Oregon State Police Tenant Improvement

OREGON STATE CAPITOL ACCESSIBILITY, MAINTENANCE, & SAFETY (CAMS)

OREGON STATE POLICE TENANT IMPROVEMENT

SRG PARTNERSHIP, INC 03/24/2017 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work Section 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures Section 01 29 00 Payment Procedures Section 01 31 00 Project Coordination Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 32 13 Scheduling of Work Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 91 Historic Treatment Procedures Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Assurance Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching Section 01 74 19 Resource Recovery Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition, Salvage, and Protection DIVISION 6 WOOD & PLASTICS Section 06 01 40 Repair and Restoration of Historic Architectural Woodwork Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Section 06 41 00 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08 01 14 Repair and Restoration of Historic Wood Doors Section 08 11 13 Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 16 Aluminum Frames Section 08 14 16 Wood Doors and Frames Section 08 31 00 Access Doors Section 08 34 00 Special Function Doors Section 08 56 59 Service Window Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware Section 08 74 13 Low-Energy Door Operators Section 08 81 00 Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09 01 21 Repair and Restoration of Plaster Section 09 01 70 Repair and Restoration of Interior Stone Panels Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Section 09 22 16 Metal Framing Section 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings Section 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring Section 09 68 13 Modular Carpeting Section 09 75 13 Stone Facing Section 09 83 11 Acoustical Wall Systems Section 09 84 15 Acoustic Insulation Section 09 90 00 Painting and Coating

214002.4 / CAMS 00 01 10 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards Section 10 28 00 Toilet Accessories Section 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section 12 21 13 Louver Shades DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression Section 21 10 00 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems DIVISION 22 PLUMBING Section 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing Section 22 05 23 General Duty Valves and Specialties for Plumbing Section 22 05 29 Hangers, Supports and Anchors Plumbing Section 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22 05 90 Pressure Testing for Plumbing Systems Section 22 07 00 Insulation for Plumbing Section 22 21 13 Pipe and Pipe Fittings Plumbing Section 22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment Section 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 HVAC Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC Section 23 05 18 HVAC Expansion Compensation Section 23 05 23 General Duty Valves and Specialties for HVAC Section 23 05 29 Hangers, Supports and Anchors for HVAC Section 23 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping & Equip. Section 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 05 90 Pressure Testing for HVAC Systems Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Section 23 07 00 Insulation for HVAC Section 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC Section 23 21 13 Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC Section 23 31 01 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure Section 23 31 02 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Medium Pressure Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units Section 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets Section 23 82 00 Convection Heating and Cooling Units

214002.4 / CAMS 00 01 10 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 73 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study Section 26 05 80 Electrical Testing Section 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices Section 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers Section 26 24 16 Panelboards Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Section 26 29 00 Motor Controllers Section 26 50 00 Lighting DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications Section 27 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems Section 27 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems Section 27 05 33 Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems Section 27 05 36 Cable Trays for Communications Systems Section 27 05 44 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling Section 27 11 00 Communications Equipment Room Fittings Section 27 13 00 Communications Backbone Cabling Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 30 01 Fire Detection and Communications

END TABLE OF CONTENTS

214002.4 / CAMS 00 01 10 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. SRG Partnership, Inc. has prepared Contract Documents titled Capitol Accessibility, LRO & OSP Tenant Improvements, dated January 13, 2017. Work of the Contract can be summarized by reference to the Contract Documents which include the Owner Contractor Agreement, Contract Conditions, Project Manual (General Requirements and technical specification Sections), Drawings, documents referenced by any of these, and addenda and modifications issued prior to the signing of the Agreement. B. Time to Complete the Work: Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion as certified by the Architect within the time stipulated in the Contractor's approved Construction Schedule and the Milestone Schedule of Construction.

1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. During the Contract Time the Contractor shall have access to the premises for construction operations The Owner will occupy the Capital building and campus during the entire period of construction. Normal building operation shall continue uninterrupted throughout all construction activities. Cooperate fully with the Owner and their representative during construction operations to minimize conflicts and to facilitate use and occupancy by the Owner and the public. Perform the work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations. Allow convenient and unobstructed use of building facilities, including barrier free access and pedestrian and vehicular entrances, exits and parking areas. 1. The Contract Sum shall include all expenses, fees and costs directly and indirectly associated with limitations on access and traffic routes, delivery, storage and loading areas, traffic planning and control, after-hours and premium time and off-site storage resulting from Contract requirements and restrictions. 2. Where existing facilities and utility services made available for the Contractor's use are not adequate to fulfill Contract requirements and facilitate efficient and timely execution of the Work the Contractor shall provide supplemental facilities and services as necessary to ensure efficient and timely execution of the Work at no change in Contract amount. 3. Work areas will not be available beyond the interval stipulated for execution of the Work B. Throughout the Contract time use and maintain the existing building in a safe condition, secured against damage due to weather exposure and other potential sources of damage. Damage occurring during construction operations shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Keep areas such as hallways, stairs, elevator lobbies and toilet rooms free from accumulation of waste material, rubbish or construction debris. 2. Permit neither smoking nor open fires within the building and the areas available to the Contractor for performance of the Work. 3. Maintain required building exits and exit routes including but not limited to exit corridors, stairways, lobbies and exterior egress from the building and as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.

1.03 PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS A. Administration and Conduct of the Work: Carried-out with all reasonable consideration to conservation of energy, water and materials, and to the recovery and recycling of waste and scrap. 1. Material and Product Requirements: In addition to specific requirements for content, origin of resources, and limitation and exclusion of certain compounds, the Contractor shall, to the greatest extent practical, provide materials, equipment and products that are resource- efficient, have recycled-content, are non-toxic, and environmentally sensitive. 2. Means and Methods of Construction: Contractor shall utilize those that will minimize the potential for damage and adverse impact to the environment regardless of whether such impact is transitory or long-term.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 11 00 - 1 SUMMARY OF WORK OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 B. Hot Work: Procedures that may elevate the risk of fire due to heat, sparks, open flame or any other cause. Shall be conducted per the Contractor's approved plan to mitigate all hazardous resulting from conduct of the Work. 1. Remove combustible materials, debris and dust within 35 feet of work area and protect combustible materials that can not be removed 2. Enclose fire risk with non-combustible screens, blankets and other suitable protection. 3. Provide fire watch during and following performance of the work at the work site and all adjacent floors or locations as appropriate to the hazard. 4. Supplement normal fire extinguishing equipment during the fire watch period.

1.04 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Contractor shall provide all work necessary for systems necessary to support and serve Owner furnished equipment including but not limited supplemental structure and connections to building mechanical, plumbing, electrical, communications and controls systems. 1. Owner responsibilities will be to arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Provide necessary submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples for the Contractor's information and coordination of the Work. Replacement of items damaged, defective or missing at the time of inspection during delivery and receipt at the Project. 2. Contractor responsibilities shall be to designate delivery dates for Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule (subject to Owner's agreement). Review submittals and return them to the Architect noting discrepancies, anticipated problems in use of product, and coordination with the Work. Receive, unload, handle, protect and store Owner-furnished items at the Project site. Contractor shall replace Owner-furnished items damaged following receipt at the Project and damage resulting from Contractor's operations. Coordination of the Work with Owner-furnished items and incorporate these items into the Work. Instruction of Owner staff, Warranty and maintenance required after installation. 3. Owner and Contractor will be mutually responsible to inspect delivered items at the Project for damage, defects, and missing items, items will be inspected on the day they arrive at the Project. Arrange for manufacturer's field services during and subsequent to installation and for ensuring the Work qualifies for any special warranty required.

1.05 DAMAGE AND RESTORATION A. Restore or replace as directed by the Owner's Representative damage to existing and new Work including but not limited to landscaping, paving, roads and sidewalks damaged as a result of the performance of this work at no change in Contract amount. B. Restoration: Comply with requirements of Section 01 35 91 for correction to historic fabric damaged in the course of the Work.

1.06 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Work of Sections in Division 2 through 14: Comply with applicable requirements of Sections in Division 22, Division 23, and Division 26 and other requirement of the Contract. 1. Service Connections: Provided as necessary for normal function of each unit of general work. 2. Service Characteristics and Requirements: As required by Division 15 and 16 Sections. 3. General Work: Coordinate for proper connection and utilization of available services, as necessary and required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION -- Not Used END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 01 11 00 - 2 SUMMARY OF WORK OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for modifications to the Contract.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Request For Information (RFI): Contractor's request for clarification of Contract requirements, design intent, resolution of on-site concerns or other collaboration with the Architect that can not be adequately resolved via required meetings, work-related submittals such as shop drawings, coordination drawings or similar procedures. B. Architect's Supplemental Instruction: Issued by the Architect in response to an RFI or as the Architect may otherwise determine necessary to clarify Contract requirements or make them more concise. An ASI may alter work results required by the Contract but provides neither authorization to perform extra work nor adjustment to Contract Amount or Contract Time. C. Modification Requiring an Adjustment to Contract Time or Amount Initiated by the Architect: Proposal Request (PR), PR is not an authorization to proceed with Change. Contractor shall respond to each PR within 7 days or otherwise advise when more time than that is needed. Submit complete information regarding anticipated effects and a final statement of adjustments to Contract Time and Contract Amount necessary to incorporate the modification described in the PR. D. Modification Requiring an Adjustment to Contract Time or Amount Proposed by the Contractor: Proposed Change Order (PCO), provide complete information as required for PR response, include why the modification is necessary, and its effect on Contract Sum and Contract Time. PCO is not an authorization to proceed with Change. E. Owner Directed Modification That May Require Adjustment of Contract Time or Amount: Field Order. Field Order (FO) is a directive for Contractor to proceed with a change, for subsequent inclusion in Change Order. FO will describe the change, and designate method for determining adjustment to Contract Time and Amount to be determined at a later time. F. Unit Price Change Order: Based upon pre-determined unit prices either included in the Contract or an Addenda, for the Work incorporated by the Change.

1.03 RFI PROCEDURE A. Request for Information: Used for clarification of Contract Requirements and where the Contractor needs assistance understanding Contract requirements necessary for proper execution of the Work. Contractor's issuance of an RFI is an indication of neither an error nor omission in the Contract Documents. Contractor and Owner understand and agree that the Contract Documents are complete and sufficiently thorough to document the Architect's design intent, and to establish Contract requirements, Contract Time, and Contract Sum. The Contractor and Owner also understand and agree that the Contract Documents do not provide all of the information that will be necessary to execute the Work; this information will be provided by the Contractor as work of the Contract.

1.04 PROCEDURE FOR CHANGE IN THE WORK A. Modification Process: Initiated by PR, PCO, or FO where an adjustment to Contract Time or Amount may be necessary; ASI where no adjustment is necessary. 1. PCO: Reviewed by the Architect who shall make a recommendation to the Owner to authorize or reject the PCO. Subject to Owner authorization the Architect will assign a PR number and the Contractor shall complete the PR form with the PCO attached. 2. PR: Subject to Owner's authorization a Change Order will be issued by the Owner for PR's accepted by the Owner. B. Documentation of Proposed Modification: Information as required and as directed by the Architect for evaluation of PR or PCO. Document substitutions to be included in a Change as required in Section 01 60 00. Documentation is required for additive and deductive Changes. 1. Document each quotation for change in Contract Time or Amount with sufficient data to allow evaluation of quotation; including quantities of products, and labor, equipment, taxes, insurance and bond, warranty, and overhead and profit.

214002 / Capitol Accessibility 01 26 00 - 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material basis. 3. Documentation for increase in Contract Amount and work done on time and material basis shall include the following. a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment and subcontracts. C. Change Order: Issued for FO's and PR's accepted by the Owner; represents Final settlement of adjustment to Contract Time and Amount for a specific scope of work. A particular CO may include more than one PR or FO at the convenience of the Owner. D. Adjustment in Contract Time and Amount: Made only upon complete processing of a Change Order. Application for Payment for Work in a FO will not be authorized by the Architect prior to receipt of a complete CO for the work. E. Construction Schedule, Schedule of Values and Submittal Schedule: Revised within two weeks of date of each Change Order. Application for Payment forms shall record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and indicate adjusted Contract Sum. 1. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION

214002 / Capitol Accessibility 01 26 00 - 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Work of the Section includes forms and procedures for progress payments. B. In addition to other submittals required as prerequisite to initial payment, submit a Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of the Work. Prepare such that each substantive item of Work is shown as a line item broken down in terms of material and labor costs and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. C. Progress of the Work: Measured in terms of dollar-volume of performed Work, which must correlate with Contractor's Construction Schedule, and the Schedule of Values, except as otherwise required for Unit Prices and Allowances. Lack of correlation between dollar volume as shown by Contractor's request payments, and Contractor's schedules may be cause for rejection of payment request. 1. Payment Applications: Periodic, consistent with previous applications and payments, and complete including notarization and execution by authorized persons, and special requirements as specified. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. a. Mock-Ups: Completion is condition precedent to any payment for work of the Section where the mock-up is required.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Payment Application Form: Unless otherwise acceptable to the Owner utilize AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets; which the Contract shall purchase from the publisher. 1. Prior to submittal of each payment application, and as a prerequisite to processing of each payment application, submit updated comprehensive schedules; monthly updates of Construction and Submittal schedules; update other Schedules from time-to-time as necessary and directed. a. List amounts for change orders issued prior to date of payment application. 2. Utilizing required media (digital files, paper documents or other media) deliver executed originals of payment application, waivers of lien and similar attachments directly to Owner's Representative or Architect as directed. Provide the number of documents with all signatures, notarization and other endorsement as required together with a transmittal form listing attachments. B. Contractor shall provide Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, and other forms and submittals prerequisite to payment application submittal and required for processing of payment application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION A. Prerequisites to submitting and processing of Initial Payment Application include, but are not necessarily limited to the following. 1. Listing of principal subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, and products. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Construction Schedule. 4. Schedule of Submittals. 5. Material and Equipment List. 6. Contractor's staff assignments and principal consultants. 7. Copies of acquired building permits and similar authorizations and licenses from Governing authorities. 8. Documentation required for insurance coverage. 9. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required. 10. Initial progress report, including report of pre-construction meeting.

214002 / CAMS 01 29 00 - 1 PAYMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

11. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages. B. Prior to submittal of each payment application, and as a prerequisite to processing of each payment application make the following submittals. 1. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages. 2. Updated comprehensive schedules; monthly updates of Construction and Submittal schedules; update other Schedules from time-to-time as necessary and directed. 3. Itemized listing of amounts for change orders issued prior to date of payment application. C. Prerequisites to submitting and processing of Payment Application at Time of Substantial Completion: Issuance of Architect's "certificate of substantial completion", and include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals or certifications by governing authorities and franchised services, assuring Owner's full access and use of completed work. 2. Warranties, maintenance agreements and similar provisions of contract documents. 3. Test/adjust/balance records, maintenance instructions, meter readings, start-up performance reports, and similar change-over information germane to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and maintenance of completed work. 4. Final cleaning of the work. 5. Application for reduction (if any) of retainage, and consent of surety. 6. Advice to Owner on coordination of shifting insurance coverage, including proof of extended coverage as required. 7. Submittal of Record Documents including Specifications and Drawings and Final Property Survey. 8. Listing of Contractor's incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's certificate of substantial completion. D. Prerequisites to submitting and processing of Final Payment Application include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Completion of project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of substantial completion (regardless of whether special payment application was previously made). 3. Assurance, satisfactory to Owner, that unsettled claims will be settled and that work not actually completed and accepted will be completed without undue delay. 4. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. 5. Proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. 6. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. 7. Change over of door locks and other Contractor's access provisions to Owner's property. 8. Consent of surety for final payment.

3.02 PAYMENTS A. Except as otherwise provided for in the Contract progress payments on account of the Contract will be made once a month, based on the value of work accomplished or materials on the job site as stated in the schedule of values on the Application and Certificate for Payment. Complete and submit as required not later than the 20th day of each month. 1. Deliver by hand to Architect three executed copies of each payment application, one copy of which is completed with waivers of lien and similar attachments. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments. B. Submit four copies of forms requesting payment to the Owner. Payments will be made on protected materials on hand at the job site properly stored, protected, and insured. Estimated quantities shall be subject to the Owner's review and judgment. C. Order materials and equipment requiring a long lead or waiting time early so as not to delay progress of the Work. D. The Contractor will be reimbursed for early order materials or items upon receipt and verification of quality and quantity against submittals and shipping documents. Receipt shall be to the job site or stored at other insured premises in an orderly and safe manner, secure from damage and loss. Security remains the responsibility of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 29 00 - 2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 31 00 COORDINATION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall use their best skill and attention to coordinate all aspects of the Project and plan the Work in advance of execution and achieve each of the following objectives. The Owner is responsible to compensate the Contractor neither for costs nor lost time incurred due to Contractor's failure to meet the objectives required for Project Coordination. 1. The Contractor shall anticipate and thereby prevent circumstances that could necessitate the need for alteration of work following execution. 2. Avoid the need for alteration of existing work not documented in the Contract. 3. Avoid alteration of new work once it has been executed. 4. Expedite progress so as to complete the Work within the Contract Time or in advance of scheduled milestones. 5. Prevent conflicts among the various trades engaged in the Work. B. When notified by the Owner’s representative the Contractor shall provide for the occurrence of work by other prime contractors at the Project site over the course of the Work. Such work may affect site and building access, utilities and other aspects of the Project. Coordinate the Work, and adapt sequence and staging as necessary to accommodate work by other prime contractors and work by the Owner. Periodically during the course of the Work consult the Owner's representative for information on current project. 1. Owner salvage. 2. Owner installation of furniture and equipment. 3. Work by other Prime Contractor's. C. Submittals: General coordination memoranda, drawings, diagrams and schedules, for the coordinated control and utilization of the site, from beginning of construction activity through project close-out and warranty periods 1. Non-standard conditions report; describe condition, location and suggested remedial measures. 2. Coordination Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall notify Architect of conditions created and uncovered during the Work that may complicate completion of subsequent work. Such conditions include but are not limited to substrate profile, coatings, integrity, voids and protrusions and other conditions. Report non- standard and potentially problematic conditions in writing, and suggest remedial measures. B. Contractor: Responsible for knowing the general character of each item of new work to be installed in areas where Work is performed, and understand the standard conditions and substrate characteristics for proper installation of the new work. 1. Utilize coordination drawings and field verification of dimensions and measurements to ensure mechanical, plumbing, electrical and other building systems and equipment are coordinated with building structure and architectural features. Verify physical dimensions of equipment with the space available and ensure necessary clearances exist for execution, operation and maintenance. 2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where new work will include manufactured products, inspect manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Provide conditions complying with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall provide for participation by representatives of each of the trades or entities involved in the execution of work to be documented by the coordination drawings, who shall be knowledgeable of all the requirements for the Work and fully authorized to act on behalf of the

214002 / CAMS 01 31 00 - 1 COORDINATION PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

entity or firm they represent. The purpose of this coordination effort shall be to provide comprehensive coordination all systems required for the Work developed in concert with the input of these representatives, and identify and eliminate conflicts between existing and new systems and among different systems in advance of execution of the work. 1. Contractor's Project Engineer shall assist all parties in the development of the coordination drawings, and in the review and understanding of them; including assistance to the Owner and the Owner's consultants. 2. Drawings shall use color coding, layering and other appropriate conventions to show discretely the components of each system, highlight conflicts, document the resolution of them, and limn the integration of all systems in the building free from conflicts. a. Scale: Comply with Shop Drawing requirements; use the same or larger drawing scale as used in the Contract Documents for the information and level of detail to be conveyed. 3. As necessary to comply with the intent of the coordination effort and when directed the Construction Manager shall require the participation of any lower tier contractor and any vendor in the coordination effort at no additional cost to the Owner. Without limitation on this requirement the following lower tier contractors may be required to be included. a. Plumbing/HVAC wet side, HVAC dry side, Fire Protection, Electrical, telecommunications, security, equipment suppliers and others as necessary to insure proper clearances, penetrations and dimensional coordination for all building systems. b. Glazier, sheet metal trades and others responsible for construction of the exterior building envelope as necessary to ensure integrated, weather-resistant assembly. 4. Coordination meetings shall be held at regularly scheduled intervals appropriate to the status of the Work and sufficiently in advance of execution to avoid the need for modifications to work already in place and prevent any delay in progress. B. Coordination of Work Sequence and Quality Assurance and Control Activities: Schedule to provide timely evaluation of the Work and identify defects and deficiencies at the earliest time possible. Facilitate corrective and remedial action to avoid delay in the progress of the Work. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 31 00 - 2 COORDINATION PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Meeting Administration: As directed by the Owner's Representative the Architect or the Construction Manager will schedule and administer pre-construction meetings, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the Work. B. The entity (Contractor or Architect) responsible for meeting administration shall provide the following as a minimum. 1. Distribute written notice including agenda, of each meeting other than weekly meetings four (4) days in advance of meeting date. 2. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 3. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings, decisions and actions required. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting: a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. C. Attendance: Contractor Project Manager and Superintendent, Subcontractors and Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda, Owner's representative, Architect and their professional consultants, as needed. 1. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending the meetings: qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Time: Within 15 days of notice to proceed. B. Location: Designate central site location convenient for all parties. C. Suggested Agenda: 1. Distribution and Discussion of: Construction Schedule; Subcontractor and supplier listing. 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project Coordination: Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Procedures for and Processing of: a. Field Questions b. Proposal requests. c. Submittals. d. Change orders. e. Request for payment applications. 6. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 7. Use of Premises: Requirements for Owner and Contractor. 8. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 9. Housekeeping procedures.

1.03 PERIODIC PROGRESS MEETING A. The Construction Manager will administer periodic progress meetings on a weekly basis. The Architect will attend these meetings as needed. B. The Architect will Schedule Special Meetings when required necessary due to the status of the Work and as directed by the Owner's Representative. C. Location: Contractor's project field office, unless otherwise directed. D. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Revisions to construction schedule. a. Corrective measures and procedures to maintain schedule. b. Review of off-site fabrication, and delivery schedules. c. Contractor coordination. 4. Submittals: Review log and expedite as required. 5. Quality Control

214002 / CAMS 01 31 19 - 1 PROJECT MEETINGS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

6. Contract Modifications. 7. Design and Construction Issues. 8. Items Carried Forward. 9. As Built Drawings and Record Documents.

1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre-Installation Conferences: Held at the Project well-in-advance of installation of Work as required, and as necessary for coordination with other work. Installer and representatives of the manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the Work, and coordination or integration of it with other work that has preceded or will follow shall attend this meeting. Coordinate schedule with Architect. 1. At each meeting review progress of other work and preparations for the particular work under consideration including specific requirements for the following: a. Contract requirements; Supplemental Instructions; Modifications. b. Delivery, and storage of materials. c. Regulatory; Inspection and Test requirements. d. Environmental requirements, and weather limitations. e. Coordination, sequence, and schedule. f. Manufacturer's recommendations. g. Potential conflicts and compatibility problems. h. Acceptability of substrates. i. Material installation and details. j. Space and access limitations. k. Protection.

2. Minutes: Record of significant discussion, agreements, disagreements, resolution, and actions. Distribute promptly to attendees, Owner, and Architect. 3. Do not proceed with the work until pre-installation conference issues are resolved. Initiate actions necessary to eliminate impediments to performance of the work and reconvene pre- installation conference at the earliest feasible date.

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION -- NOT USED END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 31 19 - 2 PROJECT MEETINGS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 32 13 SCHEDULING OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Coordinate administrative and procedural aspects of the Work to provide consistent, and logical Coordination for the Project; distribute reports and updates to parties involved including Architect and Owner. Architect and Owner review of Schedule shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for scheduling, coordinating, and completing the Work within the Contract Time. 1. Quantities and similar requirements of this Section that may pertain to physical originals may be modified as directed to facilitate utilization of electronic transfer of information. Provide and maintain a physical original with any required processing marks as the Record Document. B. Distribution: Most current issue; Architect (3 copies), Owner, principal subcontractors, suppliers, and fabricators, and others with a need-to-know schedule-compliance requirement. Post copies in the project meeting room and temporary field offices. Add and delete entities as appropriate to the performance of the Work.

1.02 SCHEDULES A. Contractor's Project Schedule: Produced using software acceptable to the Owner and printed on stable, reproducible stock. Software shall be capable of generating a two-week schedule from overall schedule, and independent sorting of Project phases (if any). Show required data and interrelation of construction sequence legibly from the Notice to Proceed (or other acceptable commencement milestone) through Final Acceptance. Provide whatever level of detail and organization in the Schedule the Architect may require to understand how the Contractor will prosecute the work and establish with reasonable certainty that they will complete the Work on time. As a minimum, include major and minor construction activities, percentage of completion, current activities, critical path, float time, and the following. 1. Document how sequence of work is affected by requirements for coordination with existing work, limitations on Contractor use and access to the site, advance notice requirements for certain work, temporary facilities, limitations consequential to the existing building and Project site, necessary sequencing of work, seasonal variations, environmental control, quality assurance activities, and administrative and procedural requirements for the Work. 2. Resource loading for all major trade groups. 3. Schedule each work product for which submittal processing, fabrication, and delivery will exceed 42 days. Schedule each mock-up as a discrete activity. 4. Utilities: Temporary and permanent use; anticipated shutdown dates, duration and services involved. 5. Substantial Completion of principal units and stages of Work; include time for required administrative procedures. 6. Two-Week Schedule: Detail sequence and duration of activities; prepare for distribution at regularly scheduled Project meetings. 7. Updating of the Construction Schedule: Prerequisite to processing of all Applications for Payment and a condition precedent to any time extension or delay compensation regardless of cause. B. Submittal Schedule: In chronological order; Describe Work generically, identify specification Section number, subcontractor, activity or event number on the Construction schedule, related Contract Documents, date for first submittal, and time allowed for processing and resubmittal, note date by which approval is necessary to avoid delay in the Work, and inspections required for quality control, and regulatory agencies. Provide preliminary and comprehensive schedules as required. 1. Correlate with subcontractor, and product listings, Construction Schedule, Schedule of Values, and related requirements of other Sections. C. Schedule of Values: Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule; correlate line items with administrative schedules and submittals. Breakdown Contract Amount in sufficient detail to facilitate evaluation of payment requests and progress reports. Break down principal subcontract amounts into several line items. Round off to the nearest whole dollar, but with the total equal to the Contract Sum.

214002 / CAMS 01 32 13 - 1 SCHEDULING OF WORK OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1. Where payment requests will be made for material, or equipment purchased, fabricated or delivered, but not yet installed, show the "initial value" for the payment request and "value added" for subsequent stage or stages of completion on that unit of work. 2. Arrange Schedule in columns, indicate generic name of item, specification Section, subcontractor, the dollar value for material and the dollar value of labor, and the percentage of the Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent and adjusted to total 100 percent, and Change Order(s) which have affected the value of the Scheduled item. 3. Margins of Cost: Where such items will be individually listed in payment requests. In general, each item in the schedule of values and in payment requests shall be established to be complete with its total expenses and proportionate share of the general overhead and profit margin. Except as otherwise indicated, major cost items that are not directly the cost of actual work-in-place, such as distinct temporary facilities, shall be shown as line items in the schedule of values. a. Provide value-added cost data required by individual specification Sections. 4. Separate Line Items: Required for the cost of generating and maintaining the Contractor's Construction Schedule, on-going housekeeping and clean-up of the Project and certain other discrete tasks as directed. 5. Submittal and approval of the Schedule of Values is a condition precedent to approval of the Initial Payment application. 6. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit schedule of values for every Contract modification. Submittal and approval of an updated Schedule of Values is a condition precedent to approval of application for payment following every Change Order.

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION -- NOT USED END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 32 13 - 2 SCHEDULING OF WORK OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Procedural requirements for work-related, and administrative submittals. 1. Administrative Submittals: Refer to Procurement and Contracting requirements and other contract documents for requirements for administrative, non- work-related submittals. 2. Project Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 01 77 00.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Administrative Submittals: Non-work-related including, but not limited to the following. 1. Permits. 2. Payment applications. 3. Performance and payment bonds. 4. Insurance certificates 5. Inspection and test reports. 6. Schedule of values. 7. Progress reports. B. Shop Drawings: Technical drawings and data specially prepared for this project, standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project will not be accepted as shop drawings. Shop drawings include but are not limited to the following items: 1. Fabrication and installation drawings. 2. Contractor's Coordination documents. 3. Schedules. C. Product Data: Demonstrate product complies with requirements; printed information, typically not specially-prepared for this project, includes but is not limited to the following. 1. Manufacturer's specifications, installation, operation and maintenance instructions, and catalogue cuts. 2. Color charts. E. Samples: Physical examples of products and materials; approved samples may be used for evaluation of acceptability of final Work. Materials and products having a range of deviation in their finished appearance that is to be acceptable in the Work provide sufficient number of samples to demonstrate the entire range of deviations proposed, but in no case less than five; such materials include but are not limited to wood products, stone, and brick. Samples include but are not limited to the following: 1. Products and materials. 2. Samples showing color, texture and pattern. 3. Color range sets for final selection of colors where options exist or are required. 4. Units of work to be used for independent inspection and testing. F. In-Place Mock-Up: Special category of Sample. Provide advance execution of select area of work as directed to demonstrate compliance with Contract requirements for details, appearance and other characteristics. Acceptable in-place mock-up will be incorporated into the Work and serve as a basis for evaluating subsequent work for compliance with the Contract. G. Miscellaneous Submittals: Work-related, non-administrative submittals that do not fit in the three previous categories, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Specially-prepared and standard printed warranties. 2. Maintenance agreements. 3. Project photographs. 4. Testing and certification reports. 5. Record drawings. 6. Field measurement data.

214002 / CAMS 01 33 00 - 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Preparation and Processing: Coordinated with the performance of the Work, other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar sequential activities. Where electronic files are utilized in the submittals process only a material original stamped and signed by the Architect shall be acceptable as the official record document. 1. Quantities of submittals required by this Article may be adjusted to facilitate utilization of electronic transfer of information as directed, but in all cases a processed material original shall be retained as required for Record Documents. B. Interrelated Work: Coordinated for Architect's review so that processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals, concurrently; Architect retains the right to withhold action on incomplete submittals pending receipt of related materials. C. Review Time: Sufficient in the Architect's professional judgment for processing of each submittal and coordination with related work. Schedule submittals so as not to delay progress of the Work as a result of time required to properly process submittals, and resubmittals. Advise the Architect on each submittal where processing time is critical. 1. The Architect, acknowledging Contract Time limits, will process submittals with all deliberate speed in a manner consistent with the Architect’s responsibilities. 2. Architect will promptly advise Contractor when submittal processing must be delayed for coordination with submittals not yet received. 3. No extension of time will be authorized due to Contractor's failure to properly coordinate submittals and transmit them to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the work.

1.4 SUBMITTAL FORMAT A. Comply with the following requirements for each type of submittal, unless otherwise required in individual technical Sections. 1. Deviations from Contract Documents: Noted on transmittal, and described on a separate attachment, and identified on the submittal. 2. Approved Final Submittals: Maintain as returned by Architect, distribute copies to subcontractors, governing authorities and others as required for proper performance of the work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Keep record submittals on site for quality control comparisons, acceptance of Work, and incorporation into record documents. 3. Unless otherwise required issue submittal and obtain Architect's approval prior to ordering materials, and beginning fabrication. B. Labeling: For identification processing and recording of action taken 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name and address of subcontractor, material supplier and manufacturer. 4. Reference information to Construction Documents, pertinent drawings and specifications. 5. Contractor's signed review and approval markings 6. 4 by 5 inch space for the Architect's processing marking. C. Transmittal Form: Attached to all submittals. Submittals transmitted to the Architect from sources other than the Contractor will be returned to sender without action. Provide places for the following information: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. To: / From: 4. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer and supplier. 5. Category and type of submittal. 6. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 7. Signature of transmitter. 8. Contractor's signed certification stating that the information submitted complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9. Other pertinent information.

214002 / CAMS 01 33 00 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

D. Shop Drawings: To scale, and with dimensions. Identify specific products, materials, compliance with specified standards, coordination requirements, and field measurements. 1. Format: Between 8.5 by 11 inch, and 36 by 48 inch. Provide title block indicating Project, firm preparing drawing, drawing scale, date and revisions. Allow 4 by 5 inch space beside title block for processing marks. 2. Do not reproduce contract documents or copy standard printed information as the basis of shop drawings. 3. Submittal: One reproducible print, one reproducible copy of the processed document will be returned for the Contractor's reproduction and distribution as necessary. 4. Coordination Drawings: Prepared as necessary and required to show special requirements for integration of separate components and systems. E. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for applications shown, compliance with Reference Standards, tests, labels and seals, performance and aesthetic characteristics, required to document conformity with the Contract Documents. 1. Format: Single submittal incorporating required information. Indicate choices and options; where data includes items not required for the Project identify products and information applicable to the Project. 2. Acceptable Submittal: Minimum 4 copies of required product data, one processed copy will be returned. Provide additional copies when the Contractor wishes to have more than one processed copy returned. Confirm product compliance with Contract Documents prior to submitting. F. Samples: Fabricated, cured and finished, physically identical to material or product to be incorporated in the Work. Where color, pattern, and texture variations are inherent provide sufficient number of samples to show the full range of variation to be expected in the final Work, but not-less-than three units. Match Architect's sample, where specified; when samples are required for Architect's selection of color, texture and pattern submit complete range of available choices. Samples are for Architect's visual review of generic kind, color, pattern, and texture, and coordination of these characteristics with related elements of the Work; compliance with other required characteristics is Contractor's responsibility. 1. Format: Description of sample, material or product name, manufacturer, source, limitations of availability, size and delivery time, and compliance with reference standards and regulatory requirements. 2. Special Procedures: Indicate on transmittal for disposition of samples that may be returned and incorporated into the Work in accordance with Section requirements. 3. Submittals: A minimum of three samples, provide additional samples when directed. G. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Inspection and Test Reports: Process as Shop Drawing when specially prepared for the project, or as Product Data when a standard publication of workmanship control testing at the point of production. 2. Warranties, Documents, Bonds, and Maintenance Agreements: Comply with Section 01 77 00 requirements. 3. Construction Photographic Prints: Provide general documentation of the Work; two prints each of three project photographs taken at weekly intervals from vantage points as directed. Photographs of specific work activities required by other Sections shall be provided in addition to those required in this Section. Submit 8 by 10 inch glossy black- and-white prints on single-weight commercial grade stock, with 0.75 inch wide margin punched for standard 3-ring binder. Identify each print on the back-side with name of project, date of shot and description of vantage point. 3. Construction Digital Photographs: Provide general documentation of the Work; color images, 640 by 480 pixels on CD-ROM and one set of permanent 8 by 10 inch prints on stable media, with 0.75 inch wide margin punched for standard 3-ring binder. Take a minimum of three project photographs at weekly intervals from vantage points as directed. Photographs of specific work activities required by other Sections shall be provided in addition to those required in this Section Identify each print on the back-side

214002 / CAMS 01 33 00 - 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

with name of project, date of shot and description of vantage point. a. Provide the Owner with a release for reproduction and use of photographs.

1.5 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Processing of Contractor submittals by attached memorandum or mark-up with comments and affix a stamp to indicate status of review as follows: "Reviewed", "No Exceptions Taken", "Make Corrections Noted", "Rejected", or "Revise and Resubmit". "Checking is for general conformance with design concepts and compliance with Contract Document information. Corrections or comments made do not relieve contractor from complying with contract requirements. Contractor responsible for: confirmed correlated site dimensions, fabrication process, techniques of construction, and coordination of his work with all other trades." B. The Architect shall be permitted sufficient time in their professional judgment for review and processing of each Contractor submittal without claim for delay to the progress of the Work, generally a minimum of 10 days. Architect will endeavor to accelerate review upon written notification attached to the submittal stating that processing time is critical, detailing the nature of the critical timing and the period within which processing is requested to be completed; this request shall not be binding on the Architect. Do not proceed with Work without Architect's approval as required for submittal, Architect's approval does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with Contract Documents. C. Adjustment to these processing procedures to facilitate utilization of electronic data transfer or realize other advantages for the Project may be directed during the course of the Work. Such modifications shall not affect the requirement for material original Record Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 33 00 - 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

SECTION 01 35 91 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures required for all work performed at existing areas: 1. General protection and treatment procedures. 2. Installation of protection done in a manner that does not damage adjacent surfaces or finishes. 3. Storage and protection of existing historic materials. 4. Temporary protection of historic materials during construction. 5. Protection of historic elements during application of chemicals. 6. Removal, cataloging, and storage of selective historic elements as required during construction. B. Similar protection procedures for site features and elements designated as historic.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Artifact Log: The log form supplied by Contractor and used to catalog historic elements that are removed from the building. B. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place. C. Dismantle: To disassemble and detach items by hand from existing construction to the limits indicated on drawings, using small hand tools and small one-hand power tools, so as to protect nearby historic surfaces; and legally dispose of dismantled items off-site, unless to be salvaged. D. Existing to Remain or Retain: Existing items of construction that are to remain in-place and continue in service in the completed Work, to be protected as necessary to prevent damage or deterioration. E. Historic: Spaces, areas, rooms, surfaces, materials, finishes, and all other elements that are important to successful preservation, rehabilitation, restoration, and reconstruction as determined by Architect, whether indicated as such or not. F. In Kind OR Material In Kind: Material that matches existing materials, as much as possible, in species, cut, color, grain, and finish. G. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect. H. Preserve: To apply measures necessary to sustain the existing form, integrity, and materials of a historic property. Work may include preliminary measures to protect and stabilize the property. I. Protect: To install protective measures such as temporary guards to prevent any damage to historic elements remaining in place during construction. J. Reconstruct: To remove existing item, replicate damaged or missing components, and reinstall in original position. K. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or as otherwise indicated. L. Reinstall: To protect removed or dismantled item, repair and clean it as indicated for reuse, and reinstall it in original position, or where indicated. M. Rehabilitate OR Renovate: To make possible the continued use of a property through repair, alterations, and additions while preserving those portions or features that convey its historical, cultural, or architectural values.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 35 91- 1 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

N. Remove: Specifically for historic spaces, areas, rooms, and surfaces, the term means to detach an item from existing construction to the limits indicated on drawings, using hand tools and hand-operated power equipment, and legally dispose of it off-site, unless to be salvaged. O. Repair: To stabilize, consolidate, or conserve; to retain existing materials and features while employing as little new material as possible. Repair includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading. Repair can also include limited replacement in kind, rehabilitation, and reconstruction, with compatible substitute materials for deteriorated or missing parts of features when there are surviving prototypes. P. Replace: To replicate features with new material in kind. Replacement includes the following conditions: 1. Replacement with New Materials: Includes replacement with new material when original material is not available as patterns for creating new duplicated elements. 2. Replacement with Substitute Materials: Includes replacement with compatible substitute materials. Substitute materials are not allowed, unless otherwise indicated. Q. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish, unless otherwise indicated. R. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and in either the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated. S. Restore: To consolidate, replicate, reproduce, repair, and refinish as required to achieve the indicated results. T. Reversible: New construction work, treatments, or processes that can be removed or undone in the future without damaging historic materials, unless otherwise indicated. U. Stabilize: To apply measures designed to reestablish a weather-resistant enclosure and/or the structural reinforcement of an element or portion of the building while maintaining the essential form as it exists at present. V. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material, without damage to the original substrate.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ASSE A10.6 - Safety & Health Program Requirements for Demolition Operations; American Society of Safety Engineers; 2006. B. NFPA 241 - Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations; National Fire Protection Agency, Quincy; 2013. C. The Secretary of the Interior's Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties. D. Chapter 34, Section 3409 "Historic Buildings", of the 2010 Oregon Structural Specialty Code.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate historic treatment procedures in this Section with public circulation patterns at Project site. Plan and execute the Work accordingly. B. Historic Treatment Pre-construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. General: Review methods and procedures related to historic treatment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review manufacturer's written instructions for precautions and effects of historic treatment procedures on materials, components, and vegetation. b. Review and finalize historic treatment construction schedule; verify availability of materials, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. c. Review qualifications of personnel assigned to the work and assign duties. d. Review material application, work sequencing, tolerances, and required clearances. e. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 35 91- 2 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

f. Confirm repair quantities before proceeding with any repair and replacement operations on existing historic materials. C. Prior to starting any work, Contractor shall indicate in writing to Architect that all personnel assigned to the job have read the specifications. Contractor shall ask for clarification on any procedural or technical instructions which are not clearly understood or for which they wish to propose alternatives.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Schedule for Historic Treatments: Indicate for entire Project the following for each activity to be performed on historic surfaces: 1. Detailed sequence of historic treatment work, with starting and ending dates, coordinated other known work in progress. 2. Equipment Data: List gross loaded weight, axle-load distribution, and wheel-base dimension data for mobile and heavy equipment proposed for use. Do not use such equipment without Contractor's professional engineer's certification that the structure can support the imposed loadings without damage. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, testing data and certifications substantiating that each product complies with requirements. Include installation recommendations and use. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of proposed methods and operations of protection procedures for review prior to the commencement of work. D. Historic Treatment Plan: Submit before work begins. E. Protection Plan: Submit a written plan for each phase or process including protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods, and equipment to be used for each phase of work. Do not proceed with any protection work until Historic Protection Plan has been approved. F. Fire-Prevention Plan: If any heat-generating or combustible tools and materials are proposed to be used, submit before work begins. G. Photographic Documentation 1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Photographs in the project site, room, and/or building as appropriate in scale with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

2. Digital Photographs: Submit image data within three government business days of taking photographs. a. Image Size: Minimum 1,500 by 1,200 pixels, in unaltered original files. b. Image Type: JPG file format. c. Image Mode: RGB color format. d. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: i. Name of Project: Oregon State Capitol Renovation – Task 01 ii. Name and contact information for photographer. iii. Name of Architect: SRG/ARG. iv. Name of Contractor. v. Date photograph was taken [Year/Month/Day format: i.e., 141221]. vi. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 35 91- 3 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3. Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of work, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. a. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. b. Take as many photographs as are necessary to document existing conditions of each area, material, and assembly where Work will occur. c. Take as many photographs as are necessary to show existing conditions adjacent to all areas, materials and assemblies where Work will occur. d. Take as many photographs as necessary to show existing conditions adjacent to the property before starting the Work. e. Take as many photographs as are necessary of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. f. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. g. Submit before work begins. 4. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of ten photographs daily, or as necessary to show full extent of daily work, with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 5. Cataloging of Salvage Elements: Photography Before Removal: Photograph salvage element in original location, from as many angles as necessary to communicate context of element in its original location, method of construction, attachment process, and/or other critical data. Provide a minimum of three views, or as Architect requires.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The subcontractors responsible for the repair or rehabilitation of salvaged elements shall also be responsible for the disassembly, cataloging, storage and reinstallation of the same elements. B. Historic Treatment Plan: Prepare a written plan for historic treatment for whole Project, including each phase or process and protection of surrounding materials during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods, and equipment to be used for each phase of work. Show compliance with indicated methods and procedures specified in this and other sections. C. Contractor is hereby directed to recognize the value and significance of the building and exercise special care during the work to ensure that the existing building, its details, materials and finishes which are to remain are not damaged by the work being performed. D. Protect all existing materials and components to remain in place throughout the duration of construction. Extent of protection is to include all historic elements to remain that are in the vicinity of construction activities, or may be harmed by the movement of materials through the building and project site, whether specifically called out on the drawings, or not. Provide any additional protection required to prevent soiling and damage to existing finishes and elements to remain. In the event of damage, such elements shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at his expense, to the satisfaction of Architect and Owner. E. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6. and the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for the Treatment of Historic Properties.

1.07 MOCK-UPS A. Requirements for mockups of specific historic treatment procedures are specified in individual technical Sections of these Specifications.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 35 91- 4 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the performance of work of this Section with related or adjacent work. Removal and protection of historic items shall be completed prior to commencement of demolition or new construction activities in each area. At a minimum, install protection in its entirety for a given area prior to commencement of any demolition activities in that area. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with removal and dismantling work. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract. E. Lead Paint: 1. Due to the age of the building, it is assumed that lead based paints may be encountered. Contractor shall be responsible for meeting all code and safety requirements for proper handling, protection and disposal of lead based paint. F. Storage or sale of removed or dismantled items on-site is not permitted unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PROTECTION MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheets: 4 mil. B. Lumber: Species to be selected by Contractor, sizes to fit field conditions. All lumber to be fire retardant. C. Plywood: 1/2, 3/4 or 1-inch, as required. D. Neoprene: 1/4 or 1/2 inch strips, stock lengths. E. Preservation Tape: 3M Scotch White Preservation Sealing Tape, number 4811. F. Zip wall poles: ZipWall. G. Sealant: Removable acrylic sealant. H. Accessories: Fasteners, nails, screws, bolts, anchors or other devices required to complete installation, sizes as required. No fasteners are to be used on any wall or floor surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, photographs, and video. B. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect potential damage to historic elements resulting from historic treatment procedures.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 35 91- 5 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.02 PROTECTION, GENERAL A. Comply with temporary barrier requirements in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" Section 01 50 00. B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are on-site and on duty when historic treatment work begins and during its progress. C. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from historic treatment procedures. 1. Provide barricades, barriers, and temporary directional signage to exclude public from areas where historic treatment work is being performed.

3.03 PROTECTION OF HISTORIC ELEMENTS AND MATERIALS A. Install protection in its entirety before commencement of work that may harm historic elements. B. Protect all historic elements to remain in place during construction that may be damaged by construction activities. In the event of damage, notify Owner immediately as to the nature and extent of damage and the proposed method for repair. Contractor shall be responsible for repair and replacement of damaged items to the satisfaction of Owner, at no additional cost to Owner. Be aware that the inherent value of an historic original element is higher than the value of a modern replication of that element. C. Do not attach temporary protection materials directly to historic elements. D. Secure protection adequately so as to maintain a safe environment for workers and other individuals using the building throughout the duration of project. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons. E. Alternative methods to specified protection may be acceptable if equal or greater protection is provided. Submit alternate methods to Architect for review. Do not proceed with alternate methods until approvals are secured. F. Protection is to be constructed primarily of wood 2 by 4 inch framing members to box out elements to be protected, or to construct barriers in front of elements to be protected. G. Protection may be required to remain in place for the duration of project. Install materials to provide protection throughout the duration of project. Protection may have to be removed during the project for access to protected elements, etc. If protection is temporarily removed, reinstall after work is complete and maintain protection throughout the duration of project. H. Do not store construction materials on or inside of protection. I. At the end of each working day, or during inclement weather, cover work exposed to weather with waterproof coverings, securely anchored. Protect partially completed work from damage when work is not in progress. J. Extent of protection includes all historic elements that will remain during construction, whether specifically called out on Drawings or not. Temporary protection may be required in areas to perform specific work activities. K. All protection assemblies shall be self-supporting and self-bracing. Protection assemblies may be secured to floor protection as long as fasteners do not penetrate through the plywood layer. L. Materials and/or elements that require protection from construction activities include but are not limited to: 1. Original doors. 2. Original windows. 3. Original finishes 4. Site features: commemorative items and historic artifacts.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 35 91- 6 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.04 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS A. Comply with the chemical cleaner manufacturer's recommendations for protecting building surfaces against damage from exposure to their products. B. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm or damage resulting from applications of chemical cleaners and paint removers. C. Erect temporary protection covers over pedestrian walkways and at points of entrance and exit for persons and vehicles that must remain in operation during course of restoration work. D. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in historic treatment program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof, UV resistant, and will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective materials staining. E. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces. F. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property. G. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, or water penetration into building interior.

3.05 GENERAL HISTORIC TREATMENT A. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when historic treatment work begins and during its progress. B. Perform work as indicated on Drawings. Follow the procedures in subparagraphs below and procedures approved in historic treatment program. C. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether due to environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing; or due to structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion. 1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 01 35 91- 7 HISTORIC TREATMENT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 42 00 REFERENCES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Definitions, description of specification format and content, and utilization of reference and industry standards.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined in this article. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are general for the Work to the extent that they are not stated more explicitly in another element of the contract documents. Basic Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions. B. Regulations: Laws, statutes, ordinances and lawful orders issued by governing authorities, requirements of private entities such as utility company serving the Project, and conventions and agreements within the construction industry that effectively control the performance of the Work regardless of whether they are imposed by government authority or not. C. Indicated: A cross-reference to graphic representations, notes and schedules on the drawings, and shall be read to mean "as indicated on the drawings". Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate the cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted. D. Directed, Requested and Similar Terms: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect", "requested by the Architect", and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision. E. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Architect's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the term "approved" will be held to limitations of the Architect's responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will the Architect's approval be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of contract documents. F. Project Site: The term, "Project site", is defined as the space available to the Contractor for performance of the Work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the drawings, and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the Project is to be built. 1. Work Limit Line: Enclose the area or areas available to the Contractor for execution of the Work or a portion thereof. G. Furnish: Interpreted to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations as applicable in each instance. H. Install: Used to describe operations at Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance for the Work to be complete and ready for intended use. I. Provide: Interpreted to mean furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. J. Replace: When used in the context of "Remove and replace", referring to elimination of unapproved and unacceptable equipment, material and other Work from the Project, the term "Replace" means "Replace with new material, equipment and Work". K. Installer: The term "installer" is defined as "the entity" (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor, and subcontractors of any tier for performance of a particular unit of work at the Project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a requirement that installers are experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. L. Necessary: Needed or essential for complete and proper performance of the Work as required and as demonstrated by conventional practices of the Trade or discipline in question and common sense. M. Required: Directive in the Contract Documents, and a charge of the Architect which must be fulfilled for the Work to conform to the intent of the Contract Documents.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 42 00 - 1 REFERENCES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

N. Testing Laboratories: The term "testing laboratory" is defined as an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work, either at the project site or elsewhere, and to report, and (if required) interpret results of those inspections or tests. O. Shop Work: Designates work not performed at the Project Site and is intended to signify that controlled conditions will be provided within tighter tolerances than might be achievable in the field. Such conditions include but are not limited to, environmental control, cleanliness, and sequence of assembly and finishing. P. Premium Time: Overtime and similar terms shall be defined as any period during which labor or a service is provided for which an elevated cost is assessed (by statute, labor agreement or other reason) due to time of day, calendar day, accumulated hours or other factors. Q. Tolerance: Dimensional deviations in the Work specified in individual Sections and reference standards are the maximum total acceptable deviation and shall not be additive to tolerances for other work.

1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based upon the Construction Specifications Institute's MasterFormat System 2009 Edition. The organization of the Contract Documents shall control the Contractor neither in dividing the Work among lower tier contractors nor establish the scope of the Work to be performed by a particular trade. 1. Divisions are standard categories of construction information. 2. Sections: Identified by number and title. Section number, generally according to MasterFormat assignments consist of six digit number (three pair of digits each pair separated by a space). Section title is for convenience only and not intended to limit the meaning or content of a Section or to be completely descriptive of requirements specified therein. 3. Part: An organizational device dividing a Section into three distinct groups of related information. B. Sections are placed in the Project Manual in numeric sequence to facilitate cross-referencing. The Project Manual "Table of Contents" lists the numbers and names of specification Sections in the Contract Documents. C. Project Identification: The project job number and name are recorded at the bottom left corner of each page of the specifications. The Section date is recorded numerically in the lower right corner. D. Page Numbering: Pages are numbered independently for each Section, The Section number is shown together with the page number at the top right corner of each page to facilitate the location of text in the Project Manual. E. Specification Text: Dependent upon other text to the extent described in individual Sections, and as follows. 1. Text: Subordinate to Titles. 2. Indented Text: Subordinate to preceding text that is not indented. 3. Sequence of Text: Except as established by indentation; interpreted neither as limiting the applicability of requirements for the Work nor restricting the applicability of requirements to other text unless such limitations are expressly stated by the text itself and when such interpretation is consistent with the documents taken as a whole. F. Specification Language: Imperative and addressed to the Contractor except where other parties are specifically identified. Singular and plural meanings will be interpreted based upon the full context of the Contract Documents. 1. The words "shall be" are included by reference wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Effort has been made to employ gender neutral language throughout the documents; however, occasional gender based references may be used. Such terminology as workmanship, craftsmanship and other gender based terms shall be interpreted to be gender neutral. 3. The terms "installer", "manufacturer" and similar words shall be interpreted to mean the entity the Contractor has chosen to perform certain portions of the Work. The use of these terms shall neither be construed to shift responsibility for performance of the Work away from the Contractor nor alter their responsibility to comply with Project requirements. G. Method of Specifying one element of the Work has no bearing on requirements for another element of the Work, and may vary throughout the text, and include any combination of the following: 1. Open generic-descriptive. 2. Performance.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 42 00 - 2 REFERENCES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3. Proprietary. 4. Compliance with reference standards. H. Work Required to be Designed and Engineered by the Contractor: Comply with performance and design requirements established in the specifications. The Contract Documents do not include all prescriptive requirements nor details for Contractor designed work. In general, the documents will establish certain design and performance requirements for such work. If the information provided is not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. As a variety of solutions complying with the Contract requirements may be available, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the finite scope of Contractor designed work. I. Conflicting, and Ambiguous Requirements: Interpreted to provide the highest quality, greatest quantity, and more costly, time consuming scope of Work; request Architect's resolution before proceeding. 1. Quantity and Quality of Work Specified: Minimum for the Work to be provided, and shall not otherwise be interpreted as establishing required limits. J. Assignment of Specialists: Required when levels of experience and qualifications are specified for entities performing specific parts of the Work. These special requirements, over which the Contractor has no choice or option, establish who may be qualified to perform the Work. The ultimate responsibility to fulfill Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. 1. These Requirements: Interpreted so as not to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the work not to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. 2. No Allowance: Made by Architect in accepting and rejecting Work due to lack of experience and craftsmanship on the part of workers. K. Use of certain titles such as "carpentry" in the specification text, is not intended to imply that the Work must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter", and does not imply that the requirements specified apply exclusively to work by tradespersons of that corresponding generic name.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Trade association names and title of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The acronyms and abbreviations referenced by the Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated names. Both names and addresses are subject to change, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Documents. The Contract Documents may use an acronym or abbreviation for a given trade association or reference standard while stating neither the association name or document title in full. Request clarification from the Architect where the intended reference or association is ambiguous or unclear. 1. Standards referenced directly in the Contract documents take precedence over standards not referenced. 2. Standards not referenced, but applicable to the Work will be enforced as a general requirement that the Work conform to superior levels of quality typically recognized in the industry. 3. Statements in reference standards shall not be interpreted to alter requirements for the Work contrary to the intent of the Contract Documents B. Publication Dates: Date of the reference standard in effect as of the date of Contract Documents. 1. Updated Standards: At the request of the Architect, Contractor or governing authority, submit a change order proposal where an applicable industry code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of the contract documents and before the performance of the work affected. The Architect will decide whether to issue the change order to proceed with the updated standard. C. Familiarity With Standards and Issuing Bodies/Organizations: Responsibility of the entity performing the Work. The Contractor shall obtain copies of Standards from the publication source as necessary and required to comply with the intent of the Contract Documents.

1.05 ABBREVIATIONS AND NAMES A. Trade association names and title of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The acronyms and abbreviations referenced in contract documents are defined to mean the associated names. Both names and addresses are subject to change, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be,

214002.4 / CAMS 01 42 00 - 3 REFERENCES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

accurate and up-to-date as of date of contract documents. The Contract Documents may use only the acronym or the abbreviation for a given trade association or reference standard without stating the associated name in full. Request clarification from the Architect where the intended reference or association is ambiguous or unclear.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION -- Not Used END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 01 42 00 - 4 REFERENCES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 45 00 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes, requirements for inspections, tests, reports, and related actions performed by the Contractor, the Owner's agent and others as necessary to evaluate whether the Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Contractor: Responsible for conformity of the Work with the Contract Documents. 2. Architect's Administration of the Contract: Not included in Quality Control Services. Quality Assurance: Systematic actions taken to ensure the quality of a material or product. B. Specific Quality Control Requirements: Specified in each Section to cover manufacture and installation of standard and custom materials and products, and shall not be limited by the provisions of this Section. C. The Owner will provide an agent for Special Inspections and Testing to comply with OSSC Chapter 17 and directives of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. Unless otherwise specifically required the Contractor shall have responsibility for all other Quality Control Services and assistance to the Owner's agent as required by this Section. 1. Contractor shall provide an approved independent testing laboratory to perform quality control services not provided by the Owner's agent. 2. Cost associated with the Contractor's quality control services and with assistance to the Owner's agent shall be included in Contract Sum. D. Retest Responsibility: Contractor's where results of quality control services do not indicate that Work complies with contract requirements, regardless of responsibility for initial tests. 1. Work the Architect determines may be defective: Tested by the Contractor as directed, including selection of testing agency. 2. Owner will reimburse Contractor for costs of testing and retesting where results indicate the work complies with Contract requirements. E. Responsibility For Testing of Replaced and Remedial Work: Contractor's, regardless of responsibility for initial tests. F. Contractor shall cooperate with agency performing quality control services without regard to responsibility for quality control services; provide auxiliary services as directed, including, but not limited to: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor, facilities and equipment to assist and take samples. 3. Delivery of samples to test laboratories. 4. Storage and protection of samples and equipment at Project. G. Contractor shall coordinate the Work with quality control activities regardless of responsibility for them, schedule times for inspections, tests and taking of samples; maintain progress of the Work and avoid cutting and patching to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. Notify the testing agency in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. 2. Notify testing agency in advance of special inspections and tests required by building officials.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Control Activities Schedule: Submit a tabular schedule within 45 days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, but in no case less than 14 days prior to the scheduled date for initiation of quality control activities. Schedule shall include the following as a minimum. 1. Reference to specification section number and unit of work. 2. Identification of activities to be performed and the party responsible for performing each. 3. Time schedule and duration of each activity. 4. Unique characteristics or requirements for each activity. B. Certified Written Report: Submit in duplicate, to Architect and Contractor each inspection, test and similar service not provided by Contractor. C. Reports shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Name of testing agency and individuals performing services. 2. Designation of the work and test method. 3. Dates and locations of samples and tests and inspections.

214002.4 / CAMS 01 45 00 - 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

4. Ambient conditions when samples taken and tests performed. 5. Inspection and test data and results. 6. Interpretations of test results. 7. Evaluation of Work compliance with Contract Documents. 8. Recommendations on retesting, if applicable.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Compliance with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and recognized in the industry as accomplished in the services required. Additional requirements may be specified in Work of individual Sections. A. Regulatory Requirements for Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified agent to perform tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and as required by the Contract Documents, and will also be responsible for the following. 1. Notifying the Architect and Contractor of results within 24 hours of performing tests or inspections. 2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, including a list of unresolved deficiencies (if any). 4. Interpret tests and inspections and affirm compliance or deviation from the Contract Documents. 5. Retesting and re-inspection of corrected work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements of Section 01 73 29. B. Protect Work exposed for quality control service activities. C. Repair and Protection: Contractor's responsibility, regardless of entity responsible for quality control services.

3.02 SCHEDULE OF QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES A. Schedule of Inspections and Tests: Comply with IBC Section 1704 and directives of regulatory officials; anticipate the following as a minimum. B. The General Structural Notes on S001 provide a summary of Quality Assurance activities associated with the Work. Additional Quality Assurance services shall be provided for the Work as directed by Regulatory Agents having jurisdiction over the Work. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 01 45 00 - 2 QUALITY ASSURANCE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utility services, construction and support facilities, Project security and protection. 1. Contractor may utilize Owner’s Utility Services for the Work subject to requirements and limitations stated in the Contract Documents. 2. Supplemental Utility Services: Provided by Contractor where Owner furnished service does not comply with Project requirements, where capacity and location are not adequate for the Work and where conflicts occur with Owner's occupancy and progress of the Work. 3. Temporary Construction and Support Facilities: Provide as necessary and required for a safe, efficient, well-organized job site and ensure orderly progress of the Work. 4. Security and Protection: Provide as necessary to prevent unauthorized entry, loss, injury and hazardous conditions. 5. Construction Aids: Provide barricades, guardrails, scaffolding, bridging, shoring, stairs, lifts and similar devices as necessary. B. Use Charges: Paid by the Owner and shall not be a basis of claims for change-order nor increase in Contract amount.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Capacity, installation and operation of facilities shall provide safe, efficient, and sanitary conditions. Where Owner furnished services do not comply with required performance levels Contractor shall provide supplemental services, and as necessary for efficient performance of the Work. 1. Water: Supply and pressure adequate for construction processes, fire protection, sanitation, and plant maintenance. Provide potable drinking water and label all non-potable service. Sterilize piping prior to use. 2. Electricity: Install underground, unless otherwise required; provide automatic ground-fault interrupter for system circuits. 3. Illumination: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. Provide lighting for security and protection without operating entire lighting system. 4. Heat and Ventilation: Provide for each stage of construction; maintain minimum 55 degree F. ambient temperature in permanently enclosed spaces, and other conditions specified in individual Sections; prevent damage to Work due to affect of climate and construction processes. 5. Conservation Plan: Establish to minimize consumption and avoid waste of utility services, and natural resources. Comply with Section 01 74 19 for resource recovery and recycling. B. Sanitary Facilities: Weatherproof, conveniently located and adequate for use of all persons employed on the Project. Install self-contained toilet units or water and sewer connected temporary toilet facilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Provide most effective means available for containment of nuisances resulting from construction activities in existing structures adjacent and proximate to occupied areas. Comply with Indoor Air Quality Management Plan and related requirements. 1. Temporary Partitions: Control dust and noise generated by construction activities; provide insulation, acoustical treatment, gasketted doors, and accessories as necessary to abate nuisances to level acceptable to Owner and to prevent disruption of Owner occupancy. 2. Ventilation: Prevent migration of dust and odors resulting from construction activities. Provide supplemental air supply, including temporary ductwork and equipment, as necessary to establish negative and positive pressures zones; isolate areas where Work that could generate fumes, dust, and air borne nuisances is underway. 3. Traffic Surface Protection: Provide as necessary and as directed to prevent damage to concrete, asphalt, and masonry pavements; walkways, drives and parking lots. Repair damaged surfaces at no expense to the Owner.

214002 / CAMS 01 50 00 - 1 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

D. Field Office: Insulated, weatherproof, and heated, with lockable doors and windows: standard prefabricated mobile units, or similar job-built construction suitable for Contractor's field supervision functions, meetings, and regular business operations. 1. Conference Room: Equipped and sized to accommodate Project meetings of size and type required, but not fewer than ten participants, with audio-visual and information technology support facilities as required.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. When directed, for each temporary facility, provide information and drawings as necessary to fully document the subject components, services, construction aid and products. B. Quality Assurance: Copies of reports, permits, and documents required by authorities and necessary for operation of temporary facilities. C. Noise and Airborne Contamination Control Plan: Incorporate completed Infection Control Risk Assessment matrix and coordinated with Construction Schedule. Document means methods, and procedures to be utilized in compliance with infection risk and airborne contamination control requirements. Provide narrative of procedures, implementation and maintenance routine, operating equipment characteristics, product data and other information as necessary. 1. Annotate plans to Show the following. Locations of vestibules, traffic paths, and staging points within work Areas. Partitions, and covers for ductwork and other building services. Temporary ventilation equipment, including intake and exhaust points. 2. Emergency response plan in the event of inadequate controls, loss or failure of controls and similar circumstance. a. Emergency Response Personnel: 24 hour contact information. 3. Filtering and control of air supply and exhaust, including plan and schedule for filter replacement. Confirm filters fit properly in the equipment used with an effective seal with the filter frame or housing. 4. Methods for material delivery, progress cleaning of work areas and removal of debris and waste to and from work areas. 5. Control of dust associated with movement of personnel and materials, tools and equipment in, out and through the work areas and any adjacent spaces. 6. Requirements for daily cleaning and final cleaning of work areas. 7. Certification that all construction personnel understand the provision of the noise and dust control plan and will comply with these provisions and procedures.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with OSHA construction workplace safety rules or equivalent State agency having jurisdiction over the Project, requirements of municipal Bureaus and Departments, Utility Co. policies, and environmental protection regulations, for materials, equipment and installation and operating procedures. B. Safeguards During Construction: Comply with State and local authorities having jurisdiction over the Work as they may pertain to temporary facilities, work conditions and related areas of Contractor responsibility. 1. OSSC Chapter 33. 2. Oregon OSHA construction workplace safety rules or equivalent State agency having jurisdiction over the Project, requirements of municipal Bureaus and Departments. 3. Control of Pollution and Nuisances Related to the Work: Comply with environmental protection regulations, for materials, equipment and installation and operating procedures. DEQ, Oregon Administrative Rules, Chapter 340, Division 21 for containment of nuisances generated by demolition and construction activities. 4. Comply with the requirements of NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", the ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and the NECA National Joint Guideline NJG-6 "Temporary Job Utilities and Services". a. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services", as prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations. 5. Temporary Utilities: Comply with utility company's requirements for procedures, materials and equipment.

214002 / CAMS 01 50 00 - 2 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Inspections: Inspect and test each service before placing in use. Provide for required inspections and tests by governing authorities, and obtain certifications and permits required for use.

1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Temporary Facilities: Ready for use at each location when first needed; maintain, expand and modify facilities as needed, remove when no longer required or replaced by approved permanent facilities. 1. Permanent Utility Service: Use in-lieu-of temporary service at earliest time feasible, subject to Architect's approval. 2. Water Service: Potable and approved by local health authority. B. Service Interruption: Schedule times acceptable to utility, and Owner for connection of temporary service. Provide advance notice of service interruptions as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials and Equipment: Undamaged, in serviceable condition and suitable for use intended. Provide fire-resistant materials for construction within 50 ft. of building lines. 1. Use of recycled and used materials for temporary construction is acceptable. 2. Wood: Fire-retardant treated material UL labeled Class "A". 3. Employ materials that conform to IAQ Management Plan and LEED Certification requirements. Do not use materials containing formaldehyde, VOC content in excess of 150 grams per liter and materials that do not comply with chemical compound limitations of Section 01600. 4. Fire Extinguishers: Type ABC dry chemical sized and located for effective extinguishing of fires throughout the Project. B. Electrical Service: Comply with applicable NEMA, NECA and UL standards and governing regulations. 1. Voltage Differences: Identify with warning signs at other than 110-120 volt outlets. 2. Ground-Fault Protection: Provide on receptacle outlets. 3. Electrical Power Cords: Grounded with waterproof connectors; use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. 4. Light Fixtures: Capable of establishing ambient light levels sufficient for safe and efficient conduct of the Work and the Architect's observation. C. Temporary Partitions: Unless otherwise acceptable paint surfaces exposed to occupied areas, using VOC compliant paint. 1. Dust Proof: 4 inch nominal studs, 3 ply, nylon reinforced polyethylene sheeting, Griffolyn T-55 Dust Partition or approved, 0.5 inch thick formaldehyde free oriented strand board or plywood and miscellaneous accessories adhesives, tape and anchors as necessary. 2. Sound Control: Similar to dust proof except provide 6 inch nominal studs and insulate partition with unfaced fiber glass insulation batts complying with Section 07210. D. Mechanical Ventilation: Size for necessary operation to maintain Project safety and efficient performance of the Work. Where work is performed near occupied areas and where control of particulates is necessary provide for negative pressure in work areas relative to adjacent spaces. 1. Provide HEPA filtered air supply and exhaust as appropriate to controlling and isolating air borne contaminants from control area. 2. Size, configure and equip mechanical units such that they will not contribute to airborne contamination including but not limited to volume, and velocity of air, pattern of air distribution, and location of air inlets, outlets and exhaust. E. Control of Airborne Contaminants and Construction Nuisances: Provide products complying with the following criteria. 1. High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filtration: 99.97 percent effective at 0.3 microns at not less than 400 CFM. 2. Disinfectant: EPA registered, hospital grade, pH neutral, quaternary antiseptic; provide product suitable to the surface to be cleaned and the cleaning methodology utilized. Provide dilute solution per recommendations of the manufacturer for optimum results. 3. Air Pressure Differential: Maintain 0.003 Inch Water Column +/- 0.001 IWC at all times uniformly in the controlled work area. 4. Air Pressure Sensor: Sensitive to 0.001 inches of water column, provide electronic contact for audible and visible alarms if set point is exceeded.

214002 / CAMS 01 50 00 - 3 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Electric Power: Install in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). 1. Exposed Wiring: Install in rigid conduit and raceways on grade, floors, and where subject to damage and abuse. 2. Circuits: Overload-protected by disconnect switch at power distribution center. B. Telephones: Minimum of three stations (voice, fax and data), each on a separate line. 1. Provide facsimile machine on dedicated line. 2. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail utilizing a DSL or other acceptable high-speed internet connection. C Heating Facilities: Thermostatically controlled, self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters or other acceptable type. Do not use open burning and salamander type heating units. 1. Gasoline-burning space heaters: Indirect-fired type, located outside the building space, use only where the specified system for temporary heating cannot be used. 2. When necessary to provide suitable conditions for the Work, dehumidify tempered air. D. Temporary Enclosures: Protect the Work from exposure, to weather, and construction activities. Mitigate environmental conditions prevailing prior to, during and following performance of the Work as necessary to conform to manufacturer's recommendations for temperature range, precipitation and other conditions that may effect the work. Enclose interior and exterior work areas, provide temporary heat and control of humidity as needed. Coordinate enclosures with construction processes, prevent hazardous and conditions detrimental to the Work. 1. Close openings through the floor, roof decks and other horizontal surfaces with substantial load- bearing construction. E. Digital Camera and Internet Link: Construction Manager shall provide a real-time web cam and all appropriate infrastructure and hosting for convenient access to camera images for monitoring by all members of the Project team and, should the Owner desire the general public. Access to the camera monitoring website shall be configured according to the desires of the Owner. 1. Fixed, affording a comprehensive overhead view of the Project and coordinated with the camera optics and equipment to produce good quality legible images with sufficient detail to permit general observation of the work and its status and progress. To the greatest extent practical maintain the camera in the same location throughout the Work.

3.02 TEMPORARY CONTROL A. Minimize potential for contamination of air, water and soil, and other undesirable affects occurring from performance of work. Provide general protection facilities, operate temporary facilities, conduct construction activities, and enforce strict discipline for personnel on Site. 1. Comply with Oregon Department of Environmental Quality, Oregon Administrative Rules, Chapter 340 Division 21 regarding containment of "dust, fumes, gasses, mist, odorous materials, vapors or any combination thereof not easily given to measurements, collection and treatment by conventional pollution control methods." This includes but is not limited to sandblasting, stockpiles of soils, acid washes and material deposited in streets. 2. Contractor shall provide remedial work necessary due to failure of pollution control measures, at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide necessary permits for pollution control activities. B. Noise Control: Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate and effective sound barriers and controls for all construction equipment so that noise from this equipment can be controlled to satisfaction of Owner. Coordinate with Owner when construction work requires use of air hammers or other objectionable noisy equipment. 1. Avoid the use of tools and equipment that produce noise in excess of 90 decibels 6 feet away from operating source. Restrict the use of noise making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize nuisance to Owner and neighboring occupants and residents. 2. Avoid the use of equipment that may produce excessive vibration and shaking.

214002 / CAMS 01 50 00 - 4 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Dust Control: Streets, roads and other routes used for construction traffic shall be treated to prevent air borne dust and to contain tracking of dirt and construction detritus. Dust prevention measures, both indoors and outdoors shall be continuous until Final Acceptance by Owner. 1. Provide interior dust control measures, such as temporary partitions, taping of air spaces at doors, maintenance of filters and protection of ducts, etc., as required to control dust. Coordinate to prevent accidental activation of particulate-sensing fire detection system as described under requirements for Hot Work Permit. D. Circulation and Vertical Conveyance: Use of existing elevator for construction traffic is not permitted. 1. Walkways: Install and maintain temporary walkways around work and to field offices, toilets and similar places. Prevent tracking of dirt and mud and provide efficient traffic surface. 2. Hoists and Lifting Devices: Provide for efficient movement of materials and personnel; include operating personnel where required. Make hoisting equipment available to all trades and lower tier contractors as necessary for efficient conduct of the Work.

3.03 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Until fire protection needs may be fulfilled by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of types needed to adequately protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 1. Comply with applicable recommendations of NFPA Standard 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers". 2. Locate fire extinguishers of type and size appropriate to area of coverage and range of hazards present. Locate where most convenient, visible and effective for their intended purpose. Provide a minimum of two extinguishers on each floor, one in a general Work area, and one at primary stair or vertical access. 3. Store combustible materials in containers in recognized fire-safe areas. 4. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. 5. Contractor shall ensure that contractor's employees are familiar with OWNERS' fire procedures and location of fire hydrants and extinguishers in adjacent parts of buildings or areas near construction area. B. Where temporary water outlets are available, provide hoses of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang hoses with warning sight to effect that hoses are for fire protection purposes and are not to be removed. Match hose sizes with outlet sizes and equip with suitable nozzles. C. Implement and supervise an overall fire prevention and fire protection program. 1. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures of program; post warnings and information, and enforce strict discipline. 2. Review needs with local fire department officials and establish procedures to be followed. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and other access routes for fighting fires. 4. Prohibit smoking inside all Owner facilities. 5. Provide extraordinary supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of ignition for possible fires. 6. Submission and approval of Hot Work Permits prior to commencing work.

3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES A. Security: Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 1. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 2. Maintain security program continuously throughout Project, until Owner occupancy, or Owner acceptance precludes need for security program. Provide control of all persons or vehicles leaving and entering Project Site, and maintain log of visitors. Owner will provide control and coordination of deliveries and vehicles related to Owner's existing operations. B. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with recognized standards and code requirements for the erection of substantial, structurally adequate barricades to prevent accidents and losses. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel at the site and the public, of the hazard being protected against. Provide lighting where appropriate and needed, including flashing lights.

214002 / CAMS 01 50 00 - 5 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Provide as necessary for interior work areas within existing building. Substantial and durable general temporary enclosure. Provide lockable entrances adequate to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar deleterious effects and violations of project security. 1. Storage: A secure lockup, enforce strict discipline in connection with the timing of installation and release of materials, so that the opportunity for theft and vandalism is minimized.

3.05 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Operate and maintain temporary facilities in good condition. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements due to weather, construction activities and vandalism. B. Temporary facilities are property of the Contractor: Remove when no longer needed, unless otherwise directed. Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project sign. 1. At substantial completion, clean and renovate permanent services and facilities that have been used to provide temporary services and facilities during the construction period, including but not limited to the following: a. Replace air filters and clean the inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace all lamps in lighting systems used during the Work.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Maintain Work in progress in a clean and orderly fashion on the basis of continuous maintenance. Protect Work in progress and adjoining work as necessary to ensure it is without damage nor deterioration at time of final acceptance. 1. Clean and perform maintenance on installed work as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. B. Waste Material and Rubbish: Collect and dispose of daily. Do not permit waste to accumulate except when collected into containers specifically designed to safely contain waste. Handle hazardous and unsanitary waste separately. Dispose of waste material in a lawful manner. 1. Collected Waste: Not held on site longer than 5 days. C. Protection: Provide to prevent exposure of completed Work, and Work in progress, from damage, harm, and deterioration at all times. 1. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual Specification Sections. 2. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. 3. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings 4. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage or movement of heavy objects by protecting with durable sheet materials. 5. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 6. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas 7. Restore surfaces of existing building to original condition where damaged due to work of this Contract or due to insufficient protection. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 50 00 - 6 TEMP FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Requirements for cutting of new and existing construction to provide for access, inspection, and other performance of the Work, and subsequent fitting and patching to restore the appearances of cut areas. Requirements of this Section also apply to alteration and repair of in- place construction including without limitation termination of selective demolition. B. Requirements of Section 01 35 91 are in addition to provisions of this Section and have precedence over this Section as obtains to historic materials and assemblies of the building.

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Cutting and patching shall adversely affect neither the physical nor aesthetic characteristics of assemblies and finishes affected by work of this Section as determined by the Architect. Completed patching work shall provide a uniform appearance without evidence of repair. 1. Where the Work is to be cut and patched, comply with Contract Document requirements for each component and the overall assembly. B. Performance Requirements: Remedial work shall conform to load requirements and meet or exceed the physical characteristics of the work it replaces and be compatible with the adjacent materials and assemblies.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where prior approval of cutting and patching is required, and when directed for other work, submit procedures proposed for cutting and patching well in advance of the time work will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal. 1. Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and patching cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, including structural, operational and visual changes as well as other significant elements. 2. List products to be used and firms that will perform cutting and patching. Confirm all requirements necessary for the preservation of existing warranty coverage including but not limited to qualifications for who may perform cutting and patching work. 3. State dates when work is expected to be performed. 4. List utilities that may be disturbed, relocated, temporarily out-of-service and otherwise be affected; indicate how long utility service will be disrupted. 5. Where structural work will be altered, submit details and engineering calculations to document that there is no adverse affect upon performance of the remaining structure. 6. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching work does not waive the Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory Work.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ skilled workers having minimum of five years experience with assemblies and materials similar to cutting and patching Work required for this Project. B. Retain the original installer, fabricator, or other approved firm to cut and patch work where existing warranties may otherwise be voided. C. Before cutting and patching the following categories of work, obtain the Architect's approval to proceed as required in the procedural proposal for cutting and patching. 1. Primary Structural Components: Girders, beams, joists, columns, piers, bearing walls, foundations, etc. 2. Secondary Structural Components: Lintels, equipment supports, decking, stair systems, retaining walls, etc. 3. Weatherproof Enclosures: Roofing, flashing, curtain walls, storefront systems, exterior doors and windows. 4. Mechanical, electrical, communication, and conveying systems.

214002 / CAMS 01 73 29 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 5. Primary operational systems and equipment including noise and vibration control elements and systems. 6. Other work as directed.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Requirements for Structural Work: Maintain the integrity and stability of work to remain. Do not reduce the load-carrying capacity or other performance characteristics of work to remain. Neither alter existing assemblies nor terminate demolition in a manner that would result in unsafe conditions. Give particular attention to terminations involving electrical systems and comply with Contract requirements for advance notification 1. Design of temporary supports shall be performed by the Contractor’s Oregon licensed engineer. B. Comply with requirements for hot work procedures as appropriate to the type of work being performed. To the greatest extent practical avoid work processes that may represent a fire hazard to Historic Resources to remain and salvage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise indicated or directed provide Work identical to adjacent and similar assemblies as determined by the Architect. When identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials matching existing adjacent and similar surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect and physical characteristics.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine materials, assemblies and conditions under which the work is to be performed and identify means and methods for performing the work the and materials and products necessary to complete required alterations and remedial work. Before proceeding with cutting and patching, and as necessary in the course of the work, correct conditions that may jeopardize the integrity and appearance of existing and remedial work.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Prevent damage to Work during cutting and patching. Protect from weather Work exposed to the exterior by cutting and patching operations. Provide temporary shoring and bracing to maintain existing position and prevent movement of Work. B. Do not cut existing mechanical systems and utilities until provisions to maintain service are in place. C. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original installer and comply with original installer's recommendations.

3.03 CUTTING A. Cutting: Use methods least likely to damage work to be retained and adjoining work. Make penetrations neatly, to sizes required, minimize disturbance of Work to remain. Use tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut and drill exposed surfaces from finished side into concealed surfaces. 1. Cutting of Concrete and Masonry: Use acceptable cutting tool leaving a clean regular edge, impact tools are not acceptable. Contain dust, water and other waste generated by cutting activity. Mitigate noise, vibration and other nuisances as required to prevent adverse impact to Owner's occupancy.

3.04 PATCHING A. Seams: Durable without change of texture, plane, and profile in finished Work. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

214002 / CAMS 01 73 29 - 2 CUTTING AND PATCHING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 1. Where repair occurs in a smooth finished surface or may otherwise create a detectable extend repair to natural break to eliminate appearance of patch. B. Floor, Wall, and Ceiling Surfaces: Patch and repair provide even surface of uniform color and appearance. Where necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing finish and coverings and replace with new materials. C. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings, with finish materials to match existing. D. Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Do not use damaged panels, repair and replace panels as directed and reinstall in suspended support system. Where suspension system is cut or damaged it shall be replaced with new components. Repaired ceilings shall provide an even planar surface of uniform appearance. E. Appurtenances: Convenience outlets, switches, fixtures and similar components removed from assemblies to remain. Repair and patch framing, backing materials and finishes cut, altered and damaged in conjunction with removal work. F. Tolerances: In addition to performance requirements of this Section, comply with tolerances specified in individual technical Sections for repair of specific assemblies and materials.

3.05 TRANSITION BETWEEN IN-PLACE AND REMEDIAL WORK A. Transitions between new and existing work shall be durable, not visible under careful examination with no adverse effect on performance of the completed work. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible. B. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface in an approved manner at a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface.

3.06 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where work is performed and used for access to work. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Clean ducts, pipes, conduit and similar features before finishes are applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 1. Remove dirt and debris from concealed areas exposed by cutting and patching work regardless of whether the area will be left exposed or concealed when work is completed. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 73 29 - 3 CUTTING AND PATCHING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 74 19 RESOURCE RECOVERY PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for management of debris and waste materials generated by the Work. It is the intent of the requirements for this Section that debris and waste materials from the Work be recovered for reuse and recycling and result in a net financial savings for the Owner. Debris and waste materials that can not be recovered shall be disposed of in a legal and conscientious manner. B. Maximize the diversion of waste form disposal via landfill. The waste management goal for this Project shall be to divert 70 percent of construction demolition and land clearing debris (CDL) from landfill disposal. Consult with the Owner where this goal appears to be unachievable within Project constraints and request direction 1. Waste Management Plan: Implemented by the Contractor. When it appears likely that these policies will incur costs greater than the expense of legal disposal the Owner shall be notified of the circumstances and costs and provide direction. C. The Contract Amount will be adjusted by Change Order to account for the cost and savings obtained by the Contractor's implementation of the Owner's Waste Management Plan.

1.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Debris and Waste Materials Produced as a Consequence of the Work: Recovered for recycling and reuse to the maximum extent practical in pursuit of Project management goal. Review recycling and reuse potential for practicality and cost effectiveness. 1. Personnel Instruction: Contractor shall instruct tradespersons, mechanics and other workers regarding the location of containers for source separation of debris and required procedures for resource processing and avoidance of contamination of the contents. 2. Sale of Recovered Debris and Waste Material: Conducted off the Owner's property. 3. Requirements to Reuse Debris and Waste Materials in the Work: Coordinated with requirements of individual technical Sections. B. Do not stockpile resources on-site beyond the period necessary for sorting and accumulation of practical quantities for transport off-site. Provide for periodic collection of resources and transportation off-site. As a minimum, provide separate containers with identifying signage for source separation of the following resources. Owner reserves the right to modify the listing to add or delete resources where this may enhance the resource recovery effort. 1. Wood: Carefully dismantled and recycled or sold. 2. Metal: Ferrous and non-ferrous containers. Includes sheet metal, mechanical equipment, piping, fasteners, and related accessories and components. 3. Portland Cement Concrete: Recycle where off-site reuse is not acceptable. 4. Gypsum Boards 5. Cardboard 6. Non-recoverable debris; as required for debris collection and disposal.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 01 74 19 - 1 RESOURCE RECOVERY OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements to be fulfilled near the end of the Contract time in preparation for final acceptance of the Work and final payment to the Contractor and normal termination of the Contract. B. Contract Close-out: Directly related to "Substantial Completion" and "Final Acceptance". Specific requirements for individual units of work are included in the individual Sections of the Specifications. 1. Substantial Completion: A single time period for the entire Work as identified in the Contract Documents. 2. Final Acceptance: Subsequent to Substantial Completion; a single time period for the entire Contract. C. Following Contractor's certification of completion and request for review, the Architect will review the Work once for Substantial Completion and once for Final Acceptance. 1. Upon completion of each review, the Architect will prepare either a Substantial Completion or Final Acceptance certificate, or advise the Contractor of incomplete work and unfulfilled prerequisites. 2. Where more than one review for either Substantial Completion or Final Acceptance is required the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs associated with these additional reviews.

1.02 PREREQUISITES FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Complete the following before requesting the Architect's review for certification of substantial completion, either for the entire Work or for portions of the Work. List known exceptions in the request. 1. In the progress payment request that coincides with, or is the first request following, the date substantial completion is claimed, show either 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as "substantially complete", or list incomplete items, the value of incomplete work, and reasons for the Work being incomplete. 2. Include supporting documentation for completion as required in the Contract Documents. 3. Submit an accounting of changes to the Contract Amount. 4. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 5. Submit special warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 6. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner's full, unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Where required, include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 7. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, final contract photographs, damage or settlement survey, property survey, and similar final record information. 8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of material, and similar physical items to Owner. 9. Make the final change-over of locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of the change-over in security provisions. 10. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities and services from the site, along with construction tools and facilities, and similar elements. 11. Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting of marred surfaces. 12. Repair and restoration of damaged finishes. B. Review Procedure: Upon receipt of the Contractor's request for Substantial Completion review, the Architect will either proceed with review or advise the Contractor of unfulfilled prerequisites. 1. Following the review, the Architect will prepare the certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise the Contractor of work that must be performed before the certificate will be issued and that a reinspection is required to establish Substantial Completion.

214002 / CAMS 01 77 00 - 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

2. Results of the Substantial Completion review will form the Architect's "punch-list" of work to be completed for Final Acceptance.

1.03 PREREQUISITES FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Complete the following before requesting the Architect's final review for certification of final acceptance, and final payment as required by the General Conditions. List known exceptions, if any, in the request. 1. Submit the final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data either as of the date of substantial completion, or else when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety, and final waiver of lien. 6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. B. Review Procedure: Upon receipt of the Contractor's request for Final Acceptance review, the Architect will either proceed with review or advise the Contractor of unfilled prerequisites. 1. Following the review, the Architect will prepare the certificate of Final Acceptance or advise the Contractor of work that must be performed before the certificate will be issued and that a reinspection is required to establish Final Acceptance.

1.04 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record documents to the Architect for the Owner's records. 1. Mark-up record documents to show the actual installation where the as-built work varies substantially from the work as originally shown. 2. Mark the document most capable of recording the actual as-built condition fully and accurately. Give particular attention to concealed work that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 3. Annotate cross-references to other record documents and Contract modifications where applicable. B. Record Drawings: Complete set of opaque reproductions acceptable to the Architect of Contract drawings and shop drawings in a clean, undamaged condition. Where shop drawings are used for mark-up, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract drawings. 1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. 2. Mark-up new information which is known to be important to the Owner, but may not be fully described on Contract Drawings or shop drawings. 3. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Contract Manual, including specifications and addenda, and one copy of other written constriction documents such as change orders and similar modifications issued in printed form during construction. 1. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options. Cross reference record drawing information and product data, where applicable. D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each product data submittal. Mark these documents to show significant variations in the actual Work performed in comparison with the submitted information. Include both variations in the products as delivered to the site, and

214002 / CAMS 01 77 00 - 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

variations from the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark- up of record drawings and specifications. E. Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of record product data to the Architect for the Owner's records. F. Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to the date or dates of substantial completion, the Contractor shall meet at the site with the Architect and the Owner's personnel, to determine which, job standard samples maintained during progress of the Work, are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Deliver samples to the Owner's as directed. G. Maintenance Manuals: Three bound sets in heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information, provide multiple volumes where a single two inch binder is not sufficient. Mark the appropriate identification on both front and spine of each binder. Provide table of contents and index for each binder, and include the following types of information: 1. Emergency operation and shut-down instructions. 2. Spare parts listing. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams, flow charts and similar descriptive function diagrams. 5. Recommended maintenance cycles, trouble-shooting and inspection procedures 6. Shop drawings and product data germane to maintenance. H. Special Warranty Documents: Bound in 3-ring lose-leaf binder sized for contents with table of contents. Provide identifying dividers for each separate warranty organizing document in accordance with the division and Sections of the Project Manual. 1. Cover: Project identification and general binder contents. 2. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES A. General Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of operating equipment and other work that requires regular or continuing maintenance, to meet at the site with the Owner's personnel to provide necessary basic instruction in the proper operation and maintenance of the entire Work. Where installers are not experienced in the required procedures, include instruction by the manufacturer's representatives. 1. As part of this instruction provide a detailed review of the following items: a. Maintenance manuals b. Record documents c. Spare parts and materials d. Tools e. Lubricants f. Fuels g. Identification systems h. Control sequences i. Hazards j. Cleaning k. Warranties, bonds, maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. 2. As part of this instruction for operating equipment demonstrate the following procedures: a. Start-up b. Shut-down c. Emergency operations d. Noise and vibration adjustments e. Safety procedures f. Economy and efficiency adjustments

214002 / CAMS 01 77 00 - 3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

g. Effective energy utilization

3.02 FINAL CLEANING A. General Cleaning during the regular progress of the Work is required by the General Conditions and as required in Section 01 50 00. B. Final Cleaning: As directed and required. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit of work to the condition expected from a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for operations. 1. Special cleaning requirements for specific units of Work are included in the appropriate technical Sections of these specifications. C. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting the Architect's review for certification of substantial completion. 1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows, to a polished condition. Remove putty and other substances which are noticeable as vision- obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. 5. Clean the Site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas to a broom clean condition; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textured surface. D. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by the Architect, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during the course of the work to protect previously completed work during remainder of the construction period. E. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become Owner's property, dispose of these materials to the Owner's best advantage as directed. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 01 77 00 - 4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017 SECTION 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition or salvage of items as required for investigation. B. Selective demolition and disposal of items as indicated on Drawings. C. Removal and salvage of items as indicated on Drawings. D. Storage of salvage items to be reinstalled.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures: Procedures specific to protection in-place, removal and dismantling, and storage of historic elements. B. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Protection of existing construction, workers, and public during demolition and activities. C. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching. D. Section 01 74 19 - Resource Recovery and Recycling.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Component, Element OR Item: Used interchangeably to indicate the part of the building being acted upon B. Demolish OR Demo: To detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site. C. Primary Path of Construction Travel: Areas that will require a higher level of protection. D. Remove: Specifically for historic spaces, areas, rooms, and surfaces, the term means to detach an item from existing construction to the limits indicated, using hand tools and hand- operated power equipment, and legally dispose of it off-site, unless to be salvaged. E. Remove and Salvage for Owner: To detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner. F. Remove and Salvage for Reinstallation: To detach items from existing construction, store and prepare them for repair and reinstallation where indicated. G. Salvage Element: Any element to be removed from the existing construction and to be repaired and/or modified for potential reinstallation or reuse. H. Storage Area: Area within the building to be used for storage of salvage materials and elements that will be rehabilitated and reinstalled.

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 241 - Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations; National Fire Protection Association.

214002.4 / CAMS 02 41 19 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set SALVAGE, AND PROTECTION 03 24 2017

1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.07 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Selective Demolition Plan: Submit written plan detailing proposed methods and operations for selective demolition. Work Description should include, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Sequence of selective demolition and salvage activities. 2. Method of protection and attachment of protection. Include information for both in-field protection and protection of items in storage. 3. Methods of demolition and removal for salvage. 4. Proposed tools and products. 5. Cataloging and storage of items. B. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. C. Shop Drawings: Submit complete set of shop drawings recording on elevations or plans the location, configuration and description of all elements removed for salvage that will require reconstruction or reinstallation in the original location or in a new location. Include location of elements, joint locations, size, spacing, surface mounted elements, materials, conditions and all dimensions so that wall, floor or ceiling or other elements can be reconstructed in their entirety. Minimum scale 1/4" = 1' - 0". Existing construction drawings may be used as base sheets for Shop Drawings. D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. E. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition.

1.09 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: All work shall be performed by skilled contractors having successful experience in comparable protection, salvage and removal operations including work on at least 3 projects similar in scope and scale to this Project in the last 5 years. Submit references with name of contact person and telephone number for the 3 submitted similar projects. All work to be performed by individuals whose qualifications have been submitted and approved. B. The subcontractors responsible for the repair or rehabilitation of salvaged elements shall also be responsible for the disassembly, cataloging, storage and reinstallation of the same

214002.4 / CAMS 02 41 19 - 2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set SALVAGE, AND PROTECTION 03 24 2017

elements. General selective demolition experience is not sufficient experience for removal and dismantling of historic elements. C. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the performance of Work of this Section with related or adjacent work. Removal and protection of items shall be completed prior to commencement of demolition or new construction activities in each area. At a minimum, install protection in its entirety for a given area prior to commencement of any demolition activities in that area. B. At the end of each working day, or during inclement weather, cover work exposed to weather with waterproof coverings, securely anchored. C. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; Comply with requirements of Section 01 11 00. 1. Immediately notify Owner and Department of Environmental Quality. 2. If presence of asbestos is confirmed, Owner will remove material under separate contract.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

2.02 PROTECTION MATERIALS A. Protection barriers and enclosures are specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. B. Protection materials are specified in Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.02 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01 11 00 "Summary of Work."

214002.4 / CAMS 02 41 19 - 3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set SALVAGE, AND PROTECTION 03 24 2017

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

3.03 PREPARATION A. Remove all debris and impediments to allow for full access as required to perform demolition and construction. Before beginning demolition, protect all elements to remain in place from damage during the removal procedures as specified. B. Verify condition of the storage area to ensure that there is adequate capacity and access to store and retrieve salvage elements.

3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect all historic elements to remain in place during demolition activities as specified in Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures. B. Install barriers and enclosures to protect existing construction, workers, and public during demolition and activities as specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

3.05 REMOVAL OF ELEMENTS FOR SALVAGE A. Disassemble, label, handle, transport and store elements which have been identified for removal. Contractor is responsible for handling, transporting and storage of the items in the storage area. B. Remove, dismantle, and store all historic elements as specified in Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures. C. Exercise extreme care in removing items or materials attached to or near historic elements that are to remain. D. Unbolt bolted connections; leave embedded connector undisturbed and in place for later element reinstallation. E. Unscrew screwed connections; leave embedded connector undisturbed and in place for later element reinstallation.

214002.4 / CAMS 02 41 19 - 4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set SALVAGE, AND PROTECTION 03 24 2017

F. Do not pry apart members whose finish will be damaged by chipping, crazing or cracking, or whose structural integrity will be compromised. G. Remove all nails from wood elements from the backside. Drive nails through or pull from the back so that the head does not splinter the finish face. H. Remove items whole whenever possible. Where cuts are required, make cuts cleanly and with the proper tool at logical break points. I. Door Assemblies. Remove components in whole sections. Store door in frame together when both are removed for salvage. Store all hardware components together.

3.06 CATALOGING OF SALVAGE ELEMENTS A. Catalog salvage elements per requirements as specified in these sections: 1. Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures.

3.07 STORAGE A. Transport items to storage facility. Store elements in their natural configuration, i.e. store doors in an upright position, and off of the floor. B. Organize elements so that they are readily retrievable. Store like elements together. Monitor stored items periodically to ensure that elements remain in good condition and are not being damaged by construction activities or the conditions of the storage area.

3.08 REINSTALLATION A. Reinstallation of salvage items is specified in individual technical Sections of these Specifications. B. Contractor is responsible for proper inventorying and distribution to appropriate subcontractors of salvaged material for reinstallation.

3.09 DEMOLITION A. Demolish and dispose of materials not indicated for salvage, based on approved Demolition Plan and shop drawings. B. Exercise extreme care in demolishing items or materials attached to or near historic elements that are to remain. C. Provide supports or reinforcement for existing construction that becomes temporarily weakened by the work, until the work is completed. D. Do not operate air compressors inside building, unless approved by Architect in each case. E. Do not drill or cut columns, beams, joints, girders, structural slabs, or other structural supporting elements, without having Contractor's professional engineer's written approval for each location before such work is begun. F. Do not use explosives. G. Water-Mist Sprinkling: Use water-mist sprinkling and other wet methods to control dust only with adequate, approved procedures and equipment that ensure that such water will not create a hazard or adversely affect building areas or materials. H. Allow no debris to accumulate on site. Legally dispose of all debris off-site as soon as removed. 3.10 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL A. Upon completion of selective demolition and salvage activities remove tools, equipment and other unnecessary materials from the site.

214002.4 / CAMS 02 41 19 - 5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set SALVAGE, AND PROTECTION 03 24 2017

B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition, salvage and protection activities. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 02 41 19 - 6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set SALVAGE, AND PROTECTION 03 24 2017

SECTION 06 01 40 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective cleaning, repair and refinishing of existing woodwork to the extent required to blend in with repaired or new woodwork. B. Reinstallation of salvaged original wood elements removed during construction. C. Repair and refinishing of woodwork in elevator cars. D. New wood veneer to match existing at interior where indicated on Drawings . 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures. B. Section 08 01 14 - Repair and Restoration of Wood Doors.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Dutchman: Wood patch or filler that replaces a damaged or missing area of any wood object. The procedure involves removing a symmetrical squared area around the defect and replacing it with new wood. Wood shall be of the same species, grain pattern and color as the original.

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of “Architectural Woodworking Standards” jointly published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) and the Woodwork Institute of California (WIC).

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Work Description: Submit written program for each phase of repair and restoration of historic architectural woodwork, including protection of surrounding materials and site during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods and equipment to be used for each phase. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used for repair and restoration of architectural woodwork, with the following information for each: 1. Recommendations for application and use. 2. Instructions for storage and handling. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and test data, Material Safety Data Sheets, and certifications sustaining that products comply with requirements. 4. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed. C. Wood Veneer Samples: 1. Submit minimum 6 by 9 inches samples of each type of wood veneer proposed to replace existing veneer. Include product name, wood species and cut and/or figure labeled on the back of each sample.

214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 1 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

2. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of wood veneer wallcovering, adhesive and accessory required. a. Include data on physical properties, fire hazard classification and fire detection characteristics of wallcoverings. b. Include manufacturer's recommendations for maximum permissible moisture content of substrates. 3. Submit a copy of maintenance instructions to Owner.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Work of this Section shall be performed by a firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in comparable wood repair and restoration projects. Firm shall have expertise in all the Work of this Section. Firm shall employ personnel and supervisors skilled in the rehabilitation and restoration processes and operations indicated. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 projects completed in last 5 years by Contractor that illustrate the firm's expertise in all of the Work of this Section. B. Qualifications of Project Manager or Foreman Supervising Work, and Skilled Workmen: Project Manager and Job Foreman shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Skilled workmen each shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 projects completed by Project Manager or Foreman that illustrate their expertise in all of the Work of this Section and a list of 5 projects completed by each of the skilled workmen. C. Contractor, project manager or foreman supervising work, and skilled workmen selected and approved for Work of this Section shall complete all Work of this Section, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Any requests for changes in management and skilled personnel shall be submitted to Architect in writing with the required documentation outlined above. 2. Architect shall review management and skilled personnel changes with reasonable promptness. Personnel changes shall not be made until Architect has approved the change. D. Qualification of Wood Veneer Applicator: Installation by skilled commercial wallcovering applicators with no less than 3 years of documented experience installing wallcovering of the types and extent specified for the project. E. Perform work in accordance with American Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality. F. Materials: 1. Obtain materials for wood restoration from a single source for each type material required to ensure match of quality, color, pattern and texture.

1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Before full-scale operation, prepare field samples for each of the specified treatments on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Specific locations and test panels to be designated by Architect. Field samples to be of sufficient size to demonstrate relevant methods, procedures, dwell times and quality of work expected in the finish product. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of visual qualities before proceeding with the Work. Repeat field samples as necessary, adjusting methods and procedures, until acceptance by Architect is achieved. Retain acceptable samples in undisturbed condition, suitably marked, during restoration as a standard for judging completed work. Upon Architect's approval, acceptable samples may remain as part of the finished work. The samples of each type of restoration work shall be done in an area that will be exposed to the same weathering conditions as final location. Allow samples to cure at least three days before requesting review of color, texture and detailing match. Samples shall be viewed from 214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 2 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

an approved distance. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of mock-ups and test panels preparation. 1. Demonstrate specified materials and methods to be used for cleaning, refinishing, and for each type of solid wood and wood veneer repair, on each type of existing wood surface and condition. 2. Area of each sample shall be approximately 12 by 12 inches.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver manufactured products to the job site in their original, unopened containers and packaging with all labels intact and legible at the time of use. Delivered materials shall be identical to approved samples. B. Store packaged materials in clean, dry, well-ventilated areas, away from heat, sparks, flame, direct rays of the sun, and intrusion of foreign matter a secure area acceptable to Architect. Store materials on raised platforms and under ventilated, waterproof cover. Maintain storage areas free from fire hazard. C. Do not use materials that show indications of moisture damage, caking, or other deterioration. D. Immediately re-seal containers after partial use. E. Replacements: In the event of damage, Contractor shall immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary, at no cost to Owner.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Installation of new wood veneer shall be done only when all wet work has been completed and dried. Temperature and humidity conditions must match the normal conditions in the occupied space. Humidity of room shall not drop under 25% or exceed 55%. HVAC system shall be functioning continuously before, during and after installation. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions by accurate field measurements before reinstallation, fabrication and installation, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate reinstallation and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber and Wood Veneer Materials: 1. New Lumber Materials: Species, grain, color, surface texture, profile, and dimensions to match existing architectural woodwork. For architectural woodwork with an opaque finish, match wood species, cut and quality of adjacent architectural woodwork. 2. New Wood Veneer Materials: Species, grain, color, surface texture, profile, and dimensions to match existing architectural woodwork. For architectural woodwork with an opaque finish, match wood species, cut and quality of existing veneer panels being replaced. 3. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with WIC recommendations for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity in installation areas. B. Strippers: 1. Approved VOC compliant varnish and shellac thinner, or paint and varnish removal product containing no alkalis. C. Solvent: Mineral spirits, turpentine, or denatured alcohol. D. Detergent: Concentrate, non-ionic, and containing no soaps, free alkali, solvents, abrasives, acids, caustics and other deleterious materials. 214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 3 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

1. Ivory Flakes (not Ivory Dishwashing Liquid), Vulpex Liquid Soap, Orvus paste, or approved equal; follow manufacturer's guidance for use of their products. Suggested detergents are supplied as a dense concentrate and must be diluted before use. E. Adhesive: 1. Non-staining, waterproof, resorcinol type. a. Epoxy Repair System by Advanced Repair Technology, Inc., Cherry Valley, NY. http://www.advancedrepair.com/. b. WoodEpox by Abatron, Inc., Kenosha, WI. http://www.abatron.com/. c. Flexible Epoxy Patch 200 by Conserv Epoxy LLC, Northford, CT. http://conservepoxy.com/. d. Or approved equal. F. Epoxy Consolidant: 1. Liquid, one or two part epoxy based consolidant filler for wood repair. a. LiquidWood Epoxy Wood Consolidant by Abatron, Inc., Kenosha, WI. http://www.abatron.com/. b. Flexible Epoxy Consolidant 100 by Conserv Epoxy LLC, Northford, CT. http://conservepoxy.com/. c. Or approved equal. G. Wood Filler: 1. Use for repair of checks, gouges and imperfections and to recreate original profiles where damaged. Color of fill to match color of wood. a. WoodEpox by Abatron, Inc., Kenosha, WI. http://www.abatron.com/. b. Stainable Wood Filler by Minwax, Upper Saddle River, NJ. http://www.minwax.com/. c. Stainable Wood Filler by Elmer's Products, Inc., Columbus, OH. http://elmers.com/. d. Fil-Stick by Mohawk Finishing Products, Hickory, NC. http://www.mohawk- finishing.com/default.aspx. e. Plastic Wood Solvent Wood Filler by DAP Products Inc., Baltimore, MD. http://www.dap.com/. f. Or approved equal. H. Filler for Nail Holes and Other Small Repairs: 1. Paraffin blended with non-fading, acrylic pigments; use colored paraffin to match adjacent wood. I. Finish Materials 1. Stain: a. Non-bleeding, non-grain raising stains and toners as required to match Architect's samples. Color to match existing wood stain. 1) Sher-Wood BAC Wiping Stain S64 Series, by the Sherwin-Williams Company, Cleveland, OH. http://www.sherwin-williams.com/. 2. Varnish Topcoat: a. Wood Classics FastDry Oil Varnish A66-300, by the Sherwin-Williams Company, Cleveland, OH. http://www.sherwin-williams.com/. 3. Sanding Sealer: a. Wood Classics FastDry Sanding Sealer B26V43, by the Sherwin-Williams Company, Cleveland, OH. http://www.sherwin-williams.com/. J. All chemical materials shall be safe in use and shall not violate city, state, or federal environmental or safety regulations.

2.02 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. Provide countersunk finish screws for attachment of all architectural woodwork elements.

214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 4 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. Provide stainless steel nails for exposed architectural woodwork which is to receive transparent finish

2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Protection Materials are specified in Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures. B. Vacuum: Soft brush tool attachment only. C. Brushes: Natural or nylon fiber bristle only. Brushes must be free of metal parts or tape all metal ferrules with duct tape. D. Scrapers: Plastic or wood only. Do not use metallic scrapers. E. Cloth: Soft, clean, and lint free. F. Sponges. G. Water: Clean, potable, free of deleterious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, and organic matter. Water filters shall be used to remove contaminants if necessary. Water shall be free of contaminants that may cause staining of masonry. 1. Provide all hoses, valve connections, pumps, nozzles and other necessary water conveying components to provide water where needed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for repair and restoration of historic architectural woodwork. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the Work until such conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor shall make thorough inspection to determine extent of wood to be repaired.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Install protection as specified in Section 01 35 91. 2. Provide protection during application of chemicals as specified in Section 01 35 91. 3. Coverings must be adhered without adhesive tape or nails. Impervious sheeting that produces condensation shall not be used.

3.03 CLEANING A. General: All wood surfaces are to receive a general cleaning as follows: 1. Vacuum to remove dirt and debris, being careful not to gouge, abrade, or nick the existing finishes with attachments or hoses. 2. Dilute non-ionic detergent with water using proportions as directed by manufacturer. 3. Damp wipe with cloths or sponges. Do not saturate wood. 4. Wipe dry with a clean dry cloth, rubbing in direction of grain. B. Surface Deposit Removal: 1. Remove surface deposits such as adhesive tape, chewing gum, etc. with a plastic scraper. Where deposits are cooled to facilitate their removal, indirect cooling methods shall be used such as "blue ice" or an ice cube in a sealed plastic bag. Do not allow the wood surface to get wet. C. Chemical Stripping: 1. Preparation: a. Sand all surfaces smooth, do not leave marks from mechanical sanding. 214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 5 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

b. Always rub along grain of wood. 2. Cleaning: a. Wet steel wool with solvent and rub over the wood surface to remove varnish build-up and smooth out worn surfaces. b. Work area should be within a comfortable arms reach. c. This process is to remove varnish build-up only. If solvent affects the wood, discontinue use and use an alternative solvent. d. Allow surface to dry thoroughly; no less than 24 hours.

3.04 REPAIR, SOLID WOOD A. General: 1. All wood must have a moisture content of 14 percent or less prior to any repairs. 2. Repair area and adjacent surface shall be prepared per manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adequate bonding of the wood filler, using fine sandpaper or steel wool. Finish shall be completely removed from surface of repair area. 3. Apply approved wood filler according to manufacturer’s instructions. After curing, sand the filled area even with the existing wood surface. 4. If necessary, apply wood stain to the fill to match the surrounding wood color. Apply clear sealer to any newly stained areas. After sealer has dried, sand smooth with very fine sandpaper or steel wool to receive clear topcoat. 5. Apply clear topcoat according to manufacturer’s instructions, ensuring the prepared area is free of sanding dust and debris. B. Gouges or scratches equivalent to or greater than 1/16 inch wide, 3 inches long and 1/16 inch deep, or areas of wood loss equivalent to or greater than 1/4 square inch and 1/8 inch deep, and not meeting dimensional requirements for a dutchman repair, shall be filled and refinished to match the surrounding wood. C. Repair of Holes Greater Than 3/16 inch: 1. General: The least amount of wood possible shall be removed for the repair. 2. Bore existing holes as necessary to create crisp hole edge. The diameter of the new hole shall be the same or slightly larger than the existing. 3. Insert plug cut to fit bored hole using specified adhesive. Surface of plug shall match grain direction and cut of surrounding wood. 4. Set plug with surface above surrounding wood. 5. Cut plug flush. D. Securing of Loose Elements: 1. Set loose elements in original position, secure with adhesive and/or fasteners, as appropriate. Secure molding with stainless steel finishing nails of appropriate size. Pre-drill holes to avoid splitting wood. E. Repair of Joints or Splits in Wood: 1. General: Splits shall be repaired with specified adhesive. 2. Work adhesive into split or open area. Use syringe if necessary for adequate penetration of adhesive. 3. Clamp split to achieve proper bonding. Do not allow clamp to stain wood at glue joint. Use adequate blocking to avoid compressing wood fibers at clamp locations. 4. Clean adhesive from surface of wood. F. Dutchman Repair: 1. General: All voids losses, nicks or dents with a surface area larger than 1/2 square inch, and a depth greater than 1/16 inch shall be filled with wood dutchman, with grain in same direction as existing wood member. 2. Existing softwood dutchman shall be replaced with dutchman matching species, color and cut of adjacent wood.

214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 6 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

3. Carve cavity to geometric shape to allow easier shaping of dutchman, with grain in same direction as existing wood member. Match cut of dutchman to surrounding material. 4. Prepare dutchman to fit cavity. 5. Mix adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 6. Apply adhesive to dutchman and surfaces of voids, and insert dutchman. All joints shall be tight with only hairline glue lines. Dutchman shall extend minimum of 1/16 inch above surface of repaired member. 7. After adhesive has cured, carve dutchman to match profile and texture of adjoining surfaces.

3.05 REPAIR, WOOD VENEER A. General: 1. When choosing glue for a repair, try to match the veneer color as closely as possible so if glue bleeds through the pores, it will be less visible. For example, use white glue on maple, a tight-grained wood that is not usually stained. However, rosewood is a dark wood with open pores and white glue would bleed through. B. Gouge and Scratch Repair: 1. Using very fine, 100-grit sandpaper sand across scratch parallel to grain, back and forth gently until the scratch is gone. Stop sanding when grain lines around the scratch begin to disappear. Do not sand through veneer. 2. Apply a matching putty stick to remaining parts of the scratch, followed by a matching oil stain. 3. Spray the area lightly with one coat of aerosol lacquer. 4. Repair deeper gouges with species-specific wood putty matching existing veneer. 5. Smash the putty hard into gouge and smear to flatten it. 6. When putty is dry, sand surface of the putty flush using 100-grit sandpaper. 7. Draw grain lines on the putty using a stain marker. C. Loose Laminate Veneer Repair: 1. Exercise extreme care when repairing loose veneer as veneer is very thin and brittle material. 2. Before starting any work, place a damp cloth on top of the laminate area and then, place a hot iron on the cloth. This will force moisture into the veneer making it more flexible and much less likely to split or crack when conducting repair. 3. After steaming moisture into the laminate, carefully scrape out the old glue from off of the base wood and the back of veneer using a small knife, working it back as far as it can be done safely. If the glue just won't come off, squeeze hot water from a sponge under the loose piece of veneer to melt the glue. 4. Re-attach the veneer by adding fresh white (wood) glue, then put a piece of plastic over the repaired area. The plastic will prevent any glue that squeezes out from sticking to clamping device used to hold the repair in place. Masking tape or a weight can also be used to substitute a clamping device. 5. Allow the glue to set for about 8 hours. 6. After the glue has set, wipe off any excess glue from the surface using a sponge soaked with hot water. 7. Be sure to dry off any excess water, so not to cause further damage. D. Bubbled (Blistered) Wood Laminate Veneer Repair 1. Small Blisters: a. Set a sheet of wax paper and then a sheet of smooth cardboard on the surface, and cover the cardboard with a clean cloth. b. Press the blistered area firmly with a medium-hot iron. Move the iron slowly and evenly back and forth if there are several blisters. Do not touch the exposed surface with the iron. c. Stop pressing as soon as the blisters have flattened. 214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 7 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

d. Leave the cardboard in place and weight the repair area solidly for 24 hours. e. Then wax and polish the surface. 2. Large Blisters: a. Before starting any work, place a damp cloth on top of the laminate area and then, place a hot iron on the cloth. This will force moisture into the veneer making it more flexible and much less likely to split or crack when conducting repair. b. After steaming the laminate material to get it pliable, place a damp cloth over the bubbled (blistered) area and cut a slit into the top of the bubble. Be careful not to cut into the base wood. c. Press on the bubble to allow any excess air to escape through the slit. d. Then, cover the surface and apply heat as indicated for repair of small blisters above. Check every few seconds as the glue softens. e. If the glue has deteriorated and does not soften, carefully scrape it out and insert a little carpenters' glue into the slit, making sure to get the glue on both the underside of the bubbled veneer and the wood base. Be careful not to use too much glue. If necessary, wipe off any excess as the blister flattens. f. As soon as one edge of the slit bubble overlaps the other, carefully shave off the overlapping edge with a craft knife or razor blade. g. Heat the blister again; if the edges overlap further, shave the overlapping edge again. h. When the blister is completely flattened, use a clamp, masking tape or any weighted item to secure the bond. i. Allow the glue to set for 24 hours. Wipe off any excess glue from the surface using a sponge soaked with hot water. Be sure to dry off any excess water, so not to cause further damage. j. Then wax and polish the surface. E. Missing Wood Veneer and Holes Repair: 1. Repair Using New Veneer: a. Locate a piece of veneer from a new stock that matches grain and color of woodwork being repaired. Cut the veneer piece slightly larger than missing or damaged area, preferably along grain lines. b. Trace shape of patch onto veneer area to be repaired and cut out damaged veneer area. Glue patch in place and clamp as above. c. Allow glue to set for 24 hours, and then, clean up the patch by light scraping and sanding. d. Then wax and polish the surface blending the patch with existing woodwork. 2. Repair Using Putty or Filler: a. Use a matching stain marker to color exposed core of lumber to match existing veneer on door or other architectural element being repaired. b. When stain dries, drag tip of a darker marker across damaged area to imitate grain lines. c. Fill the damaged area with wood putty or filler product according to manufacturer's written instructions. When dry, sand repair area lightly with 180-grit sandpaper.

3.06 REFINISHING A. General: 1. Damaged and discolored (e.g., water staining adjacent to windows) wood, and salvaged wood to be reinstalled shall be refinished to match the surrounding wood finish. 2. Remove any existing clear coat from the damaged area using fine sandpaper or steel wool until bare wood is reached. Do not create excessive depressions or divots in the wood surface by over-sanding. 3. Apply clear topcoat according to the manufacturer’s instructions, ensuring the prepared area is free of sanding dust and debris. B. Staining: 214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 8 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

1. Apply wood stain where necessary to match existing. C. Varnish Preparation: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Wood should be clean, dry, finish sanded, and dust free. 3. Sanding Sealer System: a. Seal with sanding sealer and dry for 30 minutes. 4. Sand Surface using 150-grit, followed by 180-grit sandpaper. 5. Sanded surface shall be free of grease, sanding dust and other foreign matter. D. Varnish Finishing System: 1. Apply wood stain. 2. Apply paste wood filler, well rubbed-in, across the grain. 3. Apply wet coat of varnish using a sprayer, conventional or airless. Allow to dry completely. a. Conventional sprayer: 50-65 psi atomization b. Airless: warm spray or curtain spray 4. Sand out roughness with 6/0 open coat abrasive paper. Dust off thoroughly with air jet or vacuum. 5. Apply final full wet coat of varnish. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for obtaining final gloss finish to match existing. 6. If relative humidity is above 50 percent, Contractor shall use retarder thinner to prevent wet film blushing. E. Keep area well ventilated. Wear appropriate vapor/particulate respirator approved by NIOSH/MSHA. Follow respirator manufacturer’s directions for respirator use.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF NEW WOOD VENEER A. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate new veneer panels to match size, wood species, cut and installation of original veneer being replaced. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Sand and prepare substrate to provide a smooth and clean surface that is free of dirt, dust, moisture, oil, grease, or other impurities that would interfere with adhesion. 2. Ensure substrates are uniform in thickness and free of defects. 3. Allow veneer to "acclimatize" with the substrate in the same environment for about 48 hours. 4. Finish the veneer when the humidity is less than 51 percent to avoid sealing in too much moisture as it may shrink when placed in a climate-controlled environment. C. Installation: 1. Install new wood veneer in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. 2. Use and apply adhesive on substrate. 3. Use a pinch roller for pressing veneer on the substrate. 4. To avoid bubbling when hand pressing veneer on the boards, start in the middle of the board and work to the outer edges. 5. Remove excess adhesive 6. Air bubbles must be removed and installation errors corrected before the adhesive dries. 7. Allow adhesive to dry 24 hours before applying any finish if required.

3.08 REINSTALLATION OF ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS A. Reinstall salvage elements in their original location unless otherwise indicated. B. Reinstall elements plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8' 0" for plumb and level; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surface, 1/8" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. 214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 9 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

3.09 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion, remove all tools, equipment and unnecessary materials from site. Remove and dispose masking materials following completion of Work. Return adjacent areas to clean conditions that existed prior to the start of Work. B. Dispose hazardous waste materials according to manufacturer’s instructions by legal means. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 06 01 40 - 10 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 03 24 2017

SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for rough carpentry, and incidental carpentry for support or attachment of other work. B. Fire retardant treated wood materials.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association. D. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; National Institute of Standards and Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology, Department of Commerce.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Required for treated wood products in contact with any material other than similarly treated wood. Certify treated wood is compatible with all contact surfaces and substrates including but not limited to alloy coated steel, aluminum, stainless steel and painted metals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMBER A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Any PS 2 type, rated Single Floor. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Span Rating: 48.

214002.4 / CAMS 06 10 00 - 1 Rough Carpentry OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

3. Performance Category: 1-1/8 PERF CAT. B. Wall Sheathing: Any PS 2 type. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Grade: Structural I Sheathing. 3. Span Rating: 24. 4. Performance Category: 5/16 PERF CAT. 5. Edge Profile: Square edge. C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. B. Isolation Membrane: Self-adhering non-asphalt based, breathable, water-proof membrane; WR Grace Perm-A-Barrier VPS

2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 for lumber, AWPA C9 for plywood, and AWPA C28 for Glue-Laminated Timbers. Treatment containing neither arsenic nor arsenate, non-toxic when cured and free of chemical compounds not acceptable in the Work. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, and otherwise adversely affect finished appearance. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 1. Subject to compliance with Project requirements provide one of the following treatments. a. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ). b. Copper bis (dimethyldithiocarbamate) (CDDC). c. Ammoniacal copper citrate (CC). d. Copper azole, Type A (CBA-A). e. Zinc or Sodium Borate (DOT). C. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated.

214002.4 / CAMS 06 10 00 - 2 Rough Carpentry OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Comply with American Forest Products Association Manual for Wood House Frame Construction, and prescriptive requirement of Code. 1. Wood Products With Chemical Treatment: Material not certified by the manufacturer as compatible with contact surfaces and substrates shall be separated from contact with other materials by contiguous layer of the specified isolation membrane applied to all contact surfaces. B. Install to required levels and lines, plumb and true, with minimum joints. Cut, fit, scribe and cope Work for tight joints and accurate fit. Correlate location of supports for attachment of other work. Install horizontal members with crown side up.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples. C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.

3.03 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 06 10 00 - 3 Rough Carpentry OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for custom fabrications of casework and architectural woodwork exposed to view in the finished building that is predominantly manufactured and finished off site.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to delivery of materials meet with Architect, fabricator and installer of architectural woodwork, and trades whose Work may effect conditions required for installation. Review coordination and environmental controls required for proper installation and ambient conditioning in areas to receive work. Proceed with Work only when everyone concerned agrees that required ambient conditions can be maintained.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit as required for each manufactured product, material, accessory, and finish to be incorporated into the Work. B. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations and large scale details; locate casework and woodwork, hardware and accessories. Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories; coordination of casework for integration of electrical and plumbing work. 1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS). C. Samples: 1. Wood Products: For each species, cut, profile, and finish for both solid stock and veneer; provide not less than four samples; provide additional samples to demonstrate complete range of color and grain variation expected in Work, and match to existing where required. Two feet by board, or molding, width; One foot by panel width 2. Composite Materials: Plastic laminate, solid surface and other resin fabrications provide nominal 6 by 8 inch samples in color, pattern, finish and thickness required for each. 3. Hardware: Two pieces of each type and finish required for approval of function and appearance 4. Standing and Running Trim: Demonstrate profile and composite assembly required for the work. 5. Casework Fabrications: Demonstrate construction of base cabinet complete with door, drawer and countertop and internal adjustable shelf unit as required for final work.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication and installation of the products specified in this section with minimum ten years successful experience with projects of similar scope and complexity including without limitation appearance match to existing work.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature and Humidity For Installation: As required by referenced quality standards, and fabricator to maintain moisture content of installed Work within 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content, maintain conditions until final acceptance. B. Field Measurements: Taken prior to fabrication of woodwork to be fitted to other construction, verify dimensions on shop drawings

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Hardwood Veneer and Lumber: Comply with AWI Grade AA and Grade I solid stock closely matching veneer material; provide appearance match to similar existing where required.

214002 / CAMS 06 41 00 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

1. WD-1: Not used Black Walnut, Juglands nigra; closed grain heart center and vertical grain appearance, free of checking. a. Veneer: Plain sliced, Book Matched, balance flitches where required; resawn veneer shall be 0.125 inch thick. b. Solid Stock: Cut for appearance match to veneer material. 2. WD-2: White Oak (Quercus alba) for approved appearance match to similar material original to the 1938 building; Rift cut veneer, sequence as directed for appearance match to original work; cut solid stock for optimum appearance match to veneer. a. WD-3: Not used As required for WD-2 except appearance to match 1977 material. B. Particleboard: ANSI A 208.1 Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard, 0.75 inch thick,45 pound density formaldehyde free Medite II by SierraPine or Skyblend by Roseburg Forest Products, and Medex by Sierra Pine where waterproof substrate is required. Provide thicker substrate panels or stiffer Grade for shelving where necessary to comply with load and deflection requirements. 1. Provide 45 pound density M2 grade panels except shelves shall be M3 Grade. C. Tempered Hardboard: ANSI A 135.4 inter-felted lignocellulosic fibers consolidated under heat and pressure; Surface 2 Sides, nominal thickness of 0.25 inch unless otherwise indicated. D. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) LD 3, General Purpose HGS laminate on horizontal surfaces, VGS laminate on vertical surfaces, and VGL laminate on semi-exposed surface. 1. PL-1: Wilsonart 4877-38 Grey Mesh. 2. PL-2: Wilsonart 4878-38 Pewter Mesh. 3. PL-3: Not used Formica 299-58 Ebony Oxide 4. Bonding Adhesive: Urea-formaldehyde free, water resistant and suitable for the type of laminate and substrate being bonded E. Composite Resin Panel Indicated as Solid Surface SS-1: Resin and quartz aggregate materials in proprietary fabrication process; Pental Quartz is the basis of design; Ceasarstone, Silestone, or approved 0.75 inch thickness. 1. SS-1:Not used Pental Belgium Blue, polished BQ2102P. F. Ballistic Protection Panels: UL 752 Level 1, 02.5 inch thickness; ArmorCore by Waco Composites. G. Glass for Casework: Qualify as safety glazing when evaluated per ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. Provide laminated or heat treated glazing as necessary for the specified glazing to comply; field applied film is not acceptable 1. Glazed Cabinet Doors: High purity, anti-reflective coated glass; AMIRAN by Schott North America or approved H. Cabinet Hardware: Comply with ANSI-BHMA A156.9. Provide cabinet hardware and accessories as required. 1. Finishes: Provide uniform appearance in the metal finish for all hardware components. a. 626 Satin polish chromium or nickel plated, on base metal. 2. Door and Drawer Pulls: Provide components with satin Nickel finish. a. Tab Pull: DP-1, Not used 3 inch length and 1.5 inch projection; Mockett DP3A-AS, b. Wire Pull: DP-2 4 inch length with oval cross-section; Hafele 116.11.635. 3. Shelf Supports for Adjustable Shelves in Cabinet Case: Knape & Vogt 255 - 256 steel painted to match case liner. Install flush to case interior per AWI Section 400A-S-9, Recessed Standards. 4. Wall Mounted Shelf Standards and Brackets: Steel Knape & Vogt 87 - 187, epoxy painted; provide paired standards at 6 feet o.c. to permit independent height adjustment of separate shelves. 5. Decorative Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets for Glass Shelves: Doug Mockett and Co. Model SH14 universal thickness Bracket, and Model B SHTRM Standards. 6. Butt Hinges: Small barrel, Grade 1 duty hinge for overlay cabinet construction as indicated, fixed pin. Provide one pair for doors up to 48 inches high, one-and-one-half pair for doors over 48 inches; Hafele Aximat as necessary for door thickness. 7. Casework Door Catches: Magnetic type; Ives 325, 12 lb. pull. 8. Drawer Slides: Full extension, ball bearing type with 100 pound capacity drawers up to 32 inches wide; 150 pound capacity drawers over 32 inches wide; Accuride.

214002 / CAMS 06 41 00 - 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

9. Grommets: Durable plastic or other acceptable material to line and close penetrations in countertops and cases. Sizes and configurations indicated and as necessary for service. a. Closing Covers: Separate from liner, removable with liner remaining in place in the countertop. b. Cable Grommets: Mockett Small Square Grommet; MAX2/A-94, satin aluminum 10. Door Lock: Spring bolt with lipped strike; provide extra long throw as necessary for case dimensions; Olympus 931 Series with Medeco Keyway complying with Section 08 71 00 requirements; non-captive function required. Provide specific model type necessary for the casework configuration and application required. 11. Worksurface Supports: 300 pounds load rating per pair, Hafele Hebgo bracket 287.44 series coordinate with worksurface. 1000 pounds load rating per pair, Hafele Hebgo bracket 287.45 series coordinate with worksurface. Provide one support for every 3 lineal feet of surface unless otherwise indicated. Provide custom support fabrications where required. I. Mounting Hardware for Panels: Concealed clips for demountable installation; 2.5 inch pairs of interlocking metal Zee clips. Provide quantity recommended by clip manufacturer for panel sizes and configurations required, but not less than ten pairs for every 32 square feet of paneling.

2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items and work Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. B. Pre-Cut Openings: To accommodate hardware, appliances, equipment, service connections and similar components. Locate and size openings accurately. Use templates or roughing-in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and similar exposures seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating. C. Standing and Running Trim and Rails Standing and Running Trim and Rails: AWS Quality Standards Sections 6 and 7, Premium Grade. Fabrications of specified provide hardwood veneer and solid stock materials unless otherwise indicated. 1. Picture Rail: As indicated on A637 for PR-1 and PR-3 provide solid stock fabrication in profile indicated. D. Plastic Laminate Casework Cabinets: Comply with AWS Section 10, flush overlay construction, Custom grade laminate clad and Premium Grade solid stock and veneer fabrications and as otherwise required for door backs and edges. 1. Cabinet Shelves: Particle board or other acceptable panel product with thickness conforming to AWI Section 400-G-8, and provide shelf panel to limit deflection to 0.25 inch or less for a uniform load of 46 pounds per lineal foot. Spans greater than 42 inches are not acceptable 2. Balance Backing: Straight-grained hardwood of the same thickness and grain orientation as the face veneer; thickness and species characteristics well suited to use as a backing veneer with the face veneer required. 3. Hinges: Provide 5-knuckle type except where indicated as continuous. 4. Dado Case for recessed installation of shelf standards where adjustable shelves are required inside cabinet. 5. Separation between adjacent cabinet doors shall be uniform dimension not exceeding 0.125 inch. Coordinate door and case fabrication, hinge prep and installation to ensure compliance with this requirement. Uneven work and work with excessive gaps will be rejected. 6. Cabinet Bases: Wood, scribe to fit variations in finish floor. E. Wood Cabinets: AWI Section 10, flush overlay construction Premium Grade fabrications of specified hardwood veneer and solid stock materials. 1. Balance Backing: straight-grained hardwood of the same thickness and grain orientation as the face veneer; use a species having characteristics that make it well suited to use as a backing veneer with specific face veneer required. 2. Hinges: Provide specified concealed components.

214002 / CAMS 06 41 00 - 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

F. Cabinet Tops: AWS Section 11, Premium Grade fabrication 1. Substrate Product: Specified particle board products; provide waterproof substrate at the following locations: a. Sinks and 2 feet each-side of sink openings b. Recycling centers c. Other fabrications where conditions or service require incidental exposure to water. 2. Provide hardwood and plastic laminate clad as indicated. a. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: HGL with plastic laminate self-edge or vinyl edging as indicated. Provide water-proof seal at cut edges of particleboard and required trim

2.03 SHOP FINISHING A. Provide finish system to match appearance of similar existing work as demonstrated by approved samples. The following may represent a satisfactory appearance match provide samples for approval and revise finish system and process as necessary to provide acceptable finish match to existing. 1. Condition material per recommendations of finish system manufacturer. Prepare surface by sanding with not less than three progressively finer grits ending with 180 grit, remove shipping and handling marks. Prior to starting finishing work and before beginning application of each step ensure substrate is clean and free of contaminants that may adversely effect finish. 2. Stain Coat: Apply two coats using approved application process; custom color for required appearance match; wipe clean with lint free cloth per manufacturer's instruction to produce the required appearance. 3. Compatible Seal Coat: Apply per all steps as follows: a. First seal coat: 1) Spray apply 1 medium-wet coat of a 2 component urethane low-solids. The seal coat should measure 3 to 4 wet mills thick. The product is Rodda's "Artistry 2K Exterior Urethane". There may be other Mfg. sources of this type of product. This is a self- sealing product. Allow this coat to dry minimum 2 hrs. at 70 degrees F. 2) Lightly scuff sand the entire surface with #320 grit A wt. sterated sand paper. Exercise care not to cut thru to color coat. When finished sanding blow off sealer dust and then tack rag. Make sure air compressor is producing dry air. b. Second seal coat: 3) Spray apply 1 medium-wet coat of 2KU sealer at 4 to 5 wet mills thick. Allow to air dry 12 hrs. at 70 degrees F. 4) Sand wit #220 grit A wt. sterated sand paper. When finished blow off and tack rag in preparation for topcoat. c. First topcoat: 5) Spray apply 1 medium-wet coat of 2KU topcoat at 4 to 5 wet mills (same product as above). Allow 30 mins. dry time at 70 degrees F. 6) Light scuff sand with 3m superfine sponge pad. After this very lightly tack rag all before final coat. Careful not to put too much pressure on the rag. d. Second topcoat: 7) Spray apply 1 medium-wet coat of 2KU topcoat at 4 to 5 wet mills thick. Allow product to dry overnight at 70 degrees F before wrapping and shipping. 4. Clear Coat: Provide two applications, gloss not to exceed 25-30 units at 60 degrees, scuff with 3M super fine sponge or approved and clean with tack cloth. Apply final coat as required and cure 12 hours.

B. Opaque Finish: Two finish coats, over prime coat comply with manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation and application and conditioning and drying environment. 1. Prime Coat: Sherwin Williams PrepRite ProBlock B51 series 2. Finish Coats: Sherwin Williams ProIndustrial Acrylic semigloss B66-650 Series 3. Color: Match P-3 in Section 09 90 00.

214002 / CAMS 06 41 00 - 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify required backing exists for support and attachment of casework fabrications. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work including variations in finish floors, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. Coordinate woodwork with electrical and plumbing work. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 06 41 00 - 5 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes joint sealants, fillers, compressible seals, and accessories necessary, and required for sealing joints, and reveals as indicated, and required, and not specified in work of other Sections. B. Definitions for terms used in this Section: ASTM C 717. 1. Compatible: Materials, and surfaces that are not detrimental to performance of sealed joint; non-staining to substrate and sealer as determined by ASTM D 2203. 2. Modulus of Elasticity: ASTM D 412 Tensile strength in pounds per square inch at 100 percent elongation tested at 77 degrees F, and 50 percent relative humidity after 14 days cure. a. Low: 45 psi or less. b. Medium: Not less than 45 psi nor more than 75 psi. 3. Hardness: ASTM D 2240 Shore A.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Conference: Coordinate work of this Section with all other aspects of exterior envelope construction including but not limited to proactive coordination of work sequence, provisions to prevent delay due to seasonal weather conditions that may impact work, and requirements to optimize joint geometry. Have results of the following available for review. 1. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers. 2. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. B. Sequence sealant installation to prevent conflict with other construction operations that could alter joint substrates, and reduce performance characteristics of installed sealant.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Required for each material, manufactured product, and accessory incorporated into the Work; manufacturer's recommendations for sealant installation for materials and configuration indicated. 1. Each sealant product data submittal shall identify each joint assembly the sealant will be used in with a reference to the specification Section where the constituent products or materials are specified. B. Samples: Each type and color of joint sealer required, in 0.5 inch wide joints formed between two six inch strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers in the work. C. Test Reports: Certified, current product formulation, demonstrate compliance with requirements for proposed installation, movement capacity, and compatibility with substrate and adjacent components. D. Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements, are compatible with substrates, and joint configurations indicated, and are suitable for the anticipated service environment.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Three years successful experience with sealers, and assembly types required for this project. Assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project, one of whom shall serve as lead mechanic, and be on site at all times work is in progress.

214002 / CAMS 07 92 00 - 1 JOINT SEALERS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1. Provide certification of installer's status in the Sealant Waterproofing and Restoration Institute's Contractor Validation program or documentation for five similar projects in-service for two to five years and representative of similar work scope to the required. B. Manufacturer's Field Quality Control Agent: Possess expert knowledge of the products being installed including preparation, application and field testing requirements. Shall have authority to certify compliance of the Work with Project Warranty provisions. Shall be responsible for knowing the specifics of this installation and available to perform the required field testing and inspections. C. Pre-Installation Field Samples: Tested with Architect and technical representative of sealer manufacturer present, prior to final approval of sealer for use on Project. Evaluate cured sealer performance, joint preparation, configuration, cohesion, adhesion, and flexibility using ASTM C 1193 as a guide. Locate test joints as directed. Perform tests for each of the following general categories of joints. 1. Exterior joints forming part of the weather resistive enclosure of the building for each type of bonding surface, joint geometry and profile for movement classes as defined herein.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Due to the potential variety of combinations between construction materials, sealant types, and sealant formulations, the final selection of which may be made by the Contractor; responsibility for ensuring sealant compatibility with Project conditions, not limited to bond surfaces, shall be the Contractor's.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: ASTM C 1193 and ASTM C 1472; joint configuration recommended by manufacturer for optimum sealant performance for required application. 1. Sealant Joints to be Painted: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM C 1299, coordinate with Section 09 90 00 and ensure compatibility of paint and sealant. 2. Sealant Backing: Closed cell material at all sealants having weather exposure; open cell for seals without weather exposure as necessary for B. Performance Requirements: Sealer joints that are a continuous barrier to intrusion by water, air, sound, and foreign matter able to accommodate extension and contraction at moving joints, as required such that the integrity of each sealer joint is maintained under all in-service conditions. 1. Exposed Sealants: Resistant to deterioration due to weathering, and exposure to ultra violet radiation; resistant to abrasion where traffic may occur. 2. Provide sealant products and accessories for successful application to Project substrates in the configurations required and the installation conditions encountered in the Work. Products shall be compatible with bonding substrates and adjacent materials and suitable for the service conditions encountered.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Products, and Accessories: Compatible with one another, and with joint substrates under conditions of application, and service indicated, as demonstrated by field testing, and experience. 1. Sealer Color: Exposed; selected by Architect from manufacturer's complete range of standard colors, concealed; natural color having optimal performance characteristics for product. B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing, of base polymer indicated. 1. Grade and Hardness: Recommended by manufacturer for optimal performance in application indicated; self-leveling for joints in traffic surfaces, otherwise nonsag. a. Self Leveling: Hardness 55; modulus not greater than 150 psi. b. Nonsag: Hardness 20 to 30; modulus not greater than 75 psi. 2. Modulus of Elasticity: Unless otherwise required, lowest available consistent with joint configuration, and conditions of service, including movement. 3. Type: Single component products; Type S, multicomponent products; Type M.

214002 / CAMS 07 92 00 - 2 JOINT SEALERS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Silicone Sealant: Non-Acid-Cure; Class 25. Provide single and two-component products of a one manufacturer for general use on exterior moving joints exposed to ultra violet radiation. Provide manufacturer's optimum product for each type of application, joint geometry, and bond surface required. 1. Silicone Glazing: Type S, neutral cure; Specifically for glazing, Dow 795 Color and 799 Clear, Tremco, Sonneborn, or approved. 2. One-Part With Fungicide: For interior joints with nonporous substrates, ceramic tile, showers, sinks and plumbing fixtures. 3. Narrow Joint Sealant: Dow Corning 1299 Silicone Seam Sealer. D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: ASTM C 834, Single component; Class 12-1/2, mildew resistant, paintable, for exposed interior applications; Tremco Acrylic Latex Caulk. E. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Synthetic rubber sealant for interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. F. Butyl-Polyisobutylene Tape Sealant: AAMA 804.1; Solvent-free, 100 percent solids, and paintable; Tremco 440 Tape.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant Backing: Comply with ASTM C 717; preformed, resilient, plastic foam joint-filler strips, SOF-T Rod® by NOMACO Inc. Shall control sealant depth, aid in establishing optimum joint configuration, and provide isolation from components that may adversely affect sealant performance. B. Elastomeric Tubing Joint-Fillers: ASTM D 1056; Neoprene, butyl or EPDM non-absorbent to water and gas, resilient down to -26 degrees F, with low compression set; size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene or other plastic recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant, joint filler, and other materials; self-adhesive tape where necessary D. Primer: Recommended by joint sealer manufacturer for optimum sealant performance, and as determined from preconstruction tests. E. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Compatible with joint materials and substrates, and acceptable to manufacturer of sealer, and accessories. F. Masking Tape: Provide non-staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Elastomeric Sealant Tests: Aged performance under cyclic movement, for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion low-temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging, and accelerated weathering; Conducted within 24 months of date of submission to Architect. 1. Submit to manufacturer of joint sealer products substrate materials of actual joint surfaces to be sealed for laboratory testing of sealants for adhesion to primed and unprimed substrates and for compatibility with secondary seals. 2. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealers to joint substrates under environmental conditions that will exist during actual installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions under which work is to be performed for compliance with requirements. Provide written report listing conditions that may be detrimental to performance of installed work. Proceed with work only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

214002 / CAMS 07 92 00 - 3 JOINT SEALERS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1. Confirm required joint configuration, including backing, bond break and isolation from incompatible materials (where necessary) can be accommodated within the actual joint configurations encountered. 2. Preformed Seals: Field verify actual joint profile conforms to manufacturer's requirements for the seal products specified and that work sequence has been coordinated for proper installation of preformed seals adhered to abutting bonding substrates.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Immediately before installation of joint sealer; remove contaminants that could impair sealer performance, including paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer. Use mechanical and chemical methods as recommended by sealer manufacturer, and as necessary to meet requirements. B. Prime joint substrates where necessary, and where recommended by sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction tests, and prior experience; comply with sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Protection: Prevent deterioration of adjacent materials due to sealer installation work, cover surfaces with tape or other approved means of protection recommended by sealer manufacturer. Remove protection immediately after tooling, do not disturb joint seal. D. Coordinate with work of other Sections affecting joint substrate conditions, geometry and all other conditions of installation for work of this Section to ensure compliance with System Description requirements; without limitation give particular attention to the following conditions. 1. Joints In and Abutting: Precast concrete specialties and curtain wall assemblies.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Installation Standard: ASTM C 1193 as applicable to materials, sealant type and joint conditions required. C. Sealant Backing: As indicated, and necessary to support sealers, and produce configurations which allow optimum sealant performance; continuous installation with no gaps, punctures nor variation in profile; remove absorbent joint-fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 1. Bond Breaker: Install to prevent third-side adhesion of sealant at back of joint. 2. Sealant backings: Closed-cell, nonabsorbent at primary and secondary weather seals. 3. Compressible seals serving as sealant backings: Comply with requirements for joint fillers. D. Sealants: Provide direct contact and full wetting of substrates, properly fill joint recesses, provide uniform, cross-section, and depth relative to width and optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Moving, Non-Traffic Elastomeric Sealant Joints: Depth 50 percent of joint width; not more than 0.5 inch, nor less than 0.25 inch deep. 2. Non-Elastomeric Sealant and Caulk Joints: Depth of 75 to 125 percent of joint width. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Approved by sealant manufacturer; form smooth, uniform bead of configuration indicated, prior to skinning cure, eliminate air pockets, ensure contact, and proper sealant adhesion. Remove excess sealant. Do not discolor sealants, nor adjacent surfaces. 1. Tooled Joint Configurations: Profile indicated and conforming to ASTM C 1193, Figure 8; where no profile is indicated provide concave profile. F. Acoustic Seals: Conform to ASTM C 919 methodology for acoustic sealing to achieve an STC of 50 or better. 1. Provide a 0.5 inch wide annular gap and continuous seal between gypsum panels and penetrations include electrical boxes. 2. Provide paintable sealant for joints that will remain exposed to view in completed work. G. Curing: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations to obtain high early adhesive and cohesive strength, surface durability, and optimum sealer performance. Do not cure in a manner that could alter materials performance characteristics. Provide special controls and procedures as necessary to ensure proper cure.

214002 / CAMS 07 92 00 - 4 JOINT SEALERS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion, other than normal weathering. Cut out and replace damaged, and deteriorated joint sealers to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. B. Remove excess sealant, and spills as work progresses; use methods and materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers, and acceptable to Architect. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 07 92 00 - 5 JOINT SEALERS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 01 14 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section . 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rehabilitation of existing wood doors and frames including cleaning, repair and limited or full refinishing. Full refinishing includes complete removal of existing finishes and coatings and re- finishing to match existing finish in sound condition. B. Work Includes: 1. Repair of wood surfaces as specified in Section 06 01 40 - Repair and Restoration of Architectural Woodwork. 2. Repair of damaged astragals to match existing profile and wood species. 3. Removal of selected wood doors and frames. 4. Re-installation of selected wood doors and frames. 5. Restoration of existing hardware.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures. B. Section 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition, Salvage, and Protection. C. Section 06 01 40 - Repair and Restoration of Architectural Woodwork. D. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: New door hardware.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Dutchman: Wood patch or filler that replaces a damaged or missing area of any wood object. The procedure involves removing a symmetrical squared area around the defect and replacing it with new wood. It is best to use wood of the same species, grain pattern and color as the original.

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. WIC Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of “Manual of Millwork” published by Woodwork Institute of California (WIC).

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Work Description: Submit written program for each phase of repair and restoration of wood doors, including protection of surrounding materials and site during operations. Describe in detail materials, methods and equipment to be used for each phase. 1. Include in Historic Treatment Plan required in Section 01 35 91. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Recommendations for application and use. 2. Instructions for storage and handling. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and test data, Material Safety Data Sheets, and certifications sustaining that products comply with requirements. 214002.4 / CAMS 08 01 14 - 1 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF WOOD DOORS 03 24 2017

4. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Work of this Section shall be performed by a firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in comparable repair and restoration of wood doors projects. Firm shall have expertise in all the Work of this Section. Firm shall employ personnel and supervisors skilled in the rehabilitation and restoration processes and operations indicated. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 to 7 projects completed in last 5 years by Contractor that illustrate the firm's expertise in all of the Work of this Section. B. Qualifications of Project Manager or Foreman Supervising Work, and Skilled Workmen: Project Manager and Job Foreman shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Skilled workmen each shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 to 7 projects completed by Project Manager or Foreman that illustrate their expertise in all of the Work of this Section and a list of 5 projects completed by each of the skilled workmen. C. Contractor, project manager or foreman supervising work, and skilled workmen selected and approved for Work of this Section shall complete all Work of this Section, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Any requests for changes in management and skilled personnel shall be submitted to Architect in writing with the required documentation outlined above. 2. Architect shall review management and skilled personnel changes with reasonable promptness. Personnel changes shall not be made until Architect has approved the change. D. Perform work in accordance with American Woodwork Institute (AWI) quality. E. Comply with EPA and local regulatory agency regulations regarding use of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC).

1.08 MOCK-UP A. Before full-scale operation, prepare mock-ups for each of the following treatment on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Specific locations and test panels to be designated by Architect. Field sample to be of sufficient size to demonstrate relevant methods, procedures, dwell times and quality of work expected in the finish product. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of visual qualities before proceeding with the Work. Repeat mock-ups and test panels as necessary, adjusting methods and procedures, until acceptance by Architect is achieved. Retain acceptable panels in undisturbed condition, suitably marked, during restoration as a standard for judging completed work. Upon Architect's approval, acceptable panels may remain as part of the finished work. The samples of each type of restoration work shall be done in an area that will be exposed to the same weathering conditions as final location. Allow samples to cure at least three days before requesting review of color, texture and detailing match. Samples shall be viewed from an approved distance. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of mock-ups and test panels preparation. 1. Completely rehabilitate one prototype door and frame for review in the following sequence: a. Strip door and frame of existing coatings and apply new stain to wood to match historic. Architect to review. b. Apply clear coating. Architect to review.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 01 14 - 2 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF WOOD DOORS 03 24 2017

c. Subsequent work in the sequence may not start until Architect has reviewed and approved the previous treatment. Repeat treatments until approved by Architect, before beginning the next treatment in the sequence. 2. Provide one cleaned and reconditioned sample of each type of hardware. 3. Cleaning and Repair: Demonstrate specified materials and methods to be used for cleaning, repair and refinishing each type of existing wood door and frame surface and condition on sample panels approximately 12 by 12 inches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CLEANING, REPAIR AND REFINISHING MATERIALS A. Specified in Section 06 01 40 - Repair and Restoration of Architectural Woodwork.

2.02 HARDWARE A. New replacement hardware is specified in Section 08 71 00. 1. Where Required: As Scheduled. B. General: Where required, new hardware to match existing original hardware on doors and frames. Provide all units of hardware as on existing doors and frames. Include fasteners and accessories. Each unit of hardware shall match existing original hardware in function, configuration, dimensions, metal alloy, and surface color, texture, and finish.

2.03 GLAZING A. Glass is specified in Section 08 80 00. B. Where Required: As scheduled. C. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C1193-13; silicone glazing sealant. 1. Use primer to ensure adhesion unless specifically recommended otherwise by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for repair and restoration of wood doors. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the Work until such conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor shall make thorough inspection to determine extent of wood to be repaired.

3.02 REMOVAL A. Remove, dismantle and store doors that are scheduled for shop repair and restoration, as scheduled and in accordance with requirements of Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures. B. Remove non-functional hardware requiring repair or replacement. C. Store doors in a clean, secure location with temperature between 65 and 75 degrees F and relative humidity below 60%.

3.03 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Install protection as specified in Section 01 35 91.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 01 14 - 3 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF WOOD DOORS 03 24 2017

2. Provide protection during application of chemicals as specified in Section 01 35 91. 3. Coverings must be adhered without adhesive tape or nails. Impervious sheeting that produces condensation shall not be used. B. Remove and label all hardware prior to refinishing of doors.

3.04 TREATMENT PROCEDURES A. Except where noted below, perform all treatment of wood doors and frames as specified in Part 3 of Section 06 01 40 - Repair and Restoration of Architectural Woodwork. B. Locations and extent of specific repairs are shown on Drawings and door schedule. C. General: Have treatment of wood doors directed and performed by a qualified historic treatment specialist. Ensure that historic treatment specialist's field supervisors are present when treatment work begins and during its progress. D. Glazing: Remove damaged glazing and putty. Install new glazing to match original or as scheduled. Install as specified in Section 08 80 00. E. Hardware 1. Remove and label all hardware prior to refinishing of doors. 2. Remove all residue using a non-alkaline, water-rinsable thixotropic paint and varnish remover. 3. Replace existing springs in door hardware with new springs. 4. Restore all hardware as required to a fully functional condition. Inspect all parts, straighten all bent pieces. Quality and workmanship shall match approved sample. a. Where modifications to original trim are required to interface with modern lock sets or other apparatus, such changes must not destroy or cause distortions that would interfere with the artistic quality of the original pieces. 5. Refinish hardware unless otherwise directed. All hardware to be a consistent color. 6. Install new retrofit lever handles on door hardware as scheduled and as specified in Section 08 70 00. 7. At locations indicated in hardware schedule, install electric strikes, card readers, push buttons, automatic door openers and closers. a. Install new hardware in accordance with approved shop drawings. 8. Reinstall all hardware back to its original location unless otherwise indicated in schedule. F. Where non-functional hardware is removed and new or repaired hardware will not be installed at same location, patch openings and repair metal surface to match.

3.05 REINSTALLATION A. Reinstall doors in their original locations unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Doors and hardware shall operate smoothly, quietly and free from binding; and doors shall remain plumb and level in all positions of operation. C. Install rehabilitated hardware and new hardware as scheduled. 1. Locate hardware in accordance with manufacturer's standards, unless otherwise specified. 2. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. D. Unused salvaged original hardware shall be delivered to Owner.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 01 14 - 4 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF WOOD DOORS 03 24 2017

3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion, remove all tools, equipment and unnecessary materials from site. Remove and dispose masking materials following completion of Work. Return adjacent areas to clean conditions that existed prior to the start of Work. B. Dispose hazardous waste materials according to manufacturer’s instructions by legal means. C. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and weatherstripping on each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. D. Lubricate moving parts with machine oil. Replace elements that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly for the application made. E. Clean hardware. F. Clean glass. G. Initiate and maintain all protection and other precautions required to ensure that door units will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 08 01 14 - 5 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF WOOD DOORS 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 11 13 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for steel doors and hollow metal frames for doors and other openings as scheduled and indicated.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 14 16 Wood Doors B. Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware. C. Section 08 80 00 Glazing.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Coordinate with work of section 08 71 00 for finish hardware and other trades as necessary to effectively coordinate work of this Section. B. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. C. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. 1. Schedules: Use reference numbers shown on contract documents, coordinate glazing frames and stops, and glazing requirements. Coordinate with work of Section 08 14 16, 08 71 00 and 08 80 00. C. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2 x 2 inches in size showing factory finishes, colors, and surface texture.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect doors and frames from damage during shipping and storage; ship and store in carton or crate, protect factory applied finishes, keep dry, and prevent corrosion. Inspect work for damage upon delivery, replace, or repair damaged material as acceptable to Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Hollow metal door and frame assemblies, frames for glazed assemblies and other openings of the size and configuration required and incorporating components complying with Steel Door Institute or Hollow Metal Manufacturer’s Association standards and performance requirements. 1. Barrier Free Access: Comply with ANSI A117.1 requirements for barrier free facilities.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Member of Steel Door Institute or National Asso. of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, and have five years successful experience with products required for the Project

2.03 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011 Commercial Steel Type B B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 Commercial Steel Type B C. Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel Type B A40 coating

214002 / CAMS 08 11 13 - 1 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 879 Commercial Steel Class B, mill phosphatized E. Hardware, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. 1. Items Built Into Exterior Walls: ASTM A 153, Class C and D. 2. Supports and Anchors: 18 gage galvanized sheet steel. 3. Exposed Fasteners: Countersunk, flat, Phillips head unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 FABRICATION A. Doors and Frames: Types, and sizes required; rigid, neat in appearance, free from defects, warp, and buckle; fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant to fullest extent possible, identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, for proper assembly at Project. Comply with SDI-100 and the following 1. Interior Seamless Steel Doors: Level 2, Model 2. 2. Stile and Rail Doors: Level 3, Model 3 3. Exposed Door Panels, Stiles and Rails: Cold-rolled steel; other components may be cold or hot-rolled at manufacturer's option. a. Close door top and bottom with intermittently welded channels; grind and dress welds smooth and continuously fill joint and finish flush for seamless appearance. 4. Provide square door edge unless otherwise indicated B. Frames: Full profile welded, knock-down frames are not acceptable. Provide type, profile and configuration indicated with three silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames, two on heads of double-swing frames; not required on weather-stripped frames. Comply with ANSI 250.8 and the following 1. Interior Steel Frames: Level 3, cold rolled steel; except Level 4 at Security openings.. 2. Exterior Steel Doors: Level 4. C. Insulated Assemblies: ASTM C 236, and SDI 113; exterior openings, and in locations scheduled; 0.24 U factor D. Complete preparation of doors and frames in shop for mortised and concealed hardware, reinforce as necessary for each type of hardware required; comply with ANSI A250.6, door and hardware schedules, templates, approved shop drawings, and DHI Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware. 1. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at Project. E. Glaze doors and frames in shop or field, comply with requirements of Section 08 80 00.

2.05 FINISH MATERIALS A. Galvanize doors, and frames to be installed to be installed in masonry or concrete openings and all exterior assemblies. Provide ASTM A 924 hot-dipped, G90 galvanized coated or ASTM A 653 A60 galvannealed zinc-iron alloy coating for material type and size required B. Paint System: Uniform gloss, texture, and thickness; clean, treat, and prime doors and frames, including door bottoms and tops, and frame surfaces. Coordinate with Section 09 90 00 requirements to ensure compatibility among shop and field finish coatings. 1. Paint System: Electrostatically applied, and baked; rust inhibiting enamel primer.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fire-Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Tested and labeled by acceptable laboratory for compliance with the hourly rating required, and positive pressure and temperature rise limits where required 1. Fire-rated Assemblies: Configuration required including hardware, and glazing (if any), tested for compliance with UL 10B and 10C (GSZN), ASTM E 2074 and NFPA 252. a. Temperature Rise Rating: 450 degrees F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure for doors into exit enclosures, and other locations where required by Code. b. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: NFPA 105, UL 10C and UL 1784. 2. Frames for Glazed Openings: Tested per NFPA 257 and UL 9. Glazing performance and labeling shall comply with Section 08 80 00 requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

214002 / CAMS 08 11 13 - 2 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and sequence the Work for proper installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete embeds, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Doors, Frames, and Accessories: Except for deviations documented by approved submittals install work to comply with the following standards and the manufacturer’s recommendations for specific Project applications. 1. ANSI/DHI A115.IG, Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 2. ANSI A250.11, Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames 3. SDI I22 Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. HMMA 840, Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors And Frames. 5. NFPA 80. B. Frames: Place prior to construction of adjoining walls, except at concrete, and masonry construction; set accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and brace until permanent anchors are set. Provide three jamb anchors per jamb locate at hinge and strike levels, floor anchors may be powder-actuated, masonry anchors, or machine screws as indicated and as appropriate for the given assembly. 1. Fire-rated: NFPA Standard No. 80. 2. Secure to concrete and masonry with machine screws, and masonry anchors. 3. Secure to closed steel studs; attach studs to wall anchors with tapping screws 4. Coordinate with work of Section 08 14 16 for wood doors required in metal frames. C. Door Installation: Fit accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI-100, and NFPA Standard No. 80 except as otherwise necessary for required acoustic performance. D. Finish Hardware: Comply with requirements of Section 08 71 00 and referenced Standards. E. Field Priming and Finishing: Where galvannealed steel is provided field priming per Section 09 90 00 may be acceptable in lieu of shop priming. Finish paint hollow metal in the field per Section 09 90 00 requirements F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

3.04 ADJUSTING A. Repair and Replacement of Damaged Doors and Frames: Where the Architect determines that a door or frame has been too severely damaged to represent new goods and materials as required by the Contract it shall be replaced by new undamaged work; regardless of whether this damage adversely effects door operation. Remedial work such as filling of dents and grinding to correct excessive damage is not acceptable in lieu of replacement. B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. 1. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 08 11 13 - 3 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 11 16 ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes requirements for aluminum framing for interior fenestration, aluminum framed entrances and all glass entrance and storefront.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for each type of door; include information on fabrication methods. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations of each opening type. 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings. C. Verification Samples: Actual pieces of products in each finish specified, not less than 6 inches square or 6 inches long for linear components. For finishes subject to color variation, include not less than two samples illustrating extreme range to be anticipated.

1.03 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within five years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Components shall have the sections, profiles, glazing plane and general appearance indicated. B. Performance Requirements: Comply with OSSC criteria for interior partition loads but not less than 15 PSF and deflection, and as necessary to comply with Section 08 80 00 limitations on glass deflection and breakage.

2.02 MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: Provide sizes, configurations, and profiles indicated, and Scheduled with accurate relation of planes and angles, and hairline tight joints. Shop fabricate, and assemble work to greatest extent possible using manufacturer's standard methods; disassemble only as necessary to ship and install; protect finishes from damage and deterioration. 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), alloy 6063-T5 or alloy 6463-T5 2. Reinforce work for hardware mounting, and performance requirements. B. Aluminum Framed Office Front, Door, Sidelight, and Transom Frames: Extruded aluminum hollow or C-shaped sections; no steel components. Door Type and configuration indicated with secondary components, caps and extensions for the Scheduled openings Basis of design is Raco Solutions II Office Front. 1. Frame member profiles indicated for 0.25 to 0.5 inch thick glazing and to accommodate flush panel wood doors as required. Coordinate with work of Section 08 14 16 for wood doors.

214002 / CAMS 08 11 16 - 1 ALUMINUM FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. PVDF Finish: 60 percent resin content, non-metallic as selected by Architect from complete range of options.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Replaceable Weatherstripping: AAMA 701/702 wool pile. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other material warranted by manufacturer as non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum components. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's high-strength aluminum units where feasible, otherwise, non-magnetic stainless steel or steel hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A123/A123M.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces and openings are ready to receive frames and are within tolerances specified in manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Perform cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of frames as required for project conditions. B. Replace components with damage to exposed finishes. C. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic action between metals

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set frames plumb, square, level, and aligned to receive doors. Anchor frames to adjacent construction in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and within specified tolerances. C. Coordinate with Section 08 14 16 for installation of wood doors. D. Comply with glazing installation requirements of Section 08 80 00. E. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door and frame surfaces in accordance with AAMA 609 END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 08 11 16 - 2 ALUMINUM FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 14 16 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for wood doors and frames.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. B. NFPA 105 - Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. C. Specimen warranty. D. Test Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements for the following: 1. Sound-retardant doors and frames; sealed panel tests are not acceptable. E. Samples: Provide for each exposed species, cut, and finish, in sufficient number to demonstrate complete range of color and grain variation expected in Work but not less than three. 1. Solid Stock Samples: 1 foot length of member configured as required for the work including molding profiles. 2. Veneer and Panel Samples: Sufficient size to demonstrate required veneer sequence and typical flitch dimension but not less than 1 square foot. 3. Glazing Stops and Similar appurtenances: Two of each in the configuration proposed to be used in the work. F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years successful experience including but not limited to production of doors with custom wood components for species and custom door finishes similar to those required for the Work. 1. Demonstrate comparable experience with work in scope and complexity required for this Project including compliance with custom production requirements. 2. Manufacturer member of the Wood Door Institute. B. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

214002 / CAMS 08 14 16 - 1 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.06 WARRANTY A. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Provide custom components for wood species and Grade and finish as required for the Work.

1. Flush Doors: WDMA Industry Standard IS-1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors, AWS Section 9. 2. Stile and Rail Doors: WDMA Industry Standard I.S.6-A Architectural Stile and Rail Doors, AWS Section 9. 3. Wood Frames: AWS Section 6, Premium Grade, solid stock fabrications. B. Performance Requirements: Fire-rated door and frame assemblies UL listed and labeled for compliance with NFPA 80 in size and configuration required with specified hardware, and glazing.

1. Door and Frame Assemblies: Tested per NFPA 252, or UL10B & 10C as necessary for required assembly performance. Coordinate with Section 08 11 16 for wood doors and hollow metal frame assemblies. a. Temperature Rise Rating: 450 degrees F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure for doors into exit enclosures, and other locations where required by Code. b. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: NFPA 105, UL 10C and 1784. 2. Frames for Glazed Openings: Tested per NFPA 257 or UL 9. Glazing performance and labeling shall comply with Section 08 81 00 requirements. 3. Engineering Judgment: Provided by UL authorized source for required assemblies not identical to a tested assembly due to size, configuration or other factor as acceptable to regulatory authorities certifying performance equivalent to that of the tested assembly.

2.02 MANUFACTURER A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: Products of manufacturer member of Window and Door Manufacturers Association and complying with Project criteria for each of the door types required.

2.03 MATERIALS A. Wood Veneer and Solid Stock Components: Black Walnut, Juglands nigra; closed grain heart center and vertical grain appearance, free of checking; provide slicing and veneer sequencing to match appearance of similar existing work in the building and achieve a pleasing appearance match to work of Section 06 41 00. Hand select veneer and lumber for uniform appearance of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces and throughout the work as a whole. Coordinate with appearance of wood fabrications provided as work of Section 06 41 00 to provide a close visual match with work of this Section B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G60 galvanized, mill phosphatized.

214002 / CAMS 08 14 16 - 2 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Adhesive: Shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins, comply with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for laminate joints; waterproof for doors in wet use locations and exterior. D. Core: Staved Lumber.

2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Flush Panel Architectural Doors: Comply with AWS Section 9 requirements for Premium Grade work. Solid particle board core, except where mineral core with wood lock blocks is necessary for compliance with required fire resistance rating. 1. Cross Banding: Provide 0,125 inch thick engineered hardwood composite board, OSB and particle board are not acceptable. Wood veneer shall be a minimum of 0.125 thick and not telegraph through finish veneers. 2. Provide solid stock edges matching face veneers. 3. Exterior Doors: Water-repellent and preservative treated per WDMA I.S.4 with metal top flashing on out-swinging doors. B. Stile and Rail Doors: Comply with AWI Section 1400 requirements for Premium Grade veneer construction. Provide solid stock edges and stops. 1. Provide three-piece, face laminated solid stock construction. Edge laminating is not acceptable. 2. Provide Five-ply veneered construction on edge-laminated solid stock or structural composite lumber core. 3. Bottom Rail: Minimum height of 10 inches on swing doors to comply with barrier free access requirements C. Fire Doors: Algoma Superfire Door System, or approved. 1. Stile Edge Screw Withdrawal: ASTM D 1037, 750 pounds. 2. Stile Edge Split Resistance: ASTM D 143, 1200 pounds. 3. Through-Bolt Pull-out: 1200 pounds. 4. Pairs: Formed steel edges and astragals, veneer wrapped on B and C label doors, except as otherwise required. 5. Intumescent Seals for Positive Pressure Doors: Concealed with veneer matching exposed door face. D. Glaze doors in field or shop; comply with requirements of Section 08 81 00; provide glass types as scheduled and required by Code. 1. Glazing: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials, and permanently labeled as Safety Glazing. Provide assembly type and configuration indicated and other characteristics such as color, fire rating and custom features as required. 2. Glazing Stops and Beads: Shape and profile indicated, where not indicated provide 45 degree beveled top and projected fascia returned to door face, miter corners; solid wood except veneer wrapped 18 gage steel where necessary for assembly rating. a. Stops: Anchor on security side with concealed fasteners. b. Beads: Secured by exposed fasteners, snap-on not acceptable. 3. Shop finish stops and beads as required for doors. E. Prefit and premachine doors for hardware to comply with Contract requirements, and referenced woodworking standard. Comply with final hardware schedules, shop drawings, and hardware templates, see Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00. B. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.

214002 / CAMS 08 14 16 - 3 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Provide finish system to match appearance of similar existing work as demonstrated by approved samples. The following may represent a satisfactory appearance match provide samples for approval and revise finish system and process as necessary to provide acceptable finish match to existing. 1. Condition material per recommendations of finish system manufacturer. Prepare surface by sanding with not less than three progressively finer grits ending with 180 grit, remove shipping and handling marks. Prior to starting finishing work and before beginning application of each step ensure substrate is clean and free of contaminants that may adversely effect finish. 2. Stain Coat: Apply two coats using approved application process; custom color for required appearance match; wipe clean with lint free cloth per manufacturer's instruction to produce the required appearance. 3. Sanding Sealer: Provide two coatings. Spray applied only, 3 mils wet film and air dry for time period required at controlled temperature and humidity following application where stain has raised grain scuff sand with 180 grit or finer sandpaper to eliminate raised grain texture; use care not to impart uneven appearance in stain. Clean surface with tack cloth and blow with clean dry air. Apply second coat using required procedure and allow to dry 12 hours, sand and clean as required. 4. Clear Coat: Provide two applications, gloss not to exceed 25-30 units at 60 degrees, scuff with 3M super fine sponge or approved and clean with tack cloth. Apply final coat as required and cure 12 hours.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. 2. Install smoke and draft control doors in accordance with NFPA 105 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware work of Section 06 41 00, 08 11 16 and Section 08 71 00. E. Coordinate glazing with work of Section 08 80 00.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: NFPA Standards 80 and 105 for assembly performance required. 1. 0.125 inch at jambs and heads. 2. 0.0625 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors. 3. 0.25 inch over finish floor covering, and as indicated. 4. 0.1875 inch at thresholds and saddles. 5. Bevel: 0.125 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 6. Warp, bow, cup, or twist not exceeding 0.25 inch in a 42 by 84 inch section. 7. No telegraphing of core construction in face veneers.

214002 / CAMS 08 14 16 - 4 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

B. Operation: Replace and rehang doors that do not swing or operate freely, when directed by Architect. C. Where the Architect determines that a door or frame has been too severely damaged to represent new goods and materials as required by the Contract it shall be replaced by new undamaged work; regardless of whether this damage adversely effects door function. Remedial work such as filling and sanding to correct excessive damage is not acceptable in lieu of replacement. 1. Restore damaged finishes, site cut, and machined surfaces and edges before installation, return to shop doors that can not be acceptably refinished on site, replace work that can not be acceptably repaired END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 08 14 16 - 5 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall and ceiling access door and frame units throughout the Work.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. 1. Coordination With Ceramic Tile: Indicate locations of access panels occurring in areas to receive ceramic tile and integrate panels with tile pattern C. Coordination Drawings: Penetrations, ceiling-mounted components, concealed framing, suspension systems, mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems, and other construction D. Samples: Submit one complete access door units 12 by 12 inches in size.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide access doors by one of the following: J.L. Industries, Karp Associates, Inc., Milcor Div., Nystrom, Inc. or Acudor Inc. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Provide sizes indicated and as otherwise directed.

2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Access Door Assembly: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. 1. Frames: 16 gage steel; provide flange type necessary for the installation required. 2. Stainless Steel Frames and Flush Panel Doors: 14 gage stainless steel, No. 4. satin finish; concealed spring hinges or concealed piano hinge set to open 175 degrees. 3. Flush Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees. 4. Lock: Southco CM-6, removable core cam lock and PK core compatible with Schlage 1347 key way. 5. Key Code: CH751. 6. Ceiling Doors: Recessed door panel depth necessary to finish ceiling insert and install flush to adjacent finish ceiling. Reinforced 18 gage sheet steel face. Provide access sleeves for locking devices. 7. Size: As necessary for efficient access, but not less than 24 by 24 inches. Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units which vary from sizes indicated. B. Fire Rated Units: Comply with NFPA 80, provide UL listed and labeled units having performance level required with insulated flush panel door, continuous piano hinge and self- closing mechanism for rated assemblies in sizes and configuration required. 1. Vertical Doors: NFPA 252 or UL 10B 2. Horizontal Doors: ASTM E 119 or UL 263.

214002 / CAMS 08 31 00 - 1 ACCESS DOORS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Total number of doors required for access to mechanical equipment is not necessarily shown on drawings. Consult with Architect for direction on placement of required doors not shown on drawings. 1. Comply with Section 22 05 00 requirements for access doors for plumbing work and provide as work of this Section 2. Comply with Section 23 05 00 requirements for access doors for HVAC work and provide as work of this Section. 3. Comply with Section 26 05 00 requirements for access doors for electrical work and provide as work of this Section. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors. Provide all necessary support and supplemental framing for assembly where the access doors is required. Set accurately in position, plumb, level, and flush to adjacent finish surfaces; and secure to support. 1. Provide 60 minute, fire rated doors for units required in fire rated assemblies. 2. Provide stainless steel units in restrooms, food service areas and other locations where indicated. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. END OF SECTION

214002 / Oregon State Capitol 08 31 00 - Access Doors Renovation 09 25 2015

SECTION 08 34 00 SPECIAL FUNCTION DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes door and frame assemblies for sound control and ballistic resistance.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Required for each product used in Work of this Section. B. Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation of door and frame, details of types, construction, location and installation of reinforcement, anchors, finish hardware, and accessories; elevations of door types. 1. Schedule: Use reference numbers shown on contract documents, coordinate glazing frames and stops, and glazing requirements. C. Certification: Design, materials, and construction of door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested units is equivalent to labeled assemblies.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Provide sound control and ballistic resistant components and assemblies for each application required in the sizes and configurations indicated. Work includes framed assemblies for doors. 1. Coordinate work of this Section with work of related assemblies where multiple performance characteristics are required (such as fire resistance) for work incorporating ballistic or attack resistant components assemblies. B. Performance Requirements: Tested by independent laboratory in required, configuration including hardware in accordance with referenced standards. 1. Sound Attenuating Assemblies: ASTM E 90 and E 413, for required Sound Transmission Class performance (STC), and ASTM E 336, for required Noise Isolation Class (NIC). 2. Ballistic Resistant Assemblies: UL 752 Level 3 listed and labeled.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Sound Control: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide complete door and frame assemblies including sound seals; basis of design is products of Overly Door Company Model 499723; Krieger Specialty Products, or approved. B. Ballistic Resistance: Subject to compliance with Contract requirements provide products of Armortex, Safeguard Security Services, CR Laurence, Co., ShotGard, or approved.

2.3 SOUND CONTROL ASSEMBLIES A. Frames: ASTM A1008 or ASTM A1011 sheet steel and steel shapes complying with ASTM A36; provide 14 gage fully welded fabrications. B. Wood Doors: Size, configuration and function indicated complying with performance requirements and Section 08 14 16 requirements for solid flush panel wood doors. C. Cam Lift Hinges: When required to achieve STC, manufacturer to furnish laboratory test data certifying hinges have been cycled a minimum of 1,000,000 while supporting a minimum door weight of 350 pounds; Overly MCL-500. D. Hardware Reinforcements: Factory mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames for all mortise hardware as required by hardware manufacturer’s template. Factory mortise and reinforce doors for all mortise hardware. Provide necessary reinforcement plates as required for surface mounted hardware; all drilling and tapping to be done in field by installer. Provide dust cover boxes on all frame mortises. E. Anchors: Provide suitable anchors to properly install frames in partition types shown on Architects drawings.

214002 / CAMS 08 34 00 - 1 SPECIAL FUNCTION DOORS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

F. Shop Finishing: Comply with Section 08 14 16 requirements.

2.4 BALLISTIC RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES A. Hollow Metal Frame: 16 gage steel with bullet resistant glass fiber lining. Fabricate to comply with applicable standards of Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association. Miter and weld corners, knock-down frames are not acceptable. Allow overlap of fiberglass composite frame armor and glazing panel for required performance characteristics. Provide custom configurations to accommodate glazing and wall assemblies as required with sufficient capture of glazing to prevent displacement due to ballistic and physical assault. 1. Fiberglass Armor: As required for wall panels and UL 752 Listed for level 3 ballistic resistance; ShotGard, Armortex, or approved. Permanently anchor armor in hollow metal frame to resist displacement due to ballistic and physical attack. 2. Fabricate to comply with Section 08115 requirements. 3. Frame for Fire Resistant Ballistic Glazing Assembly: 120 minute fire resistant per UL 19207 and UL 752 Level 3 ballistic resistance; Pilkington Heat Barrier frame. B. Bullet Resistant Door: Provide UL 752 Level 3 Ballistic resistance having a non-ricochet design. 1. Hollow-metal Doors: 14 gage steel faces, welded construction complying with Section 08 11 13 requirements. 2. Wood Doors: WD-2 complying with Section 06 41 00 requirements unless otherwise indicated. Provide solid core door complying with performance requirements and Section 08 14 16. C. Ballistic Resistive Armor: Multiple layers of starch-oil woven roving ballistic grade fiberglass cloth impregnated with a thermoset polyester resin and compressed into flat rigid sheets that capture a projectile, preventing its penetrating the panel. Armortex OF 300 by Safeguard Security Services, ShotGard by North American Bullet Proof, BRF300 by CR Laurence, or approved. 1. Provide specialty hardware, clamps, fasteners, and adhesives as necessary for attachment of armor in walls, frames and other assemblies as necessary for required performance characteristics.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install work accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. Comply with approved shop drawings, manufacturer's recommendations and Project requirements. B. Frames: Place prior to construction of adjoining walls, except at concrete, and masonry construction; remove temporary braces and spreaders when wall construction is complete, and before frame and bucks are secured, leave surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Fire-rated: NFPA Standard No. 80. 2. Field Splices: Welded, locations shown on shop drawings, finish to match adjacent surface. 3. Countersink exposed fasteners, fill, and grind smooth to match adjacent metal surfaces. 4. Jamb Anchors: Number per jamb for length listed, two, 24 inches and less; three, up to 80 inches; four, up to 90 inches; five, up to 96 inches; one additional for each 24 inches or fraction thereof over 96 inches. C. Bullet Resistive Wall Panel: Comply with UL listing requirements for ballistic Level 3 performance in the installed work utilizing adhesive application and mechanical attachment. M Level 3 performance across panel joints, juncture with abutting work, bullet resistive window, and any required penetrations D. Sound Control: Install gaskets, automatic door bottoms, thresholds and other components of the acoustic door and frame assembly necessary to comply with specified acoustic performance values. E. Tolerances: Comply with Section 08 11 13 and 08 14 00 requirements and as otherwise necessary for performance criteria of this Section.

214002 / CAMS 08 34 00 - 2 SPECIAL FUNCTION DOORS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

F. Finish Hardware: Comply with requirements of Section 08 71 00 for hardware not provided as work of this Section. G. Field Quality Control: 1. Sound Control Doors: Test installed door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 336 and submit certified report demonstrating compliance with acoustical performance requirements. Work that does not comply shall be corrected and re-tested until it is made to comply. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 08 34 00 - 3 SPECIAL FUNCTION DOORS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 56 59 SERVICE WINDOW PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ballistic resistant service window units.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for specified products indicating materials, operation, glazing, finishes, and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, sizes, rough-in, mounting, anchors and fasteners, and installation clearances.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SERVICE WINDOWS A. Service/Teller Window with Deal Tray at Sill: Off-set glazing plane voice port, ballistic armored sill with recessed stainless steel pass-through deal tray; Bullet-Guard TWVVP in configuration and size required. 1. Glazing: UL 752 Level V ballistic resistant clear glazing; glass - polycarbonate laminate orient glass to public side.

2.02 COMPONENTS A. Windows: Factory-fabricated, -finished, and -glazed, extruded aluminum frame and glazing stops; complete with hardware and anchors. 1. Provide window units that are re-glazable from the secure side without dismantling the non-secure side of framing. 2. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with internal reinforcement. Make joints and connections flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Fully weld corners. 3. Apply factory finish to all exposed surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in service window in location indicated; comply with ANSI A 117.1 requirements for barrier free facilities. 1. Install and anchor to achieve required ballistic resistance level. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 08 56 69 - 1 SERVICE WINDOW OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for aluminum, bronze, wood and hollow steel doors. B. Hardware for fire-rated doors. C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. D. Thresholds. E. Weather stripping, seals and door gaskets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08 34 00 - Special Function Doors C. Section 28 31 05 - Fire Alarm System Equipment: Electrical connection to activate door closers. D. Section 28 13 00 - Access Control: Electronic access control devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009. C. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1). D. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2). E. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3). F. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4). G. BHMA A156.5 - Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.5). H. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8). I. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.15). J. BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.16). K. BHMA A156.17 - American National Standard for Self Closing Hinges & Pivots; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSI/BHMA A156.17). L. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21).

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

M. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems, Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22). N. BHMA A156.31 - Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators; 2007 (ANSI/BHMA A156.31). O. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006. P. BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006. Q. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013. R. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. S. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware. C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly show products to be furnished for this project. C. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated items and include power requirements. D. Keying Schedule: Provided by Owner. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. G. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. H. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Tools: One set of all special wrenches or tools applicable to each different or special hardware component, whether supplied by the hardware component manufacturer or not.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 5 years of experience. C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN

2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. ADA Standards for Accessible Design. 3. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 4. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 5. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 6. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 7. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. 8. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardware and control components and to building power connection. E. Finishes: Identified in schedule. F. Fasteners: 1. Mineral Core Wood Doors: Sex bolts.

2.03 HINGES A. Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door. 1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers. 3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated. 4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors. 5. Where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf, provide power transfer hinges.

2.04 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking. 1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. B. Manufacturers: 1. Schlage, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. Owner Standard.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Lock Cylinders: Owner to provide and install Medeco construction/final cores and all keys.

2.05 MAGNETIC LOCKS A. Magnetic Locks: Provide magnetic locks and related components where specified. All magnetic locks shall have a power supply with a fire alarm interface and battery back-up. B. Manufacturers: 1. Schlage Electronics, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. 2. Assa Abloy Securitron: www.assaabloydss.com

2.06 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Electric Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.31 and UL listed as a Burglary-Resistant Electric Door Strike; style to suit specified hardware. B. Manufacturers: 1. Assa Abloy Folger Adams: www.assaabloydss.com (at concealed vertical rod panics). 2. SDC (at unisex indicator locks with auto operators).

2.07 EXIT DEVICES A. Locking Functions: Functions as defined in BHMA A156.3, and as follows: B. Manufacturers: 1. Von Duprin, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. Owner Standard.

2.08 CLOSERS A. Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4. 1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door. 3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring hinges are not an acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated. 4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to ensure the leaves close in proper order. B. Manufacturers - Closers: 1. LCN, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us. Owner Standard. C. Manufacturers – Floor Closers: 1. Rixson: www.assaabloydss.com.

2.09 AUTO OPERATORS & COMPONENTS A. Specified in auto door section.

2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide overhead stop, or floor stop if indicated in hardware sets. B. Wall Stops: Ives WS406/407 series. Trimco equivalent approved. C. Floor Stops: Ives FS436 or FS441 series. Trimco equivalent approved. D. Overhead Holders/Stops: Glynn Johnson 100S, 450S or 90S per hardware sets. Rixson equivalent approved.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

E. Magnetic Holder/Releases: Complying with BHMA A156.15; fail safe; doors release to close automatically when electrical current is interrupted; holding force: 25 to 40 pounds-force.

2.11 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS A. Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22. 1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting stile of pairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke gaskets on each door identified as a "smoke door" and 20-minute rated fire doors. 2. On each exterior door, provide weather stripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top, sides, and meeting stiles of pairs. a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets functioning as both smoke and weather seals. 3. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated. B. Thresholds: 1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated. 2. Field cut threshold to frame for tight fit. C. Manufacturers - Gasketing and Thresholds: 1. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com. 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com. 3. Zero International: www.allegion.com/us. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in Schedule, unless otherwise noted:

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.05 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.

3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 45 00. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.07 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The following is a general listing of hardware requirements. Provide hardware items required by established standards and practices to meet state and local codes, whether or not specifically indicated in the following sets. B. Refer to Door Schedule and/ or Drawings for door opening information, hardware set assignment, and related requirements.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 014

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA OFFICE W/SIM L9056L 01A L583-363 613 SCH RETRACT 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 613 IVE 1 EA SOUND SEALS 470D D ZER 1 EA SEMI-MORTISE AUTO 362D6 D ZER DR BTM 1 EA THRESHOLD 545D-MSLA-10 D ZER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 029

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L 01A 613 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 613 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 030

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080L 01A 613 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 613 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 048

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON 1 EA RX/EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU 01A RX 613 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA CLOSER W/STOP ARM 4111 SCUSH WMS 695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER 1 ACCESS CONTROL - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 DOOR CONTACT(S) - WORK OF DIVISION 28

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 063

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 9875-L-BE-F-01-613-SNB 613/313 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 WMS 695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 613 IVE 1 EA FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG SEM7850 695 LCN 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 081

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 01A 613 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CVX 613 IVE 1 EA SOUND SEALS 470D D ZER 1 EA SEMI-MORTISE AUTO 362D6 D ZER DR BTM 1 EA THRESHOLD 545D-MSLA-10 D ZER

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 105

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON 1 EA RX/EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU 01A RX 613 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA CLOSER W/STOP ARM 4111 SCUSH WMS 695 LCN

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 7 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER 1 EA SEMI-MORTISE AUTO 362D6 D ZER DR BTM 1 EA THRESHOLD 545D-MSLA-10 D ZER 1 ACCESS CONTROL - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 DOOR CONTACT(S) - WORK OF DIVISION 28

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 106

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON 1 EA RX/EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU 01A RX 613 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA CLOSER W/STOP ARM 4111 SCUSH WMS 695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 613 IVE 1 EA GASKETING 188S-BK S-BK ZER 1 EA SEMI-MORTISE AUTO 362D6 D ZER DR BTM 1 EA THRESHOLD 545D-MSLA-10 D ZER 1 ACCESS CONTROL - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 DOOR CONTACT(S) - WORK OF DIVISION 28

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 107

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING: QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON 1 EA RX/EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU 01A RX 613 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA CLOSER W/STOP ARM 4111 SCUSH WMS 695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 613 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA PUSHBUTTON 623GR 629 SCE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 LGR SCE

POWER SUPPLY REQUIRES 110VAC. INSTALL PUSHBUTTON AT TRANSACTION WINDOW DESK FOR REMOTE RELEASE. VERIFY WEIGHT OF BALLISTIC RESISTANT DOOR BEFORE ORDERING HINGES.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 108

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON 1 EA RX/EU MORTISE LOCK L9092LEU 01A RX 613 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER PROVIDED BY OWNER 613 MED 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 WMS 695 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B4E 613 IVE 1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 613 IVE 1 EA SOUND SEALS 470D D ZER 1 EA SEMI-MORTISE AUTO 362D6 D ZER DR BTM 1 EA THRESHOLD 545D-MSLA-10 D ZER 1 ACCESS CONTROL - WORK OF DIVISION 28 1 DOOR CONTACT(S) - WORK OF DIVISION 28

END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 08 71 00 - 9 DOOR HARDWARE OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 74 13 LOW-ENERGY DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for electro-mechanical hardware; coordinate electrical characteristics and service requirements for operation of hardware specified in this Section with Division 26 and Division 27 requirements as applicable to the Work. Provide electrical power, including labor and materials, necessary for normal operation of hardware and integration of security and status monitoring systems as required. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 71 00 Finish Hardware 2. Division 26 Electrical 3. Division 27 Communications

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIRMENTS A. Pre-Installation Conference: Comply with Section 08 71 00 requirements. 1. Verify coordination of electrical and single requirements with work of Divisions 26 and 27.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit as required for each product to be incorporated into the Work, include information on electrical characteristics. 1. UL listing data for fire rated openings. B. Shop Drawings 1. Coordination with door and frame and other components of finish hardware required for each opening. Indicate required mounting dimensions, clearances, reinforcing and attachment for hardware provided as work of this Section. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For coordination with opening frame and door and associated hardware and electrical and signal requirements of Divisions 26 and 27. C. Hardware Schedule: For each door and opening; organize into groups, give complete designation of every item, and coordinate hardware mounting and function. 1. Submit at earliest possible date, and concurrent with information essential to coordinated review; prevent delay to progress of Work for which fabrication must follow acceptance of Hardware Schedule. 2. Keying Schedule: Append to Hardware Schedule as required. D. Templates: Furnish to fabricator of Work factory-prepared for hardware. Coordinate mounting heights and installation requirements for hardware. E. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: A complete set of specialized tools and instructions specific for the components and systems provided as work of this Section. F. Samples: When directed provide as necessary to demonstrate component appearance and finish.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: Five years successful experience specializing in furnishing and installing hardware similar in scope and operation to that required for the Project, with a knowledgeable staff consultant available for consultation with the Architect and Owner as required. B. Installer Qualifications: Personnel trained by the primary product manufacturer, with a minimum 2 years successful experience with installing and maintenance hardware similar in design and complexity to that required for the for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance C. Certifications: Operators shall be certified by the manufacturer to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards. 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.19 American National Standard for Power Assist and Low Energy Operated Doors. 2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 74 13 - 1 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Identify components as required for hardware groups of Section 08 71 00. B. Prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide removable protective cover on finished surfaces that will be exposed in final installation.

1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Signed by authorized representatives of the Manufacturer, Supplier and Installer of hardware providing for the replacement of defective and non-compliant work within 24 hours of notification. Defective Work includes, but is not limited to, failure of hardware to remain in proper adjustment, and deterioration of finishes in excess of normal wear. 1. Door Operators: Five years written warranty. a. Gear Boxes: Guaranteed for complete cost of replacement including installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Hardware designed for proper operation with installation, and door function indicated; complies with requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act and barrier free access requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. 1. Design Requirements: ANSI/BHA 156.19 Low Energy Power Operated Door System, and compliance with ANSI A117.1. 2. Provide UL listed and labeled devices for openings Schedule to as fire-rated; comply with performance rating required for opening. 3. Coordinate modifications and reinforcing necessary to frames and doors to receive low energy operating components provided as work of this Section. Comply with requirements of Section 08 11 13 for hollow metal assemblies and 08 41 13 for aluminum entrances. B. Performance Requirements: Electro-mechanical operators shall have an operating cycle conforming with applicable regulatory and safety requirements for doors of sizes required with a minimum operating force capable of maintaining doors in closed position against positive and negative wind pressure of not less than 25 pounds.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Each Type of Hardware: Product of a single manufacturer, regardless of whether multiple manufacturers are listed as approved. B. Subject to requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Door Operators: ASSA Abloy/Besam, and Door-O-Matic.

2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manufacturer Name and Trade Mark Identification: Not exposed when door is closed, except for required fire exit hardware labels. Unfilled symbols on face of rim cylinders are acceptable. B. Low Energy Power Operated Door Operating Equipment: For single and paired openings, swing operation in size and configuration required , overhead surface mounted and concealed installation as required; Besam SW200i 1. Concealed mounting in head of door frame except continuous surface mounted enclosure where required. Coordinate operator configuration with Hardware set components Scheduled. 2. Activating Switches: Stainless steel wall mounted except pole mount as indicated for exterior doors. Provide manufacturer's standard barrier free access symbol complying with requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines, including braille characters. a. Pole Mount Unit: Provided complete with switch and pol. Finish pole to match operator and door frame. 3. Operating components shall integrate with access control and building security systems including but not limited to card readers, electric strike and magnetic locks as reauired. C. Balance of Finish Hardware: Provide as required in Section 08 71 00.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 74 13 - 2 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Comply with governing regulations, and Door and Hardware Institute, "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" unless otherwise required. 1. Hollow Metal: DHI "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" B. Install hardware level, plumb, and true to line and location, comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Prevent conflicts between mounting heights for each component of hardware. 1. Electrical Power: Provide as necessary for hardware function. C. Adjust and reinforce substrate as necessary for installation and operation, provide backing as wall mounted door stops and other surface mounted hardware; cut and fit as required for installation of hardware, and remove hardware prior to application of final finish; reinstall hardware once finishing is complete. 1. Where Work can not be reinforced for fasteners use sleeved thru-bolt, or sex screw fastener. D. Drill and countersink units not factory-prepared for fasteners. Space fasteners in accordance with industry standards. E. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames with mitered corners and hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Permanently anchor thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger stainless steel screws. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items as required. 1. Exterior Thresholds: Set in full bed of polyisobutylene, or butyl rubber sealant, fill concealed voids; do not plug drainage holes. Remove excess sealant.

3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Inspect and adjust hardware one week prior to scheduled inspection for final acceptance, and instruct Owner's personnel in adjustment and maintenance of hardware. 1. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. 2. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

3.03 FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. See Section 08 71 00 and Door and Frame Schedule for hardware groups. Provide products specified in this Section as Scheduled. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 08 74 13 - 3 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 08 81 00 GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for shop and field glazing of frames, doors and openings throughout the Project. 1. Install glazing gaskets furnished by other Sections. B. Definitions: 1. Hazardous Locations: International Building Code Section 2406.3.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Conference: Coordinate with other components and assemblies of the building, including but not limited to 1. Review and confirm Contractor's Project Schedule and work sequence.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Required for each product to be incorporated into the Work. 1. Four-Side Silicone Glazing: Certification of compatibility for fritted glazing. B. Shop Drawings: Provide for each glazing assembly required. 1. Calculations: Provide for Exterior and Interior glazing assemblies to demonstrate compliance with Performance Requirements. 2. Glazing Assembly Schedule: Indicate glazing assembly to be provided for each frame and location on the building. C. Samples: Two samples 12 inches by 12 inches of each glass type scheduled. D. Certificates: Document that glazing materials furnished comply with Project requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor responsibility to provide Work complying with contract requirements shall not be altered by statements made in referenced standards and documents. 1. Flat Glass Marketing Association Glazing Manual. 2. Safety Glazing Standard: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. 3. Insulating Glass Certification: Permanently mark units with Insulating Glass Certification Council, or Associated Laboratories, Inc. label. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Ten years successful experience with fabrication and installation as appropriate of glazing work similar in material, design, and extent to that required for this Project. When directed provide records of representative work including warranty and in- service performance of previous work. 1. Glaziers for this Project: Certified under the National Glass Association, Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers). 2. Comply with Section 08 44 00 requirements for curtain wall.

1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and handle products in accordance with written recommendations of manufacturer, and fabricator, and to prevent damage to glass, including edges. B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures

1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Signed by the Fabricator, and agree to furnish replacements for defective glazing at no cost to the Owner for the glazing assembly types and time periods below. Defective glazing includes, but is not limited to, failure due to weakening edge characteristics shown in Figure 16 of FGMA Glazing Manual, as determined by the Architect.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 81 00 - 1 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

1. Insulating Glazing Units: Ten years for vertical glazing (including performance of low-e coating), and five years for sloped glazing. 2. Laminated Glazing: Five years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Glazing when installed in the required assembly capable of withstanding the stresses imparted in accordance with the Performance Requirements, OSSC Chapter 24 Glass and Glazing requirements, and service conditions reasonably anticipated for the Work without deterioration, damage or failure. 1. Contractor shall analyze Project loads, glazing assembly sizes and configurations and in- service conditions and provide glass of the thickness and type required for each assembly as necessary to comply with Code requirements and ASTM E 1300 for required criteria. In no case shall glass be less than 0.25 inch thick. Heat treat glass in assemblies as necessary to resist thermal stresses and other loads. Provide thicker glass to reduce distortion or deflection and as necessary to due to required loads or service conditions. 2. Glazing in Hazardous Location as defined in this Section shall comply with Performance Requirements for Safety Glazing. 3. Structural Silicone Glazing: Provide clear silicon sealant complying with section 07 92 00 requirements. Exposed edges of glazing shall be polished and finished smooth, edge of laminated glazing not captured by faming shall be fully covered by sealant. . B. Performance Requirements: For loads conforming to the criteria in the General Structural notes on S series drawings and as follows. 1. Deflection Limit: Comply with IBC Section 2403.3 for Exterior assemblies and Section 2403.4 for Interior assemblies. 2. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lights per 1000 for lights set not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action with 60 second load duration. 3. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: 1 light per 1000 for lights set more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind load with 60 second duration, except 5 days for snow load. 4. Glass Guards: Safety factor of four per OSSC 2407.1.1. 5. Thermal Differential: Accommodate temperature range from 20 to 120 degrees F. 6. Safety Glazing: ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. Field applied films are not acceptable for compliance with this requirement. 7. Thermal Performance of Exterior Vertical Glazing: Comply with Section 08 44 00 requirements and as otherwise necessary for Project compliance with Oregon Energy Code for unit sizes and configurations required with fenestration assemblies as required by Section 08 44 00 when evaluated per AAMA 507 as certified by NFRC. a. IGU Center of Glass U-Value: 0.19. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.28. c. Visible Light Transmission: 66 percent. 8. Thermal Performance of Exterior Sloped Glazing: Coordinate with requirements of Section 08 63 00 and ensure compliance with performance requirements of that Section for glazed assembly.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Glazing Assemblies: Product of one fabricator for each type required. Fabricate glass to sizes necessary for glazing of openings as required, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer and requirements of this Section.

1. Substitution for specified glazing materials and assemblies will be considered only where acceptable samples incorporating specified high purity float glass and demonstration of compliance with Source Quality Assurance requirements are provided as a condition precedent to approval. B. Primary Glass Product: Comply with ASTM C 1036. Provide high purity, low iron clear float glass substrates throughout, PPG Starfire, Schott, or Pilkington.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 81 00 - 2 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

C. Coated Glass: Provide for high-purity, low-iron clear float glass substrates only and comply with performance values required for insulating glazing units. 1. Low-e Coating Outboard Light: Neutral color PPG Industries Solarban 72 Starphire coating on number 2 surface; except provide Solarban R100 for assembly Type E-4. a. Assembly E-6: Provide coated substrate in 0.375 inch thickness. 2. Low-e Coating Inboard Light: Pyroliytic low-e coat Pilkington Energy Advantage, coating on number 4 surface. higher performance readily achievable with tinted glass or reflective assemblies D. Ceramic Fritted Glass: Applied to number 3 surface except as otherwise required; Custom color selected by Architect 1. Solid Frit: Provide for locations required. 2. Patterned Frit: 40 percent density. 3. Four-sided structural silicone glazing; PPG OPACI-Coat 500, number 4 surface; confirm acceptance for use in structural silicon glazing as required for the Work.

2.3 GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Fabricate glass to sizes necessary for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. B. Glazing Assembly Types: Products of one fabricator; provide high purity glass substrate for all assemblies. 1. Glazing Type E-1: Vertical IGU; no pattern frit. 2. Glazing Type E-2: Vertical IGU with patterned frit. 3. Glazing Type E-3: Vertical IGU with solid frit. 4. Glazing Type E-4: Vertical IGU, reflective with SSG compatible frit. 5. Glazing Type E-6: Vertical IGU, as required for E-2 except provide 0.375 inch thick outboard light, total unit thickness not to exceed 1.125 inch. C. Heat-Treated Primary Glass Products: ASTM C 1048, by horizontal method with rollwave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass. Provide fully tempered glass for glazing in hazardous locations except where laminated safety glazing is required. Heat treat glass where necessary to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lights and for all lights 35 square feet and larger. Fabricate to size and configuration required with penetration and edge work completed prior to heat treating. 1. Clear Tempered: Kind FT, Condition A. 2. Coated Heat-Strengthened: Kind HS, Condition C, or B where fritted spandrel is required. 3. Tempered Safety Glazing: Comply with Performance requirements. D. Insulating Glazing Unit: Indicated as IGU, ASTM E 2190 for units incorporating materials specified for Assembly Types required and to comply with State energy Code performance requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Vertical IGU: One inch thick assembly with one-half inch air space, and one quarter inch thick lights, except as otherwise required to comply with System Description Article. a. Low-e coating on number 2 and number 4 surfaces; and fritted surface number 3 with argon gas fill. Do not frit units installed with northern exposure. b. Patterned Fritted Glass: Provide for locations indicated. c. Solid Fritted Glass: As indicated for spandrel lights. 2. Sloped IGU: Nominal 1.4375 inch thick assembly; outboard light of 0.375 inch thick tempered Starphire with Solarban 72 Low-e coating on number 2 surface, 0.5 inch Argon filled space and inboard light of the specified laminated sloped glazing. 3. Provide heat strengthened float glass where required for light size and configuration and to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading per System Description Article. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lights where safety glass is indicated. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal of polyisobutylene, and silicone. 5. Spacer: Warm edge, stainless steel spacer with desiccant; black finish, bent at three corners; Roltech or approved. E. Laminated Architectural Flat Glass: Heat and pressure process to fuse glass to interlayer conforming to ASTM C 1172. 1. Interlayer: Provide 0.060 inch thick clear PVB interlayer.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 81 00 - 3 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

2. Sloped Glazing: Two laminated panes each 0.25 inch high-purity tempered float with specified pyrolytic Low-e coating on number 4 surface.

2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Provide as necessary for glazed opening; black unless otherwise indicated 1. Dense Compression Seal: ASTM C 864, neoprene, EPDM, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 2. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed: ASTM C 509, Type II, extruded or molded neoprene. B. Glazing Tape: ASTM 1193 butyl-polyisobutylene preformed; continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for installation. C. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by manufacturer of gaskets, and tape. D. Blocks and Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone as necessary for compatibility with glazing sealants. 1. Hardness: 90 Shore A for setting blocks, and as recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers. E. Exposed Sealant: Black, except provide clear structural silicone for overhead glazing at canopy and pergola; comply with additional requirements of Section 07 92 00. F. Filler Rods: Closed-cell synthetic rubber, or plastic foam, 25 percent compression at five to ten psi. G. Translucent Film: Provide as necessary for glazed opening. 1. 3M - Glace 70-0709-0374-8 or equal.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Glass Color Testing: Measure monolithic coated glass and coated insulting glass units. 1. Color Target: Established per approved samples conforming to specified tolerance. 2. Color Measurement: Calibrated, off-line spectrophotometer (Minolta 2500d / 2600d or equal); measure uncoated side of glass in the central area. Measure the first 15 panes/ units to establish the color target, then measure a minimum of 1 pane / unit every four (4) hours and each product change. 3. Tolerances for color variation shall be less than 4.5 DE. 4. Document and record result of each color measurement performed. Tag each pane / unit of glass that falls outside of the maximum color variation limits and certify that non-conforming glass will not be fabricated and or supplied to the Project. 5. Perform on-line continuous color measurements. 6. Perform quality control checks using off-line measurement instrumentation every 4 hours or product change. B. Distortion Testing: Measure each pane of monolithic uncoated and coated heat-treated glass used in the Project. 1. Measurement Device: LiteSentry measurement system, or equal. 2. Horizontal Roll Wave: Millidopeter Criteria: (90% surface) Maximum + or – 120 A overall, or the highest overall measurement from the approved visual mock-up that is less than + or – 120 A overall, whichever is less. 3. Bow/Warp Tolerance: Tolerance as described herein. 4. Measure every hour on a vertical plane with an aluminum or other type of straight edge. 5. Documentation: Document and record results for each pane a. Tag each pane of glass that falls outside of the maximum distortion limits and certify that these non-conforming glass panes will not be fabricated and supplied to the Project. b. Provide written documentation of the Roll Wave and Millidopeter measurements of the glass used in visual mock-ups before the mock-ups are reviewed by the Owner and Architect for approval. c. Provide additional written documentation upon request by the Owner or Architect

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspect glass prior to and during installation; discard pieces with edge characteristics that could affect glass performance.

214002.4 / CAMS 08 81 00 - 4 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017

B. Examine frames to receive glazing for compliance with recommended tolerances, face and edge clearances, and general proper installation. Notify Contractor in writing of unacceptable conditions, and do not proceed with glazing where conditions have not been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with FGMA Glazing Manual, and instructions of manufacturers of glass, and gaskets, to achieve air, and watertight performance. 1. Provide safety glazing in individual lights, laminated and insulated glazing units per System Description requirements. B. Prevent damage to glass edges during installation. Use rolling blocks, suction cups, wedges and other devices for proper handling of glass. C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. D. Setting Blocks: Properly sized for glazing unit; locate at quarter points of unit width. E. Cleaning: As recommended by glass fabricator and manufacturer. Wash both faces within four days of scheduled inspection intended to establish date of substantial completion. F. Protect glass from contact with deleterious contaminants; immediately remove contaminants using method approved by glass manufacturer, and fabricator. G. Installation Conditions: Some conditions of installation may represent a departure from conventional applications of certain glazing materials. Review each application and provide glass products and assemblies which are suited to the required use. Such applications may include heat treatment of glazing to enhance strength, supplemental back-coating of spandrel glazing to ensure uniform opacity (eliminate pin holes and variations in coating density) and similar fabrication measures. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 08 81 00 - 5 LOW ENERGY OPERATORS OSP TENANT IMPROVEMENT – BID SET 03 24 2017 SECTION 09 01 21 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF PLASTER PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of loose or damaged plaster and where required for structural and other work. B. Repair/replacement of damaged metal lath to receive new plaster. C. Installation of new metal lath, plaster scratch, brown and finish coats required for gypsum plaster work.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures. B. Section 02 41 19 - Selective Demolition, Salvage, and Protection. C. Section 09 22 16 - Metal Framing: Supports for plaster ceiling.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to ASTM C11 for definitions of terms for gypsum veneer plaster assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Products. B. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Lime. C. ASTM C587 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Veneer Plaster. D. ASTM C841 - Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring Installation Standard. E. ASTM C842 - Standard Specification for Application of Interior Gypsum Plaster. F. "Lathing and Plastering Reference Specifications" as published by the California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Associations Inc. (CLPCA), latest edition.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Work Description: Submit written program for each phase of repair and restoration of plaster, including protection of surrounding materials and site during operations. Describe in detail materials and equipment, cleaning procedures, application methods and dwell times to be used. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Recommendations for application and use. 2. Instructions for storage and handling. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and test data, Material Safety Data Sheets, and certifications sustaining that products comply with requirements.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 21 - 1 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF PLASTER 03 24 2017

4. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Work of this Section shall be performed by a firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in comparable repair and restoration of plaster projects. Firm shall have expertise in all the Work of this Section. Firm shall employ personnel and supervisors skilled in the rehabilitation and restoration processes and operations indicated. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 to 7 projects completed in last 5 years by Contractor that illustrate the firm's expertise in all of the Work of this Section. B. Qualifications of Project Manager or Foreman Supervising Work, and Skilled Workmen: Project Manager and Job Foreman shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Skilled workmen each shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 to 7 projects completed by Project Manager or Foreman that illustrate their expertise in all of the Work of this Section and a list of 5 projects completed by each of the skilled workmen. C. Contractor, project manager or foreman supervising work, and skilled workmen selected and approved for Work of this Section shall complete all Work of this Section, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Any requests for changes in management and skilled personnel shall be submitted to Architect in writing with the required documentation outlined above. 2. Architect shall review management and skilled personnel changes with reasonable promptness. Personnel changes shall not be made until Architect has approved the change. D. All removal of existing plaster is to be performed by same firm that performs the plaster repair and installation of new plaster.

1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Before full-scale operation, prepare field samples on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Specific locations and test panels to be designated by Architect. Field sample to be of sufficient size to demonstrate relevant methods, procedures, and quality of work expected in the finish product. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of visual qualities before proceeding with the Work. Repeat samples and test panels as necessary, adjusting methods and procedures, until acceptance by Architect is achieved. Retain acceptable panels in undisturbed condition, suitably marked, during restoration as a standard for judging completed work. Upon Architect's approval, acceptable panels may remain as part of the finished work. Allow samples to cure at least three days before requesting review of color, texture and detailing match. Samples shall be viewed from an approved distance. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of mock-ups and test panels preparation. 1. Area equal to two square feet of each type of plaster application and each type of substrate, by full thickness in presence of Architect using materials, including lath, support system, and control joints, indicated for final work.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. B. Environmental Requirements:

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 21 - 2 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF PLASTER 03 24 2017

1. Contractor is responsible for complying with the manufacturer's requirements and requirements of this section, so as not to delay the project. In case of conflict, the most stringent requirements shall govern. 2. Provide sufficient heat and ventilation where work of this section is being performed to allow plaster to properly cure. 3. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure that excessive temperatures changes do not occur. 4. Cold-Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protection, temporary or permanent, as required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for at least 24 hours after application. Distribute heat uniformly to prevent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources; provide deflection or protective screens. 5. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required. 6. Room Temperatures: Maintain not less than 55 degrees F or more than 80 degrees F for 7 days before application of gypsum base and gypsum veneer plaster, continuously during application, and after application until veneer plaster is dry. 7. Provide temporary facilities and protection as necessary to establish and maintain these conditions, so as not to delay the project. C. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Expanded-Metal Lath: a. Clark Dietrich Building Systems. http://www.clarkdietrich.com/. b. National Gypsum Co. (NGC). http://www.nationalgypsum.com/. c. United States Gypsum Co. (USG). http://www.usg.com/content/usgcom/en.html. 2. Metal Accessories: a. Fry Reglet Architectural Metals. http://fryreglet.com/. b. Metalex. http://www.metlx.com/. c. National Gypsum Co. (NGC). http://www.nationalgypsum.com/. d. United States Gypsum Co. (USG). http://www.usg.com/content/usgcom/en.html. 3. Plaster Materials: a. National Gypsum Co. (NGC). http://www.nationalgypsum.com/. b. United States Gypsum Co. (USG). http://www.usg.com/content/usgcom/en.html.

2.02 LATHING MATERIALS A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C847 for material, type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below: 1. Material: Fabricate expanded-metal lath from sheet metal conforming to the following: a. Galvanized Steel: Structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G6. minimum coating designation, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: Flat. b. Weight: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 21 - 3 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF PLASTER 03 24 2017

B. Metal Plastering Accessories and Reinforcement: 1. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C1063 and the requirements indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. a. Aluminum Components: Alloy, temper, and finish recommended by manufacturer with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5. b. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G40 minimum coating designation. c. Zinc-Alloy Components: ASTM B69, 99 percent pure zinc. 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 by 3/8-inch cold rolled copper bearing steel furring channels to match existing in size and weight. 3. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch-diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. 4. Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster encasement. a. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. b. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick. c. Material: Any material above. 5. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C1063 for installations indicated.

2.03 GYPSUM PLASTER MATERIALS A. Scratch and Brown Coats: Comply with ASTM C28 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters. 1. USG Structo-Base Gypsum Plaster. 2. Or approved equal. B. Finish Coat: Manufacturer's mill-mixed gauged finish coat plaster. 1. USG Red Top Finish Plaster. 2. Or approved equal. C. Gauging Plaster: Comply with ASTM C28 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Plasters. Without aggregates and quick-set type. 1. USG Red Top Gauging Plaster. 2. Or approved equal. D. Finish Lime: Comply with ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime. Type S, autoclaved; USG "Ivory" or approved equal. 1. USG Ivory Finish Lime. 2. Or approved equal. E. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Clean, potable and free from deleterious amount of acid, alkali and organic materials. F. Sand: Comply with ASTM C35 - Standard Specification for Inorganic Aggregates for Use in Gypsum Plaster. Clean, washed silica sand. 1. Moisture Content: 1/2 gallon/ cu. ft max 2. Size: 100% passing through a no. 4 sieve; less than 5% passing through a no. 100 sieve.

2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Standard Trim: Comply with ASTM C1047. Provided or approved by manufacturer for use in gypsum veneer plaster applications indicated. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 21 - 4 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF PLASTER 03 24 2017

a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002, unless otherwise indicated.

2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Protection Materials are specified in Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for repair and restoration of plaster. Verify that surfaces to be plastered are free of dust, loose particles, oil, and other foreign matter which would affect bond of plaster coats. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence work until such conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Install protection as specified in Section 01 35 91. B. Removal of Deteriorated Plaster: 1. Remove plaster down to solid substrate, as noted on drawings at spalled and delaminated locations, and surrounding cracks if loose or deteriorated plaster is present. 2. Remove plaster and lath at locations indicated on drawings for installation of structural and other work. 3. If removal results in weakening, detachment of plaster from lath, or delamination of plaster layers, remove plaster back to sound material. C. Plaster Ceiling Framing 1. Install ceiling channels as indicated on drawings and as specified in Section 09 22 16. Overlap new and existing channels where indicated.

3.03 GYPSUM PLASTER APPLICATION ON EXPANDED-METAL LATH A. Metal Lath Installation: 1. Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with requirements of ASTM C1063. 2. General: Inspect exposed metal lath. Remove lath which is twisted, torn, deformed or otherwise damaged. 3. Replace removed or missing lath. Overlap all edges minimum of 2 inches unless a greater overlap is shown on drawings. Secure by wire tying minimum of 6 inches on center, and as necessary so that metal lath is rigidly secured to channel furring and ready to receive plaster. B. Installation of Plastering Accessories: 1. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations: a. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 21 - 5 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF PLASTER 03 24 2017

b. External Corners: Bend lath around external angles without using cornerbeads or reinforcement. c. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. C. Preparations for Plastering: 1. Prepare existing plaster surfaces to receive repair plaster. Remove loose or broken plaster and cut edges or removed area to form straight lines. Undercut edges of cut at a slight dovetail to provide key for new plaster. 2. Check metal lath. If lath is torn or distorted, remove plaster to a minimum width of approximately 6 inches and down to the lath. Remove distorted portion of lath. Splice-in replacement strip of lath using wire to replace removed lath or to bridge torn lath. Secure with steel wire minimum of 6 inches on center. 3. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch-coat work. 4. Solid plaster surfaces to receive new plaster shall have the suction (ability to absorb water) and surface roughness to provide the bond required for proper adhesion of new plaster to existing plaster substrate. Scrape and roughen surface as necessary for good mechanical bond. If proper suction is not present, or roughening of surface damages plaster, remove plaster down to metal lath, and apply 3 coat system. D. Mixing: 1. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. 2. Accurately proportion materials for each plaster batch with measuring devices of known volume. 3. Size batches for complete use within maximum of one hour after mixing. 4. Retemper plaster stiffened from evaporation, but do not use or retemper partially hydrated cement plaster. 5. Mix factory-prepared plaster in accordance with the manufacture's written instructions. 6. Use moist, loose sand in mix proportions. 7. Withhold 10 percent of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then add as needed to produce necessary consistency. 8. Mix Proportions by Volume: a. Scratch Coat: Gypsum: 1 part. Sand: 2 parts. Water: 7-9 gal. per 100 lbs. of gypsum. b. Brown Coat: Gypsum: 1 part. Sand: 3 parts. Water: 8-10 gal. per 100 lbs. of gypsum. c. Finish Coat: Per manufacturer's recommendations. d. Retarding Admixture: 1/2 of 1 percent, max. e. Patching Plaster: Gauging Plaster: 35% Finish Lime: 65% E. Plaster Application: 1. Apply three-coat gypsum plaster to exposed lath that will not receive plaster ornamentation. 2. For patching of areas in which scratch or brown coat(s) are in good condition and are properly prepared, apply plaster to match number, type and thickness of existing plaster layers. 3. Scratch Coat: Scratch coat shall be full and approximately 3/8 inch thick applied with sufficient force to form good keys. Scratch coat shall be evenly cross-scratched.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 21 - 6 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF PLASTER 03 24 2017

4. Brown Coat: Brown coat shall be applied after the scratch coat has set, but not less than 48 hours, after the application of the scratch coat. a. After drying, all shrinkage cracks shall be cut out and filled with scratch coat plaster. 5. Finish Coat: Finish shall be applied over brown coat, which has set and is surface dry, shall be scratched in thoroughly, laid on well, doubled back, and filled out to a true, even surface. The thickness shall be from 1/16 to 1/8 inch. The finish shall be allowed to draw a few minutes and then shall be well troweled with water to a smooth surface, free from blemishes and trowel marks. Finish plaster true and even with existing plaster. 6. Thickness: Apply plaster in thickness required to match adjacent existing plaster unless otherwise indicated. F. Cutting and Patching: 1. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. G. Crack Repair: 1. Sound wall surface around crack to determine if loss of bond has occurred. Widen cracks minimum of 3/4 inch. 2. Check metal lath at cracks. If lath is torn or distorted, remove plaster on each side of crack to a minimum width of approximately 6 inches and down to the lath. Remove distorted portion of lath. Splice-in replacement strip of lath using wire to replace removed lath or to bridge torn lath. Secure with steel wire minimum of 6 inches on center. 3. Undercut edges of cut at a slight dovetail angle to provide key for new plaster. 4. Clean out all loose plaster and plaster dust by vacuuming or brushing. Thoroughly wet area to be repaired. 5. Apply patching plaster, forcing it into cleaned-out area. Finish to match adjacent existing texture and contours.

3.04 COMPLETION A. Patching: 1. Upon completion of application, point up plaster around trim and other locations where plaster meets dissimilar materials. 2. Cut out and patch defective or damaged plaster. 3. Match patching of defective or damaged plaster in existing work and to new work in form, texture, and color.

3.05 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion, remove all tools, equipment and unnecessary materials from site. Remove and dispose masking materials following completion of Work. Return adjacent areas to clean conditions that existed prior to the start of Work. B. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. C. Dispose hazardous waste materials according to manufacturer’s instructions by legal means. D. Sweep or flush away all residues washed from building surfaces from sidewalks and site areas nightly. Leave premises clean and neat at all times. E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 21 - 7 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set OF PLASTER 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 01 70 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF INTERIOR STONE PANELS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. New openings: Cutting of wall panels, salvage, fabrication and installation of new panels and trim. B. Cleaning of travertine wainscoting and marble base to remove general soiling, staining, clear coatings, and adhesives. C. Repair of all cracks, spalls and pigmented filler losses in travertine wainscoting and marble base. D. Selective regrouting of travertine wainscoting joints. E. Cleaning of bathroom marble panels to remove general soiling, staining, clear coatings, and adhesives. F. Repair of cracks in bathroom marble panels. G. Polishing of all marble sills at windows.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 35 91 - Historic Preservation Treatment Procedures. B. Section 09 75 13 - Stone Facing: Installation of salvaged exterior stone panels at current or new interior locations.

1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Very Low-Pressure Spray: Under 100 psi. B. Low-Pressure Spray: 100 psi to 400 psi; 4 gpm to 6 gpm.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate cleaning and repair operations with the other trades involved in interior restoration work, including repair and restoration of terrazzo flooring, and repair and restoration of doors and windows at interior. B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner, Architect, Contractor, and Project Manager or Foreman responsible for the Work of this Section shall attend one pre-construction conference.

1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Work Description: Submit written program for each phase of repair and restoration of interior stone panels, including protection of surrounding materials and site during operations. Describe in detail materials and equipment, cleaning procedures, application methods and dwell times to be used. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Recommendations for application and use.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 1 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

2. Instructions for storage and handling. 3. Manufacturer's specifications and test data, Material Safety Data Sheets, and certifications sustaining that products comply with requirements. 4. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of all substitutions proposed. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following: 1. Filling: Submit sets of filling that will be left exposed in the form of plugs (patches in drilled holes) in sample units of stone representative of the range of stone colors on the building. a. Have each set contain a close color range of at 3 samples of different mixes of white Portland cement and lime-proof non-fading cement coloring that produces a filling matching the existing, cleaned filling when cured and dry. b. Submit with precise measurements on ingredients, proportions, and gradations.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: Work of this Section shall be performed by a firm with not less than 5 years successful experience in comparable repair and restoration of marble and travertine projects. Firm shall have expertise in all the Work of this Section. Firm shall employ personnel and supervisors skilled in the rehabilitation and restoration processes and operations indicated. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 to 7 projects completed in last 5 years by Contractor that illustrate the firm's expertise in all of the Work of this Section. B. Qualifications of Project Manager or Foreman Supervising Work, and Skilled Workmen: Project Manager and Job Foreman shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Skilled workmen each shall have a minimum of 5 years successful experience with Work of this Section. Provide with bid the following: 1. List of 5 to 7 projects completed by Project Manager or Foreman that illustrate their expertise in all of the Work of this Section and a list of 5 projects completed by each of the skilled workmen. C. Contractor, project manager or foreman supervising work, and skilled workmen selected and approved for Work of this Section shall complete all Work of this Section, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Any requests for changes in management and skilled personnel shall be submitted to Architect in writing with the required documentation outlined above. 2. Architect shall review management and skilled personnel changes with reasonable promptness. Personnel changes shall not be made until Architect has approved the change. D. All removal of stone panels is to be performed by the same firm that performs the repair and reinstallation of stone panels.

1.08 FIELD SAMPLES A. Before full-scale operation, prepare field samples for each of the following treatment on existing surfaces to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Specific locations and test panels to be designated by Architect. Field sample to be of sufficient size to demonstrate relevant methods, procedures, dwell times and quality of work expected in the finish product. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of visual qualities before proceeding with the Work. Repeat samples and test panels as necessary, adjusting methods and procedures, until acceptance by Architect is achieved. Retain acceptable panels in undisturbed condition, suitably marked, during restoration as a standard for judging completed work. Upon Architect's approval, acceptable panels may remain as part of the finished work. The samples of each type of restoration work shall be done in an area that will be exposed to the same weathering conditions as final location. Allow samples to cure at least three days before requesting review of color, texture and detailing match. Samples shall be viewed from

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 2 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

an approved distance. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of mock-ups and test panels preparation. 1. Travertine: a. Repair one crack approximately 10 inches in length. b. Repair one spall approximately 6 by 6 inches in area. c. Repoint one joint approximately 24 inches in length. 2. Marble: a. Repair one crack approximately 6 inches in length. b. Repair one spall approximately 6 by 6 inches in area. c. Polish one interior marble sill at window.

1.09 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all local, state and federal requirements regarding the use of masonry repair materials that contain chemicals considered hazardous by the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mortar and other materials from deterioration by moisture and temperature. Store in a dry location or in waterproof containers. Keep containers tightly closed and away from open flames. Protect liquid components from freezing. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. B. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for mixing, application, and curing of grouts and patching materials.

1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Perform work only when temperature of products being used, temperatures of existing and new materials, and air temperature and humidity comply with the manufacturer's requirements and requirements of this Section. In case of conflict, the most stringent requirements shall govern. 1. No work of this section shall be performed unless air and surface temperatures are between 40 degrees F and 90 degrees F and will remain so for at least 48 hours after completion of work. 2. Work shall be protected during hot weather from premature or rapid curing by the use of dampened fabric coverings. B. Cover partially completed work when work is not in progress. C. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 STONE A. General: 1. Interior stone types: a. ST-3: New travertine panels to match existing. b. ST-4: Existing travertine panels salvaged for reuse. c. ST-5: Existing black marble base and window sills salvaged for reuse. d. ST-6: New granite base to match existing. 2. Salvaged travertine and marble shall be free of checks, spalls, stains, discoloration, unusual patterns or other imperfections, and matching existing stone color and texture.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 3 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT A. Cement: Portland cement, color matching existing, conforming to ASTM C150, Type I, except complying with the staining requirements of ASTM C91 for not more than 0.02 percent water soluble alkali. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Pigments: ASTM C979, non-fading, compounded for use in mortar mixes and travertine filler, and having a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc; SGS Mortar Colors. D. Sand: ASTM C144, non-staining. E. Water: Potable and fresh. F. Use of proprietary grout mixes is not allowed without prior written approval from Architect.

2.03 INJECTION GROUT FOR CRACK REPAIR A. Grout shall be premixed and color matched by the manufacturer to a freshly cleaned sample of the stone. Grouting material shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers. Grouting material shall be mixed and used in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Admixture ingredients of any kind not specifically listed in this specification shall not be used. 1. Jahn M30 Micro Injection Adhesive by Cathedral Stone Products, Hanover, MD. http://www.cathedralstone.com/. (For hairline cracks up to 3/16 inch in width.) 2. Or approved equal.

2.04 WATER REPELLENTS A. Stand Off Limestone & Marble Protector by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence, KS. http://www.prosoco.com/. B. Or approved equal.

2.05 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Detergent: Concentrate, non-ionic, and containing no soaps, free alkali, solvents, abrasives, acids, caustics and other deleterious materials. 1. Vulpex Liquid Soap, Orvus paste, or approved equal; follow manufacturer's guidance for use of their products. Suggested detergents are supplied as a dense concentrate and must be diluted before use. B. Poultice Materials: 1. Sure Klean Marble Poultice by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence, KS. http://www.prosoco.com/. 2. Or approved equal. C. Other Materials: 1. Standoff Oil & Grease Stain Remover by PROSOCO, Inc., Lawrence, KS. http://www.prosoco.com/. 2. Or approved equal. D. All chemical materials shall be safe in use and shall not violate city, state, or federal environmental or safety regulations.

2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Protection Materials are specified in Section 01 35 91 - Historic Treatment Procedures.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 4 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

B. Spray Equipment: Provide equipment capable of providing cold water for controlled spray application of water. C. Brushes: Natural or nylon fiber bristle only. Brushes must be free of metal parts or tape all metal ferrules with duct tape. D. Scrapers: Plastic or wood only. Do not use metallic scrapers. E. Sponges. F. Cloth: 100% cotton.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for repair and restoration of interior stone panels. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence the Work until such conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor shall make thorough inspection to determine extent of stone to be repaired.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Install protection as specified in Section 01 35 91. 2. Provide protection during application of chemicals as specified in Section 01 35 91. 3. Prevent masonry patching materials from staining the face of masonry or other surfaces to be left exposed. Immediately remove all patching materials that come in contact with such surfaces. B. Joint Preparation: 1. Inspect and repoint all open and deteriorated joints. Deteriorated joints are defined as those which have loose or missing grout; shrinkage or structural cracks; voids; or holes. 2. Remove all loose or soft grout to a depth of at least 1 inch or 2-1/2 times joint width, whichever is greater. Do not damage edge of adjacent material. Remove additional grout if it is found to be unsound. When raking is complete, remove all grout and foreign material from raked joints; clean joint edges; use fine brush or compressed air to remove dust. 3. Only hand tools may be employed to rake out deteriorated and/or inappropriate mortar. 4. Other power chisels, power saws and air-abrasive tools are strictly forbidden.

3.03 CUTTING AND REMOVAL A. General: Designated stone panels and trim units are to be removed, stored and reset. Units shall be installed at their original location where possible. Where not possible, salvaged units shall be installed. B. Examination: Examine stone panels and trim to be removed for reinstallation later to determine best methods to safely and effectively perform removal and dismantling work. Examine adjacent work to determine what protective measures will be necessary. Make explorations, probes, and inquiries as necessary to determine condition of construction to be removed or dismantled and location of utilities and services to remain that may be hidden by construction that is to be removed or dismantled. 1. Verify that affected utilities have been disconnected and capped. 2. Inventory and record conditions of items to be removed for reinstallation. Make permanent record of measurements. Photograph all units using print film and label each with clear indication of its original location. C. Cutting and Removal:

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 5 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

1. Provide protection to prevent damage to existing construction to remain. 2. Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage stone panels and trim to be retained and removed for reinstallation. Review proposed procedures with Architect before proceeding. a. Cut marble and travertine joints with rigid guides to ensure straight, uniform cuts and to prevent over cutting into adjacent stones. Use thin saw blades so that stones can be reused. Replace with new any dismantled stones and adjacent stones if cut irregularly or otherwise damaged, at no additional cost to Owner. b. In general, use hand or small non-impact power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. D. Storage: Temporarily store removed panels and trim for reinstallation later.

3.04 CLEANING, GENERAL A. Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water do not wash over dry, cleaned surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning methods indicated. 1. Brushes: Scrubbing methods will be employed, using natural or nylon fiber bristle brushes, for cleaning deeply embedded dirt and stains. Do not use wire brushes, or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used. 2. Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage stone. a. Rinse water pressure shall not exceed 400 psi. b. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. c. Equip units with pressure gauges. 3. No abrasive, steam, or high water pressure techniques will be permitted. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces. Keep stone wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff. D. Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small area that are noticeably different, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas. 1. Before any stain removal treatment is started, thoroughly wet the stone around the stained area with clean water to prevent the spread of cleaners and to prevent the development of staining the finished work. Clean spots in the finished work are to be avoided. E. Water Application Methods: 1. Water-Spray Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from stone surface, and apply water in horizontal back-and-forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage. F. Cleaner Application Methods: 1. Dilute cleaning materials using clean water according to manufacturer's written instructions. Cleaning material dilutions and dwell times recommended by manufacturer are to serve as an initial guide for testing only. Actual mixes and dwell times shall be as determined after tests. 2. Apply cleaners to masonry surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi. Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer. G. Notify Architect if finished surface does not present a uniformly clean appearance after one cleaning operation.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 6 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

H. Finished work shall show no signs of stains, scratches, streaks or runs of discoloration from use of cleaners. Leave all exposed surfaces neat and clean.

3.05 CLEANING A. Cold-Water Wash: Use cold water applied by low-pressure spray. B. Detergent Cleaning: 1. Wet surface with water applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Scrub surface with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with water applied by low-pressure spray to remove detergent solution and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above, where required to produce cleaning effect established by mock-up. C. Poultice Application: 1. Examine surface to be cleaned prior to commencing cleaning operations for large cracks and open joints. If discovered, temporary fill with removable sealant to prevent penetration of cleaning materials. 2. Surface to be cleaned should be free of surface dirt or dust. 3. Dampen surface area to be cleaned with clean water. 4. Mix absorbent material with a cleaning solution per manufacturer's written instructions. Stir continuously until the mixture forms a smooth, wet paste. 5. Apply a layer of poultice paste, 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch in thickness, immediately to the stained surface. 6. Leave poultice paste on the surface until completely dry or for a maximum of 24 hours. 7. Once poultice is completely dried, scrape mixture from the surface using wood, plastic, or rubber spatulas. 8. Rinse treated area thoroughly with water and a soft brush to remove remaining residue. 9. Reapply poultice for consecutive treatments if required.

3.06 REGROUTING AND PATCHING A. Mix grout with water by hand or with a slow speed mixer to a smooth, stiff consistency, according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Match grout color to existing joints. B. Dampen tile surface with water before filling joints and losses with grout. C. Spread a generous amount of grout to joints and losses with a sharp, firm rubber grout float. Work the grout paste into joints until completely filled. Use diagonal strokes to pack the joints. D. Remove excess grout from the face of the wainscoting with the edge of the grout float. Hold the float at a 90 degree angle and pull it at a 45 degree angle diagonally across the wainscoting to avoid pulling out the material. E. Let grout set for approximately 10 minutes. F. Wipe remaining grout off of the wainscoting with a damp sponge (not wet), working in a diagonal motion. Rinse the sponge and repeat the step until all of the grout residue is removed and stone is completely clean of grout haze. G. Allow to dry.

3.07 PATCHING OF SPALLS AND SMALL HOLES A. Patch the following stone units unless another type of repair or replacement is indicated: 1. Units with chipped edges or corners. Patch chipped edges or corners. Patch chipped edges or corners measuring over 1/4 inch in least dimension.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 7 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

B. Mask adjacent mortar joint or rake out for repointing if patch extends to edge of stone unit. C. Mix patching compound in individual batches to match each stone unit being patched. Combine one or more colors of patching compound, as needed, to produce exact match. D. Place patching compound in layers, but not less than 1/4 inch or more than 2 inches thick. Roughen surface of each layer to provide a key for next layer. 1. Simple Details: Trowel, scrape, or carve surface of patch to match texture and surrounding surface plane or contour of the stone. Shape and finish surface before or after curving, as determined by testing, to best match existing stone. E. Keep each layer damp for 72 hours or until patching compound has set. F. Remove and replace patches with hairline cracks or that show separation from stone at edges, and those that do not match adjoining stone in color or texture.

3.08 CRACK REPAIR, USING INJECTION GROUT A. General: 1. Comply with all applicable recommendations of manufacturer's written specifications and requirements. 2. Do not add any bonding agents, accelerators, or retarders to grout. 3. Discard all grout that has hardened or exceeded its allowable pot life after mixing. Provide separate, clearly labeled containers for discarded grout and remove material from the staging area as soon as practical. 4. While injecting, continually check for grout runs and spills on the surface of the masonry. Remove uncured grout from substrate before it has time to set using a clean sponge and water. Cured grout may only be removed chemically or mechanically. B. Wash surface and interior of the crack using clean water to remove all dust, loose or deleterious material, which could prevent proper flow and/or adhesion. C. Mix injection grout mix per manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Moisten interior of the crack immediately before injection by flushing with clean water. If the crack is allowed to dry out before grout is injected, this step must be repeated. E. Drill a series of injection ports in the center of the crack. These ports should be drilled in a downward direction. Between the ports, the crack should be sealed with removable, non- staining clay, sealant, or caulk. F. Inject grout into lowest port and continue until it flows freely from this port and other ports at the same level. Seal ports using non-staining clay, sealant, or caulk and proceed in identical fashion until the crack is filled. Clean up overflow and runs immediately with clean water. G. Allow the grout to dry for manufacturer's recommended time and remove all sealant, caulk, or clay. H. Repair the crack surface and injection ports with a mortar that matches color and type of existing masonry.

3.09 REINSTALLATION OF PANELS AND TRIM A. General: Designated stone panels and trim units are to be removed, stored and reset. Units shall be installed at their original location where possible. Where not possible, salvaged units shall be installed. B. Do not fill and patch stone before installation. Repair in situ. C. Clean stone before setting. D. Polish newly cut edges of panels and trim that will be exposed as specified in 3.10. 1. Edge profile to match that of existing panels remaining in place.

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 8 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

E. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. F. All salvaged stone shall be set by experienced stone masons, accurately and in accordance with Construction Documents. If required, supply anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments to securely anchor stonework in place. G. Install stone plumb and level with joints uniform in width and accurately aligned and matching existing. H. During setting, immediately wash off any mortar splashed or dropped on face of stone during setting with a sponge and clean potable water. I. Supply setting buttons to prevent extrusion of mortar. J. Exercise care to prevent displacement of stones while grouting. K. Contractor shall supply temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability and alignment as units are being permanently connected.

3.10 MARBLE AND TRAVERTINE POLISHING A. Polish marble and travertine after all other cleaning and repair procedures are completed. Polished finish shall match balance of the stone surfaces in sound condition. Polishing and sealing procedures may require modification so that new or reinstalled marble or travertine matches the balance of the original. B. Use a single or three-head machine. C. Begin with 120 grit diamond. Complete with 400 grit diamond. D. Polish to a honed finish. E. Sealing: Apply a water repellent to all marble sills following manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion, remove all tools, equipment and unnecessary materials from site. Remove and dispose masking materials following completion of Work. Return adjacent areas to clean conditions that existed prior to the start of Work. B. Dispose hazardous waste materials according to manufacturer’s instructions by legal means. C. Sweep or flush away all residues washed from building surfaces from sidewalks and site areas nightly. Leave premises clean and neat at all times. D. Protect ______work until firmly cured. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 09 01 70 - 9 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set INTERIOR STONE PANELS 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for gypsum boards and accessories, equipment, labor and services for drywall and other finish systems as indicated and required for a complete installation. B. Definitions: ASTM C 11. C. Joint treatment and accessories. D. Bullet resistant sheathing and wallboard.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for cementitious materials and accessories. B. Samples: When directed provide one by one foot square incorporating one panel joint demonstrating finish texture required. C. Test Reports: Bullet resistant sheathing and wallboard.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Assemblies: Tested per ASTM E 119 and UL listed, or other acceptable agency, for rating required. B. Acoustic Performance: Assemblies tested per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413. C. Delivery, Storage and Handling: GA-216, GA-800. D. Environmental Requirements: ASTM C 840; minimum ambient temperature between 55 and 85 degrees F., and as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: Comply with requirements of Section 09 22 16.[]

2.02 GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396 0.625 inch thick, Type X unless otherwise required; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. Obtain gypsum board products from a single manufacturer to the greatest extent possible, products of different manufacturers shall be acceptable to the manufacturer of gypsum board 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Vertical and horizontal applications; ASTM D 3273 mold growth resistance of 10 or better; treated core and facings having no special finish requirements with tapered edges, USG Mold Tough Firecode, Georgia Pacific Mold Guard Type X, Temple-Inland ComfortGuard Type X or approved. 2. Impact Resistant Panels: USG Mold Tough VHI Firecode Core, or approved having ASTM C 1629 Level 3 resistance to soft body impact B. Bullet Resistant Sheathing and Wallboard: Woven roving, multi-ply, ballistic grade fiberglass cloth with thermoset polyester resin.

214002 / CAMS 09 21 16 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Joint Compound: Two grades for interior use; one specifically for bedding tapes and filling depressions, and one for topping and sanding. C. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations. D. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Metal Framing: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 754 and Section 09 22 16 1. Steel Fire Door Frames: Comply with Project requirements, and GA-219. 2. Coordinate with Section 09 83 11 requirements for acoustically insulated assemblies. 3. Backing and Reinforcing: Verify assemblies have been reinforced for mounting of wall and ceiling supported components 4. Ceilings: Coordinate with Section 09 51 00 for work supported by suspended acoustical ceiling grid assemblies. B. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. Face side out, joints tightly butted, plumb, level and square; shim as necessary to maintain required tolerances. Do not use damaged boards. Cover both faces of partition frame including concealed spaces, except in reinforced chase walls. In concealed areas scraps 8 square feet and larger may be used, unless otherwise necessary for performance requirements. 1. Fire Rated Assemblies: Assemblies shall comply with requirements of assembly listing. Coordinate with Section 07 84 00 requirements for perimeter and penetration seals. B. End Joints: Minimum number possible, locate exposed joints away from center of walls and ceilings; stagger not-less-than one foot in alternate courses. Install wall and partition boards with long edges vertical; stairwells, and high walls with long edge horizontal, and end joints staggered over supports, unless otherwise acceptable. C. Locate edge or end joint over supports; stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite faces of partitions. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking; provide supplementary support at corners, openings, cutouts, and penetrations. Reinforcing may be omitted where control joints are required. 1. Abut like edges; tapered edges against tapered edges and cut ends against cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. D. Control and Expansion Joints: As minimum comply with ASTM C 840 and GA 201 recommendations for control joints, obtain Architect approval of location of joints not shown on drawings; form with space between edges of boards prepared to receive trim accessories. 1. At door jambs, extending to ceiling from both corners.

214002 / CAMS 09 21 16 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

2. Ceiling dimension exceeding 30 feet without perimeter relief; 50 feet with relief. E. Single-Layer Application: Screw to metal supports; screw or nail, and glue to wood. 1. Ceilings: Apply board prior to application to wall and partition to the greatest extent possible. 2. Long edges horizontal on partitions and walls 8 feet one inch and less in height; use maximum length sheets to minimize end joints. 3. Z-Furring: Long edges vertical, supported by furring; no end joints. F. Double-Layer Application: Gypsum backing board base, and gypsum wallboard face layer; stagger joints between layers at least ten inches. Fasten base layer with screws and face layer with adhesive and screws. 1. Ceilings: Apply base prior to application of wall and partition base; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated. 2. Z-Furring: Base layer, long edges vertical, locate on furring member; face layer long edges vertical or horizontal; offset vertical joints at least one furring member. G. Trim and Accessories: Provide edge trim, and corner beads on exposed edges of gypsum base; types indicated, and as required. Fasten to substrate as recommended by manufacturer; where feasible, use same fasteners required for gypsum board, otherwise, nail or staple. 1. Embed face flange in joint compound, unless semi-finishing type indicated; L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work; kerf-type where work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim; U-type where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled. H. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments; provide 0.25 to 0.5 inch space, trim edge with U or J-type semi-finishing edge trim, and seal joint with acoustical sealant. I. Bullet Resistant Sheathing and Wallboard: 1. Install bullet resistant sheathing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and with manufacturer approved fasteners. 2. Cover all joints between boards with a 4 inch strip of the same thickness material as the boards, centered on the joint.

3.03 SPECIAL INSTALLATIONS A. Acoustically Insulated Work: Double-layer work on resilient furring, unless otherwise indicated; seal perimeter, joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant on both faces of partition. 1. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of beads. 2. Close off sound-flanking paths around or through the work, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings. 3. Multi-layer Assemblies: Tape and finish joints in each layer. 4. Penetrations: Oversize to allow a minimum anular gap of 0.75 inch for entire perimeter. Isolate penetrant from wall assembly. Provide sheet metal sleeve bedded in sealant and fill annular gap with acoustic insulation (regardless of whether penetrant is insulated). Comply with Section 07 90 00 requirements for seals. 5. Fill voids at junction boxes and similar components in assembly cavity with acoustic insulation.

3.04 FINISHING A. Fill and prepare butt-joints, edges, accessory flanges, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and as necessary for final finish; prefill open joints, and rounded or beveled edges. Tape joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessories are indicated 1. Apply joint compound in 3 coats; omit third coat on concealed work. B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

214002 / CAMS 09 21 16 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 21 16 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 22 16 METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for light gage metal framing, and related accessories to support plaster, drywall, and assemblies indicated.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for metal support components, and accessories. 1. Structural Characteristics: For anchors, pre-engineered support components and assemblies provide ICC-ES Report and other documentation satisfactory to Authority having jurisdiction over the Work. B. Shop Drawings: To the extent not documented by product data submittals for Project specific installations provide details including anchors for each assembly type proposed for use in the Work. Document Contractor designed seismic loading resistance; including resolution of conflicts between building system assemblies and ceiling suspension. 1. Provide drawings and calculations sealed by Registered Engineer for Contractor designed support systems and anchors not having an ICC-ES Report and applications not complying with ICC-ES criteria. C. Coordination Drawing: Provide as necessary for coordination of ceiling supports with construction in the ceiling plenum and where other work may affect metal framing systems work of this Section.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Subject to Project requirements, provide products by a member company of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association, including but not limited to: Dietrich Industries, SCAFCO Corporation and Steeler Incorporated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: AISI Specifications for Cold Formed Steel Structural Members and Project requirements 1. Suspension System: International Building Code with State amendments Section 803 and Chapter 16, and ASTM C 635. 2. Coordination of Ceiling Suspension Support With Building Structure and Other Building Systems: Where direct anchorage to building structure is impractical due to dimensional restriction, conflict with HVAC, plumbing, electrical or other considerations provide fully engineered design for ceiling support assembly. Coordinate with HVAC, Plumbing, electrical fire protection and all other building systems to identify potential areas of conflict for ceiling anchorage and prepare engineered solution in advance of installation. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Fire Rated Installations: ASTM E 119 tested, UL listed assemblies for rating required. 2. Structural Criteria: Comply with Section 01615 requirements. 3. Material yield stress and member structural properties are minimum required, increase material thickness and yield strength for member size, spacing and span required to limit deflection due to Code required loads to L/360 of span.

214002 / CAMS 09 22 16 - 1 METAL FRAMING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: C shaped [] Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. B. Furring: ASTM A 653, G60 galvanized, and ASTM C 645, Size components to comply with ASTM C 754 and for installation required. 1. Channels and Braces: Cold-rolled steel. 2. Hat-Shaped and Z-Furring: For mechanical attachment. 3. Studs: Cee-shaped. 4. verify whether hat channels and resilient channels are used, member sizes and gauges, confirm the components indicated are readily available in the project area a. 26 GAGE STUDS LIMITED TO FOUR FT HORIZ. SPAN, INDICATE SIZES REQUIRED. 5. Brackets: Corrugated edges; length adjustable to 2.25 in. 6. Anchors: Wire ties, clips bolts and screws complying with Project requirements, and as recommended by manufacturer. C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating. 3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems indicated on drawings. D. Fasteners: ASTM C1002 self-piercing tapping screws Type and size required, and recommended by manufacturer for substrate and application indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate installation with supporting structure, inserts, imbeds, anchors, supplementary framing, and blocking to develop full strength of metal framing system, and comply with Project requirements. 1. Furnish inserts, and imbeds to other trades for installations well in advance of time needed for coordination with other work. 2. Coordinate attachments for metal support systems with spray applied fireproofing.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing Systems: Provide framing components for assemblies subject to imposed loads as work of Section 05 40 00 and this Section as indicated and as necessary to comply with Project requirements including but not limited to member size, and gage for span and spacing required 1. For Screw Attached Gypsum: ASTM C 754. 2. Lath and Furring: ASTM C 841, and Steel Stud Manufacturers' Association recommendations; do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 3. Coordinate with Section 09 21 16 and Section 09 81 00 requirements for acoustically insulated assemblies. Frame double stud acoustic walls so that nothing bridges the gap

214002 / CAMS 09 22 16 - 2 METAL FRAMING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

between each row of studs, and off-set studs in each row a minimum of 10 inches. Coordinate framing to ensure isolation of partition assembly and that required acoustic performance is achieved. 4. Sill Gaskets: Provide two contiguous lines of specified product at sills of walls and seal against air intrusion and sound transmission. Comply with Section 07 84 00 requirements at fire rated assemblies. B. Component Size and Spacing: Indicated and as required by reference standards; attach to supporting structure by welding, and mechanical joining as indicated and acceptable. C. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches on center. D. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs to same spacing as wall studs. E. Align stud web openings horizontally. F. Secure studs to tracks using crimping method. Do not weld. G. Fabricate corners using a minimum of three studs. H. Double stud at wall openings, door and window jambs, not more than 2 inches from each side of openings. I. Provide supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations, and openings in the work, and for support of wall-hung shelving, cabinets, fixtures, equipment, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, surface mounted hardware and similar work as necessary. J. Isolate system to prevent transfer of loads from structure. Provide flexible joints to absorb loads, and movement, but maintain lateral support. 1. Provide deflection heads at tracks attached to structural deck. 2. Coordinate with Section 09 51 00 requirements for acoustically insulated assemblies.

3.03 HORIZONTAL FRAMING A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C754.Coordinate with assemblies in ceiling plenum and minimize potential for conflicts with ceiling supports. Modify ceiling supports to accommodate work in the ceiling plenum, provide supplemental suspension members and hangers as necessary to comply with System Description requirements B. Install furring after work above ceiling or soffit is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C. Install furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work. D. Securely anchor hangers to structural members or embed in structural slab. Space hangers as required to limit deflection to criteria indicated. Use rigid hangers at exterior soffits. E. Space main carrying channels at maximum 72 inch on center, and not more than 6 inches from wall surfaces. Lap splice securely. F. Securely fix carrying channels to hangers to prevent turning or twisting and to transmit full load to hangers. G. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels, not more than 2 inches from perimeter walls, and rigidly secure. Lap splices securely.

3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 22 16 - 3 METAL FRAMING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for acoustical ceilings, metal suspension systems, and accessories.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Conference: Comply with requirements for Project Meetings; provide coordination of building systems and other work to be performed above finish ceiling elevation. 1. Verify compliance with finish ceiling elevations and accommodation of all work necessary in the space between the finish ceiling and underside of structure, including but not limited to beams and other structure restricting ceiling plenum space. 2. Layout of items penetrating finish ceilings and coordination with ceiling support connections to structure, trim and perimeter edging as required. 3. Confirmation of painting requirements for plenum spaces exposed to view at termination of suspended finish ceiling assembly.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Required for ceiling panels, suspension systems, and accessories; including maintenance instructions 1. Certification of Recycled Material Content in Metal Framing Components: To the maximum extent possible provide documentation of recycled content and that portion that is post consumer and that portion that is post industrial by weight. 2. Certification of compliance with Local / Regional Materials requirements. 3. Provide material value documentation for metal support components including value- added cost of shop fabrication. 4. Test Results: ICC-ES reports for metal suspension systems, and ceiling panels; comply with performance requirements B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. 1. Ceiling support assembly seismic loading resistance; including resolution of conflicts between building system assemblies and ceiling suspension. Provide drawings and calculations stamped by Contractor’s registered structural engineer for work that does not have ICC-ES certification demonstrating compliance with System Description Article. 2. Reflected ceiling plan documenting coordination of penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Indicate ceiling suspension members and location and method of attachment to building structure complying with Performance Requirements. 3. Coordination with building systems including but not limited to HVAC, plumbing, electrical, fire suppression and communication, and requirements for exposed structure. 4. Intermediate Supports for Ceiling Suspension Systems: As necessary for specialty and custom ceiling assemblies. C. Samples: Color, finish and type required; 12 inches square of ceiling panels, and 12 inches length of suspension systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustic Panels:

214002 / CAMS 09 51 00 - 1 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1. Suspension System: OSSC Section 803 and Chapter 16, ASTM C 635, ASTM E 580 and Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau Technical Bulletin 401 OREGON. 2. Coordination of Ceiling Suspension Support With Building Structure and Other Building Systems: Where direct anchorage to building structure is impractical due to conflict with mechanical, plumbing electrical or other building system assemblies provide fully engineered alternative for anchorage of ceiling suspension assembly. Coordinate with work of HVAC, plumbing and electrical systems, identify potential areas of conflict for anchorage and support of suspended ceiling assembly and provide engineered solution in advance of installation. 3. Metal suspension systems specified in this Section shall be coordinated with work of Section 09 21 16 for support of gypsum board ceilings B. Performance Requirements: 1. Ceiling Components: UL tested and labeled for flame spread 25, and smoke development 50, and required fire resistance. 2. Seismic Design: Comply with OSSC Chapter 16 requirements utilizing Project specific criteria for Use Group, Design Category, Building Configuration and Site Classification.

2.02 CEILING PANELS A. Lay-In Acoustic Panels: ASTM E1264,. 1. ACP-1: Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E; Armstrong Calla 282, square edge. NRC 0.85 2. ACP-5: Not used Type XII, Form 2, Pattern E, Armstrong Optima Vector Plank, square edge panel sizes as indicated. NRC Rating: 0.9

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Comply with ASTM C635; Indirect Hung Suspension System; Heavy Duty. white enamel finish except as otherwise required. 1. ACP-1: Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16 Exposed Tee, Blizzard White, and as otherwise necessary for the required installation 2. Gypsum Board Ceilings: Armstrong Drywall Grid with 1.5 inch flange. Provide attachment, angle and transition clips and other accessories as necessary for ceiling configuration and installation types required. 3. Wall Molding: Accommodate movement required by Performance Requirements; coordinate with suspension system, and panel edge detail; provide ICC certification of product compliance with requirements. 4. Edge Trim: Extruded aluminum channel in profile and configuration indicated; finish to match suspension grid. Armstrong Axiom. 5. Penetrations: Escutcheon and other trim configured to fit the penetration, provide edge detail and finished appearance acceptable to Architect. B. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung; type recommended by suspension system manufacturer for installation as required. 1. Powder Actuated: Provide ICC-ES Report for pull-out resistance in directed tension and approval of regulatory official having jurisdiction over the Project. Oversize load factor as required. 2. Hanger Wire: sized so that stress at 3-times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gage. 3. Impact Clips: Where indicated provide manufacturer's standard impact clip system design to absorb impact forces against lay-in panels. 4. Dry Wall Attachment Clips: Armstrong Prelude 15/16 T bar for GWB ceiling.

2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Insulation: Comply with 09 84 15 requirements; provide for ceiling types indicated.

214002 / CAMS 09 51 00 - 2 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Furnish ceiling layout, and inserts, clips, and support materials, to be installed by other trades well in advance of time needed for coordination. B. Coordinate layout and installation with other work supported by and penetrating through ceiling; light fixtures, mechanical and electrical equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partitions. 1. Measure ceiling area and layout as indicated, balance border widths at opposite edges of ceiling, avoid use of less-than-half width units.

3.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard joint configuration for exposed flanges of intersecting suspension system members, for uniform, neat well-crafted joints. Miter exposed corners, unless otherwise acceptable. 2. In lieu of installing suspension system per Design Requirements, provide certified design by registered engineer. 3. Molding: At ceiling perimeter and penetrations, to conceal panel edges; provide spring spacers for panels in concealed suspension systems. Support moldings not adjacent to runners as required for suspension system, unless otherwise indicated B. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. C. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. E. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. F. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. G. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.

3.03 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.

214002 / CAMS 09 51 00 - 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 0.125 inch in any 10 feet for acoustical panels and 0.125 inch in any 12 feet for acoustical tile. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 51 00 - 4 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for resilient floor coverings, stairway components and accessory products. B. Resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Resilient stair accessories. E. Installation accessories.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Conference: Coordinate provisions for compliance with flooring substrate requirements including but not limited to surface integrity, elimination of contaminants and moisture content and pH.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of floor covering pattern, seam locations and seaming method. C. Samples: Type, color and pattern required, showing full-range of color and pattern variations to be expected in final work. D. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RESILIENT TILE A. Resilient Floor RF-1: Not Used B. RF-2: Armstrong LinoArt Marmorette sheet, LS096 Obsidian, NATURCote II UV cured polyurethane, 2.5 mm thickness.

2.02 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; Style A at carpet and Style B at other areas, 4 inches height except as otherwise necessary for coordination with existing wall base. Provide factory corners. 1. RB-1: Roppe,100 Black.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Floor Transition: Roppe #73 Rolling Traffic Transition, 100 Black

214002 / CAMS 09 65 00 - 1 RESILIENT FLOORING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives; follow the recommendations of RFCI Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings. B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. D. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. E. Clean substrate. F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Fit joints tightly. E. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

3.04 SHEET FLOORING A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. B. Double cut sheet at seams. C. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer.

214002 / CAMS 09 65 00 - 2 RESILIENT FLOORING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.05 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

3.06 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.07 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 65 00 - 3 RESILIENT FLOORING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 68 13 MODULAR CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes requirements for modular carpeting and accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints. C. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile CPT-1: Tandus Live Wire 04632, River Basin 71408; 24 inch module. B. Carpet Tile CPT-8: Tandus Tenera 04120, Nightshade 45212 24 inch module.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate.

214002 / CAMS 09 68 13 - 1 MODULAR CARPETING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in ashlar pattern accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in required pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 68 13 - 2 MODULAR CARPETING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 75 13 STONE FACING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for interior wall cladding and soffits:

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Conference: 1. Verify coordination of supporting construction with stone panels and connection hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Each variety of new stone for required appearance match to existing and other performance requirements. 2. Connection hardware and other installation products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the installer's Oregon registered professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 18 by 24 inches square with faces and edges finished to demonstrate required appearance match. Include three or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone will be judged. 2. Provide one set of each type of installation hardware for both standard and custom fabricated components and accessories including but not limited to pointing mortar and sealants.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and professional engineer.

E. Sealant Compatibility Test Report: From sealant manufacturer, complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants and indicating that sealants will neither stain nor damage stone.

F. Maintenance Data: For interior stone facing to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate interior stone facing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer who employs experienced stone setters who are skilled in installing interior stone facing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

214002 / CAMS 09 75 13 - 1 STONE FACING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1. Installer's responsibilities include installing interior stone facing, including anchoring system, and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.

B. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining separators and nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.

C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain air and material temperatures to comply with requirements of installation material manufacturers, but not less than 50 deg F during installation and for 7 days after completion.

B. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive interior stone facing by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Metal framing and backing components and assemblies are indicated diagrammatically and do not represent a complete engineered system. Coordinate with work of Section 09 22 16 for metal framing to support loads imposed by anchored stone veneer work of this Section; provide final design and engineering of 16 gage backing plate connections to framing as necessary to receive anchors and transfer loads imposed by veneer assembly. Delegated design and engineering shall account for the specified Performance Requirements in coordination with the supporting assembly.

1. Stone Attachments: ASTM C 1242; standard components of the basis of design manufacturer are indicated; modify standard components and provide custom fabrications as necessary for compliance of anchored veneer assemblies with Project requirements. Coordinate supporting framing with attachment components provided including but not limited projections indicated on A642.

B. Performance Requirements: Comply with Section 09 22 16 in addition to requirements of this criteria in the General Structural Notes on S001 – S004, Design Requirements of this Section and the following.

1. Support of Anchored Stone Masonry: Marble Institute to America – Dimension Stone Design Manual.

2.2 STONE

A. ST-3: Montana Rose Travertine: Match appearance and physical characteristics of similar existing material. Provide 2 centimeter thick material in the unit sizes and configurations indicated, both faces and edges dressed 1. Source: Stone Center, Inc. Portland, OR 2. Quarry: Yellowstone Travertine. 3. Finish Surfaces: Filled and processed as necessary to match similar existing for faces and edges.

214002 / CAMS 09 75 13 - 2 STONE FACING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

B. ST-4: Designates existing Travertine wall cladding salvaged for reuse; material shall be furnished for installation as work of this Section including but not necessarily limited to cutting to required unit sizes.

C. ST-5: Existing Radio Black Marble wall base and window sill salvaged for reuse; material shall be furnished for installation as work of this Section including but not necessarily limited to cutting to required unit sizes.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Adhesives, General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone species and recommended by their manufacturer for the application required. Provide products of a single manufacturer throughout the work unless otherwise acceptable.

B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I[, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. Provide Custom Building Products, Laticrete International, MAPEI Corp or approved

C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3[, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. Provide Custom Building Products, Laticrete International, MAPEI Corp or approved

D. Stone Adhesive: 2-part, epoxy-resin or polyester-resin stone adhesive with an initial set time of not more than 2 hours at 70 deg F, and with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Color: Clear.

2.4 GROUT

A. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Grout Type: Sanded or Unsanded depending on stone type and joint width.

B. Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

C. Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

D. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Provide Custom Building Products, Laticrete International, MAPEI Corp or approved

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants of characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements of Section 07 92 00 and will not stain the stone they are applied to. 1. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in stone adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise required.

2.6 STONE ANCHORS AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Stone Anchors: 300 series stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240 and A 276, alloy recommended for fabrication types and service conditions required; basis of design is Red Leaf Anchors HA01 and HA04 and as otherwise required for specialty and custom fabrications. 1. Fasteners: Annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.2. a. Specialty Fasteners: Provide in configuration necessary for assembly types required and complying with UL assembly listing.

214002 / CAMS 09 75 13 - 3 STONE FACING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

B. Direct-Mount Anchoring Systems: Fabricator's approved design suitable for anchoring specified stone materials in unit size, configuration and thickness to required structural backing. Shall be fully concealed from view in the completed installation unless otherwise necessary for required appearance match to similar existing work.

2.7 STONE ACCESSORIES

A. Temporary Setting Shims: Rigid plastic shims, nonstaining to stone, sized to suit joint thickness.

B. Setting Shims for Direct-Mount Anchoring Systems: Strips of resilient plastic or neoprene, nonstaining to stone, of thickness needed to prevent point loading of stone on anchors and of depths to suit anchors without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.

C. Cleaner: Stone cleaner specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

D. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces and as necessary for required appearance match to similar existing.

2.8 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated and to comply with fabrication and construction tolerances recommended by applicable stone association. 1. Where items are installed with adhesive or where edges of stone is visible in the finished work, make items uniform in thickness and of identical thickness for each type of item; gage back of stone if necessary. 2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stone securely in place; shape beds to fit supports. 5. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work.

B. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each type of stone required and to match approved Samples and mockups.

C. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 1. Grade and mark stone for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stone units match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved Samples.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive interior stone facing and conditions under which interior stone facing will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of interior stone facing. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear

214002 / CAMS 09 75 13 - 4 STONE FACING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.

3.3 SETTING OF STONE, GENERAL

A. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.

B. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals and openings as required to accommodate contiguous work.

C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone in place. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

D. Erect stone units level, plumb, and true with uniform joint widths. Use temporary shims to maintain joint width.

E. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. Sealing of expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints is specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 2. Keep expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints free of plaster, mortar, grout, and other rigid materials.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch maximum.

B. Variation from Level: For lintels, sills, chair rails, horizontal bands, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, 3/8 inch maximum.

D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For thickness of walls from dimensions indicated, do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch.

E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/32-inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

3.5 STONE CLADDING

A. Set units firmly against setting spots. Locate setting spots at anchors and spaced not more than 18 inches apart across back of unit, but provide no fewer than 1 setting spot per 2 sq. ft., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Moisture Exposure: Use portland cement mortar for setting spots where stone is applied to inside face of exterior walls and at other locations where stone or cavity will be exposed to moisture.

B. Set units on direct-mount anchoring system with anchors securely attached to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1242.

214002 / CAMS 09 75 13 - 5 STONE FACING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with sealant indicated for filling kerfs. 2. Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths and to prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of stone a distance at least equal to width of joint.

C. Minimum Anchors: Provide anchors at a maximum of 24 inches o.c. around perimeter of interior stone facing panels with a minimum of 4 anchors per panel.

D. Minimum Anchors: Provide a minimum of 4 anchors per panel up to 12 sq. ft. in face area, plus a minimum of 2 additional anchors for each additional 8 sq. ft..

E. Grout joints after setting.

3.6 STOOLS, BASE AND TRIM

A. Stone Window Stools: Set stone window stools on masonry in a full bed of mortar.

B. Stone Window Stools: Set stone window stools on wood or metal framing or wood blocking in a full bed of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for pointing with sealant.

C. Where window stools are too long to be installed in one piece, assemble by bonding joints with stone adhesive as units are set. Mask areas adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Clamp units in place to ensure that window stools are properly aligned and joints are minimum width.

D. Where joints are indicated in window stools maintain alignment across joints. Use temporary shims as necessary to maintain joint width.

E. Stone Base and Trim at Walls with Stone Paneling: Set units by adhering to interior stone facing with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for grouting.

F. Stone Base and Trim at Walls with Stone Paneling: Set units firmly against setting spots. Located setting spots at anchors and spaced not more than 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. Provide no fewer than 2 anchors per piece for stone trim up to 48 inches in length, plus 1 additional anchor for each additional 24 inches of length.

G. Stone Base and Trim at Walls without Stone Paneling: Adhere units to plywood backing with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Hold adhesive back from exposed edges of joints to allow for grouting.

3.7 GROUTING JOINTS

A. Grout stone to comply with ANSI A108.10. 1. Use sanded grout mixture for joints wider than 1/8 inch. 2. Use unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower.

B. Remove temporary shims before grouting.

C. Tool joints uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

3.8 JOINT-SEALANT INSTALLATION

A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Remove temporary shims before applying sealants.

214002 / CAMS 09 75 13 - 6 STONE FACING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean interior stone facing as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.

B. Remove and replace interior stone facing of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective stone facing. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone facing and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone facing not complying with other requirements indicated.

C. Replace in a manner that results in interior stone facing's matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

D. Clean interior stone facing no fewer than six days after completion of grouting and pointing, using clean water and soft rags or stiff-bristle fiber brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.

E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage. Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to prevent damage.

B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces.

END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 75 13 - 7 STONE FACING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 83 11 ACOUSTICAL WALL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes requirements for demountable acoustic wall panel systems.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM E2573 - Standard Practice for Specimen Preparations and Mounting of Site-Fabricated Stretch Systems to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Specimen warranty. B. Shop Drawings: Elevations indicating proposed locations of fabric seams and details indicating typical transitions to other finish surfaces. C. Samples: 1. For each fabric specified, minimum size [] square yard, representing actual product in color, texture, and pattern. 2. Acoustical backing material, minimum 12 inches square. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Supply an additional 5 percent of fabric installed for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all components of acoustical wall systems by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in site-fabricated wall systems, with not less than 5 years of documented experience in installing wall systems of the type specified, and approved by the manufacturer. C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and overall appearance are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable workmanship. 4. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the completed Work.

214002 / CAMS 09 83 11 - 1 ACCOUSTICAL WALL SYSTEMS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect fabric, acoustical backing, and track from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Do not deliver materials to project until wet work such as concrete and plaster has been completed. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.06 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a 5-year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACOUSTICAL WALL SYSTEM A. Acoustical Wall System: Site-installed stretched fabric over acoustical core and continuous perimeter and intermediate mounting frames applied directly to wall surface; designed to permit removal and replacement of fabric in individual panels without affecting adjacent panels. 1. AWP-2:, BOD Conwed, Respond A Series, 1 inch, square edge, 6-7 PCF Density Firbeglass Core with Hardened Edges a. Fabric Facing: Knoll Asterisk II - unbacked, WC2114/1, Flurry

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that all casework, markerboards, door and window jambs, finished ceiling, and other finished items abutting acoustical wall systems have been installed.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove wall plates and other obstacles, and prepare substrates to receive core material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

214002 / CAMS 09 83 11 - 2 ACCOUSTICAL WALL SYSTEMS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical wall systems at locations indicated, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Acoustical Core Material: Cut core material to fit snugly within frame perimeter. Apply adhesive and press core material into place, maintaining constant plane. Staple core material to prevent air gaps and to maintain secure contact for full adhesion. 1. At fixtures mounted within area of acoustical wall system, install rigid blocking for backing and to maintain fixture surface flush with acoustical panels. C. Fabric: Stretch fabric over acoustical core material, locking fabric edges into track's serrated jaws using manufacturer's recommended tool. Keep fabric weave plumb, level, and true, in proper relation to building lines, without ripples, waviness, hourglass, or other deleterious effects. 1. Seams are not permitted. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 83 11 - 3 ACCOUSTICAL WALL SYSTEMS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 84 15 ACOUSTIC INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for acoustical insulation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used in the Work. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Specimen warranty. B. Shop Drawings: Elevations indicating proposed locations of fabric seams and details indicating typical transitions to other finish surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACOUSTIC INSULATION A. Glass Fiber Insulations: Formaldehyde free and contain a minimum 25 percent of recycled material, h flame spread 25, and smoke development 50 rating, and comply with individual product specifications. 1. Fiberglass Batts: Owens Corning Select Sound Black Acoustic Blanket is the basis of design. 2. Fiber Glass Board: Owens Corning Select Sound Black Acoustic Board 3. Acoustical Liner: ASTM C 1071 Type I flexible, Class A, 2 inches thick having an Noise Reduction Coefficient of 0.95 evaluated per ASTM C 423 Mounting A; finish, black matt face. Owens Corning Rotary Duct Liner, or approved. B. Acoustic Ceiling Insulation: Laminated two-ply glass fiber panel having an NRC of 0.85 for nominal 1 inch thickness per ASTM C 423 Type A; Wall Technologies, New Dimensions panel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Extend insulation in thickness indicated, and as necessary to comply with require performance values over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. B. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. C. Duct Liner: Provide for wood panel assembly type WD-4, 2 inch thickness; coordinate with wall furring work and wood panel assembly work for complete assembly as indicated. D. Acoustic Ceiling Insulation: Coordinate with work of Section 09 51 00 and provide perimeter trim components as indicated. Provide adhesive application to concrete deck between slotted channels to support building services. 1. Provide field verified dimensions for custom size panels required. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 84 15 - 1 ACCOUSTIC INSULATION OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints and other coatings. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before installing equipment.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. B. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors available for each finishing product specified. C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on aluminum sheet, 24x24 inch in size. D. Paint Systems Schedule: List substrate, materials, color, gloss, application and anticipated dry film thickness for each finish sample

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sole Source: Provide primers and paint produced by same manufacturer for each paint system. B. Coordination of Work: Ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for various undercoats and substrates. C. Do not paint over code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, nor equipment identification, performance rating, name, and nomenclature plates.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

214002 / CAMS 09 90 00 - 1 PAINTING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 2. Miller Paint Co. (Miller). 3. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh). 4. Rodda Paint Co. (Rodda) 5. Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 6. ICI-Dulux (ICI) B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS A. Paints and Coatings: Provide compatible products of a single manufacturer for each paint system required. Provide barrier coatings and similar preparatory treatments to isolate incompatible substrate conditions as necessary for field application of required paint system at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color. 3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Paint Systems: Provide as Scheduled in Part 3incorporating the design basis products of specified manufacturers or approved substitutes. The specified paints shall establish minimum acceptable quality and performance characteristics for each paint system required. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Less than 150 grams per liter, provide Scheduled products with the VOC content specified or below that level. Certain paints may exceed the threshold value of 150 grams, including but not necessarily limited to polyurethanes. Where such coatings are required to be applied in the interior establish and maintain a VOC Budget for the Work and provide all mitigation necessary for compliance with Project LEED Certification goals. 1. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2- ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

214002 / CAMS 09 90 00 - 2 PAINTING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

E. Gloss: As specified; where not specified, gloss will be as selected by Architect from the manufacturer's full line of options.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes where moisture content exceeds limitations recommended by the paint manufacturer; provide necessary corrective measures to establish acceptable conditions for paint application. 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent. 3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Gypsum Board Substrate: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. G. Plaster Substrates: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.

3.03 PAINT MATERIAL PREPARATION A. Mix, prepare, and thin painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions; within recommended limits. B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. C. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material; remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

3.04 PAINT APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

214002 / CAMS 09 90 00 - 3 PAINTING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

C. Paint Film: Uniform color, appearance, and dry film thickness; including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners. Provide a smooth finish with uniform, color, gloss and appearance free of imperfections D. Prime and Barrier Coats: Apply promptly after preparation; prevent subsequent surface deterioration. Repair damaged shop primer and recoat. Prime surfaces not already coated in the shop; provide barrier coats on incompatible substrate and coatings and to prevent read- through of existing paint colors and substrate characteristics. Provide finish coat free of defects due to insufficient priming, or undercoating. E. Walls, Ceilings and Doors: Apply paint with rollers or airless spray equipment; do not streak or pile up sprayed paint, lay off with roller to provide light stipple finish. Brush-paint other work except as specifically indicated. F. Provide ancillary work between paint coats including without limitation, surface conditioning and sanding.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner may invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, and any number of times during the course of the Work: 1. Sampling of paint products by an independent testing laboratory. 2. Test samples for compliance with requirements and performance characteristics set by the specified products. B. Where test results indicate the material does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove non-complying material; pay for testing; and replace non-compliant work, including removal of material from substrate. C. Number of coats specified for paint systems in the Paint Materials Schedule is a minimum. Provide additional coats as necessary to provide a durable coating complying with application and appearance requirements.

3.06 CLEANING A. Clean-Up: On a daily basis during progress of work, remove from work-areas and dispose of paint materials, trash, containers and material that could constitute a hazard or otherwise detrimental to orderly work area and maintenance of construction indoor air quality.

3.07 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Drywall: Two finish coats over primer. 1. Water Based Undercoat: 71 grams (?) per liter VOC content. BM/COR: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Primer N534 PPG Pure Performance 9-2; ICI Lifemaster 2000 LM9116; S-W PrepRite High-Build B28W600. Rodda Roseal II 502701. 2. Latex Eggshell Finish: 0 grams per liter VOC content. BM/COR: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Eggshell N538 PPG Pure Performance 9-411 Series; ICI Lifemaster 2000 LM9300; S-W Harmony B9 Series.Rodda 523601 Master Painter Ultra Low VOC Satin 3. Latex Semigloss Finish: 0 grams per liter VOC. BM/COR: Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi- Gloss N539 PPG Pure Performance 9-510 Series; ICI Lifemaster 2000 LM9200; S-W Harmony B10 series. Rodda Cloverdale 70623 EcoLogic SG Enamel 4. Epoxy Primer: BM/COR: Corotech Epoxy Mastic Coating V160 PPG Industries Pitt-Guard 97-145 Series, or approved having less than 150 grams per liter VOC content. Rodda Roseal II 502701 5. Waterborne Epoxy Finish: BM/COR Corotech Waterborne Epoxy V440 PPG Industries Tile-8 95-6749 Series, VOC 111 grams per liter. Rodda/Cloverdale Ecologic W/B Epoxy70503

214002 / CAMS 09 90 00 - 4 PAINTING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

B. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Two finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. 1. Primer: Moore. BM/COR: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer V110, Rodda 508901 Metal Master Primer, Devoe Devflex DTM 4020 HPA; PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel 90-712 Series; Miller 5000 DTM Acrylic 2. Satin Gloss Acrylic Emulsion: BM/COR: Corotech Acrylic DTM Enamel V331, Rodda 528901 Multi Master Satin, Devoe DTM 4216 Devflex HPA, Miller 5200 DTM Acrylic; PPG Pitt-Tech Plus Interior/Exterior Satin DTM Industrial Enamel 90-1110 Series.

3.08 SCHEDULE OF PAINT COLOR A. Using products approved for each paint system provide colors matching each of the following; provide satin gloss unless otherwise scheduled below. Manufacturer’s designations cited for convenience only, provide matching colors by one of the listed manufacturers

P-1: General Wall ColorSherwin Williams SW7566 Westhighland White, eggshell LRV 85% P-2: General Ceiling Color, Miller 0011W Sugar Dust, flat LRV 90% P-3: Door trim, semi-gloss, match P-1

END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 09 90 00 - 5 PAINTING OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 10 11 01 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes requirements for Markerboards and Tackboards.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on chalkboard, markerboard, tackboard, tackboard surface covering, trim, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details. C. Samples: Submit two samples demonstrating materials and finish, color and texture of glass and porcelain markerboard and tackboard surfacing, and trim.

1.03 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Written, signed by manufacturer; agree to replace porcelain enamel markerboards that do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, including crazing, cracking, and flaking, or are otherwise defective, for the lifetime of the installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS A. Glass Markerboard Indicated as MB-1: Low Iron Transparent Glass (LITG), PPG Starfire, Schott, or Pilkington.tempered glass with proprietary marker coating, edges ground and polished; Clarus Glassboard Float size and configuration indicated, color C100 Pure White. 1. Accessories: T Marker Tray, 12 inches long, mounted on surface at lower corner. B. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards MB-2: Not used 24-gage enameling grade steel sheet, with three-coat porcelain enamel finish on exposed face, and two coat finish on concealed face. Pressure laminate face and backing sheets to core with moisture resistant thermoplastic adhesive. 1. Porcelain Enamel Steel Sheet Manufacturer: Steelcase Polyvision E3 or approved 2. Core: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-M-1 particleboard, no added urea formaldehyde, nominal 0.5 inch thick, actual thickness as standard for fabricator; provide balanced backing sheet. 3. Writing Surface: White Satin Gloss Polyvision 6100 S; splined edges shall be free of damage to porcelain facing. 4. Trim: Extruded aluminum profile indicated; J trim, nominal 0.5 face dimension, actual as standard with manufacturer; powder coat finish to match panel face. 5. Marker Tray: Provide profile and extent as indicated, permanently mounted to panel by concealed means. 6. Fabricator: Platinum Visual Systems, FCS Series; or Claridge, Markerwall. C. Tackboard: Unika Vaev Ecoustic Panel, .53-inch thickness, 1. Color: Natural 2. Edge: 0.57 inch Aluminum Ecoustic Edging

214002 / CAMS 10 11 01 - 1 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure units level and plumb.

3.03 CLEANING A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 10 11 01 - 2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes accessory products for toilet rooms and Janitor rooms.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. B. Coordinate with work of Division 26 for electrical service for hand driers and final field connection to power.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, and attachment methods. B. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. C. Shop Drawings: Field verified mounting Heights and wall reinforcing

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Design and install accessories to comply with barrier free access requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines and ANSI A117.1 requirements for barrier free facilities. B. Grab Bars and Supporting Construction: Capable of carrying loads as required by OSSC Section 1607.7.2.

1.05 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's written 5-year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors which develop visible defects within warranty period. B. Electric Hand Dryer: Manufacturer's three years warranty; dryer shall remain within the specified performance and operating characteristics with neither frequent excess adjustment nor maintenance. Replace and install dryers that fail to function as required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces. B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Type 304 or 316. D. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.

214002 / CAMS 10 28 00 - 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

E. Mirror Glass: Annealed float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof mop added urea-formaldehyde. G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; tamper-proof; security type.

2.02 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 Brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. For electrically-operated accessories, verify that electrical power connections are ready and in the correct locations.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. B. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

3.04 ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE A. Toilet and Bath Accessories Schedule: The following accessory model numbers are for products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. unless noted otherwise. Not all accessories may be used for this phase of work. 1. Feminine Napkin Receptacle: B-270. 2. Feminine Napkin/Tampon Dispenser: B-4300. 3. Grab Bar: B-6806 series. 4. Paper Towel Dispensers: Bradley a. PTD: 2482-11 Surface mounted roll dispenser b. PTDR1: 2A15-3600 Recessed combination dispenser and waste container. c. PTDR2: 2A15-1036 Semi-recessed combination dispenser and waste container. d. PTDR3: not used e. PTDR4: Bradley 2A15-1036 Semi-recessed with 12 gallon waste container instead of 21 and as otherwise required for PTDR2. f. PTDR5: Bradley 2A15-3600 Recessed with 12 gallon waste container instead of 21 and as otherwise required for PTDR1. 5. Sanitary Disposal: SND, Bradley 4A10-11, surface mounted receptacle. 6. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser: Bradley 5A40-11, surface mounted. 7. Soap Dispenser, Liquid: Surface mounted Bradley 6A00-11. 8. Toilet Paper Holder: TPD, Surface mounted Bradley 5A10

214002 / CAMS 10 28 00 - 2 TOILET ACCESSORIES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

9. Mirror w/Shelf (MRSH): B-292, custom size 38.75 by 24 inches. Provide mirror with shelf where indicated. 10. Mirrors, provide configurations indicated, custom sizes as noted on drawings. a. M-1: B-290, surface mounted b. M-2: B-290 with custom stainless steel flange for recess into wall tile, as noted on drawings. c. M-3: not used d. M-4: Robern M Series Recessed Mirror Cabinet MC2434D4FBLE2, beveled edge mirror, 24 inches wide, 34 inches high, 4-5/8 inches deep, electric, interior light, USB. e. M-5 through M-7 not used. f. M-8: Custom Wood Framed Mirror, 1 inch beveled edge mirror with WD-2 frame, surface mounted, as noted on drawings. 11. Shower Curtain and Rod: Curtain Bradley 9537 white, Rod B-6047, Hooks 204-1 12. Mop Holder and Shelf MHSH: Bradley 9934 x 44; 44 inches long with 3 shelf bracket, 5 hooks and 4 mop holders. 13. Coat Hooks: CH: Bradley 9134 END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 10 28 00 - 3 TOILET ACCESSORIES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets and brackets.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. Provide wall bracket mount where no cabinet is indicated. B. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10 lb. nominal capacity, in enameled steel container.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Cabinets: Steel box, trim, door and frame as required; sized for extinguishers types and capacities required. Weld all joints and grind smooth, miter and weld perimeter frames and doors. 1. Cabinet Type: Fully recessed except semi-recessed where necessary due to limitations of wall assembly; provide UL listed and labeled fire-rated cabinets where required. Factory applied finish, white or to match wall color as directed. 2. Trim: One-piece trim and door frame; overlap cabinet - wall joint. 3. Door Style: Full glass tubular stile and rail. 4. Door Hardware: Surface mounted door pull requiring no hand articulation to operate, and continuous piano hinge permitting 180 degree opening. Provide forcible break-free lock, Larsen-Loc or approved. B. Provide approved brackets for mounting of fire extinguisher where no cabinet is indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings. B. Secure rigidly in place. C. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 10 44 00 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 12 21 13 LOUVER SHADES PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association; 2012. (ANSI/WCMA A100.1).

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LOUVER BLINDS A. Description: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; Levolor Contract RIV2 is the basis of design. B. Manual Operation: Control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand. C. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; square slat corners, with manufacturing burrs removed. 1. Width: 2 inch. 2. Color WC-1:Levelor Dover 115. D. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. E. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats. 1. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop; complying with WCMA A100.1. G. Tape: 1.5 inch wide fabric to match slat color.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. END OF SECTION

214002 / CAMS 12 21 13 - 1 LOUVER SHADES OSP Tenant Improvement – Bid Set 03 24 2017

SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. This Section includes Design-Build Work. The intent of Division 21 Specifications and the accompanying Drawings is to provide a complete and workable facility with complete systems as shown, specified and required by applicable codes. Include all work specified in Division 21 and shown on the accompanying Drawings, including appurtenances, connections, etc., in the finished job. 2. The Division 21 Specifications and the accompanying Drawings are complimentary and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items shown on the Drawings are not necessarily included in the Specifications and vice versa. Specifications shall supersede drawings in case of conflict, except sprinkler head locations where shown on the plans take precedence. 3. Imperative language is frequently used in Division 21 Specifications. Except as otherwise specified, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. 4. The Drawings that accompany the Division 21 Specifications are diagrammatic. They do not show every offset, bend, tee, or elbow which may be required to install work in the space provided and avoid conflicts. Offsets and transitions shall be assumed at a minimum at each duct crossing, structural penetrations through shear walls or beams, structural grids where ceiling heights are restricted, and at piping mains. Follow the Drawing as closely as is practical to do so and install additional bends, offsets and elbows where required by local conditions from measurements taken at the Building, subject to approval, and without additional cost to the Owner. Piping and sprinkler head locations shall meet the Architectural design intent for the building in addition to applicable code. The right is reserved to make any reasonable changes in sprinkler head location prior to roughing-in, without cost impact. 5. Furnish piping, pipe fittings, valves, gauges and incidental related items as required for complete systems. Identify valves, piping and equipment components to indicate their function and system served. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 21 10 00, Water Based Fire Suppression Systems 1.03 RELATED WORK A. The General and Supplemental Conditions apply to this Division, including but not limited to: 1. Drawings and specifications. 2. Public ordinances, permits. 3. Include payments and fees required by governing authorities for work of this Division. B. Division 1, General Requirements, applies to this Division. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Products and equipment prohibited from containing pentabrominated, octabrominated, and decabrominated diphenyl ethers. Where products or equipment within this specification contain these banned substances, provide complying products and equipment from approved manufacturers with equal performance characteristics.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 1 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

2. General: All work and materials shall conform to the local and State codes, and all Federal, State and other applicable laws and regulations. 3. Contractor responsible for obtaining and payment for all permits, licenses, and inspection certificates required in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. 4. All fire protection system designs must bear the stamp and seal of the registered Professional Engineer who prepared the documents. The Engineer’s stamp certifies that the work was done under the Engineer’s supervision and control. Certification from NICET technicians, or other contractors, cannot replace the certification by the Engineer. Verify/coordinate with local building department for their specific requirements. B. Materials and equipment shall be new. Work shall be of good quality, free of faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. C. Apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. D. The entire system and apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. E. For remodel projects, the existing system must remain fully operational, or provisions made to provide coverage while the new system is being installed. New installation switchover shall require minimal down time. Provide method to maintain fire protection or fire watch during any system down time. Include any related cost for materials or labor that is needed for providing continuous coverage. F. All equipment shall be installed level and true. Housekeeping pads and curbs shall account for floor or roof slope. G. Materials and Equipment. 1. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name along with other manufacturers. 2. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use products of the same manufacturer. Component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. 3. Furnish all materials and equipment of size, make, type, and quality herein specified. 4. Equipment scheduled by performance or model number shall be considered the basis of the design. If other specified manufacturer's equipment is provided in lieu of the basis of design equipment the contractor is responsible for all changes and costs which may be necessary to accommodate this equipment, including different sizes and locations for connections, different electrical characteristics, different dimensions, different access requirements or any other differences which impact the project. H. Workmanship. 1. General: All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Follow manufacturer’s directions where they cover points not specifically indicated. If they are in conflict with the Drawings and Division 21 Specifications, obtain clarification before starting work. I. Cutting and Patching. 1. Cutting, patching, and repairing for the proper installation and completion of the work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting shall be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with the appropriate Division of Work. 2. Additional openings required in building construction shall be made by drilling or cutting. Use of jackhammer is specifically prohibited. 3. Fill holes which are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the sleeves passing through.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 2 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

4. Beams or columns shall not be pierced without permission of Architect and then only as directed. 5. All new or existing work cut or damaged shall be restored to its original condition. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, walks, etc., the surfaces shall be repaired, refinished, and left in condition existing prior to commencement of work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Certified Shop Drawings: 1. The Drawings indicate the general layout of the piping and various items of equipment. Coordination with other trades and with field conditions will be required. For this purpose, prepare fire protection system layout Drawings showing locations and types of head or outlets, alarm valves and devices, pipe sizes and cutting lengths, test tees and valves, drain valves, and other related items. Shop Drawings shall be new drawings prepared by Contractor and not reproductions or tracings of Architect’s Drawings. Overlay drawings with shop drawings of other trades and check for conflicts. All drawings shall be same size as Architect’s Drawings with title block similar to the Drawings and identifying Architect’s drawing number or any reference drawings. All drawings shall be fully dimensioned including both plan and elevation dimensions. Shop drawings cannot be used to make scope changes. B. Shop drawings: 1. Prepare in three-dimensional format. 2. Include but are not limited to: a. Sprinkler head layout drawings overlaid with ceiling and floor plans. b. Sprinkler floor plans, including all piping, equipment and heads to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-inch scale or same as plans, whichever is greater. C. Product Data: 1. In general, submit product data for review on all scheduled pieces of equipment, on all equipment requiring electrical connections or connections by other trades, and as required by each specification section or by drawing notes. Include manufacturer’s detailed shop drawings, specifications and data sheets. Data sheets shall include capacities, RPM, BHP, pressure drop, design and operating pressures, temperatures, and similar data. Manufacturer’s abbreviations or codes are not acceptable 2. Provide sample of each type of sprinkler head. 3. Indicate equipment operating weights including bases and weight distribution at support points. 4. In the case of equipment such as wiring devices, time switches, valves, etc., specified by specific catalog number, a statement of conformance will suffice. D. Test Reports: Submit certificates of completion of tests and inspections. E. Submission Requirements: 1. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for additional requirements related to submittals. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Provide three sets of Drawings showing sprinkler head locations and layout coordinated with architectural ceiling details to the Architect for review prior to submitting Drawings to insurance underwriter and Fire Marshal. b. Provide six sets of Drawings and calculations to the Architect to be sent to the Owner’s insurance underwriter for approval. c. Then submit six sets of approved Drawings to Architect for final review. 3. Product Data: a. Submit electronic copies of shop drawings and product data for Work of Division 21 in PDF format with each item filed under a folder and labeled with its respective specification section number, article and paragraph and mark, if applicable.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 3 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

b. Include a complete index in the original submittal. Indicate both original items submitted and note stragglers that will be submitted at a later date to avoid delay in submitting. c. All shop product data shall be submitted in a single submittal. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Re-submittals submitted after return of the original binder shall include a tab similar to that originally submitted. Upon receipt of the returned re- submittals, insert them in the previously submitted binder. F. Contractor Responsibilities: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to: 1. See that all submittals are submitted at one time and are in proper order. 2. Ensure that all equipment will fit in the space provided. 3. Assure that all deviations from Drawings and Specifications are specifically noted in the submittals. Failure to comply will void review automatically. 1.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Provide 2D model in the following format: 1. AutoCAD 2. PDF B. Provide record drawings in hard copy and PDF format. 1. Drawings include the following: a. Project specific titleblock. b. Notations reflecting the as built conditions of any additions to or variations from the construction documents provided as part of the BIM coordination, RFIs, ASIs, Owner Changes, and Field Coordination. 1.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, PARTS LISTS, AND OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for additional requirements. B. Submit three bound copies of manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for each piece of equipment or item requiring servicing. Literature shall be on 8-1/2 by 11-inch sheets or catalogs suitable for side binding. Submit data when the work is substantially complete, packaged separately, and clearly identified in durable 3-ring binder. Include name and contact information for location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment. Clearly mark and label in each submittal, the piece of equipment provided with the proper nameplate and model number identified. Provide wiring diagrams for all electrically powered equipment. C. Instruct Owner thoroughly in proper operation of equipment and systems, in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manuals. Operating instructions shall cover all phases of control. D. Furnish competent engineer knowledgeable in this building system for minimum of one 8-hour day to instruct Owner in operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Contractor shall keep a log of this instruction including dates, times, subjects, and those present and shall present such log when requested by Architect. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Prior to bidding, verify and become familiar with all existing conditions by visiting the site, and include all factors which may affect the execution of this Work. Include all related costs in the initial bid proposal. B. Coordinate exact requirements governed by actual job conditions. Check all information and report any discrepancies before fabricating work. Report changes in time to avoid unnecessary work. C. Coordinate shutdown and start-up of existing, temporary, and new systems and utilities. Notify Owner, City, and Utility Company. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide a written guaranty covering the work of this Division (for a period of one calendar year from the date of acceptance by the Owner) as required by the General Conditions.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 4 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

B. Provide manufacturer’s written warranties for material and equipment furnished under this Division insuring parts and labor for a period of one year from the date of Owner acceptance of Work of this Division. C. Correct warranty items promptly upon notification. 1.10 PROVISIONS FOR LARGE EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall make provisions for the necessary openings in building to allow for admittance of all equipment. 1.11 TEST REPORTS AND CERTIFICATES A. Contractor shall submit one copy of all test reports and certificates specified herein to the Architect. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Contractor shall submit any requests for product substitutions in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and the General and Supplemental Conditions. 1.13 ALTERNATES A. Comply with Division 01, General Requirements Section, “Alternates”. B. Refer to Electrical Drawings for detailed information relating to the appropriate alternates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish under this Division as specified in another Division of work. 2.02 PIPE SLEEVES A. Interior Wall and Floor Sleeves: 18 gauge galvanized steel or another pre-approved water tight system. B. Interior Wall and Floor Sleeves (fire rated): Fire rated and water tight system approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owners Insurance underwriter, with rating equal to floor or wall penetration, and designed specifically for the floor or wall construction, piping material, size and service. C. Exterior Wall Sleeves: Cast iron. D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as exterior wall sleeves. 2.03 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES A. Furnish stamped split type plates as follows: 1. Floor Plates: Cast brass, chromium plated. 2. Wall and Ceiling Plates: Spun aluminum. 2.04 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. General: All equipment and installed work shall be as specified under Division 26, Electrical. B. Equipment Wiring: Interconnecting wiring within or on a piece of fire suppression equipment shall be provided with the equipment unless shown otherwise. This does not include the wiring of motors, starters, and controllers provided under Division 26, Electrical. C. Control Wiring: All control wiring for fire suppression equipment shall be provided hereunder. D. Codes: All electrical equipment and products shall bear the Underwriters label as required by governing codes and ordinances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fire protection piping and appurtenances with ducts, other piping, electrical conduit, and other equipment.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 5 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

B. All fire protection piping and equipment shall be concealed except in area without ceilings and as noted on the Drawings. C. Locate piping, heads, and equipment where shown on Drawings. 3.02 GENERAL A. Install fire protection systems to serve the entire project area. B. The drawings indicate approximate locations sprinkler zones, and types of systems. The drawings do not indicate the locations of sprinkler heads in ceiling areas. In general, sprinklers shall be located in the center of ceiling panels and symmetrically within rooms and down corridors, coordinated with and in pattern with lights and grilles. Deviations must be approved. C. Locations of all sprinkler heads, outlets, piping, and appurtenances are not shown in all areas and, therefore, are to be installed in accord with code requirements. D. Location of heads shown in ceiling areas may be changed if required by code requirements, but only after review by the Architect for new head locations for each specific instance. 3.03 SLEEVES A. Interior Floor and Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves large enough to provide clearances around pipe outside diameter as required by NFPA. Penetrations through mechanical room and fan room floors shall be made watertight by packing with safing insulation and sealing with Tremco Dymeric Sealant or approved water tight system. B. Sleeves through Rated Floors and Walls: Similar to interior sleeves except install fire-rated system approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner’s Insurance Underwriter, with rating equal to floor or wall penetration, and designed specifically for the floor or wall construction, piping material, size and service. Firestopping work shall comply with requirements of Section 07 84 00, Firestopping. C. Exterior Wall Sleeves Below Grade: Large enough to allow for caulking and made watertight. Caulking shall be from outside using link-seal modular wall and casing seal or lead and oakum. Secure sleeves against displacement. D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as below grade exterior wall sleeves, caulked from inside. E. Exterior Wall Sleeves Above Grade: Similar to interior wall sleeves except caulk outside with Tremco Dymeric Sealant. F. Layout work prior to concrete forming. Do all cutting and patching required. Reinforce sleeves to prevent collapse during forming and pouring. G. All floor sleeves shall maintain a water barrier by providing a water tight seal or they shall extend 1-inch above finished floor except through mechanical equipment room floors and shafts where sleeves shall extend 2-inches above finished floor level. Sleeves through roof shall extend 8-inches above roof. Wall sleeves shall be flush with face of wall unless otherwise indicated. Sleeves through planters shall extend 8-inches above planter base. H. Do not support pipes by resting pipe clamps on floor sleeves. Supplementary members shall be provided so pipes are floor supported. I. Special sleeves detailed on the Drawings shall take precedence over this section. 3.04 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES A. Install on piping passing through finished walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, and plaster furrings. Plates shall completely cover opening around pipe and duct. B. Secure wall and ceiling plates to pipe or structure. C. Plates not required in mechanical rooms or unfinished spaces. 3.05 CLEANING A. General: Clean equipment and piping of stampings and markings (except those required by codes), iron cuttings, and other refuse.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 6 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

B. Painted Surfaces: Clean scratched or marred painted surfaces of rust or other foreign matter and paint with matching color industrial enamel, except as otherwise noted. C. Additional requirements are specified under specific Sections of this Division. 3.06 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. Keep pipe and conduit openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. Protect piping, conduit, equipment and apparatus against dirty water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Restore damaged or contaminated equipment, or apparatus to original conditions or replace at no cost to the Owner. B. Cover or otherwise suitably protect equipment and materials stored on the job site. 3.07 ACCESSIBILITY A. General: Locate valves, indicating equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection, repairs, and removal or replacement conveniently and accessibly with reference to the finished building. B. Gauges: Install gauges so as to be easily read from the floors, platforms, and walkways. 3.08 PAINTING A. General: Coordinate painting of fire suppression equipment and items with products and methods in conformance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. B. Equipment Rooms and Finished Areas. 1. Hangers, Miscellaneous Iron Work, Structural Steel Stands, Tanks, and Equipment Bases: Paint one coat of black enamel. 2. Steel Valve Bodies and Bonnets: One coat of black enamel. 3. Equipment: One coat of red machinery enamel. Do not paint nameplates. 4. Sprinkler Heads: Not painted. C. Concealed Spaces (above ceilings, not visible). 1. Hangers, Miscellaneous Iron Work, Valve Bodies, and Bonnets: Not painted. D. Sprinkler Piping. 1. Concealed from View: Not painted. 2. Exposed to View: Paint pipe and hangers exposed to view, including in equipment spaces, with one coat approved rust inhibiting primer. Final finish coat as specified in conformance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating. 3. Exterior: Wire brush and apply two coats of rust-inhibiting primer and one coat of grey exterior machinery enamel. Final finish coat as specified in conformance with the appropriate Division of Work, Painting. 4. Alarm Bell: Factory paint with two coats of red enamel. 3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. General: 1. Before operating any equipment or systems, make thorough check to determine that systems have been flushed and cleaned as required and equipment has been properly installed, lubricated, and serviced. Check factory instructions to see that installations have been made accordingly and that recommended lubricants have been used. 2. Use particular care in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over-lubrication and blowing out seals. Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment, after delivery, or during installation. Repair damaged equipment as approved or replace with new equipment. B. Piping: 1. Clean interior of all piping before installation. 2. Flush sediment out of all piping systems.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 7 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

3.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Fire Suppression systems shall not be installed in switchgear rooms, transformer vaults, telephone rooms, or electric closets except as indicated. B. Fire Suppression systems shall not pass over switchboards or electrical panelboards. Where conflicts exist, bring to attention of Architect. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 21 05 00 - 8 Common Work Results for Fire OSP Tenant Improvement Suppression 03 24 2017

SECTION 21 10 00 WATER BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 21 05 00, Common Work Results for Fire Suppression, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Design-Build work. Provide a complete automatic fire sprinkler/combination standpipe system with zoning (and sprinkler head) layout as indicated on the Drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a complete automatic fire sprinkler/combination standpipe system with zoning (and sprinkler head) layout as indicated on the Drawings. B. Regulatory Requirements. 1. As a minimum, sprinkler system shall comply with NFPA 13 and local Fire Marshal requirements. 2. Comply with Factory Mutual requirements for Hazard Class and System Design. C. Hydraulically Calculated Sprinkler System: Sprinkler system to be hydraulically calculated grid system designed to provide: 1. Light Hazard Occupancies: (0.10 GPM/Ft2 density at most remote 1500 square feet) for public areas, living spaces, or designated by the local fire marshal with an excess of 10 PSI additional pressure requirements incorporated into the design over specified pressure requirements. 2. Ordinary Hazard Occupancies Group I: (0.15 GPM/Ft2 density at most remote 1500 square feet) for mechanical rooms, kitchen, and parking areas, or designated by the local fire marshal with an excess of 10 PSI additional pressure requirements incorporated into the design over specified pressure requirements. D. NFPA 13 (without the use of exceptions found in NFPA 13 systems minimum guideline) shall be used for the location, sizing, and installation of piping and sprinkler systems unless local fire marshal or owner’s insurance underwriter requirements are more stringent. Exceptions must be approved by the Engineer prior to usage. E. Water Service Pressure Basis of Design: Coordination was done to determine fire service water pressure used to develop the fire sprinkler system design information included herein. The Contractor shall be required to obtain current flow test information prior to starting their design of the fire sprinkler system. F. Automatic sprinklers within elevator hoistways and machine rooms shall comply with ANSI A17.1-102.2 (c) 4 requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittal in accordance with Section 21 05 00, Common Work Results for Fire Suppression PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. As indicated for each product. B. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 1 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.02 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Viking 2. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler 3. Tyco Fire Products B. General: 1. Fire sprinklers shall be of one manufacturer throughout building. No mixing of sprinkler brands shall be permitted. 2. Sprinklers shall be of all brass frame construction with a coated metal-to-metal seating mechanism. Sprinklers utilizing non-metal parts in the sealing portion of the sprinkler are strictly prohibited. 3. Sprinklers shall have a quick response frangible bulb type fusible element with a temperature rating of 155 or 200 degrees F or shall have a fast response metal type fusible element with a temperature rating of 165 or 212 degrees F. 4. Sprinklers shall have a 1/2-inch NPT, a standard orifice, and a 5.6 nominal K Factor. 5. Sprinklers shall be UL listed and FM Approved for working water pressures up to 175 psi. Sprinkler heads in dry and pre-action type systems shall be installed per NFPA 13. 6. All heads shall be UL approved for application and installation. C. Provide high temperature (212 degrees F) heads for mechanical rooms, areas below skylights, dishwashing and other areas which have high heat producing equipment to prevent accidental trippage. D. Sprinklers Installed in Finished Ceilings: Quick response, recessed, bulb type, finish and color to be selected by Architect, 165 degrees F unless required otherwise. E. Sprinklers Installed in Finished Ceilings: Quick response, concealed pendant with drop-off cover plate, color and finish to be selected by Architect, 155 degrees F unless required otherwise. F. Sprinklers Installed in Unfinished Ceiling Areas (or Above Finished Ceilings Where Required): Pendant or up-right fusible solder type, rough bronze finish and shall be of adequate temperature for the hazard. G. Sprinklers Installed in Exterior Perimeter Areas: Quick response, horizontal dry sidewall sprinkler, fusible solder type, polished chrome finish. H. “Life Safety Type” Sprinkler Heads (Window Wash to Maintain Ratings at Glazed Openings at Enclosed Stairs): Quick response, chrome finish, horizontal sidewall or pendant vertical sidewall, Central Model WS Window Sprinkler, or similar listed sprinkler for this application. I. Flexible Stainless Steel Hose: UL rated, FM approved stainless steel hose assembly for individual sprinkler connections, similar to Flexhead Industries. 2.03 FLOW SWITCH A. Description: UL listed electric flow switch with retard. Provide required accessories. B. Single pole type with normally open and normally closed contacts. Location as shown. Provide all required related trimmings. Provide one set of contacts for use by the Fire Alarm Contractor. Coordinate with pipe size. C. Manufacturer: Potter Electric Model VSR-F. 2.04 TAMPER SWITCH A. Description: Each sprinkler system control valve shall be equipped with a tamper switch listed by Underwriters Laboratories for the particular location and type of valve supervised. The switch shall initiate a supervisory signal upon a maximum of two complete turns of a valve wheel or closure of ten percent, whichever is less. The tamper switch shall have the number of poles provided to coordinate with the fire alarm system manufacturer. B. Manufacturer: Potter Electric Signal Company Model PCVS.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 2 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT TEST STATION A. Description: One piece, compact, floor test module for standard alarm test loop, threaded. B. Manufacturer: Victaulic Style 720, equivalent by Viking. 2.06 VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Where only one manufacturer’s model is listed, equivalent products by those specified below, or equal, are acceptable. a. Gate, Swing Check: 1) Jenkins 2) Crane 3) Hammond 4) Nibco 5) Kennedy b. Silent Check: 1) Jenkins 2) Mueller 3) Metraflex 4) Gustin-Bacon c. Butterfly: 1) Jenkins 2) Nibco 3) Keystone 4) Victaulic 5) Gustin-Bacon d. Specialty: 1) Nibco 2) Conbraco 2. All such valves shall be of one manufacturer. 3. All gate, butterfly and check valves shall meet current MSS standards. 4. Bronze gate and check valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. 5. Full lug and grooved butterfly valves shall be suitable for bi-directional dead end service at full rated pressure without use or need of a downstream flange. 6. Valves in Insulated Piping: Valves shall have 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: a. Gate Valves: Shall be rising stem type. b. Butterfly Valves: Shall have extended necks. 7. Valve ends may be threaded, flanged, soldered, or grooved as applicable to piping system. 8. Provide ball drip drains, test orifices, and other related items as required to provide a complete fire protection system. B. Check Valves: 1. Horizontal Bronze Swing Check: Bronze body, bronze-mounted, TFE disc, 150 psi SWP, 300 psi CWP; Nibco T-443-Y, Nibco S-433-Y. Check valves in main riser path shall be FM approved. 2. Horizontal Iron Swing Check: Iron body, bronze-mounted, regrinding bronze disc and seat ring, 200 psi CWP; Nibco F-918-B. Check valves in main riser path shall be FM approved. 3. Vertical and Silent Check Valves: Iron body, stainless steel spring, wafer type, globe style, 200 psi CWP; Nibco 910-B. Check valves in main riser path shall be FM approved.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 3 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Butterfly Valves: 1. Iron Butterfly: Ductile iron body, aluminum-bronze disc and one-piece stainless steel shaft, copper bushing, fasteners and pins shall not be used to attach stem to disc, gear operator, stem neck length to accommodate insulation where applicable, EPDM liner or disc, 200 psi CWP; Nibco LD 2000 (lug style), Nibco GD-4765 (grooved ends). Butterfly valves in main riser path shall be FM approved. D. Specialty Valves: 1. Drain Valves: Bronze ball valve, garden hose end, cap and chain 3/4-inch size, bronze cast body, chrome-plated full port ball, with handle, Teflon seat, threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem designs allowed) with adjustable stem packing, 600 psi CWP; Nibco T-585-70-HC. 2. Gauge Cocks: Brass, tee handle, male to female, 200 psi working pressure, 1/4-inch; Conbraco 41 series, or equal. 2.07 BLACK STEEL PIPE A. General: Pipe shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection use. Fittings and joints must be UL listed with pipe chosen for use. Listing restrictions and installation procedures per NFPA 13 and state and local authorities for fire protection use. Pipe/fittings must be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A53 for all dry pipe sprinkler systems. B. Pipe: ASTM A135 or A53. 1. For Fire Protection: a. Schedule 10 or Schedule 40 in sizes up to 5 inches. b. 0.134-inch wall thickness for 6 inches. c. 0.188-inch wall thickness for 8 inches and 10 inches. d. 0.330-inch wall thickness for 12 inches. C. Fittings: Roll grooved ends with mechanical couplings as specified. D. Service Above Grade: Fire protection system only for sizes listed, as approved by NFPA 13. 2.08 MECHANICAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Victaulic 2. Gruvlok B. Couplings and Fittings: Coupling housing to be zero flex rigid type coupling with angled bolt pad design. Similar to Victaulic Type 07. Flexible couplings to be used only when expansion contraction, deflection or noise and vibration is to be dampened. Flexible Coupling to be similar to Victaulic Type 77.Coupling gasket similar to Victaulic's Grade E molded synthetic rubber per ASTM D-73.5, Grade No. R615BZ. Coupling bolts oval neck track head type with hexagonal heavy nuts per ASTM A-183. 2.09 EXPANSION JOINTS AND COMPENSATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Flexonics 2. Keflex 3. Hyspan 4. Metraflex 5. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Description: 1. Expansion compensators to be of the packless, externally pressurized type to allow for axial movement constructed of stainless steel bellows, stainless steel shroud, integral guide rings, internal liner, limit stops, with drain port and plug. 2. All materials of construction and pressure ratings shall be appropriate for the application as specified for each piping material and service. 3. UL listed and FM approved for fire protection use. Listing restrictions and installation procedures per NFPA 13 and state and local authorities for fire protection use.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 4 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.10 EXPANSION LOOPS/SEISMIC EXPANSION JOINTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Metraflex Metraloop. 2. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Description: 1. Flexible stainless steel hose and braid connector sized to allow +/- 2 feet (total travel of 4 feet) without failure. 2. Connector shall accept differential support displacement without damaging pipe, equipment connections, or support connections. 3. All materials of construction and pressure ratings shall be appropriate for the application, 4. UL listed and FM approved for fire protection use. Listing restrictions and installation procedures per NFPA 13 and state and local authorities for fire protection use. 2.11 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Marsh 2. Ashcroft 3. Weiss 4. Trerice 5. Weksler 6. Tel-Tru B. Description: 4-1/2-inch dial, molded black polypropylene turret case. C. Range: SYSTEM PRESSURE (PSI) GRADUATIONS (PSI) Fire Protection 0-160 1 *Provide compound gauge where shown on inlet side of fire pump on open piping systems (30-inch 15 psi). Other ranges may be listed on Drawings in which case they take precedence. 2.12 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. General: Identify valves with metal tags or plastic signs, legends to be stamped or embossed. It shall indicate the function of the valve and its normal operating position, and area served; i.e. 3RD FL (Area Served) ISOLATION (Valve Function) NO (Normal Operation Position) 2. Size: Valve tags 2-inch diameter with 1/4-inch high letters. 3. Material: Use 0.050 or 0.064-inch brass tags. 4. Control Valves: Use 1/16-inch thick laminated 3-ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply red, “lamicoid” or equal. Form letters by exposing center ply. B. Valve Tag Directory: Include tag number, location, exposed or concealed, area served, valve size, valve manufacturer, valve model number, and normal operating position of valve. 2.13 PIPING MARKERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. W.H. Brady 2. Seton 3. Marking Systems, Inc. (MSI) B. Pipes shall be labeled with all-vinyl, self-sticking labels or letters. For pipe covering sizes up to and including 3/4-inch outside diameter, select labels with 1/2-inch letters. For sizes from 3/4 to 2-inch outside diameter, 3/4-inch letters; above 2-inches outside diameter, 2-inch letters. The pipe markers shall be identified and color coded as follows with white directional arrows.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 5 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SERVICE PIPE MARKER BACKGROUND COLOR SPRINKLER WATER “FIRE PROTECTION WATER” RED AIR, COMPRESSED *COMPRESSED AIR* GREEN 2.14 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: 1. Tag all pumps, and miscellaneous equipment with engraved nameplates. Nameplates shall be 1/16-inch thick, 3 x 5 laminated 3-ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply black. Form letters by exposing center ply. 2. Identify unit with code number as shown on Drawings and area served. B. Equipment Nameplate Directory: 1. List pumps, compressors and other equipment nameplates. Include Owner and Contractor furnished equipment. List nameplate designation, manufacturer’s model number, location of equipment, area served or function, disconnect location, and normal position of HOA switch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide seismic hangers as required by code. 2. Provide tamper switches on all sprinkler system isolation valves. Provide flow switches for all sprinkler zones. See Drawings for locations. 3. A corrosion-resistant metal placard shall be provided on riser indicating location number of sprinklers, design criteria, water demand, and date of installation. 4. Install fire sprinklers in exhaust ductwork from grease hood per NFPA 13. Provide access doors for sprinkler access per NFPA 96 and IBC. Provide access doors at a maximum of 10 ft. on center in horizontal run. Provide a dry pendant sprinkler head at top of ductwork to prevent freezing. 5. Provide fire sprinkler guards on exposed sprinklers in areas subject to damage. 6. Quick response sprinklers shall be listed for installation in an Ordinary Hazard occupancy when installed in an Ordinary Hazard occupancy. B. Flexible Sprinkler Head Drop: 1. Install per manufacturer’s installation requirements. 2. Coordinate head location with all other trades to assure space is available to maintain proper radius requirements. 3. Provide flexible sprinkler drops of appropriate length as conditions require. 4. Provide flexible sprinkler drops at all sprinkler heads located in suspended, dropped, or acoustical ceilings. In hard lid ceiling areas, provide flexible heads at Contractor’s option. C. Sprinklers in Elevator Hoistways and Machine Rooms: 1. Reference Division 26 for heat detectors provided to disconnect mainline power of elevator prior to application of water from the sprinklers. 2. A shutoff valve with tamper switch will be provided for each branch service serving these spaces and shall be located in an accessible location outside these spaces. D. Sprinklers at Glazed Openings: 1. Rated glazed openings will be protected on both sides of glass by listed quick response “Life Safety Type” sprinkler heads designated to wet entire surface of glass. Sprinklers shall be spaced 6-feet apart, 8- to 12-inches from the glass or as required per sprinkler manufacturer’s listed installation instructions. E. Sprinklers Above Finished Ceilings: 1. Include heads above finished ceilings if structure is combustible, or if steel beams are not provided with spray-on fire proofing. F. Electrical: All electrical work shall comply with Division 26.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 6 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

G. Fire Service: Connect to sprinkler line where it enters the building. H. Hangers and Supports: 1. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Install standpipe piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 14. 3. Connections to structural framing shall not introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required. I. Pressure Gauges: 1. Provide gauges where specified, shown on Drawings, or required by code. 2. Install additional gauges as required and as recommended by equipment manufacturer or their representative. 3. Locate all gauges so that they may be conveniently read at eye level or easily viewed and read from the floor or from the most likely viewing area, i.e., platform, catwalk, etc. 4. Install instruments over 6'-6" above floor, to be viewed from the floor, with face at 30 degrees to horizontal. 5. Provide instrument gauge cock at inlets. J. Valves: 1. Provide valves at connections to equipment where shown or required for equipment isolation. 2. Install all valves accessible and same size as connected piping. 3. Provide separate support for valves where necessary. 4. Provide drain valves in all low points in the piping system, and at equipment, as required by code, and as indicated. 5. Fire Suppression Service: a. In piping 2-inches and smaller; bronze gate valve, bronze swing check valve, vertical check valve. b. In piping 2-1/2-inches and larger; iron gate valve, iron swing check valve, vertical check valve. c. UL approved butterfly valves. d. Silent check valves on pump discharge. 6. Provide gauge cocks for all pressure gauges. K. Piping Preparation: 1. Measurements, Lines and Levels: a. Check dimension at the building site and establish lines and levels for work specified in this Section. b. Establish all inverts, slopes, and elevations by instrument, working from an established datum point. Provide elevation markers for use in determining slopes and elevations in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. c. Use established grid and area lines for locating trenches in relation to building and boundaries. L. Excavation and Backfill: 1. General: Perform all necessary excavation and backfill required for the installation of fire suppression work in accord with Division 2. Repair pipelines or other work damaged during excavation and backfilling. 2. Excavation: Excavate trenches to the necessary depth and width, removing rocks, roots, and stumps. Include additional excavation to facilitate utility crossovers, additional offsets, etc. Excavation material is unclassified. Width of trench shall be adequate for proper installation of piping. The trench shall be widened, if not wide enough for a proper installation. 3. Bedding: All cast iron, steel, and copper piping shall be full bedded on sand. Place a minimum 4-inch deep layer on the leveled trench bottom for this purpose. Remove the sand to the necessary depth for piping bells and couplings to maintain contact of the pipe on the sand for its entire length. Lay all other piping on a smooth level trench bottom so that contact is made for its entire length.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 7 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

4. Backfill: Place in layers not exceeding 8 inches deep, and compact to 95percent of standard proctor maximum density at optimum moisture content. Earth backfill shall be free of rocks over 2 inches in diameter and foreign matter. Disposal of excess material as directed. a. Interior: All backfill under interior slabs shall be bank sand or pea gravel. b. Exterior: Excavated material may be used outside of buildings at the Contractor’s option. The first 4 inches shall be sand, and final 12-inch layer course shall be soil in any event. M. Piping: 1. Hold piping as tight to structure as possible. In general, run piping in areas without ceilings parallel to building elements in a neat, professional manner. 2. Pipe inspector test connections to exterior and discharge as approved by local applicable governing authorities. 3. Provide test tees as required. 4. Install unions in all non-flanged piping connections to apparatus and adjacent to all screwed control valves, and appurtenances requiring removal for servicing so located that piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system. 5. Mechanical Couplings: a. On systems using galvanized pipe and fittings, fittings shall be galvanized at factory. b. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with approved lubricant. c. Pipe grooving in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications contained in latest published literature. 6. Install all piping as to drain per NFPA 13. 7. Support all piping independently at apparatus so that its weight shall not be carried by the equipment. 8. Utility Marking: Installed over the entire length of the underground piping utilities. Install plastic tape along both sides and the center line of the trenches at the elevation of approximately 12 inches above the top of utility. 9. Underground Water System: Prior to testing pipe provide concrete thrust blocks at changes in direction. Block size as required for types of fittings involved. N. Drain Piping: 1. Pitch drain piping 1/2-inch per 10-feet minimum; no traps allowed. 2. Discharge drain piping to outside with suitable splash plate to a location as approved by the architect. O. Piping Joints: 1. Pipe and fittings shall be joined using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer in conformance with standard practice and applicable codes. Cleaning, cutting, reaming, grooving, etc. shall be done with proper tools and equipment. Hacksaw pipe cutting prohibited. Peening of welds to stop leaks not permitted. 2. No couplings installed in floor or wall sleeves. 3. Steel Piping: a. Screwed Joints: Pipes cut evenly with pipe cutter reamed to full inside diameter with all burrs and cuttings removed. Joints made up with suitable lubricant or Teflon tape applied to male threads only, leaving two threads bare. Joints tightened so that not more than two threads are left showing. Junctions between galvanized steel waste pipe and bell of cast iron pipe shall be made with tapped spigot or half coupling on steel pipe to form spigot end and caulked. b. Flanged Joints: Pressure rating of flanges shall match valve or fitting joined. Joint gaskets shall be coated with graphite and oil.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 8 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

4. Welded Joints: a. Preparation for Welding: Bevel piping on both ends before welding: 1) Use following weld spacing on all buttwelds: NOMINAL PIPE WALL THICKNESS SPACING BEVEL 1/4-inch or less 1/8-inch 37-1/2 Over 1/4-inch, less than 3/4-inch 3/16-inch 27-1/2 2) Before welding, remove all corrosion products and foreign material from surfaces. b. Welded Joints: Joints shall be made by the “arc-welding” process using certified welders. Port openings of fittings must match the inside diameter of the pipe to which they are welded. Use full radius welding elbows for all turns, use welding tees for all tees. Reducing fittings must be used for size reduction. “Weldolets” may be used for branches up through one-half the pipe size of the main to which they are attached. Nipples are not allowed. c. Welding Operation: 1) After deposition, clean each layer of weld metal to remove slag and scale by wire brushing or grinding. Chip where necessary to prepare for proper deposition of next layer. 2) Weld reinforcement no less than 1/16-inch not more than 1/8-inch above normal surface of jointed sections. Reinforcement crowned at center and taper on each side to surfaces being joined. Exposed surface of weld shall present professional appearance and be free of depressions below surface of jointed members. 3) No welding shall be done when temperature of base metal is lower than 0 degrees F. Material to be welded during freezing temperatures shall be made warm and dry before welding is started. Metal shall be “warm to the hand” or approximately 60 degrees F. 5. Ductile Iron Pipe: Install joints per manufacturer’s written instructions. P. Expansion Loops / Seismic Expansion Joints: 1. Install at building seismic expansion joints. 2. Install in other locations indicated on the drawings. 3. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Q. Pipe Wrap: 1. Apply per manufacturer’s written instructions. 2. Apply wrapping to fittings in field after installation. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Identification: 1. Valve Tags: a. Attach to valve with a brass chain. b. Valve tag numbers shall be continuous throughout the building for each system. Contractor shall obtain a list for each system involved from the Owner. 2. Valve Tag Directory: Post final copy in Operation and Maintenance Manual. B. Piping Markers: 1. Unless recommendations of ANSI A13.1, 1981 are more stringent, apply labels or letters after completion of pipe cleaning, painting, or other similar work, as follows: a. Every 20 feet along continuous exposed lines. b. Every 10 feet along continuous concealed lines. c. Adjacent to each valve and stubout for future. d. Where pipe passes through a wall, into and out of concealed spaces. e. On each riser. f. On each leg of a “T”. g. Locate conspicuously where visible.

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 9 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Further, apply labels or letters to lower quarters of the pipe on horizontal runs where view is not obstructed or on the upper quarters when pipe is normally viewed from above. Apply arrow labels indicating direction of flow. Arrows to be the same color and sizes as identification labels. C. Equipment Identification: 1. Nameplates: Attach to prominent area of equipment, either with sheet metal screws, brass chain, or contact cement as applicable. 2. Nameplate Directory: Post final copy in Operation and Maintenance Manual. 3.03 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide additional number of heads of each type and temperature rating installed as required to meet NFPA 13 requirements. B. Provide storage cabinet or cabinets as required to receive reserve sprinkler heads and special installation tools required. C. Provide index label for each head indicating manufacturer, model, orifice size of K-factor, and temperature rating. D. Provide, inside cabinet a list of heads stored within and brief description of where installed. E. Locate cabinet near sprinkler control station as approved. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform all tests and arrange for required inspections of installed system as required. 2. Notify the Architect 48 hours prior to any test or inspection. 3. Final test and certification shall be provided in the presence of an Owner representative. Coordinate hereunder. B. Inspection Service: 1. At start of warranty year, execute inspection agreement. 2. Without additional charge to Owner, make quarterly inspection of system during year. a. Check and operate all control valves. b. Lubricate valve parts. C. Report each inspection to Owner. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 21 10 00 - 10 Water Based Fire Suppression Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of This Section, Common Work Results for Plumbing, apply to all Sections in Division 22, Plumbing. C. All Sections of Division 22, Plumbing are interrelated. When interpreting any direction, material, and method specified in any section of Division 22, Plumbing consider it within the entirety of Work in Division 22, Plumbing. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The intent of Division 22, Plumbing Specifications and the accompanying Drawings is to provide a complete and workable facility with complete systems as shown, specified and required by applicable codes. Include all work specified in Division 22 and shown on the accompanying Drawings, including appurtenances, connections, etc., in the finished job. B. The Division 22, Plumbing Specifications and the accompanying Drawings are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items shown on the Drawings are not necessarily included in the Specifications and vice versa. Specifications shall supersede drawings in case of conflict. C. Imperative language is frequently used in Division 22, Plumbing Specifications. Except as otherwise specified, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. D. The Drawings that accompany the Division 22, Plumbing Specifications are diagrammatic. They do not show every offset, bend, tee, or elbow which may be required to install work in the space provided and avoid conflicts. Offsets and transitions shall be assumed at a minimum at each duct crossing, structural penetrations through shear walls or beams, structural grids where ceiling heights are restricted, and at piping mains. Follow the Drawing as closely as is practical to do so and install additional bends, offsets and elbows where required by local conditions from measurements taken at the Building, subject to approval, and without additional cost to the Owner. The right is reserved to make any reasonable changes in fixture location prior to roughing-in, without cost impact. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. The General and Supplemental Conditions apply to this Division, including but not limited to: 1. Drawings and specifications. 2. Public ordinances, permits. 3. Include payments and fees required by governing authorities for work of this Division. B. Division 01, General Requirements, applies to this Division. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Products and equipment prohibited from containing pentabrominated, octabrominated, and decabrominated diphenyl ethers. Where products or equipment within this specification contain these banned substances, provide complying products and equipment from approved manufacturers with equal performance characteristics. 2. General a. Conform work and materials to local and State codes, and Federal, State and other applicable laws and regulations. 3. Contractor responsible for obtaining and payment for all permits, licenses, and inspection certificates required in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 1 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. New materials and equipment. Work of good quality, free of faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. C. Build and install apparatus to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. D. Operate the entire plumbing system and apparatus at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. E. Install equipment level and true. Use housekeeping pads and curbs to account for floor or roof slope. F. Materials and Equipment: 1. Meet detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name along with other manufacturers. 2. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use products of the same manufacturer. Component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. 3. Furnish materials and equipment of size, make, type, and quality herein specified. 4. Equipment scheduled by performance or model number considered the basis of the design. If other specified manufacturer's equipment is provided in lieu of the basis of design equipment the contractor is responsible for changes and costs which may be necessary to accommodate this equipment, including different sizes and locations for connections, different electrical characteristics, different dimensions, different access requirements or any other differences which impact the project. G. Workmanship: 1. General: a. Install materials in a neat and professional manner. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: a. Follow manufacturer’s directions where they cover points not specifically indicated. b. If in conflict with the Drawings and Division 22, Plumbing, obtain clarification before starting work. H. Cutting and Patching: 1. Cutting, patching, and repairing for the proper installation and completion of the work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with the appropriate Division of Work. 2. Additional openings required in building construction made by drilling or cutting. Use of jackhammer is specifically prohibited. 3. Fill holes which are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the sleeves passing through. 4. Do not pierce beams or columns without permission of Architect and then only as directed. 5. Restore new or existing work cut or damaged to its original condition. Where there are alterations disturb lawns, paving, walks, etc., repair, refinish, and leave in condition existing prior to commencement of work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Contract Drawings indicate the general layout of the piping, and various items of equipment. 2. Coordinate with other trades and field conditions. 3. Prepare Shop Drawings of piping, and equipment installations. 4. Prepare new Shop Drawings by Contractor and not reproductions or tracings of Architect’s Drawings. 5. Overlay drawings with shop drawings of other trades and check for conflicts. 6. Drawings same size as Architect’s Drawings with title block similar to Contract Drawings and identifying Architect’s Drawing number or any reference drawings.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 2 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

7. Fully dimensioned including both plan and elevation dimensions. 8. Shop drawings cannot be used to make scope changes. 9. Prepare in three-dimensional format. 10. Shop drawings include but are not limited to: a. Plumbing site plan drawn to same scale as site plan. b. Complete floor plans with plumbing to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-foot scale. c. Plumbing in mechanical rooms to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. d. Sections of congested areas to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. e. Fabricated Equipment: Scale and drawing sizes to suit contractor except equipment not less than 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. f. Superplot plans of above ground work with a colored overlay of all trades including, but not limited to, HVAC piping, HVAC equipment, plumbing piping and equipment, sprinklers, lighting, lighting controls, cable tray, fire alarm devices, electrical power conduit, and ceiling system to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. g. Superplot plans of below ground work with a colored overlay of all trades including, but not limited to, structural footings and foundation, HVAC piping, civil piping, plumbing piping, and power conduit to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. h. Beam penetration drawings indicating beam penetrations meeting the requirements indicated on the floor plans and on the structural drawings to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-foot scale. i. Slab penetration drawings of HVAC, plumbing, sprinklers, lighting and electrical to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-foot scale. 11. Submit shop drawings for review prior to beginning fabrication. Additional shop drawings may be requested when it appears that coordination issues are not being resolved in the field or when there is a question as to whether contract documents are being complied with or the design intent is being met. B. Product Data: 1. Submit product data for review on scheduled pieces of equipment, on equipment requiring electrical connections or connections by other trades, and as required by each specification section or by Drawing notes. Include manufacturer’s detailed shop drawings, specifications and data sheets. Data includes the following: a. Capacities b. RPM c. BHP d. Pressure Drop e. Design and Operating Pressures f. Temperatures g. Manufacturer’s abbreviations or codes are not acceptable. 2. List the name of the motor manufacturer and service factor for each piece of equipment. 3. Indicate equipment operating weights including bases and weight distribution at support points. 4. In the case of equipment such as wiring devices, time switches, valves, etc., specified by specific catalog number, a statement of conformance will suffice. C. Submission Requirements: 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: a. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for additional requirements related to submittals. b. Submit electronic copies of shop drawings and product data for Work of Division 22, Plumbing in PDF format with each item filed under a folder and labeled with its respective specification section number, article, and paragraph and mark, if applicable. c. Include a complete index in the original submittal. Indicate both original items submitted and note stragglers that will be submitted at a later date to avoid delay in submitting.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 3 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

d. The bulk of the shop drawings and product data, excepting Controls and Instrumentation, included with the original submittal. Controls and Instrumentation submittals may lag but still complete when submitted. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Other stragglers submitted after return of the original binder includes a tab similar to that originally submitted. Upon receipt of the returned late submittal, insert them in the previously submitted binder. D. Contractor Responsibilities: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to: 1. Submit submittals at one time and are in proper order. 2. Ensure equipment will fit in the space provided. 3. Assure that deviations from Drawings and Specifications are specifically noted in the submittals. Failure to comply will void review automatically. 1.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Provide 2D model in the following format: 1. AutoCAD 2. PDF B. Provide record drawings in hard copy and pdf format. Drawings include the following: 1. Project specific titleblock. 2. Notations reflecting the as built conditions of any additions to or variations from the construction documents provided as part of the BIM coordination, RFIs, ASIs, Owner Changes, and Field Coordination. 1.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, PARTS LISTS, AND OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for additional requirements. B. Submit three bound copies of manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for each piece of equipment or item requiring servicing. Show literature on 8- 1/2-inches by 11-inches sheets or catalogs suitable for side binding. C. Submit data when the work is substantially complete, packaged separately, and clearly identified in durable 3-ring binder. Include name and contact information for location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment. D. Clearly mark and label in each submittal, the piece of equipment provided with the proper nameplate and model number identified. Provide wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment. E. Instruct Owner thoroughly in proper operation of equipment and systems, in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manuals. Operating instructions cover all phases of control. F. Furnish competent engineer knowledgeable in this building system for minimum of five 8 hour days to instruct Owner in operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Keep a log of this instruction including dates, times, subjects, and those present and present such log when requested by Architect. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. Prior to bidding, verify and become familiar with existing conditions by visiting the site, and include factors which may affect the execution of this Work. B. Include related costs in the initial bid proposal. C. Coordinate exact requirements governed by actual job conditions. Check information and report any discrepancies before fabricating work. Report changes in time to avoid unnecessary work. D. Coordinate shutdown and start-up of existing, temporary, and new systems and utilities. Notify Owner, City, and Utility Company.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 4 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide a written guaranty covering the work of this Division (for a period of one calendar year from the date of acceptance by the Owner) as required by the General Conditions. B. Provide manufacturer’s written warranties for material and equipment furnished under this Division insuring parts and labor for a period of one year from the date of Owner acceptance of Work of this Division. C. Correct warranty items promptly upon notification. 1.10 PROVISIONS FOR LARGE EQUIPMENT A. Make provisions for the necessary openings in building to allow for admittance of equipment. 1.11 TEST REPORTS AND CERTIFICATES A. Submit one copy of test reports and certificates specified herein to the Architect. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submit requests for product substitutions in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and the General and Supplemental Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish under this Division as specified in another Division of work. 2.02 PIPE SLEEVES A. Interior Wall and Floor Sleeves: 18 gauge galvanized steel, or another pre-approved system. B. Interior Wall and Floor Sleeves (fire rated): Fire rated and water tight system approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner’s Insurance underwriter, with rating equal to floor or wall penetration, and designed specifically for the floor or wall construction, piping material, size and service. C. Exterior Wall Sleeves: Cast iron. D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as exterior wall sleeves. E. Water Tight Sleeves: Combination steel pipe sleeves with water stop and anchor plate; Link Seal Model WS, mated with synthetic rubber links interlocked with bolts and nuts; Link Seal Model LS. 2.03 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES A. Furnish stamped split type plates as follows: 1. Floor Plates: Cast brass, chromium plated. 2. Wall and Ceiling Plates: Spun aluminum. 2.04 MACHINERY GUARDS A. Furnish guards for protection on all rotating and moving parts of equipment. Provide guards for all metal fan drives and motor pulleys, regardless of being enclosed in a metal cabinet. B. Design guards so as not to restrict air flow at fan inlets resulting in reduced capacity. C. Provide shaft holes in guards for easy use of tachometers at pulley centers. Guards shall be easily removable for pulley adjustment or removal and changing of belts. D. All guards shall meet OSHA requirements including back plates. E. Provide inlet and outlet screens on all fans in plenums or where exposed to personnel. 2.05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. General: All equipment and installed work shall be as specified under Division 26, Electrical. B. Coordinate with the electrical Drawings and electrical contractor for minimum electrical equipment bracing requirements based on the available interrupting current (AIC) rating at the bus of the panelboard or switchboard serving the piece of equipment. Provide equipment that meets the bracing requirement.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 5 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Motors – AC Induction: 1. Motors shall be furnished as integral part of driven equipment. They shall be drip-proof induction type with ball bearings unless noted otherwise. Motors 1 HP and above shall be premium energy efficient type, except for emergency equipment motors. Motors shall be built to NEMA Standards for the service intended. The motors shall be rated for the voltage specified, suitable for operation within the range of 10% above to 10% below the specified voltage. 2. Energy efficient motors shall be Baldor, Westinghouse, General Electric or approved equal. 3. The motor shall meet the efficiency standards identified in the table below as determined using the IEEE Method B test at full load. MINIMUM MOTOR EFFICIENCIES RPM

IEEE 112B Efficiency HP KW 900 1200 1800 3600 1 0.75 -- 82.5 85.5 80.0 1.5 1.15 -- 86.5 86.5 85.5 2 1.53 -- 87.5 86.5 86.5 3 2.3 84.0 89.5 89.5 88.5 5 3.8 85.5 89.5 89.5 89.5 4. Refer to Equipment Schedules on the Drawings for motor horsepower, voltage and phase. 5. Refer to individual product sections for additional motor requirements. 6. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection, or be protected externally with separate thermal overload devices with low voltage release or lockout. Hermetically sealed motors shall have quick trip devices. 7. All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated and have Class F insulation or better. They shall also be able to withstand repeated voltage peaks of 1600 volts with rise times of 0.1 microseconds and greater in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1 Part 31. 8. Motors served from variable frequency drives shall be equipped with shaft grounding system which shall provide a path for current to flow between the shaft and motor frame. SGS or equal. 9. Motors located in environment air plenums not tied to air handling functions shall be totally enclosed type motors. D. Motors – Electronic Commutation (EC): 1. Motors shall be furnished as integral part of driven equipment. 2. Permanently lubricated with ball bearings unless noted otherwise. 3. Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to the motor to DC power to operate the motor. 4. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed. 5. Motor efficiency shall be minimum of 85% at all speeds. 6. Refer to Equipment Schedules on the Drawings for motor horsepower, voltage and phase. 7. Refer to individual product sections for additional motor requirements. 8. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection, or be protected externally with separate thermal overload devices with low voltage release or lockout. Hermetically sealed motors shall have quick trip devices. 9. Motors located in environment air plenums not tied to air handling functions shall be totally enclosed type motors. E. Starters: Provided under Division 26, Electrical, suitable for performing the control functions required, with the exception of self-contained equipment and where the starters are furnished as part of the control package.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 6 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

F. Equipment Wiring: Interconnecting wiring within or on a piece of mechanical equipment shall be provided with the equipment unless shown otherwise. This does not include the wiring of motors, starters and controllers provided under Division 26, Electrical. G. Control Wiring: All control wiring for plumbing equipment shall be provided herewith. H. Codes: All electrical equipment and products shall bear the Underwriters label as required by governing codes and ordinances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ACCESS PANELS A. Install in accord with manufacturer’s recommendations, coordinated with architectural features. B. Provide 2-hour fire rated doors where required bearing the UL label. C. Furnish 18-inch by 18-inch panels for ceilings and for access to equipment in soffits and shafts, and 12-inch by 12-inch for walls unless indicated otherwise. D. Furnish where indicated and where required to access valves, trap primers, shock arresters, and other appurtenances requiring operation, service, or maintenance. Submit proposed locations for review prior to installation. 3.02 SLEEVES A. Interior Floor and Wall Sleeves: 1. Provide sleeves large enough to provide 3/4-inch clearances around pipe or ductwork. Where pipe or ductwork is insulated, insulation shall pass continuously through sleeve with 3/4-inch clearance between insulation and sleeve. 2. Penetrations through mechanical room and fan room floors made watertight by packing with safing insulation and sealing with Tremco Dymeric Sealant or approved system. B. Sleeves Through Rated Floors and Walls: Similar to interior sleeves except install fire rated system approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owners insurance underwriter, with rating equal to floor or wall penetration, and designed specifically for the floor or wall construction, piping material, size and service. C. Exterior Wall Sleeves Below Grade: 1. Provide water tight sleeves. Install at pipes entering building below grade and where shown. Adjust to provide positive hydrostatic seal. 2. Responsible for following manufacturer’s procedure for installing and tightening seal. Secure sleeves against displacement. D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as below grade exterior wall sleeves, caulked from inside. E. Exterior Wall Sleeves Above Grade: Similar to interior wall sleeves except caulk outside with Tremco Dymeric Sealant. F. Layout work prior to concrete forming. Do cutting and patching required. Reinforce sleeves to prevent collapse during forming and pouring. G. Floor sleeves maintain a water barrier by providing a water tight seal or they extend 1-inch above finished floor except through mechanical equipment room floors and shafts where sleeves extend 2-inches above finished floor level. Sleeves through roof extend 8-inches above roof. Wall sleeves flush with face of wall unless otherwise indicated. Waste stacks using carriers have sleeves flush with floor and sealed. Sleeves through planters extend 8- inches above planter base. H. Do not support pipes by resting pipe clamps on floor sleeves. Provide supplementary members so pipes are floor supported. I. Special sleeves detailed on drawings take precedence over this Section. 3.03 CLEANING A. General: Clean plumbing equipment, fixtures and piping of stampings and markings (except those required by codes), iron cuttings, and other refuse.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 7 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Painted Surfaces: Clean scratched or marred painted surfaces of rust or other foreign matter and paint with matching color industrial enamel, except as otherwise noted. C. Additional requirements are specified under specific Sections of this Division. 3.04 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. Keep pipe and conduit openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. Protect piping, conduit, fixtures, equipment, and apparatus against dirty water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Restore damaged or contaminated fixtures, equipment, or apparatus to original conditions or replace at no cost to the Owner. B. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings, and similar items until in service. No rust will be permitted. C. Cover or otherwise suitably protect equipment and materials stored on the job site. 3.05 ACCESSIBILITY A. General: Locate valves, thermometers, cleanout fittings and other indicating equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection, repairs, and removal or replacement conveniently and accessibly with reference to the finished building. B. Thermometers and Gauges: Install thermometers and gauges so as to be easily read from the floors, platforms, and walkways. 3.06 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES A. Install on piping and ductwork passing through finished walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, and plaster furrings. Plates completely cover opening around pipe. B. Secure wall and ceiling plates to pipe, insulation, or structure. C. Plates not to penetrate insulation vapor barriers. D. Plates not required in mechanical rooms or unfinished spaces. 3.07 PAINTING A. General: 1. Coordinate painting of mechanical equipment and items with products and methods in conformance with the appropriate Division of Work, Painting. B. Exposed work under this division receives either a factory painted finish or a field prime coat finish, except: 1. Exposed copper piping. 2. Aluminum jacketed outdoor insulated piping. C. Equipment Rooms and Finished Areas: 1. Insulation: Not painted. 2. Hangers, Uninsulated Piping, Miscellaneous Iron Work, Structural Steel Stands, Uninsulated Tanks, and Equipment Bases: Paint one coat of black enamel. 3. Steel Valve Bodies and Bonnets: One coat of black enamel. 4. Brass Valve Bodies: Not painted. 5. Equipment: One coat of grey machinery enamel. 6. Do not paint nameplates. D. Concealed Spaces (above ceilings, not visible): 1. Insulation: Not painted. 2. Hangers, Uninsulated Piping, Miscellaneous Iron Work, Valve Bodies and Bonnets: Not painted. E. Exterior Steel: Wire brush and apply two coats of rust-inhibiting primer and one coat of grey exterior machinery enamel. F. Exterior Black Steel Pipe: Wire brush and apply two coats of rust-inhibiting primer and one coat of exterior enamel. Painting schemes shall comply with ANSI A13.1.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 8 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Before operating any equipment or systems, make thorough check to determine that systems have been flushed and cleaned as required and equipment has been properly installed, lubricated, and serviced. Check factory instructions to see that installations made accordingly and that recommended lubricants have been used. B. Use particular care in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over lubrication and blowing out seals. Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment, after delivery, or during installation. Repair damaged equipment as approved or replace with new equipment. 3.09 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Do not install piping for plumbing systems not serving electrical space in switchgear room, transformer vault, telephone room, or electric closet except as indicated. B. Piping for plumbing systems shall not pass over switchboards or electrical panelboards. Where conflicts exist, bring to attention of Architect. 3.10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Make final connections to equipment specified in sections other than Division 22, Plumbing of the specifications and Owner furnished equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings furnished and as indicated. B. Piping: 1. Connections include hot and cold water and sanitary waste and vent. 2. Provide valves and specialties as specified and as detailed on the Drawings. Provide increasers, reducers, and any other fittings required for complete installation. 3. Independently support piping connections to prevent undue strain on equipment. C. Refer to Specification Section 11 40 00, Food Service Equipment, for requirements. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 00 - 9 Common Work Results for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES AND SPECIALTIES FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Valves 2. General Purpose Gauge Cocks 3. Balance Fittings 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. CWP Cold working pressure B. EPDM Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber C. NBR Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber D. NRS Nonrising stem E. OS&Y Outside screw and yoke F. RS Rising stem G. PTFE Polytetraflouroethylene plastic H. SWP Steam working pressure I. Lead Free: Refers to the wetted surface of pipe, fittings, and fixtures in potable water systems that have a weighted average lead content ≤0.25 percent per Safe Drinking Water Act as amended January 4th 2011. Section 1417 *Add specific state requirements as needed. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance. 1. ASME B16.10 for ferrous valve dimensions. 2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. B. NSF Compliance: 1. NSF/ANSI 61 and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for valve materials for potable-water service. 2. Valves for domestic water must be 3rd Party Certified. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER VALVES A. General: Where only NIBCO INC. figure numbers are listed, equivalent products by those specified below are acceptable. 1. Balancing: a. Bell and Gossett b. Armstrong c. Tour and Anderson d. NIBCO

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 23 - 1 General Duty Valves and Specialties for OSP Tenant Improvement Plumbing 03 24 2017

2. Ball: a. Gruvlok b. Apollo c. Crane d. Hammond e. Milwaukee f. Victaulic B. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. C. All such valves shall be of one manufacturer. D. Valve ends may be threaded, flanged, soldered, or grooved, as applicable to piping system. Refer to Section 22 21 13, Pipe and Pipe Fittings Plumbing for allowable fittings. 2.02 BALL VALVES A. Bronze Ball: Bronze cast body, chrome-plated full port ball, with handle, Teflon seat, 600 psi WOG, 150 psi steam; Nibco 585-80. B. Lead Free Bronze Ball: Two piece, full port, Lead Free silicon bronze body, Stainless steel or silicon bronze trim, Reinforced PTFE or TFE seats, 600 psi CWP NIBCO T/S-585-80-LF or T/S- 585-66-LF. 2.03 BALANCING VALVE A. Lead-Free Calibrated: Bronze, Ametal (copper-alloy), or ductile iron body, brass globe or ball, differential pressure readout valves with integral checks, calibrated plate, integral pointer, suitable for tight shutoff, memory stops, threaded, grooved or soldered ends, 250 psi water, NSF/ANSI 61 compliant, Bell and Gossett Lead-Free Circuit Setter Plus. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide valves at connections to equipment where shown or required for equipment isolation. B. Provide separate support for valves where necessary. C. Provide drain valves in low points in the piping system, at coils and equipment, and as indicated. D. Coordinate gas pressure regulator selection with inlet pressure available at the regulator and the capacity and outlet pressure required by the equipment served. E. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Locate gas cocks and gas regulator readily accessible for servicing. G. Provide approved gas cock immediately upstream of each gas pressure regulator. H. Provide separate vent to the outside for each regulator. 3.02 APPLIED LOCATIONS PLUMBING VALVES A. In piping 2 inches and smaller. Valve Types System Gate Globe Swing Check Ball Butterfly Lead Free Lead Free Lead Free Lead Free Domestic Hot Not Allowed Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Lead Free Lead Free Lead Free Lead Free Domestic Cold Not Allowed Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Reclaimed Bronze Bronze Bronze Bronze Not Allowed Water

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 23 - 2 General Duty Valves and Specialties for OSP Tenant Improvement Plumbing 03 24 2017

B. Calibrated balancing valves on domestic hot water. Size balancing valves based on the published performance curve characteristics for the scheduled flow rate for each location to ensure proper operation at design conditions. C. Provide gauge cock for all pressure gauges. 3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. General: Identify valves to indicate their function and system served. B. See Section 22 05 53, Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 23 - 3 General Duty Valves and Specialties for OSP Tenant Improvement Plumbing 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Supports 2. Anchors 3. Equipment B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 22 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 2. Section 22 07 00, Insulation for Plumbing 3. Section 22 21 13, Pipe and Pipe Fittings Plumbing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings of Contractor-fabricated piping support structures. 2. No other submittals required under this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORTS, ANCHORAGE, AND RESTRAINT A. Provide pipe and equipment hangers and supports in accordance with the following: 1. Equipment, supports, and seismic restraints for conduit, piping, and ductwork are not shown on the Drawings, the contractor responsible for their design. 2. Resist seismic forces as specified in the latest edition of the International Building Code for the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. 3. Seismic restraint not to introduce excessive stresses in the piping caused by thermal expansion or contraction. 4. Connections to structural framing not to introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required. 5. In accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems for the Seismic Hazard Level corresponding to the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. 6. In accordance with the applicable code. 7. Follow provisions described in Section 22 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. B. Engineered Support Systems: Design, detail, and bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State having jurisdiction. 1. Supports and seismic restraints for suspended piping and equipment. 2. Support frames such as pipe racks or stanchions for piping and equipment which provide support from below. 3. Equipment and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 29 - 1 Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for OSP Tenant Improvement Plumbing 03 24 2017

2.02 SUPPORTS, GENERAL A. Fabricate support members from welded standard structural shapes, pipe, and plate to carry the necessary rollers, hangers, and accessories as required. 1. Support piping less than 4-inch pipe size from or by prefabricated roll-formed channels with necessary accessories to adequately support piping system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut 2. Superstrut 3. Powerstrut and Kinline 4. B-Line Systems 5. AnvilStrut C. Supports and Accessories: Preformed roll-formed channels and accessories with matching compatible accessories as shown, as specified, and as required. D. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Hydra-Zorb cushions or Cush-a-strip. E. Clamps: Super Strut Series 700 through 702 or AnvilStrut Series 1000 through 1200. 2.03 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Anvil 2. Superstrut 3. B-Line Systems 4. Tolco 5. ERICO B. Uninsulated Horizontal Copper Piping. 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil CT-65, CT-69, CT-99C. 2. Larger than 2-inch: Anvil 260 field or factory copper plated, plastic coated or other recognized industry methods. 3. Electricians’ tape is unacceptable. C. Insulated Horizontal Copper Pipe with Hangers Inside of Insulation: Same as Uninsulated Horizontal Copper Pipe. D. Insulated Horizontal Copper Pipe with Hangers Outside of Insulation: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104 or 260. 2. Larger than 2-inch: Anvil 260. E. Other Uninsulated Horizontal Pipe: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104 or 260. 2. Larger than 2-inch: Anvil 260. F. Other Insulated Horizontal Pipe With Hangers Inside of Insulation: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104, 260 or 300. 2. Larger than 2-inch: Anvil 260. G. Other Insulated Horizontal Pipe with Hangers Outside of Insulation: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104 or 260. 2. Larger than 2-inch: Anvil 260. H. Riser Clamps Copper Pipe: 1. 4-inch and Smaller: Anvil CT-121, CT-121C or 261C. 2. Larger than 4-inch: Anvil 261C. I. Riser Clamps Other Piping: Anvil 261. 2.04 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Anvil as listed or equivalent products. 1. Elcen 2. Superstrut

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 29 - 2 Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for OSP Tenant Improvement Plumbing 03 24 2017

3. B-Line Systems 4. Tolco 5. ERICO B. Beam Hangers. 1. On piping 6-inch and smaller: Anvil 86 with retaining clip Fig. 89. 2. On piping larger than 6-inch: Anvil 228, or 292. C. Inserts: 1. Anvil 152 malleable iron or 281 steel inserts. D. Inserts sized for required rod to support load being carried. E. Expansion Plugs: Similar and equal to Phillips “red-head” self-drilling flush shell selected for safety factor of 4. F. Powder actuated fasteners with silencers as approved by Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Install support systems as detailed and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide pipe racks, pipe stands, trapeze hangers, etc., as required and as detailed on the Drawings. 2. Provide adjustable hangers for pipes complete with inserts, adjusters, bolts, nuts, swivels, all-thread rods, etc., except where specified otherwise. 3. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping and do not support piping from other piping. 4. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers, and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 5. Install cast iron piping in accordance with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Industry (CISPI) Standards. 6. Support piping within 2-feet of each change of direction on both sides of fitting. B. Insulated Piping Systems: 1. Refer to Section 22 07 00, Insulation for Plumbing for insulation requirements. 2. Insulated Piping Systems with Vapor Barrier Insulation: a. Install hangers outside of insulation. b. On piping 1-1/2-inch and larger, provide insulation protection shields at each support location. 3. Insulated Piping Systems with Non-Vapor Barrier Insulation: a. At the contractor’s option, hangers may be installed inside or outside of insulation for piping 2-inch and smaller. b. If hangers are installed outside of insulation, provide insulation protection shields at support locations on piping 1-1/2-inch and larger. c. On piping larger than 2-inch, provide insulation saddles at each support location. 4. Insulation Protection: a. Band insulation protection shields firmly to insulation to prevent slippage. b. Tack weld insulation protection saddles to steel pipe. Braze saddles to copper pipe. C. Vertical Piping: 1. Support with U-clamps fastened to wall to hold piping away from wall unless otherwise approved. 2. Riser clamps on steel pipe to be directly welded to pipe. Riser clamps on copper pipe to be installed directly under fitting. 3. Risers that are not subject to thermal change to be supported at each floor of penetration.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 29 - 3 Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for OSP Tenant Improvement Plumbing 03 24 2017

4. Risers that are subject to thermal change require engineered supports. Size supports to carry forces exerted by piping system when in operation. Riser supports follow provisions described in Section 22 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Horizontal Piping: 1. Trapeze Hangers: a. Multiple pipe runs where indicated supported on channels with rust resistant finish. b. Provide necessary rods and supporting steel. 2. Support Spacing: a. Provide support at minimum spacing per MSS SP-69-1996 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application: 1) Support piping within 2 feet of each change in direction. 2) Steel Pipe, Copper Tubing: Minimum Pipe Maximum Span Maximum Span Rod Size Size Steel Copper 1-inch and 7 feet 5 feet 1/4-inch smaller 1-1/4-inch to 2- 8 feet 8 feet 3/8-inch inch b. Plumbing Piping: Support in accordance with local plumbing code. c. Piping provided with acoustical lagging wrap supported a maximum of 5-feet on center. Install hangers outside of acoustical lagging. E. Building Attachments: 1. Fastening or attaching to steel deck (without concrete fill) is prohibited. It will be necessary to support piping from structural members, beams, joists, or provide intermediate angle iron supporting members between joists. Supports may be attached to concrete filled steel deck with load limitations shown on the structural drawings or otherwise obtained from the structural engineer. 2. Provide horizontal bracing on horizontal runs 1-1/2 inch and larger and exceeding 50-feet in length at 75-foot intervals and as required to provide stabilized piping systems. 3. Provide additional structural steel angles, channels, or other members required to support piping where structures do not occur as required for proper support. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at joist panel points. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 29 - 4 Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for OSP Tenant Improvement Plumbing 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Valve Identification 2. Piping Markers 3. Equipment Identification 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Valve Tag Directory: Submit for approval prior to fabrication of valve tags. 2. Equipment Nameplate Directory: Submit for approval prior to fabrication. 3. Operating and Maintenance Data: Include a copy of valve tag and equipment nameplate directories in each set of Operating and Maintenance manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags. 1. General: Identify valves with metal tags, legends to be stamped or embossed. It shall indicate the function of the valve and its normal operating position; i.e., 56 HW (NUMBER AND CONTENT OF PIPE) ISOLATION (VALVE FUNCTION) NO (NORMAL OPERATION POSITION) 2. Size: Valve tags 2-inch diameter with 1/4-inch high letters. 3. Material: Use 0.04-inch brass tags. 4. Automatic Valves and Regulating Valves: Use 1/16-inch thick laminated 3-ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply red, “lamicoid” or equal. Form letters by exposing center ply. 5. Buildings Systems: Contact the Owner for coordination with existing building tagging system and supplementary information required for any specific system before valve tagging begins. B. Valve Tag Directory: Include tag number, location, exposed or concealed, service, valve size, valve manufacturer, valve model number, and normal operating position of valve. 2.02 PIPING MARKERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers. 1. W.H. Brady 2. Seton 3. Marking Systems, Inc. (MSI) 4. Other Manufacturers: Submit substitution request. B. Label pipes with all-vinyl, self-sticking labels or letters. 1. For pipe covering sizes up to and including 3/4-inch outside diameter, select labels with 1/2-inch letters. a. For sizes from 3/4 to 2-inch outside diameter, 3/4-inch letters, above 2-inches outside diameter, 2-inch letters. b. Identify and color-code pipe markers as follows with black directional arrows.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 53 - 1 Identification for Plumbing Piping and OSP Tenant Improvement Equipment 03 24 2017

PLUMBING SERVICE BACKGROUND PIPE MARKER * COLOR COLD WATER “DOMESTIC COLD WATER” GREEN HOT WATER “DOMESTIC HOT WATER SUPPLY” YELLOW “DOM. HOT WATER RECIRC” YELLOW OR GREEN SANITARY WASTE “SANITARY WASTE” GREEN VENT “VENT” GREEN * Directional arrow applied adjacent to pipe marker indicating direction of flow. ** Provide custom marker labels for all piping for which no standard manufactured marker is available. Submit sample for approval.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags. 1. Attach to valve with a brass chain. 2. Continuous valve tag numbers throughout the building for each system. Obtain a list for each system involved from the Owner. B. Valve Tag Directory: Post final copy in Operation and Maintenance Manual. 3.02 PIPING MARKERS A. Unless recommendations of ANSI A13.1, 1981 are more stringent, apply labels or letters after completion of pipe cleaning, insulation, painting, or other similar work, as follows: 1. Every 20 feet along continuous exposed lines. 2. Every 10 feet along continuous concealed lines. 3. Adjacent to each valve and stubout for future. 4. Where pipe passes through a wall, into and out of concealed spaces. 5. On each riser. 6. On each leg of a “T”. 7. Locate conspicuously where visible. 8. Provide pipe identification (over insulation) for all reclaimed water systems in accordance with current local codes and rulings. B. Apply labels or letters to lower quarters of the pipe on horizontal runs where view is not obstructed or on the upper quarters when pipe is normally viewed from above. C. Apply arrow labels indicating direction of flow. Arrows to be the same color and sizes as identification labels. D. Install tags on specialty gas piping valves with brass chain. 3.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Attach to prominent area of equipment, either with sheet metal screws, brass chain, or contact cement as applicable. B. Nameplate Directory: Post final copy in Operation and Maintenance Manual. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 53 - 2 Identification for Plumbing Piping and OSP Tenant Improvement Equipment 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 05 90 PRESSURE TESTING FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Pressure Testing of Piping System 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Perform required tests in the presence of the authority having jurisdiction. B. Owner Witness: Perform all tests in the presence of the Owner’s representative. C. Engineer Witness: The Engineer or Engineer’s representative reserves the right to observe all tests or selected tests to assure compliance with the specifications. D. Simultaneous Testing: Test observations by the authority having jurisdiction, the Owner’s representative and the Engineer’s representative need not occur simultaneously. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following test reports: 1. Certificate of completion, inspection and test by authority having jurisdiction on required piping systems. 2. Certificate of test approval by Owner’s representative on all systems. 3. Engineer’s representative will record witnessed tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Piping: 1. Test prior to concealment, insulation being applied, and connection to equipment, fixtures, or specialties. 2. Conduct tests with all valves but those used to isolate the test section 10 percent closed. B. Leaks: Repair leaks and retest until stipulated results are achieved. C. Notification: Advise the Construction Manager 72 hours in advance of each test. D. Failure to so notify will require test to be rescheduled. E. Testing Equipment: Provide all necessary pumps, gauges, connections, and similar items required to perform the tests. 3.02 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Sanitary and Roof Drainage Systems: 1. Test entire system or sections of system by closing all openings in piping except highest opening and filling system with water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, plug each opening except highest opening of section under test and fill each section with water, but none with less than 10 feet head of water. 2. Keep water in system or in portions under test for at least 45 minutes before inspection starts. Test for 2 hours with no drop allowed. 3. Locate and repair leaks.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 90 - 1 Pressure Testing For Plumbing Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Domestic and Reclaimed Water Systems: 1. Test entire system by closing all openings in piping except highest opening and filling system with water to point of overflow. 2. Keep water in system under test for a minimum of 45 minutes before inspection starts. 3. Test at full working pressure for 2 hours with no drop allowed. Locate and repair leaks. C. Piping - General: Test all piping as noted below, with no leaks or loss in pressure for time indicated. Repair or replace defective piping until tests are completed successfully: Plumbing Systems Test Pressure Test Medium Test Duration Industrial water 150 psig Water 4 hours Natural gas piping 60 psig Air 4 hours

END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 05 90 - 2 Pressure Testing For Plumbing Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 07 00 INSULATION FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Piping Insulation 2. Equipment Insulation B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 22 05 29, Hangers, Supports and Anchors for Plumbing 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Insulating products prohibited from containing pentabrominated, octabrominated, and decabrominated diphenyl ethers. Where products within this specification contain these banned substances, provide complying products from approved manufacturers with equal performance characteristics. 2. Flame and Smoke Ratings: Installed composite flame spread not to exceed 25 and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested by UL 723 or ASTM E84. 3. Energy Codes: Local Building and Energy Codes shall govern where insulation performance requirements for thickness exceeds thickness specified. B. Protection: Protect against dirt, water, chemical, or mechanical damage before, during, and after installation. Repair or replace damaged insulation at no additional cost. C. Source Quality Control. 1. Service: Use insulation specifically manufactured for service specified. 2. Labeling: Insulation labeled or stamped with brand name and number. 3. Insulation and accessories shall not provide any nutritional or bodily use to fungi, bacteria, insects, rats, mice, or other vermin, shall not react corrosively with equipment, piping, or ductwork, and shall be asbestos free. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product Data: For each type including density, conductivity, thickness, jacket, vapor barrier, and flame spread and smoke developed indices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Johns Manville B. Knauf C. Owens Corning D. CertainTeed E. Such insulation by one manufacturer. F. Other Manufacturers: Submit substitution request.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 07 00 - 1 Insulation for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Fiberglass: 1. Split sectional or snap-on type with 0.23 per inch maximum thermal conductivity (K-factor) at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 850 degrees F maximum service rating and white, vapor barrier jacket with pressure sensitive closure system. 2. Manufacturers: Johns Manville Microlok HP 2.03 ACCESSORIES PIPING A. Adhesives. 1. General: Maximum Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating of 25/50, SCAQMD Rule 1168 compliant. 2. Fiberglass: Integral closure system B. Cements. 1. Insulating: Ryder. 2. Heat Transfer: Chemax Tracit-300 C. Pipe Fitting Covers: 1. One piece PVC insulated pipe fitting covers. 2. Zeston, Ceel-Co. D. Tapes: 1. Pressure sensitive, weather resistant, and for temperatures up to 150 degrees F. 2. Zeston Z-tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Workmanship. 1. Installation: Insulation installed in first class, neat professional manner. 2. Applicators: Applicators shall be employed by firm that specializes in insulation work. B. Preparation: Surfaces of piping and equipment clean, free of oil or dirt, and dry before insulation is applied. C. Stamps: ASME stamps, UL labels, and similar stamps and labels shall not be covered. 3.02 PLUMBING PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLIED LOCATIONS A. Insulation Applied Locations – Plumbing Piping. Insulation System Pipe Size Insulation Type Notes Thickness

Domestic Cold Water, 1-1/4 inch Fiberglass, Note 1 1 inch Above Grade and smaller all purpose jacket Note 2

Above Fiberglass, 1-1/2 inch Note 1 1-1/4 inch all purpose jacket

Domestic Hot Water 1-1/2 inch Fiberglass, Note 1 1-1/2 inch Supply/Return, Above and smaller all purpose jacket Note 2 Grade Above Fiberglass, 2 inch Note 1 1-1/2 inch all purpose jacket

Note 1: Cover with metal pipe jacket where exposed to weather, and overheat trace cable. Note 2: Elastomeric or polyolefin insulation not allowed over heat trace cable.

B. The following piping is not insulated: 1. Waste and vent, except where heat traced.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 07 00 - 2 Insulation for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Insulation shall include all fittings, unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, valve bodies, valve bonnets, piping through sleeves, except valve bonnets, unions and flanges need not be insulated on the following systems: Domestic and solar hot water, inside building. D. Insulate valves and irregular fittings with section of pipe insulation and insulating cement, securely fastened, and finished with 6 oz. canvas and Foster 30-36 lagging adhesive. E. Flanges, valves, strainers, not requiring a vapor barrier to insulate with removable replaceable pads fabricated of 1-inch layer of Pittsburgh Corning Temp Mat sandwiched between inner and outer layer of 8 oz. glass cloth held together with stainless staples with sufficient stainless lacing hooks to hold pad firmly to flange or valve with minimum 3-inch overlap onto adjacent pipe insulation using 18 gauge SS lacing wire. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General. 1. Joints: Coat both sides of complete joining area with applicable adhesive. a. Longitudinal Joints: Make joints on top or back of pipe to minimize visibility. Except foam plastic, seal with closure system or 3-inch wide tape. b. Butt Joints: Butt lightly together and, except for foam plastic, seal with 3-inch wide tape or butt straps. c. Multiple Layered Insulation: Joints staggered. 2. Access: Strainer and other items requiring service or maintenance with easily removable and replaceable section of insulation to provide access. 3. Voids: Fill all voids, chipped corners and other openings with insulating cement or material compatible with insulating material. In insulation with Heat Tracing: Where piping is shown or specified to be heat traced, bed heat tape into heat transfer cement with insulation over heat tape and cement. 4. Seal joints, seams and fittings of metal watertight jackets at exterior locations. B. Fiberglass Insulation: Exterior insulation encased in metal jacket. C. Fittings: Insulation specified with continuous vapor barrier, the vapor barrier must not be violated. 1. Fittings covered with insulation to the same level of the adjoining insulation or fill with insulating cement. Finish with pipe fitting covers or cloth facing and tape. D. Unions, Mechanical Joints, Valves, Etc. 1. General: a. As specified for fittings. b. Minimum thickness same as specified for piping. 2. Unions: Build up insulation at least 1/2-inch beyond adjoining insulation. 3. Flanges: With square corners. Where flanges are not insulated, terminate adjacent insulation so flange bolts can be removed. 4. Flanged Valves: Insulation with square corners. E. Vapor Barrier Insulation. 1. Refer to Section 22 05 29, Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for Plumbing for support requirements. 2. Piping which requires vapor barrier protection shall have a continuous vapor barrier, which may not be pierced or broken. The following piping systems require vapor barrier protection: a. Domestic cold water. b. Industrial cold water. c. Non-potable cold water. d. All other piping systems with a nominal operating temperature below 65 degrees F. 3. Vapor Barrier Insulation: a. Insulation for pipe requiring vapor barrier protection 1-1/4-inch or smaller, insulation continuous through pipe hangers and rollers.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 07 00 - 3 Insulation for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

b. For pipe 1-1/2-inch and larger, 18-inch section of calcium silicate, same thickness as pipe insulation with continuous vapor barrier jacket at each hanger or roller. Provide pipe shield specified in Section 22 05 29, Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for Plumbing. F. Non-Vapor Barrier Insulation. 1. Refer to Section 22 05 29, Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for Plumbing for support requirements. 2. At contractor’s option, insulation may be interrupted at supports. Butt insulation tight to support. 3. If contractor elects to continue insulation at supports, installation as specified for piping systems with vapor barrier installation. 4. Void between saddle and pipe filled with insulation. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Test: Test and approve systems prior to installation of insulation. B. Existing Insulation. 1. Repair existing insulation damaged during construction. 2. Make neat connections where new and existing insulation meet. 3. Where existing piping, or equipment is removed, cover existing surfaces neatly to match existing. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 07 00 - 4 Insulation for Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 21 13 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Piping 2. Pipe Fittings B. Related Sections Include: 1. Section 22 25 00, Plumbing Water Treatment 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Piping material and installation to meet requirements of the local plumbing, fire, and building codes and serving utility requirements. 2. Provide chlorination of domestic cold and hot water piping in accordance with County and State health requirements. B. Pipe Cleaning: If pipe gets plugged or should foaming of water systems occur, disconnect piping, reclean, and reconnect without additional expense to the Owner. C. Correct any damage to the building or systems resulting from failure to properly clean the system without additional expense to the Owner. D. Products with a wetted surface installed in potable water systems UL classified in accordance with ANSI / NSF-61 for potable water service, and certified to the low lead requirements of NSF-372. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the Following: 1. List of piping materials indicating the service it is being used for. (Do not submit piping product data). 2. Product data on mechanical couplings and related components, double wall fuel oil pipe and fittings, and polypropylene waste and vent pipe. B. Test Reports and Certificates: Submit certificates of inspections and pipe tests to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. As indicated. 2.02 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE, SERVICE WEIGHT (NO-HUB) A. General: A code approved hubless system conforming to Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301. B. Pipe and Fittings: Service weight hubless cast iron conforming to ASTM A 74, marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and listed by NSF International. Tyler, AB&I, or Charlotte. C. Gaskets: Compression type conforming to ASTM C 564.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 21 13 - 1 Pipe and Pipe Fittings Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

D. Couplings: 1. Above Grade: Band type coupling in conformance with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) 310-90, consisting of stainless steel clamp and corrugated shield assemblies with a neoprene sealing sleeve ANSI A21.6, ANSI A21.10 Fittings. 2. Buried: Husky 28 gauge 304 stainless steel hubless type clamp and orange corrugated shield assemblies (80-inch pound torque) with neoprene sealing gaskets (ASTM-C-564), or Clamp-All (125-inch pound torque), 24 gauge 304 stainless steel hubless type clamp, and shield assemblies with neoprene sealing gaskets (ASTM-C-564). 3. Service: a. Sanitary, storm, and overflow drain. b. Vent piping 2 inches and above. 2.03 COPPER PIPE A. Pipe: Hard drawn copper tubing, Class L or K, ASTM B 88. B. Fittings: Wrought copper, 150 PSI; ANSI B16.22 for soldered joints, ANSI B16.50 for brazed joints; Chase, Revere, Mueller or approved equal. At Contractor’s option, a system using mechanically extracted collars in main with branch line inserted to not obstruct flow may be used on domestic water piping above ground, similar to T-drill. C. Service. 1. Domestic hot and cold water piping above ground (Type L, hard drawn) on piping 4 inches and smaller. 2. Trap priming lines (Type L, annealed). 3. Miscellaneous drains and overflows. 2.04 UNIONS A. 150 PSI malleable iron, brass to iron seat, ground joint, black or galvanized to match pipe. 200 PSI WOG bronze, ground joint, solder type for copper tubing. 1. Unions or flanges for servicing or disconnect are not required in installations using grooved mechanical joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.) B. Dielectric fittings shall be nationally listed, have a dielectric thermoplastic interior lining, and meet requirements of ASTM F-492. Fittings shall be suitable for the pressure and temperature to be encountered. 2.05 SOLDER AND BRAZING A. Brazed Joints. 1. Wrought Copper Piping Fittings: Westinghouse Phos-Copper or Dyna-Flow by J.W. Harris Co., Inc. 2. Applied locations: a. All below grade piping. b. All above grade piping larger than 2 inches for the following services: Industrial cold water, domestic hot and cold water, and pumped waste. c. Joints in Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping: Use mechanically extracted collars. Braze in accordance with Copper Development Association Copper Tube Handbook using BCUP series filler material. B. Soldered Joints. 1. Wrought Copper Pipe Fittings: All-State 430 with Duzall Flux, Engelhard Silvabrite with Engelhard General Purpose Flux or J.W. Harris Co. 2. Valves, Cast Fittings or Bronze Fittings: Harris Stay-Silv-15 or Handy & Harmon Sil-Fos. 3. Applied locations: Above grade piping 2-inch and smaller for the following services: Industrial cold water, domestic hot and cold water, pumped waste, trap priming lines.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 21 13 - 2 Pipe and Pipe Fittings Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Measurements, Lines and Levels. 1. Check dimension at the building site and establish lines and levels for work specified in this Section. 2. Establish all inverts, slopes, and manhole elevations by instrument, working from an established datum point. Provide elevation markers for use in determining slopes and elevations in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. 3. Use established grid and area lines for locating trenches in relation to building and boundaries. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install unions in all non-flanged piping connections to apparatus and adjacent to all screwed control valves, traps, and appurtenances requiring removal for servicing so located that piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system. B. Install all piping as to vent and drain. Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Support all piping independently at apparatus so that its weight shall not be carried by the equipment. D. Run piping clear of tube cleaning or removal/replacement access area on heat exchangers, water heaters, etc. E. Dielectric Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric couplings, unions, or flanges between dissimilar metals. 2. Provide dielectric couplings as required to isolate cathodically protected piping and equipment. F. No-Hub Couplings: Install per manufacturer’s instructions. 3.03 PIPING JOINTS A. Pipe and fittings shall be joined using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer in conformance with standard practice and applicable codes. Cleaning, cutting, reaming, grooving, etc., shall be done with proper tools and equipment. Hacksaw pipe cutting prohibited. Peening of welds to stop leaks not permitted. B. Copper Piping: Pipe cut evenly with cutter, ream to full inside diameter; end of pipe and inside of fitting thoroughly cleaned and polished. Joint shall be uniformly heated, and capillary space completely filled with solder or braze material, leaving full bead around entire circumference. C. No couplings installed in floor or wall sleeves. D. Flexible Connector: Provide where indicated on the Drawings. E. Above Grade No-Hub Couplings: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. General. 1. Clean interior of all piping before installation. 2. Flush sediment out of all piping systems after installation before connecting plumbing fixtures to the piping. 3. When placing the water systems in service during construction, each system shall be cleaned in accordance with Specification 22 25 00, Plumbing Water Treatment, prior to being placed in service. 4. Clean all strainers prior to placing in service. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 21 13 - 3 Pipe and Pipe Fittings Plumbing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Electric Tankless Water Heater B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 22 40 00, Plumbing Fixtures 2. Section 23 51 00, Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Water heaters to meet state energy code requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product data for each item specified. 2. Operating and Maintenance Data PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC TANKLESS WATER HEATER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Eemax 2. Chronomite 3. Envirotech 4. Other Manufacturers: Submit substitution request. B. General: Wall mounted instantaneous water heater complete with but not limited to the following: 1. Replaceable element cartridge insert. 2. Replaceable inlet filter. 3. Constant flow regulator. 4. Compression type water connections. 5. UL listed C. Reference schedule on drawings for model number, KW rating, voltage, GPM, and rate of temperature rise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRIC TANKLESS WATER HEATER A. Install per manufacturer's installation guidelines and in accordance to all applicable codes. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 30 00 - 1 Plumbing Equipment OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 22 05 00, Common Work Results for Plumbing HVAC apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Plumbing Fixtures 2. Fixture Trim 3. Drainage Products 4. Miscellaneous Plumbing Items 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Faucets: Certified to NSF/ANSI 61 and California AB1953. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product data for each item specified. 2. Operating and Maintenance Data: Hot Water Dispensers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers are stated for each fixture specified. The following manufacturers are also acceptable, except when indicated only. B. Stainless Steel Products: 1. Elkay 2. Just 3. Franke C. Faucets: 1. Chicago 2. Delta Commercial 3. Kohler 4. Symmons 5. Powers 6. Moen Commercial D. Hot Water Dispenser: In-Sink-Erator E. Exposed Waste and Supply Piping Insulation Kits: 1. Truebro 2. McGuire F. Other Manufacturers: Submit substitution request. 2.02 FIXTURE TRIM A. Supply Stops: Chicago cast brass rigid riser supplies with loose key angle stops, wall flanges, NPT female inlet, all chrome plate finish; equivalent NPT McGuire (LK series), Brasscraft (SCR series) or NPT stops by fixture supplier. B. Trap: Provide 17 gauge, chrome plated cast brass P-Traps with solder bushings, and clean- out.

214002.4 / CAMS 22 40 00 - 1 Plumbing Fixtures OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Vacuum Breakers: 1. Chicago Faucet 2. A.W. Cash 3. Febco, chrome plated 2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. S-1 Sink (Break Rooms - ADA): 1. Elkay LRAD series, 22-inch by 19-inch by 6-1/2-inch single compartment 18 gauge, type 302, 4-hole, self-rimming stainless steel sink, chrome plated brass basket strainer. 2. Chicago 350 series faucet with polished chrome plated solid brass body construction, single lever mixing valve, 6-1/4-inch cast brass spout, high temperature limit stop, 1.5 GPM pressure compensating laminar flow outlet, vandal resistant complete. B. In-Sink-Erator: Model H-770 hot water dispenser, able to produce 60 cups of 190 degrees F hot water per hour, adjustable thermostat, 750 watt, 115 volt. C. SB-1 Supply Box: Sioux Chief 696 series ice maker supply box with bottom valve supply and shock arrestor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FIXTURE TRIM A. Provide plumbing fixture trim where applicable on fixtures, including but not limited to supply stops, traps, support rims, flush valve, and vacuum breakers. B. Provide rough-in and final piping connection to fixtures. Carefully review all construction documents to assure that all fixtures are provided with necessary services for a complete operating system. C. Rigidly secure rough-in piping, carriers and supports, and other service piping to structure. 3.02 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Americans with Disabilities Act: 1. Those fixtures indicated by “ADA” shall comply with and be installed in accordance with Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines (ADAAG). Where applicable building code requirements are more stringent than ADAAG guidelines, building code requirements shall be followed. 2. Sinks: Provide insulation kits on exposed hot water and waste piping beneath ADA sinks. B. Fixture Mounting Heights: All fixtures standard rough-in catalogued heights unless shown otherwise on the Architectural Drawings. C. Water Supplies: When both hot and cold water to a fixture is required, connect the hot on the left and the cold on the right. D. Cleanout: 1. Where shown or required. 2. Cover set flush with finished surface. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 22 40 00 - 2 Plumbing Fixtures OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of This Section, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to all sections in Division 23, HVAC. C. All Sections of Division 23, HVAC are interrelated. When interpreting any direction, material, and method specified in any section of Division 23, HVAC, consider it within the entirety of Work in Division 23, HVAC. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The intent of Division 23, HVAC Specifications and the accompanying Drawings is to provide a complete and workable facility with complete systems as shown, specified and required by applicable codes. Include all work specified in Division 23, HVAC and shown on the accompanying Drawings, including appurtenances, connections, etc., in the finished job. B. The Division 23, HVAC, HVAC Specifications and the accompanying Drawings are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Items shown on the Drawings are not necessarily included in the Specifications and vice versa. Specifications shall supersede drawings in case of conflict. C. Imperative language is frequently used in Division 23 , HVAC Specifications. Except as otherwise specified, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by the Contractor. D. The Drawings that accompany the Division 23, HVAC Specifications are diagrammatic. They do not show every offset, bend, tee, or elbow which may be required to install work in the space provided and avoid conflicts. Offsets and transitions shall be assumed at a minimum at each duct crossing, structural penetrations through shear walls or beams, structural grids where ceiling heights are restricted, and at piping mains. Follow the Drawing as closely as is practical to do so and install additional bends, offsets and elbows where required by local conditions from measurements taken at the Building, subject to approval, and without additional cost to the Owner. The right is reserved to make any reasonable changes in outlet location prior to roughing-in, without cost impact. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. The General and Supplemental Conditions apply to this Division, including but not limited to: 1. Drawings and specifications. 2. Public ordinances, permits. 3. Include payments and fees required by governing authorities for work of this Division. B. Division 01, General Requirements, applies to this Division. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Products and equipment are prohibited from containing pentabrominated, octabrominated, and decabrominated diphenyl ethers. Where products or equipment within this specification contain these banned substances, provide complying products and equipment from approved manufacturers with equal performance characteristics. 2. General: All work and materials shall conform to the local and State codes, and all Federal, State and other applicable laws and regulations. 3. Contractor responsible for obtaining and payment for all permits, licenses, and inspection certificates required in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 1 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Materials and equipment shall be new. Work shall be of good quality, free of faults and defects, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. C. Apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full-rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. D. The entire mechanical system and apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. E. All equipment shall be installed level and true. Housekeeping pads and curbs shall account for floor or roof slope. F. Materials and Equipment: 1. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name along with other manufacturers. 2. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use products of the same manufacturer. Component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. 3. Furnish all materials and equipment of size, make, type, and quality herein specified. 4. Equipment scheduled by performance or model number shall be considered the basis of the design. If other specified manufacturer's equipment is provided in lieu of the basis of design equipment the contractor is responsible for all changes and costs which may be necessary to accommodate this equipment, including different sizes and locations for connections, different electrical characteristics, different dimensions, different access requirements or any other differences which impact the project. G. Workmanship: 1. General: All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Follow manufacturer’s directions where they cover points not specifically indicated. If they are in conflict with the Drawings and Division 23, HVAC Specifications, obtain clarification before starting work. H. Cutting and Patching: 1. Cutting, patching, and repairing for the proper installation and completion of the work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting shall be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with the appropriate Division of Work. 2. Additional openings required in building construction shall be made by drilling or cutting. Use of jackhammer is specifically prohibited. 3. Fill holes which are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the sleeves passing through. 4. Beams or columns shall not be pierced without permission of Architect and then only as directed. 5. All new or existing work cut or damaged shall be restored to its original condition. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, walks, etc., the surfaces shall be repaired, refinished, and left in condition existing prior to commencement of work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. The Contract Drawings indicate the general layout of the piping, ductwork, and various items of equipment. Coordination with other trades and with field conditions will be required. For this purpose, prepare Shop Drawings of all piping, ductwork and equipment installations. Shop Drawings shall be new drawings prepared by Contractor and not reproductions or tracings of Architect’s Drawings. Overlay drawings with shop drawings of other trades and check for conflicts. All drawings shall be same size as Architect’s Drawings with title block similar to Contract Drawings and identifying Architect’s Drawing number or any reference drawings. All drawings shall be fully dimensioned including both plan and elevation dimensions. Shop drawings cannot be used to make scope changes.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 2 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Shop drawings shall be prepared in three-dimensional format. 3. Shop drawings shall include but are not limited to: a. Complete floor plans with sheet metal and HVAC piping to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-foot scale. b. Sheet metal and HVAC piping of mechanical and fan rooms to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. c. Sections of congested areas to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. d. Controls and Instrumentation: Scale and drawing sizes to suit controls supplier. e. Fabricated Equipment: Scale and drawing sizes to suit contractor except equipment shall not be less than 1/4-inch equals 1-foot scale. f. Superplot plans of above ground work with a colored overlay of all trades including, but not limited to, HVAC piping, HVAC equipment, plumbing piping and equipment, sprinklers, lighting, lighting controls, cable tray, fire alarm devices, electrical power conduit, and ceiling system to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. g. Superplot plans of below ground work with a colored overlay of all trades including, but not limited to, structural footings and foundation, HVAC piping, civil piping, plumbing piping, and power conduit to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-foot scale. h. Beam penetration drawings indicating beam penetrations meeting the requirements indicated on the floor plans and on the structural drawings to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-foot scale. i. Slab penetration drawings of HVAC, plumbing, sprinklers, lighting and electrical to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-foot scale. j. Fabrication drawings of radiant ceiling panels, architectural metal ceiling, including panel penetrations for lighting, sprinkler heads, fire alarm devices, and any other penetrations. 4. Submit shop drawings for review prior to beginning fabrication. Additional shop drawings may be requested when it appears that coordination issues are not being resolved in the field or when there is a question as to whether contract documents are being complied with or the design intent is being met. B. Product Data: 1. In general, submit product data for review on all scheduled pieces of equipment, on all equipment requiring electrical connections or connections by other trades, and as required by each specification section or by Drawing notes. Include manufacturer’s detailed shop drawings, specifications and data sheets. Data sheets shall include capacities, RPM, BHP, pressure drop, design and operating pressures, temperatures, and similar data. Manufacturer’s abbreviations or codes are not acceptable. 2. List the name of the motor manufacturer and service factor for each piece of equipment. 3. Indicate equipment operating weights including bases and weight distribution at support points. 4. In the case of equipment such as wiring devices, time switches, valves, etc., specified by specific catalog number, a statement of conformance will suffice. C. Submission Requirements: 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: a. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements related to submittals. b. Submit electronic copies of shop drawings and product data for Work of Division 23, HVAC in PDF format with each item filed under a folder and labeled with its respective specification section number, article, and paragraph and mark if applicable. c. Include a complete index in the original submittal. Indicate both original items submitted and note stragglers that will be submitted at a later date to avoid delay in submitting.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 3 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

d. The bulk of the shop drawings and product data, excepting Controls and Instrumentation, shall be included with the original submittal. Controls and Instrumentation submittals may lag but shall be complete when submitted. Partial submittals will not be accepted. Other stragglers submitted after return of the original binder shall include a tab similar to that originally submitted. Upon receipt of the returned late submittal, insert them in the previously submitted binder. D. Contractor Responsibilities: It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to: 1. See that all submittals are submitted at one time and are in proper order. 2. Ensure that all equipment will fit in the space provided. 3. Assure that all deviations from Drawings and Specifications are specifically noted in the submittals. Failure to comply will void review automatically. 1.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Provide 2D model in the following format: 1. AutoCAD 2. PDF B. Provide record drawings in hard copy and pdf format. Drawings include the following: 1. Project specific titleblock. 2. Notations reflecting the as built conditions of any additions to or variations from the construction documents provided as part of the BIM coordination, RFIs, ASIs, Owner Changes, and Field Coordination. 1.07 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, PARTS LISTS, AND OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS A. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements for additional requirements. B. Submit three bound copies of manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for each piece of equipment or item requiring servicing. Literature shall be on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch sheets or catalogs suitable for side binding. Submit data when the work is substantially complete, packaged separately, and clearly identified in durable 3-ring binder. Include name and contact information for location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment. Clearly mark and label in each submittal, the piece of equipment provided with the proper nameplate and model number identified. Provide wiring diagrams for all electrically powered equipment. C. Instruct Owner thoroughly in proper operation of equipment and systems, in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction manuals. Operating instructions shall cover all phases of control. D. Furnish competent engineer knowledgeable in this building system for minimum of five 8-hour days to instruct Owner in operation and maintenance of systems and equipment. Contractor shall keep a log of this instruction including dates, times, subjects, and those present and shall present such log when requested by Architect. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Prior to bidding, verify and become familiar with all existing conditions by visiting the site, and include all factors which may affect the execution of this Work. Include all related costs in the initial bid proposal. B. Coordinate exact requirements governed by actual job conditions. Check all information and report any discrepancies before fabricating work. Report changes in time to avoid unnecessary work. C. Coordinate shutdown and start-up of existing, temporary, and new systems and utilities. Notify Owner, City, and Utility Company. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide a written guaranty covering the work of this Division (for a period of one calendar year from the date of acceptance by the Owner) as required by the General Conditions.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 4 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Provide manufacturer’s written warranties for material and equipment furnished under this Division insuring parts and labor for a period of one year from the date of Owner acceptance of Work of this Division. C. Correct warranty items promptly upon notification. 1.10 PROVISIONS FOR LARGE EQUIPMENT A. Contractor shall make provisions for the necessary openings in building to allow for admittance of all equipment. 1.11 TEST REPORTS AND CERTIFICATES A. Contractor shall submit one copy of all test reports and certificates specified herein to the Architect. 1.12 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Contractor shall submit any requests for product substitutions in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and the General and Supplemental Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS PANELS A. Furnish under this Division as specified in another Division of work. 2.02 PIPE AND DUCT SLEEVES A. Interior Wall and Floor Sleeves: 18 gauge galvanized steel, or another pre-approved system. B. Interior Wall and Floor Sleeves (fire rated): Fire rated and water tight system approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner’s Insurance Underwriter, with rating equal to floor or wall penetration, and designed specifically for the floor or wall construction, piping material, size and service. C. Exterior Wall Sleeves: Cast iron. D. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as exterior wall sleeves. E. Water Tight Sleeves: Combination steel pipe sleeves with water stop and anchor plate; Link Seal Model WS, mated with synthetic rubber links interlocked with bolts and nuts; Link Seal Model LS. 2.03 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES A. Furnish stamped split type plates as follows: 1. Floor Plates: Cast brass, chromium plated. 2. Wall and Ceiling Plates: Spun aluminum. 2.04 MACHINERY GUARDS A. Furnish guards for protection on all rotating and moving parts of equipment. Provide guards for all metal fan drives and motor pulleys, regardless of being enclosed in a metal cabinet. B. Design guards so as not to restrict air flow at fan inlets resulting in reduced capacity. C. Provide shaft holes in guards for easy use of tachometers at pulley centers. Guards shall be easily removable for pulley adjustment or removal and changing of belts. D. All guards shall meet OSHA requirements including back plates. E. Provide inlet and outlet screens on all fans in plenums or where exposed to personnel. 2.05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. General: All equipment and installed work shall be as specified under Division 26, Electrical. B. Coordinate with the electrical Drawings and electrical contractor for minimum electrical equipment bracing requirements based on the available fault current rating at the bus of the panelboard or switchboard serving the piece of equipment. Provide equipment with a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) that meets the bracing requirement.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 5 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Motors – AC Induction: 1. Motors shall be furnished as integral part of driven equipment. They shall be drip proof induction type with ball bearings unless noted otherwise. Motors 1 HP and above shall be premium energy efficient type, except for emergency equipment motors. Motors shall be built to NEMA Standards for the service intended. The motors shall be rated for the voltage specified, suitable for operation within the range of 10 percent above to 10 percent below the specified voltage. 2. Energy efficient motors shall be Baldor, Westinghouse, and General Electric or approved equal. 3. The motor shall meet the efficiency standards identified in the table below as determined using the IEEE Method B test at full load. MINIMUM MOTOR EFFICIENCIES RPM

IEEE 112B Efficiency HP KW 900 1200 1800 3600 1 0.75 -- 82.5 85.5 80.0 1.5 1.15 -- 86.5 86.5 85.5 2 1.53 -- 87.5 86.5 86.5 4. Refer to Equipment Schedules on the Drawings for motor horsepower, voltage, and phase. 5. Refer to individual product sections for additional motor requirements. 6. Furnish motors on belt drive equipment of nominal nameplate horsepower not less than 120 percentof equipment brake horsepower required for performance specified. 7. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection, or be protected externally with separate thermal overload devices with low voltage release or lockout. Hermetically sealed motors shall have quick trip devices. 8. All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated and have Class F insulation or better. They shall also be able to withstand repeated voltage peaks of 1600 volts with rise times of 0.1 microseconds and greater in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1 Part 31. 9. Motors served from variable frequency drives shall be equipped with shaft grounding system which shall provide a path for current to flow between the shaft and motor frame. SGS or equal. 10. Motors located in environment air plenums not tied to air handling functions shall be totally enclosed type motors. 11. Motors installed on cooling towers shall be totally enclosed type TEFC. D. Motors – Electronic Commutation (EC): 1. Motors shall be furnished as integral part of driven equipment. 2. Permanently lubricated with ball bearings unless noted otherwise. 3. Internal motor circuitry shall convert AC power supplied to the motor to DC power to operate the motor. 4. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20 percent of full speed. 5. Motor efficiency shall be minimum of 85 percent at all speeds. 6. Refer to Equipment Schedules on the Drawings for motor horsepower, voltage, and phase. 7. Refer to individual product sections for additional motor requirements. 8. Motors shall have built-in thermal overload protection, or be protected externally with separate thermal overload devices with low voltage release or lockout. Hermetically sealed motors shall have quick trip devices. 9. Motors located in environment air plenums not tied to air handling functions shall be totally enclosed type motors.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 6 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

E. Starters: Provided under Division 26, Electrical, suitable for performing the control functions required, with the exception of self-contained equipment and where the starters are furnished as part of the control package. F. Equipment Wiring: Interconnecting wiring within or on a piece of mechanical equipment shall be provided with the equipment unless shown otherwise. This does not include the wiring of motors, starters, and controllers provided under Division 26, Electrical. G. Control Wiring: All control wiring for mechanical equipment shall be provided under Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC. H. Codes: All electrical equipment and products shall bear the Underwriters label as required by governing codes and ordinances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ACCESS PANELS A. Install in accord with manufacturer’s recommendations, coordinated with architectural features. B. Provide 2-hour fire rated doors where required bearing the U.L. label. C. Furnish 18-inch by 18-inch panels for ceilings and for access to equipment in soffits and shafts, and 12-inch by 12-inch for walls unless indicated otherwise. D. Furnish where indicated and where required to access valves, fire/smoke dampers, trap primers, shock arresters, and other appurtenances requiring operation, service, or maintenance. Submit proposed locations for review prior to installation. 3.02 SLEEVES A. Interior Floor and Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves large enough to provide 3/4-inch clearances around pipe or ductwork. Where pipe or ductwork is insulated, insulation shall pass continuously through sleeve with 3/4-inch clearance between insulation and sleeve. Penetrations through mechanical room and fan room floors shall be made watertight by packing with safing insulation and sealing with Tremco Dymeric Sealant or approved system. B. Sleeves Through Rated Floors and Walls: Similar to interior sleeves except install fire rated system approved by Authority Having Jurisdiction and Owner’s Insurance Underwriter, with rating equal to floor or wall penetration, and designed specifically for the floor or wall construction, piping or duct material, size and service. Firestopping work shall comply with requirements of Section 07 84 00, Firestopping. C. Sleeves specified or indicated at fire damper penetrations shall take precedence over this article. D. Exterior Wall Sleeves Below Grade: Provide water-tight sleeves. Install at pipes entering building below grade and where shown. Adjust to provide positive hydrostatic seal. Contractor shall be responsible for following manufacturer’s procedure for installing and tightening seal. Secure sleeves against displacement. E. On Grade Floor Sleeves: Same as below grade exterior wall sleeves, caulked from inside. F. Exterior Wall Sleeves Above Grade: Similar to interior wall sleeves except caulk outside with Tremco Dymeric Sealant. G. Layout work prior to concrete forming. Do all cutting and patching required. Reinforce sleeves to prevent collapse during forming and pouring. H. All floor sleeves shall maintain a water barrier by providing a water tight seal or they shall extend 1-inch above finished floor except through mechanical equipment room floors and shafts where sleeves shall extend 2 inches above finished floor level. Sleeves through roof shall extend 8 inches above roof. Wall sleeves shall be flush with face of wall unless otherwise indicated. I. Do not support pipes by resting pipe clamps on floor sleeves. Supplementary members shall be provided so pipes are floor supported. J. Special sleeves detailed on drawings shall take precedence over this section.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 7 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.03 CLEANING A. General: Clean mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork of stampings and markings (except those required by codes), iron cuttings, and other refuse. B. Painted Surfaces: Clean scratched or marred painted surfaces of rust or other foreign matter and paint with matching color industrial enamel, except as otherwise noted. C. Additional requirements are specified under specific Sections of this Division. 3.04 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION A. Keep pipe, ductwork, and conduit openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. Protect piping, conduit, ductwork, equipment, and apparatus against dirty water, chemical, or mechanical damage both before and after installation. Restore damaged or contaminated fixtures, equipment, or apparatus to original conditions or replace at no cost to the Owner. B. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings, and similar items until in service. No rust will be permitted. C. Cover or otherwise suitably protect equipment and materials stored on the job site. 3.05 ACCESSIBILITY A. General: Locate valves, thermometers, cleanout fittings and other indicating equipment or specialties requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspection, repairs, and removal or replacement conveniently and accessibly with reference to the finished building. B. Thermometers and Gauges: Install thermometers and gauges so as to be easily read from the floors, platforms, and walkways. 3.06 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES A. Install on piping and ductwork passing through finished walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, and plaster furrings. Plates shall completely cover opening around pipe and duct. B. Secure wall and ceiling plates to pipe, insulation, or structure. C. Plates shall not penetrate insulation vapor barriers. D. Plates not required in mechanical rooms or unfinished spaces. 3.07 PAINTING A. General: Coordinate painting of mechanical equipment and items with products and methods in conformance with the appropriate Division of Work, Painting. All exposed work under this division shall receive either a factory painted finish or a field prime coat finish, except: 1. Exposed copper piping. 2. Aluminum jacketed outdoor insulated piping. B. Equipment Rooms and Finished Areas: 1. Insulation: Not painted. 2. Hangers, Uninsulated Piping, Miscellaneous Iron Work, Structural Steel Stands, Uninsulated Tanks, and Equipment Bases: Paint one coat of black enamel. 3. Steel Valve Bodies and Bonnets: One coat of black enamel. 4. Brass Valve Bodies: Not painted. 5. Equipment: One coat of grey machinery enamel. Do not paint nameplates. 6. Grilles, Diffusers, Registers: Paint sheet metal and visible ductwork behind grilles, diffusers, and registers flat black. C. Concealed Spaces (above ceilings, not visible): 1. Insulation: Not painted. 2. Hangers, Uninsulated Piping, Miscellaneous Iron Work, Valve Bodies and Bonnets: Not painted. D. Exterior Steel: Wire brush and apply two coats of rust-inhibiting primer and one coat of grey exterior machinery enamel.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 8 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

E. Roof Mounted Equipment: Paint two coats of exterior machinery enamel. Color as selected by Architect. Where factory standard finish is indicated in the equipment specification, it is assumed that the standard finish is painted. 3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Before operating any equipment or systems, make thorough check to determine that systems have been flushed and cleaned as required and equipment has been properly installed, lubricated, and serviced. Check factory instructions to see that installations have been made accordingly and that recommended lubricants have been used. B. Use particular care in lubricating bearings to avoid damage by over-lubrication and blowing out seals. Check equipment for damage that may have occurred during shipment, after delivery, or during installation. Repair damaged equipment as approved or replace with new equipment. 3.09 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Ductwork or piping for mechanical systems not serving electrical space shall not be installed in any switchgear room, transformer vault, telephone room, or electric closet except as indicated. B. Ductwork or piping for mechanical systems shall not pass over switchboards or electrical panelboards. Where conflicts exist, bring to attention of Architect. 3.10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Make final connections to equipment specified in sections other than Division 23, HVAC of the specifications and Owner-furnished equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings furnished and as indicated. B. Piping: 1. Connections shall include steam supply, steam vent and condensate. 2. Provide valves and specialties as specified and as detailed on the Drawings. Provide increasers, reducers, and any other fittings required for complete installation. 3. All piping connections shall be independently supported to prevent undue strain on equipment. C. Refer to Specification Section 11 40 00, Food Service Equipment, for requirements. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 00 - 9 Common Work Results for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 18 HVAC EXPANSION COMPENSATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Expansion joints and compensation. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 05 29, Hangers, Supports and Anchors for HVAC 2. Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 3. Section 23 21 13, Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The expansion joints, pipe guides, and related supports, braces, and anchorages to building structure shall be designed to absorb thermal expansion and contraction of piping and terminal movement, as well as resist the static and dynamic loads due to fluid flow at design conditions, hydraulic testing pressures, and seismic forces. B. The system of expansion joints, guides, and related supports, braces, and anchorage to building structure shall be designed, detailed, and bear the seal of a Professional Engineer registered in the State having jurisdiction. C. Use expansion joints in straight lengths of rigid pipe; preferably welded steel, anchored and guided in accordance with best practices recommendations of Crocker and King, Piping Handbook, latest edition. D. Avoid use of expansion joints in conjunction with U-bends or other piping systems with “inherent” flexibility, such as Victaulic piping with flexible couplings. If expansion joints are used in piping with bends, thorough analysis of pipe stresses and deflections shall be conducted and extra care and attention shall be paid to radial thrust capacity of pipe guides, braces, and anchors. E. Design shall include: 1. Pipe stress analysis indicating loads, deflections, and pipe stress at critical points throughout the piping systems under the following conditions: a. At hydraulic design test pressure and ambient water temperature. b. At design operating temperature, pressure, and flow. c. Model number, size, location, and details of expansion joints, compensator guides, supports, braces, and anchorage to building structure, with substantiating calculations that the components and building can accept the calculated loads and deflections. d. Detailed shop drawings stamped and signed by a registered Professional Engineer. e. Structural details and calculations stamped and signed by a registered Professional Structural Engineer. f. Expansion Joints to be designed and manufactured to the current Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) standards. Manufacturer of expansion joints to be certified by EJMA.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 18 - 1 HVAC Expansion Compensation OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product data. 2. Shop Drawings showing details of construction, dimensions, arrangement of components, and isolation. 3. Structural Details and Calculations: Submit structural details and calculations substantiating that building structure, anchorages, and fabricated steel braces can safely withstand maximum calculated loads. 4. Specified testing requirements. 5. Operating and maintenance data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPANSION JOINTS AND COMPENSATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Flexonics 2. Keflex 3. Hyspan 4. Metraflex 5. Other Manufacturers: Submit substitution request. B. Description: 1. Expansion compensators to be of the packless, externally pressurized type to allow for axial movement constructed of stainless steel bellows, stainless steel shroud, integral guide rings, internal liner, limit stops, with drain port and plug. 2. Materials of construction and pressure ratings shall be appropriate for the application as specified for each piping material and service. 2.02 PIPE GUIDES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hyspan 2. Grinnell 3. Flexonics 4. Adsco 5. Pipe Shields Inc. 6. Unistrut 7. Or equal. B. Spider Clamp Assembly: 1. Heavy gauge pressed steel, fusion welded, bolted construction, black enamel finish. 2. Hyspan series 9500, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXPANSION JOINTS AND COMPENSATORS A. Install in piping to compensate for base isolated building expansion and contraction during seismic event. Contractor is responsible to determine quantities and locations required. B. Install in other locations indicated on the drawings. C. Provide and install pipe alignment guides as recommended by the expansion joint manufacturer, with the first guide no more than 4 pipe diameters away from the expansion joint or compensator and second guide no more than 14 pipe diameters from first guide. D. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 18 - 2 HVAC Expansion Compensation OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 23 GENERAL DUTY VALVES AND SPECIALTIES FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Valves, general purpose gauge cocks, and balance fittings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data. A. Submit balancing valve schedule with manufacturer, model, size, flow rate and pressure drop. B. Submit automatic flow control valve schedule with manufacturer, model, size, flow rate and pressure drop. C. Submit pressure independent control valve schedule with manufacturer, model, size, flow rate and pressure drop. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER VALVES A. General: Where only Nibco figure numbers are listed, equivalent products by those specified below are acceptable. 1. Gate, Globe, Swing Check: Victaulic, Crane, Kennedy, Stockham, Milwaukee, Walworth and Hammond. 2. Silent Check: Mueller, Metraflex, Victaulic, Bell and Gossett, Milwaukee and Gruvlok. 3. Balancing: DeZurik, Homestead, Bell and Gossett, Armstrong, Walworth, Taco, Wheatley, Tour and Andersson, Victaulic, Gruvlok, and Nibco. 4. Butterfly: Victaulic, Gruvlok, Crane, Walworth, Milwaukee and Metraflex. 5. Ball: Gruvlok, Apollo, Crane, Hammond, Milwaukee and Victaulic. B. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. C. All such valves shall be of one manufacturer. D. Valve ends may be threaded, flanged, soldered, or grooved, as applicable to piping system. Refer to Section 23 21 13 for allowable fittings. 2.02 GATE VALVES A. Bronze Gate: Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze screwed bonnet; solid wedge, 150 PSI steam rating (use bonnet on steam service), 300 PSI WOG, Nibco 134. B. Iron Gate, OS&Y: Iron body, bronze trim, OS and Y pattern, solid wedge, 150 PSI rating; Nibco 637. 2.03 GLOBE VALVES A. Bronze Globe and Angle Globe: Bronze body, bronze mounted, renewable composition disc, 150 PSI rating; Nibco 235 or 335. B. Iron Globe: Iron body, bronze mounted, OS and Y pattern, renewable composition disc, 125 PSI rating; Nibco 718-B. 2.04 CHECK VALVES A. Horizontal Bronze Swing Check: Bronze body, bronze mounted, regrinding bronze disc, 150 PSI steam rating, 300 PSI WOG; Nibco 433-Y.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 23 - 1 General Duty Valves and OSP Tenant Improvement Specialties for HVAC 03 24 2017

B. Horizontal Iron Swing Check: Iron body, bronze mounted, regrinding bronze disc and seat ring, 125 PSI rating; Nibco 918. C. Vertical and Silent Check Valves. 1. 250-pound WOG, iron body, stainless steel trim, globe type with flanged ends; Nibco 960. 2. 300-PSIG CWP, ductile iron body, stainless steel spring and shaft. Victaulic Series 716. 3. 230-PSIG CWP, AGS grooved end ductile iron body, stainless steel spring, shaft, and disc, EPDM seat. Victaulic Series W715. 4. Vertical and Silent Check Valves: 250-pound WOG, iron body, stainless steel trim, wafer type; Nibco W-960. 2.05 BALL VALVES A. Bronze Ball: Bronze cast body or forged brass, chrome-plated full port ball, with handle, Teflon seat, 300 PSI WOG, 150 PSI steam; Nibco 585-70 or Victaulic Series 589. B. PVC Ball: PVC Body, trunion mounted, Teflon seat, Viton seals, socket type connection; True Blue GSR Asahi. 2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Ductile iron body, electroless-nickel chrome plated disc and stainless steel shaft (shaft shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating), with lever handle and locking feature on valves 6-inches and less, gear operator on valves 8-inches and over; stem neck length to accommodate insulation where applicable, pressure responsive EPDM liner, 300 PSI water; Victaulic MasterSeal, Nibco 2000, Nibco 4765. B. Copper Grooved Piping System Butterfly Valve: Nylon coated or Cast bronze body per Copper Development Agency-836, ductile iron disc encapsulated with EPDM coating, lever handle up to 6-inches, gear operator on valves 8-inches and greater, stem length to accommodate insulation, 300 PSI water; Victaulic Series 608, per ASTM A-584. 1. Grooved ends shall be manufactured to copper-tubing sizes. Flaring tube or fitting ends to accommodate alternate sized couplings is not permitted. 2.07 BALANCING VALVE A. Calibrated. 1. Bronze, Ametal (copper-alloy), or ductile iron body, brass globe or ball, differential pressure readout valves with integral checks, calibrated plate, integral pointer, suitable for tight shutoff, memory stops, threaded, grooved, or soldered ends, 250 PSI water; Victaulic, Tour Anderson, Bell and Gossett CB. 2. Size balancing valves based on the published performance curve characteristics for the scheduled flow rate for each location to ensure proper operation at design conditions. B. Eccentric Plug. 1. Cast iron body, EPT coated plug, pressure measuring ports, flanged or grooved cut end, memory stop, 2-inch square actuating nut for sizes up to 6-inch, above 6-inch gear operator, 175 PSI; Victaulic Series 365 or DeZurik 118-F. 2. Size balancing valves based on the published performance curve characteristics for the scheduled flow rate for each location to ensure proper operation at design conditions. 2.08 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Gauge Cocks: Brass, tee handle, male to female, 200 PSI working pressure, 1/4 inch; Conbraco 41 series. B. Drain Valves: Bronze globe valve or full port ball valve, garden hose end, cap and chain 3/4-inch size. 2.09 SYSTEM SPECIALTIES A. Manual Air Vents: Coin type; Dole No. 9 or approved equal.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 23 - 2 General Duty Valves and OSP Tenant Improvement Specialties for HVAC 03 24 2017

B. Automatic Air Vents. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hoffman No. 78, Amtrol, Armstrong, Spirax/Sarco, Spirotop. b. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. 2. Description: Water main type, cast brass body, built-in check valve, 1/8-inch I.P.S. top tapping for moisture discharge, 3/4-inch size, 150 PSI operating pressure. C. Pressure/Temperature Test Plug. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Peterson Engineering, Inc., Universal Lancaster, Sisco, Trerice. b. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. 2. General: 1/2-inch N.P.T. fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8-inch O.D., fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket. 3. Material: Solid brass with valve core of Nordel. 4. Rating: Minimum 300 PSIG at 275 degrees F. 5. Gauges and Thermometers: Supply Owner with two pressure gauge adapters with 1/8-inch O.D. probe and two five-inch stem pocket test thermometers 25-125 degrees F for chilled water, 40 -240 degrees F for heating water. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide valves at connections to equipment where shown or required for equipment isolation. B. Install all valves and strainers in accessible locations and same size as connected piping (not the size of the equipment connection), except balancing valves shall be sized by the Contractor to properly balance the flow. C. Provide separate support for valves where necessary. D. Provide drain valves in all low points in the piping system, at coils and equipment, and as indicated. 3.02 APPLIED LOCATIONS HVAC VALVES A. In piping 2 inches and smaller: Valve Types System Gate Globe Swing Check Ball Butterfly Chilled Not Allowed Bronze Bronze Bronze Not Allowed Water Heating At Boiler Only Bronze Bronze Bronze Not Allowed Water B. In piping 2-1/2-inches and larger: Valve Types System Gate Globe Check Ball Butterfly Chilled Water Iron Iron Iron, Swing Not Allowed Ductile Iron Heating Iron Iron Iron, Swing Not Allowed Ductile Iron Water C. Calibrated balancing valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller, on water coils and in piping systems in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Eccentric Plug Valves 3 inches and larger, on water coils and in piping systems in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. E. Provide gauge cock for all pressure gauges. F. Provide gate valves with pressure type packing glands for heating water boiler shutoff applications. Valves shall meet requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV, Article 7 for Stop Valves.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 23 - 3 General Duty Valves and OSP Tenant Improvement Specialties for HVAC 03 24 2017

3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. General: Identify valves to indicate their function and system served. B. See Section 23 05 53, Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 3.04 CHAIN OPERATORS A. All valves in equipment rooms or fan rooms used for equipment or coil isolation and more than 8 feet above floor shall be installed with stem horizontal and equipped with chain wheels and chains extending to 6 feet above floor. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Manual Air Vents. 1. Install at all high points where automatic air vents are not used, where noted, and where required for proper venting of system. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Automatic Air Vents. 1. Install automatic air vents at high points where air can collect in water systems where indicated. Route drain lines from vent to nearest floor drain. 2. Install 3/4-inch globe shut-off valve ahead of air vent. Install ball valve where bucket drainage is required. C. Grooved Mechanical Pipe Valve End Connections. 1. Refer to Section 23 21 13, Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC for allowed service installations. 2. Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published installation instructions. 3. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer and shall be suitable for the intended service. 4. The coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative: a. Shall provide on-site training for the Contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. b. Shall periodically visit the project site to ensure best practices in grooved installation are being followed. c. A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or field visits. D. Test Plugs: Install where indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 23 - 4 General Duty Valves and OSP Tenant Improvement Specialties for HVAC 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 29 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Supports and anchors for piping systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 2. Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC 3. Section 23 21 13, Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide pipe and equipment hangers and supports in accordance with the following: 1. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment, and supports and seismic restraints for conduit, piping, and ductwork are not shown on the Drawings, the contractor shall be responsible for their design. 2. Seismic restraints and anchorages shall resist seismic forces as specified in the latest edition of the International Building Code for the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. 3. Seismic restraint shall not introduce excessive stresses in the piping caused by thermal expansion or contraction. 4. Connections to structural framing shall not introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required. 5. Seismic restraints shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” for the Seismic Hazard Level corresponding to the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. 6. Seismic restraints shall be in accordance with the applicable code. 7. Seismic restraints shall follow the provisions described in Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. B. Engineered Support Systems: The following support systems shall be designed, detailed, and bear the seal of a Professional Engineer registered in the State having jurisdiction. 1. Supports and seismic restraints for suspended piping and equipment. 2. Support frames such as pipe racks or stanchions for piping and equipment which provide support from below. 3. Equipment and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings of contractor fabricated support structures. 2. Structural Details and Calculations: Submit structural details and calculations substantiating that building structure, anchorages, and fabricated steel braces can safely withstand maximum calculated loads. 3. No other submittals required under this Section.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 29 - 1 Hangers, Supports and Anchors for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORTS, GENERAL A. Fabricate support members from welded standard structural shapes, pipe, and plate to carry the necessary rollers, hangers, and accessories as required. Support piping less than 4-inch pipe size from or by prefabricated roll-formed channels with necessary accessories to adequately support piping system. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Unistrut 2. Superstrut 3. Powerstrut and Kinline 4. B-Line Systems 5. AnvilStrut C. Supports and Accessories: Preformed roll-formed channels and accessories with matching compatible accessories as shown, as specified, and as required. D. Dissimilar Metal Protection: Hydra-Zorb cushions or Cush-a-strip. E. Clamps: Super Strut Series 700 through 702 or AnvilStrut Series 1000 through 1200. 2.02 PIPE ATTACHMENTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Anvil as noted or equivalent products by Superstrut, B-Line Systems, Tolco, Michigan Hanger. B. Uninsulated Horizontal Copper Piping: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil CT-65, CT-69, CT-99C. 2. Larger than 2 inches: Anvil 260 field or factory copper plated, plastic coated or other recognized industry methods. Electrician’s tape is unacceptable. C. Insulated Horizontal Copper Pipe with Hangers Inside of Insulation: Same as Uninsulated Horizontal Copper Pipe. D. Insulated Horizontal Copper Pipe with Hangers Outside of Insulation: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104 or 260. 2. Larger than 2 inches: Anvil 260. E. Other Uninsulated Horizontal Pipe: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104 or 260. 2. Larger than 2 inches: Anvil 260. F. Other Insulated Horizontal Pipe With Hangers Inside of Insulation: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104, 260 or 300. 2. Larger than 2 inches: Anvil 260. G. Other Insulated Horizontal Pipe with Hangers Outside of Insulation: 1. 2-inch and Smaller: Anvil 65, 70, 104 or 260. 2. Larger than 2 inches: Anvil 260. H. Riser Clamps Copper Pipe: 1. 4-inch and Smaller: Anvil CT-121, CT-121C or 261C. 2. Larger than 4 inches: Anvil 261C. I. Riser Clamps Other Piping: Anvil 261. 2.03 PIPE ROLLERS, INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS, AND INSULATION PROTECTION SADDLES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Anvil as noted or equivalent Super Strut, B-Line Systems, Tolco, Michigan Hangers. B. Pipe Rollers: Anvil 174 or 274 as required. Size for pipe plus insulation for insulated pipe. C. Insulation Protection Shields: Anvil 167.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 29 - 2 Hangers, Supports and Anchors for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

D. Insulation Protection Saddles: Anvil 160 through 166A as required. Saddles for copper pipe, factory or field copper plated. 2.04 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Anvil as listed or equivalent products by Elcen, Superstrut, B-Line Systems, Tolco, Michigan Hangers. B. Beam Hangers. 1. On piping 6-inch and smaller: Anvil 86 with retaining clip Fig. 89. 2. On piping larger than 6 inches: Anvil 228, or 292. C. Inserts: Anvil 152 malleable iron or 281 steel inserts. Inserts sized for required rod to support load being carried. D. Expansion Plugs: Similar and equal to Phillips “red-head” self-drilling flush shell selected for safety factor of 4. E. Powder actuated fasteners with silencers as approved by Architect. 2.05 ROOF-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Greenheck - GES B. Equipment Supports: Welded aluminum or galvanized steel construction suitable for use on insulated (GESR) or non-insulated (GESS) flat roof decks, wood nailer, engineered to support gravity and seismic loads of supported equipment. Account for roof slope to provide level mounting surface for equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: 1. Install all support systems as detailed and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide pipe racks, pipe stands, trapeze hangers, etc., as required and as detailed on the Drawings. 2. Provide adjustable hangers for all pipes complete with inserts, adjusters, bolts, nuts, swivels, all-thread rods, etc., except where specified otherwise. 3. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping and do not support piping from other piping. 4. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 5. Support all piping within 2 feet of each change of direction on both sides of fitting. B. Insulated Piping Systems. 1. See Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC for insulation requirements. 2. Insulated Piping Systems with Vapor Barrier Insulation: a. Install hangers outside of insulation. b. On piping 1-1/2 inches and larger, provide insulation protection shields at each support location. 3. Other insulated Piping Systems with Non-Vapor Barrier Insulation: a. At the Contractor’s option, hangers may be installed inside or outside of insulation for piping 2 inches and smaller. b. If hangers are installed outside of insulation, provide insulation protection shields at all support locations on piping 1-1/2 inches and larger. c. On piping larger than 2 inches, provide insulation saddles at each support location. 4. Insulation Protection: a. Band insulation protection shields firmly to insulation to prevent slippage. b. Tack weld insulation protection saddles to steel pipe. Braze saddles to copper pipe.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 29 - 3 Hangers, Supports and Anchors for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Vertical Piping: 1. Support with U-clamps fastened to wall to hold piping away from wall unless otherwise approved. 2. Riser clamps on steel pipe to be directly welded to pipe. Riser clamps on copper pipe to be installed directly under fitting. 3. Risers that are not subject to thermal change to be supported at each floor of penetration. 4. Risers that are subject to thermal change require engineered supports. Size supports to carry all forces exerted by piping system when in operation. Riser supports shall follow the provisions described in Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. D. Horizontal Piping: 1. Trapeze Hangers: Multiple pipe runs where indicated shall be supported on channels with rust resistant finish. Provide all necessary rods and supporting steel. 2. Support Spacing: Provide support at minimum spacing per MSS SP-69-1996 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application: a. Support piping within 2 feet of each change in direction. b. Steel Pipe, Copper Tubing: Minimum Pipe Size Max. Span Steel Max. Span Copper Rod Size 1-inch and smaller 7 feet 5 feet 1/4-inch 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches 8 feet 8 feet 3/8-inch 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches 11 feet 9 feet 1/2-inch 4 inches to 5 inches 14 feet 12 feet 1/2-inch c. Piping provided with acoustical lagging wrap shall be supported a maximum of 5 feet on center. Install hangers outside of acoustical lagging. E. Building Attachments: 1. Fastening or attaching to steel deck (without concrete fill) is prohibited. It will be necessary to support all piping from structural members, beams, joists, or provide intermediate angle iron supporting members between joists. Supports may be attached to concrete filled steel deck with load limitations shown on the structural drawings or otherwise obtained from the structural engineer. 2. Provide horizontal bracing on all horizontal runs 1-1/2 inches and larger and exceeding 50 feet in length at 75-foot intervals and as required to provide stabilized piping systems. 3. Provide all additional structural steel angles, channels, or other members required to support piping where structures do not occur as required for proper support. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports at joist panel points. F. Roof Mounted Equipment Supports: 1. Select appropriate model for insulated or uninsulated roof deck. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. Account for roof slope to provide level mounting service for equipment. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 29 - 4 Hangers, Supports and Anchors for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Isolation of mechanical equipment as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 2. Seismic restraint of equipment, piping and ductwork. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 05 18, HVAC Expansion Compensation 2. Section 23 05 29, Hangers, Supports and Anchors for HVAC 3. Section 23 31 01, HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A single manufacturer shall select and furnish all isolation required, except packaged equipment with integral isolators meeting all the isolation and seismic requirements of this specification. B. The system of vibration isolators and seismic controls shall be designed, detailed, and bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State having jurisdiction. C. Isolation performance requirements are indicated in the specifications. All deflections indicated are nominal static deflections for specific equipment supported. D. Isolator Stability and Rated Capacity: 1. Spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. E. Seismic Restraints: 1. Restraint of equipment, piping and ductwork to be in accordance with the current state and local Building Code. 2. All calculations shall be in accordance with current state and local Building Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Submit Shop Drawings showing complete details of construction for steel and concrete bases including: a. Equipment mounting holes. b. Dimensions. c. Isolation selected for each support point. d. Details of mounting brackets for isolator. e. Weight distribution for each isolator. f. Code number assigned to each isolator. 2. Submit product data and calculation sheets for isolators, showing: a. Size, type, load rating, and rated deflection of each required isolator. b. Percent of vibration transmitted based on the lowest disturbing frequency of the equipment.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 48 - 1 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement Piping and Equipment 03 24 2017

3. Structural Details and Calculations: a. Submit structural details and calculations substantiating that building structure, anchorages, and fabricated steel braces can safely withstand maximum calculated loads. B. Installation report as specified in Part 3 of this Section. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.05 EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION A. Provide a balanced set of vibration isolators for each piece of equipment listed in the Equipment Schedules. B. Isolation work to include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1. Isolation support of motor-driven equipment. 2. Inertia base frames in conjunction with isolation. 3. Isolation support of air-handling housings. 4. Isolation support of piping, piping risers, and ductwork. 5. Penetration isolation of pipework, ductwork, and conduits through walls, floors or ceilings. 6. Flexible connections of ductwork and piping to equipment. C. Each piece of rotating equipment must meet a reasonable criterion for maximum vibration levels at each bearing, while in operation. The criteria for varying operating speeds are given as follows: 1. Rotating equipment operating peak vibration velocities must not exceed 0.08 inch/second. 2. If it is discovered that the operating vibration velocities exceed this criteria, the equipment shall be repaired or replaced at no expense to the Owner until approval of the equipment is given by the Engineer. D. Any components or materials not specially mentioned herein, but necessary to the proper vibration isolation of the equipment, shall be provided. 1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Amber Booth B. Mason Industries, Inc C. Kinetics Corporation D. Vibrex E. Approved equal, meeting all of the conditions and requirements specified herein. 1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. All vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and pouring forms, shall be designed and furnished by a single manufacturer or suppliers. B. Adequately restrain all equipment, piping, and ductwork to resist seismic forces. Design and select restraint devices to meet seismic requirements as defined in the latest issue of the International Building Code under Earthquake Design and applicable state and local codes. C. In addition, the contractor shall have the following responsibilities: 1. Selection, installation, adjustment, and performance of vibration isolators which will meet the requirements given on the plans or in the specifications. 2. Provide Engineering drawings, details, supervision, and instruction to assure proper installation and performance. 3. Provide whatever assistance necessary to ensure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TYPE 2 - RESTRAINED NEOPRENE MOUNT A. Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have all directional seismic capability.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 48 - 2 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement Piping and Equipment 03 24 2017

B. Provide minimum deflection of 0.2 inch. C. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. D. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. E. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing specifications. F. Manufacturer: Mason type BR. 2.02 TYPE 5 - BASE WITH SPRINGS A. Steel base with wide flange beams and springs. B. Provide minimum deflection of 1 inch. C. Depth of base equal to 10 percent of the span between supports, 6-inch minimum. D. Provide external height saving brackets. E. Manufacturer: Mason as indicated, similar Amber-Booth, Kinetics Corporation, Vibrex. 2.03 ISOLATING SLEEVES A. Provided for all piping through walls and floors of penthouses and chiller room. Size for piping as required. B. Manufacturers: Potter-Roemer PR isolators or Grinnell Semco Trisolators. 2.04 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General Requirements: 1. Seismic restraints shall be provided for all equipment, piping and ductwork, both supported and suspended. 2. Bracing of piping and ductwork shall be in accordance with the code and with the provisions set forth in the SMACNA seismic restraint manual. 3. The structural requirements for the restraints, including their attachment to the building structure, shall be reviewed and approved by the Structural Engineer. 4. Attachments to supported or suspended equipment must be coordinated with the equipment manufacturer. B. Supported Equipment: 1. All-directional seismic snubbers shall consist of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene. 2. Bushing shall be replaceable and a minimum of 1/4-inch thick. Rated loadings shall not exceed 1000 PSI. 3. An air gap of 1/4-inch shall be incorporated in the snubber design in all directions before contact is made between the rigid and resilient surfaces. 4. Snubber end caps shall be removable to allow inspection of internal clearances. Neoprene bushings shall be rotated to ensure no short circuits exist before systems are activated. 5. Snubber shall be type Z-1225 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. C. Bracing of Pipes: 1. Provide seismic bracing of all piping as detailed below to meet the building code requirements: a. Exception: Piping suspended by individual hanger’s 12 inches or less in length, as measured from the top of the pipe to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached, need not be braced where the following criteria are met. 1) Seismic braces are not required on high deformability piping when the Ip=1.0 and provisions are made to avoid impact with larger pipe or mechanical components or to protect the pipe in the event of such impact and the nominal pipe size is 3 inches diameter or less.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 48 - 3 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement Piping and Equipment 03 24 2017

2) Seismic braces are not required on high deformability piping when the Ip=1.5 and provisions are made to avoid impact with larger pipe or mechanical components or to protect the pipe in the event of such impact and the nominal pipe size is 1-inch diameter or less. 2. Seismic braces for pipes on trapeze hangers may be used. 3. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic joints or expansion joints, or where pipes connect to equipment. 4. Cast iron pipe of all types, glass pipe, and any other pipe jointed with a shield and clamp assembly, where the top of the pipe is 12 inches or more from the supporting structure, shall be braced on each side of a change in direction of 90 degrees or more. Riser joints on unsupported sections of piping shall be braced or stabilized between floors. 5. Vertical risers shall be laterally supported with a riser clamp at each floor. For buildings greater than six stories high or for piping subject to thermal change all risers shall be engineered individually. D. Bracing of Ductwork: 1. Brace rectangular ducts with cross sectional areas of 6 square feet and larger. Brace flat oval ducts in the same manner as rectangular ducts. Brace round ducts with diameters of 28 inches and larger. Brace flat oval ducts the same as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size. 2. Exception: No bracing is required if the duct is suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length, as measured from the top of the duct to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached, and the Ip=1.0. 3. Transverse bracing shall occur at the interval specified in the SMACNA tables or at both ends if the duct run is less than the specified interval. Transverse bracing shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run, with a minimum of one brace at each end. 4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at the interval specified in the SMACNA tables with at least one brace per duct run. Transverse bracing for one duct section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it if the bracing is installed within four feet of the intersection of the ducts and if the bracing is sized for the larger duct. Duct joints shall conform to SMACNA duct construction standards. 5. Install duct flex connections at equipment connections to accept expected differential displacement and protect the equipment connection from damage. E. Suspended Equipment and Piping and Ductwork: 1. Seismic cable restraints shall consist of galvanized steel aircraft cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide all-directional restraint. 2. Cable must be pre-stretched to achieve a certified minimum modulus of elasticity. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts to provide proper cable engagement. 3. Cable assemblies shall be type SCB at the ceiling and at the clevis bolt, SCBH between the hanger rod and the clevis or SCBV if clamped to a beam, all as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Steel angles, sized to prevent buckling, shall be clamped to pipe or equipment rods utilizing a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location when required. Welding of support rods is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall be type SRC or UC as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. 5. Pipe clevis cross-bolt braces are required in all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the cross bolt. Clevis cross brace shall be type CCB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 48 - 4 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement Piping and Equipment 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not install any equipment or pipe which makes rigid contact with the building. "Building" includes slabs, beams, studs, walls, etc. B. The installation or use of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping which would result in stresses in piping connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this objective, equipment and piping shall be maintained in a rigid position during installation. The load shall not be transferred to the isolator until the installation is complete and under full operational load. C. Correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are defective in workmanship or materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Treat all isolators, including springs, hardware and housing, with a corrosion protective coating of epoxy powder or electro galvanizing. B. Coat steel frames exposed to weather with a rustproof metal primer. C. Provide hot dipped galvanizing on steel frames as indicated on the plans for corrosion protection in severe conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install isolation where indicated on the Drawings by type and location and where indicated below. 2. The assigned code number shall be marked on the isolators and bases to assure placement in the proper location. 3. Anchor isolator seismic housing baseplate to floor. 4. Rubber grommets and washers shall be provided to isolate the bolt from the building structure. Under no circumstances shall the isolation efficiency be destroyed when bolting the isolators to the building structure. B. Type 2 – Restrained Neoprene Mount: Service: Fan Coil Units. C. Type 5 – Base with Springs: Service: Air Cooled Condensing Unit. 3.04 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. General: 1. Install and adjust seismic restraints so that the equipment, piping, and ductwork support is not degraded by the restraints. 2. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit objectionable vibration or noise. B. Supported Equipment: 1. Each vibration isolation frame for supported equipment shall have a minimum of four seismic snubbers mounted as close as possible to the vibration isolators and/or the frame extremities. 2. Care must be taken so that the 1/4-inch air gap in the seismic restraint snubber is preserved on all sides in order that the vibration isolation potential of the isolator is not compromised. This requires that the final snubber adjustment be completed after the vibration isolators are properly installed and the installation approved. C. Bracing of Pipes: 1. Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines. 2. Transverse bracing shall be at 40 feet maximum, except where a lesser spacing is indicated in the SMACNA tables for bracing of pipes.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 48 - 5 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement Piping and Equipment 03 24 2017

3. Longitudinal bracing shall be at 80 feet maximum except where a lesser spacing is indicated in the tables. In pipes where thermal expansion is a consideration, an anchor point may be used as the specified longitudinal brace provided that it has a capacity to resist both the seismic load and the additional force induced by expansion and contraction. 4. A rigid piping system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of the building or to two dissimilar building systems that may respond differently during an earthquake. 5. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for a pipe section of the same size connected perpendicular to it if the bracing is installed within 24-inches of the elbow or tee. 6. Subject to confirmation by field inspection, seismic bracing is not required on piping when the piping is supported by rod hangers and the hangers in the entire run are 12-inches or less in length from the top of the pipe to the supporting structure, hangers are detailed to avoid bending of the hangers and their attachments and provisions are made for piping to accommodate expected deflections. D. Bracing of Ductwork: 1. Hanger straps must be positively attached to the duct within 2 inches of the top of the duct with a minimum of two #10 sheetmetal screws. 2. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger frame so that the combined weights and dimensions of the ducts are less than or equal to the maximum weight and dimensions of the duct for which bracing details are selected. 3. Walls, including gypsum board nonbearing partitions, which have ducts running through them, may replace a typical transverse brace. Provide solid blocking around duct penetrations at stud wall construction. 4. Unbraced ducts shall be installed with a 6-inch minimum clearance to vertical ceiling hanger wires. E. Suspended Equipment, Piping, and Ductwork Cable Method: 1. The cables shall be adjusted to a degree of slackness approved by the Structural Engineer. 2. The uplift and downward restraint nuts and Mason type RW neoprene covered steel rebound washers for the Type 6 hangers shall be adjusted so that there is a maximum 1/4-inch clearance. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation Report: 1. Isolation manufacturer’s representative shall confirm that all isolation is installed correctly and submit report stating that isolators are installed as shown on Shop Drawings, isolators are free to work properly, and that installed deflections are as scheduled and as specified. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 48 - 6 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement Piping and Equipment 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Identify valves, piping and equipment components of the mechanical systems to indicate their function and system served. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Valve Tag Directory: Submit for approval prior to fabrication of valve tags. 2. Equipment Nameplate Directory: Submit for approval prior to fabrication. 3. Operating and Maintenance Data: Include a copy of valve tag and equipment nameplate directories in each set of Operating and Maintenance manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. General: Identify valves with metal tags, legends to be stamped or embossed. It shall indicate the function of the valve and its normal operating position; i.e., 56 HW (NUMBER AND CONTENT OF PIPE) ISOLATION (VALVE FUNCTION) NO (NORMAL OPERATION POSITION) 2. Size: Valve tags 2-inch diameter with 1/4-inch high letters. 3. Material: Use 0.04-inch brass tags. 4. Automatic Valves and Regulating Valves: Use 1/16-inch thick laminated 3-ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply red, “lamicoid” or equal. Form letters by exposing center ply. 5. Buildings Systems: Contact the Owner for coordination with existing building tagging system and supplementary information required for any specific system before valve tagging begins. B. Valve Tag Directory: 1. Include tag number, location, exposed or concealed, service, valve size, valve manufacturer, valve model number, and normal operating position of valve. 2.02 PIPING MARKERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. W.H. Brady 2. Seton 3. Marking Systems, Inc. (MSI). 4. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Pipes shall be labeled with all-vinyl, self-sticking labels or letters. For pipe covering sizes up to and including 3/4-inch outside diameter, select labels with 1/2-inch letters. For sizes from 3/4 to 2-inch outside diameter, 3/4-inch letters; above 2 inches outside diameter, 2-inch letters. The pipe markers shall be identified and color coded as follows with black directional arrows.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 53 - 1 Identification for HVAC Piping and OSP Tenant Improvement Equipment 03 24 2017

HVAC SERVICE BACKGROUND PIPE MARKER* COLOR CHILLED WATER ”CHILLED WATER SUPPLY” GREEN ”CHILLED WATER RETURN” GREEN SECONDARY CHILLED ”SECONDARY CHILLED WATER GREEN WATER SUPPLY” ”SECONDARY CHILLED WATER GREEN RETURN” HEATING WATER “HEATING WATER SUPPLY” YELLOW OR GREEN “HEATING WATER RETURN” YELLOW HIGH TEMP HEATING “HIGH TEMP HEATING WATER YELLOW OR GREEN WATER SUPPLY” “HIGH TEMP HEATING WATER YELLOW RETURN” REFRIGERANT SUCTION “REFRIGERANT SUCTION” YELLOW REFRIGERANT LIQUID “REFRIGERANT LIQUID” GREEN REFRIGERANT HOT GAS “REFRIGERANT HOT GAS” YELLOW REFRIGERANT RELIEF “REFRIGERANT RELIEF VENT” GREEN VENT * Directional arrow applied adjacent to pipe marker indicating direction of flow. 2.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: 1. Tag all pumps, air handling supply units, fans, terminal units, converters, and miscellaneous items of mechanical equipment with engraved nameplates. Nameplates shall be 1/16-inch thick, 3 by 5-inch laminated 3-ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply black. Form letters by exposing center ply. 2. Identify unit with equipment tag as shown on Drawings and area served. 3. Access points to fire dampers, smoke dampers, and combination fire and smoke dampers shall be permanently identified on the exterior of the duct by a label with letters 1/2-inch in height reading: Fire Damper, Smoke Damper, or Fire/Smoke Damper, as appropriate. Label constructed from same material as equipment nameplates. B. Equipment Nameplate Directory: 1. List pumps, air handlers, terminal units, and other equipment nameplates. Include Owner and Contractor furnished equipment. 2. List nameplate designation, manufacturer’s model number, location of equipment, area served or function, disconnect location, and normal position of HOA switch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Valve Tags: 1. Attach to valve with a brass chain. 2. Valve tag numbers shall be continuous throughout the building for each system. Contractor shall obtain a list for each system involved from the Owner. B. Valve Tag Directory: Post final copy in Operation and Maintenance Manual. 3.02 PIPING MARKERS A. Unless recommendations of ANSI A13.1, 1981 are more stringent, apply labels or letters after completion of pipe cleaning, insulation, painting, or other similar work, as follows: 1. Every 10 feet along continuous exposed lines. 2. Every 10 feet along continuous concealed lines. 3. Adjacent to each valve and stubout for future. 4. Where pipe passes through a wall, into and out of concealed spaces.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 53 - 2 Identification for HVAC Piping and OSP Tenant Improvement Equipment 03 24 2017

5. On each riser. 6. On each leg of a “T”. 7. Locate conspicuously where visible. B. Further, apply labels or letters to lower quarters of the pipe on horizontal runs where view is not obstructed or on the upper quarters when pipe is normally viewed from above. Apply arrow labels indicating direction of flow. Arrows to be the same color and sizes as identification labels. 3.03 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates: Attach to prominent area of equipment, either with sheet metal screws, brass chain, or contact cement as applicable. B. Nameplate Directory: Post final copy in Operation and Maintenance Manual. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 53 - 3 Identification for HVAC Piping and OSP Tenant Improvement Equipment 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 90 PRESSURE TESTING FOR HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Pressure testing of piping and ductwork systems. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code Compliance: Perform required tests in the presence of the authority having jurisdiction. B. Owner Witness: Perform all tests in the presence of the Owner’s representative. C. Engineer Witness: The Engineer or Engineer’s representative reserves the right to observe all tests or selected tests to assure compliance with the specifications. D. Simultaneous Testing: Test observations by the authority having jurisdiction, the Owner’s representative and the Engineer’s representative need not occur simultaneously. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following Test Reports: 1. Submit certificate of completion, inspection, and test by Authority Having Jurisdiction on required piping systems. 2. Submit certificate of test approval by Owner’s representative on all systems. 3. For ductwork testing, submit the Test Report. Test Report shall contain description of the testing procedure and results, including recommendation for any remedial actions needed. The Engineer’s representative will record witnessed tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Piping: Test prior to concealment, insulation being applied, and connection to equipment, fixtures, or specialties. Conduct tests with all valves but those used to isolate the test section 10 percent closed. B. Ductwork: Test prior to connection to equipment and before applying insulation. C. Leaks: Repair all leaks and retest until stipulated results are achieved. D. Notification: Advise the Architect 72 hours in advance of each test. Failure to so notify will require test to be rescheduled. E. Testing Equipment: Provide all necessary pumps, gauges, connections and similar items required to perform the tests. 3.02 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Low Pressure Ductwork: 1. Test all ductwork systems at 2-inch static pressure, using a Pacific Air Products "Port-O- Lab" or "Rolok", or a McGill Airflow “LEAK DETECTIVE” testing machine or approved equivalent. 2. All ductwork testing shall be conducted in accordance with latest published version of the SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual”. 3. Prior to testing verify that all low pressure ductwork has been sealed to meet the SMACNA Seal Class C. for all joints.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 90 - 1 Pressure Testing for HVAC Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

4. Low pressure ductwork leakage shall be less than or meet the requirement of the following SMACNA Leakage Classes: a. Rectangular Metal – Class 24 b. Round or Flat Oval – Class 12 5. Maximum allowable leakage is defined as Cubic Feet per Minute (CFM) air leakage per 100 square feet SURFACE AREA of duct section tested. 6. A representative sample totaling no less than 25% of the installed ductwork shall be tested. B. Piping - General: Test all piping as noted below, with no leaks or loss in pressure for time indicated. Repair or replace defective piping until tests are completed successfully: HVAC Systems Test Pressure Test Medium Test Duration Chilled Water 150 psig Water 4 hours Refrigerant piping 300 psig Nitrogen 4 hours Heating water 150 psig Water 4 hours END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 90 - 2 Pressure Testing for HVAC Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results, for HVAC apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Testing and balancing of air systems. 2. Testing and balancing of hydronic systems. 3. Testing and balancing of miscellaneous mechanical equipment. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 22 08 00, Commissioning for Plumbing 2. Section 23 08 00, Commissioning for HVAC 3. Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Testing and Balancing Firms: 1. A.I.R., Inc. 2. Air Balance Specialty, Inc. 3. Neudorfer Engineers, Inc. 4. Northwest Engineering Services 5. Pacific Coast Air Balance 6. Accurate Balancing Agency, Inc. B. Other Firms: Submit Substitution Requests prior to Bid Date. C. Industrial Standards: Testing and Balancing shall conform to NEBB, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as follows: 1. NEBB: Comply with Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 2. ASHRAE: Comply with recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting and balancing. 3. ANSI: a. S1.4 Specifications for sound level meters. b. S1.11 Specifications for Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-Band analog and digital filters. D. Instrument Certification: All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and certified within six months of balancing and maintained in good working order. E. Test Observation: If requested, the tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect or the Architect’s representative. F. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to starting balancing, general techniques shall be reviewed with the Engineer. This conference must occur prior to measuring existing conditions. Measuring of existing conditions must occur prior to any demolition or new work. The conference will review existing conditions and systems to be affected by the project.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 93 - 1 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Balancing Log: Include all air and water outlets, actual field measured air and water volume, and percentage of design volumes. Provide drawings identifying location of all outlets. 2. Equipment Data Sheets: Indicate actual equipment performance, model numbers, bearing and belt data, motor nameplate data, and final balanced motor data. 3. Additional Data: Submit all additional data as provided by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Standard forms. 4. Number of Copies: Submit six copies of the above completed information to the Engineer for review and insertion into the Operating and Maintenance Data. 5. Instrument Certification: When requested, submit certificate of calibration for all equipment to be used. B. Record data on NEBB forms or forms approved by the Architect. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Where existing systems are to be adjusted, establish flow rates in all branches prior to making any modifications to system. Submit preliminary report indicating existing conditions prior to making any modifications to existing systems. Adjust central equipment as required and restore all unmodified branches and outlets to original condition. Obtain existing system drawings from Owner and become familiar with extent and nature of existing systems. B. Do not perform final testing, adjusting, and balancing work until heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment has been completely installed and operating continuously as required. C. Conduct air testing and balancing with clean filters in place. Clean strainers, etc., prior to performing hydronic testing and balancing. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. In addition to the Requirements of the Contract, include an extended warranty of six months after completion of test and balance work during which time the Architect at his discretion may request a recheck or resetting of any equipment or device listed in the test reports. PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Balance to maximum measured flow. Deviation from specified values of ±10 percent at terminal device and ±5 percent at equipment, or mean sound level deviation of 15 decibels. Advise Engineer if deficiencies are generally noted to enable proper corrective actions. 3.02 AIR SYSTEMS A. General: Make measurements in accord with Industrial Standards specified above. Record on appropriate forms. B. Preliminary: 1. Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of all equipment to be tested including air outlets and inlets. 2. Use manufacturer’s ratings for equipment to make required calculations except where field test shows ratings to be impractical. C. Central System: 1. Set speed to provide air volume at farthest run without excess static pressure. Provide additional sheaves and belts as required to accomplish speed adjustment. 2. Read and adjust air supply, return, and exhaust fan units to deliver design conditions at minimum O.S.A. and at 100 percent O.S.A. 3. Adjust all automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 93 - 2 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

4. Read static air pressure conditions on all air handling equipment including filter and coil pressure drops and total pressure across the fan. A Dwyer Series 400 air velocity meter only shall be used for final static pressures at equipment and where critical readings are required. 5. Measure temperature conditions across all outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. 6. Read and record motor data and amperage draw. 7. For variable volume systems, establish minimum static pressure required at sensing point to permit operation over entire VAV range. Adjust supply and return fan speed so that at maximum demand the associated VFD is controlling the motor of motor nameplate RPM to 100 percent. Adjust return fan speed so that return air volumes track with supply air volume minus exhaust air volume. 8. Assist controls contractor in establishing minimum outside air damper positions. D. Distribution: 1. Evaluate all building and room pressure conditions to determine adequate supply and return air conditions. Generally, the building shall be balanced to be slightly positive to outdoors. 2. Evaluate all building and room pressure conditions to determine adequate performance of the system to maintain temperatures without draft. 3. Perform multipoint pitot traverses to confirm instrumentation, shaft tightness, fan operation, etc. Pitot traverses shall be performed using a Dwyer Series 400 air velocity meter only with applicable duct probe. 4. Mark all balancing dampers. 3.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM A. In cooperation with control manufacturer’s representative, set and adjust automatically operated devices to achieve required sequence of operations. B. Testing organization shall verify all controls for proper calibration and list controls requiring adjustment by control system installer. 3.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with other trades to ensure rapid completion of the project. B. Deficiencies noted during the course of air balancing in the mechanical installation shall be promptly reported to the Architect to allow corrective action to proceed. C. Periodic review of progress shall be provided as requested. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 05 93 - 3 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 07 00 INSULATION FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirement Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Insulation for piping, ductwork (external), ductwork (internal), and equipment. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 05 29, Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for HVAC 2. Section 23 31 01, HVAC Ducts and Casing – Low Pressure 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All insulating products shall comply with the Oregon Revised Statute (ORS) 453.005(7)(e) prohibiting pentabrominated, octabrominated, and decabrominated diphenyl ethers. Where products within this specification contain these banned substances, provide complying products from approved manufacturers with equal performance characteristics. 2. Flame and Smoke Ratings: Installed composite flame spread not to exceed 25 and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested by UL 723. 3. Energy Codes: Local Building and Energy Codes shall govern where insulation performance requirements for thickness exceeds thickness specified. B. Protection: Protect against dirt, water, chemical, or mechanical damage before, during, and after installation. Repair or replace damaged insulation at no additional cost. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Service: Use insulation specifically manufactured for service specified. 2. Labeling: Insulation labeled or stamped with brand name and number. 3. Insulation and accessories shall not provide any nutritional or bodily use to fungi, bacteria, insects, rats, mice, or other vermin, shall not react corrosively with equipment, piping, or ductwork, and shall be asbestos free. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product Data: For each type including density, conductivity, thickness, jacket, vapor barrier, and flame spread and smoke developed indices. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Johns Manville B. Knauf C. Owens Corning D. CertainTeed E. All such insulation shall be of one manufacturer. F. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 1 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Fiberglass: 1. Split sectional or snap-on type with 0.23 per-inch maximum thermal conductivity (K-factor) at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 850 degrees F maximum service rating and white, vapor barrier jacket with pressure sensitive closure system. 2. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Microlok HP B. Calcium Silicate: 1. Sectional with 14 pcf nominal density, 0.40 maximum K-factor at 300 degrees F mean temperature and 1200 degrees F maximum service rating. 2. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Thermo-12 Gold. C. Elastomeric: 1. Expanded closed cell, 0.27 per-inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 220 degrees F maximum service rating with fitting covers and paintable surface. 2. Manufacturers: a. ArmacellAP Armaflex b. Rubatex D. Cellular Glass: 1. Light weight rigid glass foam insulation, 0.34 per-inch maximum K factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 900 degree degrees F maximum service rating. 2. Field applied jacketing, woven glass fabric, bituminous resin, poly-ethylene film. 3. Manufacturers: a. Pittsburgh Corning Foamglas b. Pittwrap SS Jacket E. Polyurethane Foam: 1. Cellular rigid polyurethane foam insulation, minimum 90 percent closed cell, 2 pcf density, compressive strength of 30 psi at 75 degrees F, 0.16 per-inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 230 degrees F maximum service rating. F. High Temperature Polyurethane Foam: 1. Cellular rigid polyurethane foam insulation, minimum 90 percent closed cell, 2 pcf density, compressive strength of 35 psi, 0.16 per-inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 400 degrees F maximum service rating. 2. Insulation capable of handling intermittent temperature spikes of 450 degrees F for one hour. G. Mineral Wool: 1. Sectional mineral wool, 8 psf density, 0.31 per-inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F temperature, 1200 degrees F maximum service rating. 2.03 BLOCK INSULATION A. Calcium Silicate: 1. 1-1/2-inch thick unless specified or shown otherwise with 14 pcf nominal density, 0.40 maximum K-factor at 300 degrees F mean temperature and 1200 degrees F maximum operating temperature limit 2. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Thermo-12 Gold. B. Fiberglass: 1. 1-1/2-inch thick unless specified or shown otherwise with 3 pcf nominal density, 0.23 per- inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature and 450 degrees F maximum operating temperature limit. 2. Manufacturer: Johns Manville 1000 Series.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 2 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.04 DUCTWORK BLANKET INSULATION A. Fiberglass: 1. 1.0 pcf nominal density, 0.25 per-inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 250 degrees F minimum operating temperature limit. 2. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Microlite Type 100 with facing as follows: a. Exposed: FSK facing (foil scrim Kraft) or vinyl - white appearance. b. Concealed with Vapor Barrier: FSK reinforced foil and paper. c. Concealed without Vapor Barrier: Facing not required. B. Semi-Rigid Fiberglass: 1. 2.5 pcf nominal density, 0.24 per-inch maximum K-factor, at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 250 degrees F minimum operating temperature limit. 2. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Micro-Flex with facing as follows: a. Exposed: FSK facing (foil scrim kraft) or vinyl-white appearance. b. Concealed with Vapor Barrier: FSK reinforced foil and paper. c. Concealed without Vapor Barrier: Facing not required. C. Elastomeric: 1. Expanded closed cell sheets, 0.27 per-inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature and 220 degrees F minimum operating temperature limit. 2. Manufacturer: ArmacellArmaflex. 2.05 DUCTWORK BOARD INSULATION A. Semi-Rigid Fiberglass: 1. 0.23 per-inch maximum K-factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature, 250 degrees F minimum operating temperature limit and all-purpose vapor barrier facing with white Kraft paper finish. 2. Manufacturer: Micro-Aire Duct Board Type LP. B. Rigid Fiberglass: 1. Same as semi-rigid except with 4.0 pcf density and 0.23 per-inch maximum K-factor. 2. Manufacturer: Johns Manville Diffuser Board. 2.06 DUCT INSULATION, INTERNAL A. Description: 1. Fiberglass with airstream surface protected with a glass mat facing that contains an EPA registered anti-microbial agent proven to resist microbial growth as determined by ASTM G21 and G22, 1-inch thick unless indicated otherwise. 2. 2-inch thick insulation has 0.24 per-inch maximum K-Factor at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Johns Manville Duct Liner PM for rectangular ductwork. B. Acoustical Absorption Coefficients: With minimum NRC of 0.70 for 1-inch and 0.90 for 2-inch as tested in accordance with ASTM C-423-90, type A mounting. C. Liner must meet ASTM C1071. 2.07 DUCT, PIPE, AND TERMINAL UNIT ACOUSTICAL WRAP A. Construct barrier of a 0.10-inch thick mass loaded, limp vinyl sheet bonded to a layer of reinforced aluminum foil on one side. 1. Nominal density of 1 pound per square-foot and minimum STC rating of 28. 2. Minimum thermal conductivity value of 0.29 and a rated service temperature range of - 40 degrees F. to 220 degree F. 3. Flame spread index of no more than 10 and a smoke development index of less than 40. B. Decoulpling Layer: 1. Combination of 1-inch fiberglass batting, non woven porous scrim-coated glass cloth, quilted together in a matrix of 4-inch diamond stitch pattern which encapsulates the glass fibers.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 3 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Composite Material: Fabricated to include a nominal 6-inch wide barrier overlap tab extending beyond the quilted fiber glass to facilitate a leak-tight seal around field joints. C. Manufacturer: Kinectics Noise Control model KNM-100ALQ. 2.08 ACCESSORIES PIPING A. Adhesives: 1. Fiberglass: Zeston Z-Glu. 2. Calcium Silicate: Benjamin Foster 30-36. 3. Elastomeric: Armacell 520. B. Cements: 1. Insulating: Ryder. 2. Heat Transfer: Zeston Z-20. C. Wire Mesh: 1 inch mesh with 20 gauge annealed steel wire. D. Pipe Fitting Covers: One piece PVC insulated pipe fitting covers. Zeston, Ceel-Co. E. Grooved Coupling Insulation: One piece PVC insulated fitting cover. Zeston, Ceel-Co. F. Metal Pipe Jacket: 0.016-inch thick aluminum jacket with formed fitting covers, aluminum snap straps and sealant. G. Cloth Facing: Presized fiberglass cloth. H. Tapes: Pressure sensitive, weather resistant, and for temperatures up to 150°F. Zeston Z- tape. I. Paint: Ultraviolet resistant latex paint with special adherence capabilities to the PVC fitting covers, elastomeric, aluminum facing, Kraft paper, tapes and adhesives. 2.09 ACCESSORIES DUCTWORK A. Adhesives: 1. Fiberglass: Zeston Z-Glu. 2. Elastomeric: Armacell 520. 3. Duct Insulation, Internal: Benjamin Foster 85-20. B. Weld Pins: Duro-Dyne with NC-1 nylon stop clips. C. Cements: 1. Insulating: Ryder. 2. Heat Transfer: Zeston Z-20. D. Wire Mesh: 1 inch mesh with 20 gauge annealed steel wire. E. Mastic: Chicago Mastic. 1. Vapor Barrier: 17-475. 2. Outdoor Mastic: 16-110 white. F. Cloth Facing: Presized fiberglass cloth. G. Tapes: Pressure sensitive, weather resistant, and for temperatures up to 150°F. Zeston Z- tape. H. Paint: Ultraviolet resistant latex paint with special adherence capabilities to the PVC fitting covers, elastomeric, aluminum facing, Kraft paper, tapes and adhesives. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Workmanship. 1. Installation: Insulation installed in first class, neat professional manner. 2. Applicators: Applicators shall be employed by firm that specializes in insulation work. B. Preparation: Surfaces of piping, ductwork and equipment clean, free of oil or dirt, and dry before insulation is applied. C. Stamps: ASME stamps, UL labels, and similar stamps and labels shall not be covered.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 4 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.02 HVAC PIPE AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION APPLIED LOCATIONS A. Insulation Applied Locations – HVAC Piping: Pipe Insulation Insulation System Notes Size Type Thickness 1-1/4 inch Fiberglass 1 1/2-inch Note 1 High Temp Heating Water (to and smaller 180°F) - Piping to 1977 Wings 1-1/2 inch Fiberglass 2-inch Note 1 and above 1-1/4 inch Fiberglass 1-inch Note 1 Heating Water (to 140°F) - and smaller Piping to 1938 Building 1-1/2 inch Fiberglass 1 1/2-inch Note 1 and above 1-1/4 inch Fiberglass 1-inch Note 1 and smaller Chilled Water 1-1/2 inch Fiberglass 1 1/2-inch Note 1 and above 1-1/4 inch Fiberglass 1-inch Note 1 and smaller Secondary Chilled Water 1-1/2 inch Fiberglass 1 1/2-inch Note 1 and above Refrigerant Suction, Hot Gas All Elastomeric 1 1/2-inch Note 2 Note 1: Cover with metal pipe jacket where exposed to weather and overheat trace cable. Note 2: Elastomeric insulation not allowed over heat trace cable. B. The following piping is not insulated: 1. Refrigerant relief valve discharge. 2. Condenser water, inside building, except where used for water side economizer. C. Insulation shall include all fittings, unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, valve bodies, valve bonnets, piping through sleeves, except valve bonnets, unions and flanges need not be insulated on the following systems: 1. Hot water heating and heat recovery, inside building. D. Piping insulation is not required between the control valve and coil on run-outs when the control valve is located within 4 feet of the coils and the pipe size is one (1) inch or less. E. Valves, humidifier bodies and irregular fittings shall be insulated with section of pipe insulation and insulating cement, securely fastened, and finished with 6-ounce canvas and Foster 30-36 lagging adhesive. The Contractor shall have the option on all flanges, valves, strainers, not requiring a vapor barrier to insulate with removable replaceable pads fabricated of one (1) inch layer of Pittsburgh Corning Temp Mat sandwiched between inner and outer layer of 8-ounce glass cloth held together with stainless staples with sufficient stainless lacing hooks to hold pad firmly to flange or valve with minimum 3-inch overlap onto adjacent pipe insulation using 18 gauge S.S. lacing wire. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Joints: Coat both sides of complete joining area with applicable adhesive. a. Longitudinal Joints: Make joints on top or back of pipe to minimize visibility. Except foam plastic, seal with closure system or 3-inch wide tape. b. Butt Joints: Butt lightly together and, except for foam plastic, seal with 3-inch wide tape or butt straps. c. Multiple Layered Insulation: Joints staggered.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 5 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Access: Strainer and other items requiring service or maintenance with easily removable and replaceable section of insulation to provide access. 3. Voids: Fill all voids, chipped corners and other openings with insulating cement or material compatible with insulating material. In insulation with Heat Tracing: Where piping is shown or specified to be heat traced, bed heat tape into heat transfer cement with insulation over heat tape and cement. 4. Seal joints, seams and fittings of metal watertight jackets at exterior locations. B. Fiberglass Insulation: Exterior insulation encased in metal jacket. C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: 1. Secure with 18-gauge wire embedded into insulation. 2. On systems with vapor barrier, coat complete with vapor barrier mastic. 3. Cover with cloth facing secured with applicable adhesive. 4. Exterior insulation encased in metal jacket. D. Cellular Glass Insulation (pre-insulated piping): 1. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. 2. All insulation and jacket shall be factory applied to the carrier piping and fittings. 3. Apply bituminous wrap jacket. 4. Installation to be liquid and vapor tight. E. Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Slit full length and snap around pipe. 2. Make cuts perpendicular to insulating surface leaving no cut section exposed. 3. Do not stretch insulation to cover joints or fittings. 4. Seal joints in elastomeric insulation with adhesive. 5. Exterior insulation painted with two coats of specified paint in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and encase in metal jacket. 6. Sealing joints with tape will not be allowed. F. Polyurethane Foam Insulation (pre-insulated piping): 1. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. 2. All insulation and jacket shall be factory applied to the carrier piping and fittings. 3. Spray applied or injected with one shot into the annular space between carrier pipe and jacket. 4. Installation shall be liquid and vapor tight. G. Mineral Wool Insulation (pre-insulated piping): 1. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. 2. All insulation and jacket shall be factory applied to the carrier piping and fittings. 3. Sectional insulation shall be banded on pipe with stainless steel banding on 18 centers. 4. Installation shall be liquid and vapor tight. H. Fittings: Insulation specified with continuous vapor barrier, the vapor barrier must not be violated. 1. On Elastomeric Insulation: Fittings covered with covers made up of mitered sections of insulation or with formed pipe fitting covers. 2. In Other Insulation: Fittings covered with insulation to the same level of the adjoining insulation or fill with insulating cement. Finish with pipe fitting covers or cloth facing and tape. I. Unions, Mechanical Joints, Valves, Etc. 1. General: a. As specified for fittings. b. Minimum thickness same as specified for piping. 2. Unions: Build up insulation at least 1/2-inch beyond adjoining insulation. 3. Flanges: With square corners. Where flanges are not insulated, terminate adjacent insulation so flange bolts can be removed. 4. Flanged Valves: Insulation with square corners.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 6 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

J. Vapor Barrier Insulation: 1. Refer to Section 23 05 29, Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for HVAC for support requirements. 2. Piping which requires vapor barrier protection shall have a continuous vapor barrier, which may not be pierced or broken. The following piping systems require vapor barrier protection: a. Chilled water including radiant cooling water. b. Brine water. c. Refrigerant suction. d. All other piping systems with a nominal operating temperature below 65 degrees F. 3. Vapor Barrier Insulation: a. Insulation for pipe requiring vapor barrier protection 1-1/4-inch or smaller, insulation continuous through pipe hangers and rollers. b. For pipe 1-1/2-inch and larger, 18-inch section of calcium silicate, same thickness as pipe insulation with continuous vapor barrier jacket at each hanger or roller. Provide pipe shield specified in Section 23 05 29, Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for HVAC. K. Non-Vapor Barrier Insulation: 1. Refer to Section 23 05 29, Hangers, Supports, and Anchors for HVAC for support requirements. 2. At Contractor’s option, insulation may be interrupted at supports. Butt insulation tight to support. 3. If Contractor elects to continue insulation at supports, installation as specified for piping systems with vapor barrier installation. 4. Void between saddle and pipe filled with insulation. 3.04 DUCT INSULATION APPLIED LOCATIONS A. General: 1. All external insulation with continuous vapor barriers unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. Internally lined shall be lined completely to grille or diffuser or to indicated terminal points. Dimension shown are net inside of liner. 3. Internally lined ductwork need not be externally insulated. 4. In addition to locations described in specification, internally line medium, low, return and exhaust air ductwork where shown on drawings. B. Insulation Applied Location – HVAC Ductwork. Insulation System Location Duct Type Thickness Notes Type Medium Fiberglass Pressure Concealed All 1-1/2 inch Blanket Supply* Low Pressure Fiberglass Concealed All 1-1/2 inch Supply* Blanket Downstream of Internally Air Terminal All 1-1/2 inch Lined Units 3.05 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. 2. The vapor barrier shall be continuous. Tears, holes, staples, etc., shall be coated with vapor barrier mastic and patch with facing or tape. Joints between insulation and access with vapor barrier mastic. 3. Insulation at access panels to be removable or attached to panel with edges of panel and opening reinforced with metal beading.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 7 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. External Blanket Insulation: 1. Insulation secured to ductwork with 20-gauge snap wires 24 inches on center and at all joints. 2. Joints and seams lapped a minimum of 3 inches and sealed with jacket tape. C. Board Insulation: 1. Rectangular ducts with weld pins spaced a maximum of 18 inches on center in both directions. 2. All corners made with joints, bending insulation around corners not allowed. 3. All joints and seams butted tight together. 4. Butt joints with 3-inch wide tape. 5. Corners finished with 3-inch wide tape. D. Internal Duct Liner: 1. The coated surface shall face air stream. 2. Weld pins spaced maximum of 15 inches on center in both directions and within 2 inches of all corners and joints. Weld pins flush with liner surface. 3. Complete duct surface coated with adhesive and insulation pressed tightly thereto. 4. Edges at terminal points shall be provided with metal beading and heavily coated with adhesive. 5. All joints and corners shall be heavily coated with adhesive. 6. Damaged areas replaced or heavily coated with adhesive. E. Duct Enclosure - Fire Rated: 1. Installation: Per manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Joints: a. Attached boards shall be cemented and attached to one another. Mating surfaces shall be “buttered” with a 1/8-inch layer adhesive. b. Secure fiberglass type material with stainless steel banding (type 304). 3. Support: The duct enclosure may be hung from a conventional “trapeze” arrangement. Adequate support shall be provided at the bottom of vertical runs. On multi-story vertical runs, the Firetemp enclosure shall be supported at each story penetration with an angle iron collar attached to the Firetemp. 4. Expansion: Adequate clearance shall be provided at the end of all straight runs to allow for expansion of the metal duct inside the enclosure. F. Plenums: Insulation on floors protected by wire mesh. G. Blank Off Panels: Insulation, enclosed with sheet metal on all sides. All joints with vapor barrier mastic and taped. H. Volume Dampers: Where volume dampers do not allow for continuous insulation, terminate insulation clear of handle sweep and finish edges to maintain vapor barrier and to prevent damage to the insulation. 3.06 DUCT, PIPE, AND TERMINAL UNIT ACOUSTICAL WRAP A. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. B. Applied locations for piping and duct systems: 1. All variable and constant volume terminal units with maximum air volumes over 2000 CFM. Wrap installed such that control devices are easily accessible without circumventing the acoustical value. 2. Where specified or indicated on drawings. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Test: All systems shall be tested and approved prior to installation of insulation. B. Existing Insulation. 1. Repair existing insulation damaged during construction. 2. Make neat connections where new and existing insulation meet.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 8 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3. Where existing piping, ductwork or equipment is removed, cover existing surfaces neatly to match existing. 4. Where existing insulation is damaged or missing, notify the Architect prior to performing to work. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 07 00 - 9 Insulation for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirement Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC apply to work specified in this Section. C. The Work of this Section is supplemental to and does not supersede any other requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The commissioning process is described in Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. B. Provide all labor and materials required to complete the commissioning of those Division 23, HVAC systems and equipment identified as Commissioned Systems and Equipment in Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. C. Related Sections include: 1. Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. 2. All Sections of Division 23, HVAC. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. 1.04 COMMISSIONING SCOPE OF WORK - COMMISSIONING AGENT A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. 1.05 COMMISSIONING SCOPE OF WORK - CONTRACTOR A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MEETINGS A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. 3.02 INSTALLATION, CHECK-OUT, START-UP AND PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKS A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. 3.03 FUNCTIONAL TESTING A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. 3.04 TRAINING OF FACILITY OPERATING STAFF AND BUILDING OCCUPANTS A. Refer to Section 01 91 00 Commissioning. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 08 00 - 1 Commissioning for HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 21 13 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Furnish piping, pipe fittings, and incidental related items as required for complete piping systems, and treatment of HVAC water systems. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 25 00, HVAC Water Treatment 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Piping material and installation to meet requirements of the local building codes and serving utility requirements. B. All grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 1. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability. C. Pipe Cleaning: Should any pipe be plugged or should foaming of water systems occur, disconnect piping, re-clean, and reconnect without additional expense to the Owner. D. Correct any damage to the building or systems resulting from failure to properly clean the system without additional expense to the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. List of piping materials indicating the service it is being used for. (Do not submit piping product data). 2. Product data on mechanical couplings and related components, double wall fuel oil pipe and fittings, and polypropylene waste and vent pipe. 3. Certificate of completion. 4. Treatment Reports. B. Test Reports and Certificates: Submit certificates of inspections and pipe tests to Owner. C. Other: Make certified welders’ certificates available. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. As indicated. 2.02 BLACK STEEL PIPE, SCHEDULE 40 AND STANDARD A. Pipe: Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A 135 or A 53. Schedule 40 up to 10-inch diameter. Standard weight for 12-inch diameter and above. B. Fittings: 150 lb. screwed malleable iron on 2 inches and below, Schedule 40 welding fittings conforming to ASTM A 234 for 2-1/2 inches and above or mechanical couplings on select piping as herein specified. Fittings below grade shall be welding fittings. All elbows on pumped systems shall be long radius type. Short radius elbows not acceptable for use except as approved on a case by case basis.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 21 13 - 1 Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Service: 1. Chilled and heating water piping up to and including 6-inches. 2. Refrigerant relief vent. 3. Safety and relief valve discharge. 2.03 COPPER PIPE A. Pipe: Hard drawn copper tubing, Class L, ASTM B 88. B. Fittings. Wrought copper, 150 psi; ANSI B16.22 for soldered joints, ANSI B16.50 for brazed joints; Chase, Revere, Mueller or approved equal. C. Service: 1. Refrigerant piping (Type L, hard drawn, ACR cleaned). 2. Chilled and heating water piping (Type L, hard drawn) up to and including 4-inches. 3. Coil condensate drains and traps, cooling tower drains, and other miscellaneous drains. 2.04 FLANGED JOINTS A. Flanged Joints: Flanges shall be cast iron or steel for screwed piping and forged steel welding neck for welded line sizes. Pressure rating and drilling shall match the apparatus, valve, or fitting to which they are attached. Flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.1; 150 lb. for system pressures to 150 psig; 300 lb. for system pressures 150 psig to 400 psig. Gaskets for all flanged services, except steam and pumped condensate, shall be Garlock 3700 or equal, 1/8-inch thick, non-metallic type. Gaskets for steam and pumped condensate shall be Flexitaulic Style CG or equal, 1/8-inch thick, semi-metallic type. Make joint using American Standard hexagon head bolts, lock washers, and nuts (per ASTM A307 GR.B) for service pressures to 150 psig; alloy steel stud bolts, lock washer, and American Standard hexagon head nuts (per ASTM A307 GR.B) for service pressures 150 psig to 400 psig. Use length of bolt required for full nut engagement. Provide electro-cad plated bolts and nuts on cold and chilled water lines. 2.05 UNIONS A. 150 psi malleable iron, brass to iron seat, ground joint, black or galvanized to match pipe. 200 psi WOG bronze, ground joint, solder type for copper tubing. B. Dielectric fittings shall be nationally listed, have a dielectric thermoplastic interior lining, and meet requirements of ASTM F-492. Fittings shall be suitable for the pressure and temperature to be encountered. 2.06 MECHANICAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Victaulic 2. Anvil Gruvlok 7401, 7001 3. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Couplings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, rust inhibiting paint. C. Fittings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Elbows shall be long radius type. D. Bolts and Nuts: Zinc electroplated track head bolts conforming to ASTM A 183. E. Gasket: Grade “E” EPDM. 1. Temperature Range: -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 2. Flushseal, Installation Ready or Flush Gap configuration. F. Service: Chilled water. 2.07 SOLDERING AND BRAZING A. Brazed Joints: 1. Westinghouse Phos-Copper or Dyna-Flow by J.W. Harris Co., Inc. 2. Applied locations: a. All below grade piping.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 21 13 - 2 Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

b. All above grade piping larger than 2-inches for the following services: heating water, chilled water, condenser water, heat recover water. c. Refrigerant piping. Braze in accordance with Copper Development Association Copper Tube Handbook using BCUP series filler material. B. Soldered Joints: 1. Wrought Copper Pipe Fittings: All-State 430 with Duzall Flux, Engelhard Silvabrite with Engelhard General Purpose Flux or J.W. Harris Co. 2. Valves, Cast Fittings or Bronze Fittings: Harris Stay-Silv-15 or Handy & Harmon Sil-Fos. 3. Applied locations: Above grade piping 2-inch and smaller for the following services: Heating water, chilled water, condenser water, heat recovery water, industrial cold water, trap priming lines. C. Valves, Cast Fittings or Bronze Fittings: Harris Stay-Silv-15 or Handy & Harmon Sil-Fos. 2.08 UTILITY MARKERS A. Provide plastic tape utility markers over all buried piping. Provide identification on tape. B. Material to be Brady Identoline plastic tape, 6-inch, Seton, or as approved. 2.09 PIPE WRAPPING A. For all below ground steel piping and fittings, provide complete covering of Scotchrap No. 51, 20 mil thickness, protective tape applied over Scotchrap pipe primer applied at 1 gal/800 SF of pipe surface. B. At Contractor’s option as approved, pipe may be furnished with factory applied jacket of “X-tru- coat” with Scotchrap as previously specified for field joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Measurements, Lines, and Levels: 1. Check dimension at the building site and establish lines and levels for work specified in this Section. 2. Establish all inverts, slopes, and manhole elevations by instrument, working from an established datum point. Provide elevation markers for use in determining slopes and elevations in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. 3. Use established grid and area lines for locating trenches in relation to building and boundaries. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install unions in all non-flanged piping connections to apparatus and adjacent to all screwed control valves, traps, and appurtenances requiring removal for servicing so located that piping may be disconnected without disturbing the general system. B. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: 1. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 2. Flexible couplings to be used only when expansion, contraction, deflection or noise and vibration is to be dampened, as detailed or specified. 3. On systems using galvanized pipe and fittings, fittings shall be galvanized at factory. 4. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with approved lubricant. 5. Pipe grooving in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications contained in latest published literature. 6. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer, and shall be suitable for the intended service.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 21 13 - 3 Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

7. The coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for the contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the project site to ensure best practices in grooved installation are being followed. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or field visits.) C. Install all piping as to vent and drain. Install according to manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Support all piping independently at apparatus so that its weight shall not be carried by the equipment. E. Utility Marking: Installed over the entire length of the underground piping utilities. Install plastic tape along both sides and the center line of the trenches at the elevation of approximately 12-inches above the top of utility. F. Dielectric Fittings: Provide dielectric couplings, unions, or flanges between dissimilar metals. In addition, provide dielectric couplings as required to isolate cathodically protected piping and equipment. 3.03 PIPING JOINTS A. Pipe and fittings shall be joined using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer in conformance with standard practice and applicable codes. Cleaning, cutting, reaming, grooving, etc. shall be done with proper tools and equipment. Hacksaw pipe cutting prohibited. Peening of welds to stop leaks not permitted. B. Purge refrigerant piping with nitrogen continuously during the piping installation, and seal each branch outlet with Visqueen and tape or similar method to assure continued cleanliness of interior of piping until system is completed. C. Copper Piping: Pipe cut evenly with cutter, ream to full inside diameter; end of pipe and inside of fitting thoroughly cleaned and polished. Joint shall be uniformly heated, and capillary space completely filled with solder or braze material, leaving full bead around entire circumference. D. No couplings installed in floor or wall sleeves. E. Steel Piping: 1. Screwed Joints: Pipes cut evenly with pipe cutter reamed to full inside diameter with all burrs and cuttings removed. Joints made up with suitable lubricant or Teflon tape applied to male threads only, leaving two threads bare. Joints tightened so that not more than two threads are left showing. Junctions between galvanized steel waste pipe and bell of cast iron pipe shall be made with tapped spigot or half coupling on steel pipe to form spigot end and caulked. 2. Flanged Joints: Pressure rating of flanges shall match valve or fitting joined. Joint gaskets shall be coated with graphite and oil. F. Welded Joints. 1. Preparation for Welding: Bevel piping on both ends before welding: a. Use following weld spacing on all buttwelds: Nominal Pipe Wall Thickness Spacing Bevel 1/4 inch or less 1/8 inch 37-1/2 Over 1/4 inch, less than 3/4 inch 3/16 inch 27-1/2 b. Before welding, remove all corrosion products and foreign material from surfaces. 2. Welded Joints: Joints shall be made by the “arc-welding” process using certified welders. Port openings of fittings must match the inside diameter of the pipe to which they are welded. Use full radius welding elbows for all turns, use welding tees for all tees. Reducing fittings must be used for size reduction. “Weldolets” may be used for branches up through one-half the pipe size of the main to which they are attached. Nipples are not allowed.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 21 13 - 4 Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3. Welding Operation: a. After deposition, clean each layer of weld metal to remove slag and scale by wire brushing or grinding. Chip where necessary to prepare for proper deposition of next layer. b. Weld reinforcement no less than 1/16-inch not more than 1/8-inch above normal surface of jointed sections. Reinforcement crowned at center and taper on each side to surfaces being joined. Exposed surface of weld shall present professional appearance and be free of depressions below surface of jointed members. c. No welding shall be done when temperature of base metal is lower than 0 degrees F. Material to be welded during freezing temperatures shall be made warm and dry before welding is started. Metal shall be “warm to the hand” or approximately 60 degrees F. G. Screwed Joints: Use Teflon tape or Teflon liquid dope applied to male threads only. H. Flexible Couplings: Provide where indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 PIPE WRAP A. Apply per manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Apply wrapping to fittings in field after installation. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. General: 1. Clean interior of all piping before installation. 2. Flush sediment out of all piping systems after installation before connecting mechanical equipment to the piping. 3. When placing the water systems in service during construction, each system shall be cleaned by circulating a solution with 1000 ppm of trisodium phosphate for 24 hours, then drained, flushed and placed in service. 4. Clean all strainers prior to placing in service. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 21 13 - 5 Pipe and Pipe Fittings HVAC OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 31 01 HVAC DUCTS AND CASING-LOW PRESSURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Low pressure ductwork and fittings. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping Equipment 2. Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC 3. Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories 4. Section 22 30 00, Plumbing Equipment 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Work performed by qualified, experienced mechanics, in accordance with the manual of Duct and Sheet Metal Construction of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association and these Specifications. B. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Entire ductwork system, including materials and installation, installed in accordance with NFPA 90A. 2. Ductwork and components shall be listed as U.L. 181, Class I air duct, flame rating not to exceed 25 and smoke rating not to exceed 50. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Provide catalog data on each product specified hereunder. 2. Schedule of duct construction standards. 3. Provide shop drawings showing materials and construction details for single wall housing plenum. 4. Provide shop drawings showing construction details, support, and seismic restraint of ductwork distribution systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORTS, ANCHORAGE AND RESTRAINTS A. General: 1. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment, and supports and seismic restraints for ductwork are not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for their design. 2. Seismic restraints and anchorages shall resist seismic forces as specified in the latest edition of the International Building Code for the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. 3. Seismic restraints shall follow the provisions described in Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Control for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 4. Seismic restraints shall not introduce stresses in the ductwork caused by thermal expansion or contraction. 5. Connections to structural framing shall not introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 01 - 1 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Suspended Ductwork: Seismic restraints shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” for the seismic hazard level corresponding to the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. C. Engineered Support Systems: The following support systems shall be designed, detailed, and bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State having jurisdiction: 1. Supports and seismic restraints for suspended ductwork and equipment. 2. Support frames for ductwork and equipment which provide support from below. 3. Equipment and ductwork support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure. 2.02 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK A. Fabricate from galvanized steel, unless noted otherwise. B. Minimum gauge, duct construction, joint reinforcing, fittings, hangers and supports shall be in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”, Latest Edition. C. Duct Classification: Ducts shall be considered low pressure when design velocities are 2000 fpm or less and maximum static pressure is 2 inches WG positive or negative. 1. The following ductwork constructed in accordance with minimum reinforcement requirements for static pressure class of 1/2-inch WG positive or negative. a. Supply ductwork downstream from terminal units. b. Supply, return or exhaust ductwork serving fans scheduled to operate at less than 1/2-inch WG. c. Supply, return, or exhaust branch ductwork which serves one or two inlets/outlets. 2. The following ductwork constructed in accordance with minimum reinforcement requirements for static pressure class of 1-inch WG positive or negative. a. Supply, return, or exhaust ductwork serving fans scheduled to operate at less than 1-inch WG. On supply fans pressure drops for louvers, coils, clean filters, and sound traps may be deleted from scheduled fan static. b. Supply, return, or exhaust ductwork serving multiple duct branches where contractor can demonstrate that pressures will not exceed 1-inch WG positive or negative. c. Boiler direct vent combustion air intake ductwork. d. Water heater direct vent combustion air intake ductwork. 3. The following ductwork constructed in accordance with minimum reinforcement requirements for static pressure class of 2-inches WG positive or negative. a. Supply, return, or exhaust ductwork serving fans scheduled to operate at pressures greater than 1-inch WG positive or negative. D. Longitudinal seams on rectangular duct shall be Pittsburgh or Button punch snap lock. Snap lock seams for round duct may be used only on ducts classified for 1/2 inch WG. Longitudinal seams for round ducts using lap and rivet, spot weld, or fillet weld may be used only on ducts classified for statics 1-inch WG or less. E. Joining and reinforcing systems manufactured by Ductmate, Roloc, or TDC are acceptable. Ductmate 35 is equivalent to SMACNA “J”, and Ductmate 25 is equivalent to SMACNA “F”. F. Use of adjustable round elbows not permitted. 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Thermaflex M-KE 2. Gen Flex IMP-25S 3. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Description: Flexible air duct with CPE or metal film liner permanently bonded to coated spring steel wire helix with 1-inch thick fiberglass insulation blanket covered with fiberglass reinforced metal film vapor barrier jacket. Duct rated for 6-inch WG positive and 1-inch WG negative.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 01 - 2 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.04 ALUMINUM DUCTWORK A. Ductwork listed below and ductwork indicated on drawings shall be constructed of 3003-H-14 alloy aluminum. Gauge of metal and construction details to be determined by using minimum equivalent thickness and reinforcing for galvanized steel tables in SMACNA. B. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh type. Button punch snap lock seams not allowed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLIED LOCATIONS A. Supply ductwork on downstream side of terminal box. Galvanized sheet metal ductwork, lined where indicated on the Drawings or as specified in Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC. B. Supply Ductwork from Spin-In Fittings to Supply Outlet Collar Connection: Flexible duct, maximum 4 feet-0 inch length. C. Return Air Trunk Ductwork from End Run to Unit Connection: Galvanized sheet metal ductwork, lined where indicated on the Drawings or as specified in Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC. D. Ductwork between Transfer Grilles: Galvanized sheet metal ductwork, lined where indicated on the Drawings or as specified in Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Ductwork: 1. Seal traverse joints with an approved mastic during joining procedure or tape after joining to provide airtight duct system. 2. Low pressure ductwork hanger and support systems in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”. Wire supports are not allowed. 3. Provide supplementary steel for support of ductwork in shafts and between building structural members. 4. Fabricate changes in direction to permit easy air flow, using full 1.5D radius bends or fixed turning vanes in square elbows. Radius elbows less than 1.5D radius shall have splitter vanes. 5. Change in duct size or shape necessitated by interference made using rectangular equivalents of equal velocity. 6. Where pipe, structural member, or other obstruction passes through a duct, provide streamlined sheet metal collar around member and increase duct size to maintain net free area. Fit collar and caulk to make air tight. B. Sound Attenuation (Internal Insulation): 1. Provide sound attenuation duct where shown and as specified under Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC. 2. Duct dimensions shown are net inside attenuating material. C. Dampers: Install where shown and where necessary to complete final balancing of system. Install regulators as specified in Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories for each specific project condition. Leave all dampers locked wide open in preparation for balancing. D. Extractors: Install behind supply grilles and registers where shown. E. Flexible Connectors: Make connections to fans and other rotating equipment with flexible connectors with 2-inch minimum clearance between casing and ductwork. Not required on internally spring isolated units. F. Spin-in Fittings: 1. Install at branch takeoffs to outlets using round or flex duct. 2. Connect to flexible duct with draw band strap and minimum of two wraps of duct tape. 3. Leave all dampers locked wide open. G. Flexible Ducts: 1. Make connections at ends using draw band strap and a minimum of 2 wraps of duct tape.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 01 - 3 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Suspend center spans from structure above using wire as required by code. Connect to manufacturer’s eyelet on jacket or use 1-inch wide galvanized steel strap with single loop at top and smooth edges. 3. Suspending duct by laying it on the ceiling is prohibited. 4. Avoid crimping flex duct. All changes in direction shall be made using 2D radius. Duct connections to grilles, registers and diffusers using less than 2D radius bends are not acceptable. Where space is constricted, use sheet metal elbows or Thermaflex Flex Boots (or equal). H. Ductwork, Grease Hood Exhaust: 1. Slope minimum of 1/4 inch per foot of run toward the hood. Where horizontal ducts exceed 75 feet in length, slope minimum of 1-inch per foot of run. 2. Install access doors at every change in direction and maximum of 10 feet on center. 3. Provide access doors and allow penetrations for sprinklers as required by Fire Protection section of these specifications. 4. Install ductwork in a rated shaft as specified under other divisions of work. I. Ductwork, Exposed or Visible in Finished Areas: 1. Use extreme care in handling and installing. 2. Replace all dented or damaged sections. 3. Install ductwork straight and true, parallel to building lines. 4. Make all connections with pop rivets using couplings where applicable. Grind all raw edges smooth and apply paintable sealant to cover imperfections. 5. Remove all excess sealant to provide a finished joint. 6. Provide floor, wall, and ceiling plates as specified in Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC. 7. Finish, clean and prime all ductwork and hangers for painting. J. Single Wall Housing Plenums: 1. Install housing plenums in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, latest edition. 2. All joints and seams sealed with high pressure duct sealer or gaskets and fastened with bolts, screws, or pop rivets. 3. Pipe, duct, conduit, and control penetrations sealed to prevent air leakage using close off sheets and strips. 4. Securely anchor housing panels to floor or roof curbs. 5. Block outside air or return air dampers open to prevent damage during construction until automatic control system is operational and adjusted. 6. Provide access doors where indicated on drawings and where required to provide access for cleaning and maintenance. Access doors installed to open against air pressure. 7. Slope plenum and connected ductwork to drain towards the exterior louver or building exterior opening. 8. For single wall plenums installed behind exterior louvers or wall openings, slope plenum floor and connected ductwork at 1/4-inch per foot to drain towards the exterior louver or opening. 9. For single wall plenums installed below roof ventilators or roof openings, slope floor of plenum at 1/4-inch per foot to drain connection. Pipe drain connection to floor drain. K. Stainless Steel Duct: Install stainless steel ductwork similar to galvanized ductwork per SMACNA standards. L. Aluminum Duct: 1. Slope minimum of 1/4 inch per foot of run toward the grille. 2. Install similar to galvanized duct work per SMACNA standards. 3. Provide dielectric protection when joining aluminum duct to steel duct by utilizing neoprene flexible connections or other approved method. 4. Use aluminum straps and hangers to support aluminum, ductwork.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 01 - 4 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Coordination with Balance Agency: 1. Provide services of a sheet metal person familiar with the system ductwork to provide assistance to the balancing agency during the initial phases of air balancing in locating all sheet metal dampers. 2. Install missing dampers required to complete final balancing. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 01 - 5 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 31 02 HVAC DUCTS AND CASING-MEDIUM PRESSURE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Medium pressure ductwork and fittings. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 05 48, Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 2. Section 23 05 90, Pressure Testing for HVAC Systems 3. Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC 4. Section 23 33 00, Air Duct Accessories 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Work performed by qualified, experienced mechanics, in accordance with the manual of Duct and Sheet Metal Construction of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association and these Specifications. B. Regulatory Requirements. 1. Entire ductwork system including materials and installation, installed in accordance with NFPA 90A. 2. Ductwork and components shall be listed as UL 181 Class I air duct, flame rating not to exceed 25 and smoke rating not to exceed 50. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings of ductwork specified hereunder. Include details of supports and seismic restraint of ductwork distribution systems. 2. Product data on medium pressure round and flat oval ductwork and fittings. 3. Schedule of rectangular duct construction standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORTS, ANCHORAGE, AND RESTRAINTS A. General: 1. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment and supports and seismic restraints for ductwork are not shown on the Drawings, the contractor shall be responsible for their design. 2. Seismic restraints and anchorages shall resist seismic forces as specified in the latest edition of the International Building Code for the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. 3. Seismic restraints and anchorages shall resist seismic forces as specified in the latest edition of the International Building Code for the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. 4. Seismic restraints shall follow the provisions described in Section 23 05 48. 5. Seismic restraints shall not introduce stresses in the ductwork caused by thermal expansion or contraction. 6. Connections to structural framing shall not introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 02 - 1 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Medium OSP Tenant Improvement Pressure 03 24 2017

B. Suspended Ductwork: Seismic restraints shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA “Seismic Restraint Manual - Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” for the seismic hazard level corresponding to the seismic zone in which the project is constructed. C. Engineered Support Systems: The following support systems shall be designed, detailed, and bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State having jurisdiction: 1. Supports and seismic restraints for suspended ductwork and equipment. 2. Support frames for ductwork and equipment which provide support from below. 3. Equipment and ductwork support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure. 2.02 GENERAL A. Fabricate from galvanized steel unless otherwise noted. B. Minimum gauge, duct construction, joint reinforcing, fittings, hangers, and supports in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”, Third Edition, 2005. C. Duct Classification: Ducts shall be considered medium pressure when design velocities exceed 2000 fpm or static pressure is 2-inches W.G. or greater positive. Ducts constructed in accordance with minimum reinforcement requirements for static pressure class of 4 inches positive. 2.03 SINGLE WALL ROUND DUCT AND FITTINGS A. Materials: 1. Medium pressure round ductwork up to 36-inch diameter spiral lock seam. Round ducts over 36 inches in diameter either spiral lock seam or shop fabricated with longitudinal seams. 2. Takeoffs: Main and branch takeoffs similar to United Spiral Uniform Duct fittings type SRHTC, SRHTL, or SRHL, typically. No saddle fittings allowed. All fittings welded. Saddle fittings with pop rivet fasteners and sealed with high pressure duct sealer may be used only when adding takeoff fittings to existing duct. 3. Transitions, Elbows: a. Transitions of concentric type or eccentric type to maintain elevations detailed, with not more than 15 degree angle variation on sloped portion. b. 90 degree elbows of 5 piece design with centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 of duct diameter minimum. Mitered elbows not allowed. c. 60 degree and 45 degree elbows of 3 piece design with long radius. d. Y-Branch fittings similar to United Uniseal SRHY or SRHYR. Bull head tees not allowed. 2.04 RECTANGULAR STEEL DUCTWORK A. Fabricate from galvanized steel unless noted otherwise. B. Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburg type. Button punch snap lock may be used only if sheetmetal screws are added on 24-inch centers. C. Joining and reinforcement systems as manufactured by Ductmate, Roloc, or TDC are acceptable. Ductmate 35 is equivalent to SMACNA “J” reinforcement and Ductwork 25 is equivalent to SMACNA “F”. Fasten ductmate to duct with sheetmetal screws minimum of 6-inch on center. D. Fittings: 1. Fabricate fittings for easiest airflow using radius elbows with center-line radius elbows equal to 1-1/2 times the duct dimension in the plane of the turn. 2. Transitions: Concentric or eccentric type to maintain elevations with not more than 15 degree angle variation on sloped portion. 3. Conical Taps: For branch take-off to terminal unit, construct with inlet 4 inches wider than outlet and no raw edges inside.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 02 - 2 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Medium OSP Tenant Improvement Pressure 03 24 2017

E. Use of mitered elbows with turning vanes is not acceptable except where indicated on drawings. Radius elbows with centerline radius less than 1.5D radius shall be vaned type and may be used only with approval of engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLIED LOCATIONS A. Supply ductwork on upstream side of air terminal unit. B. Supply ductwork serving fans scheduled to operate at pressures greater than 2 inches WG positive. C. Supply ductwork 20 feet downstream of air handling equipment and the first 6 feet of duct mains connect to the vertical ducts at each floor with round or oval double walled ductwork. D. Acoustical line plenums on discharge of rooftop units. Plenum size shall be sufficient for supply duct connections as shown on plans, minimum plenum size shall be same as unit opening. 3.02 MEDIUM PRESSURE ROUND AND OVAL DUCTWORK INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with the latest edition of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards". B. Seal all traverse and longitudinal joints with high pressure duct sealer and wrap with duct sealer tape or hard cast with minimum 2-inch overlap. C. Field connections for ducts 36-inch diameter and less for round duct and 42 inches major axis and less for oval ducts not requiring additional reinforcing shall use slip on connections. Other ducts shall use flanged joint connections, fabricated and sealed per manufacturer’s instructions. D. Oval duct shall use reinforced per SMACNA standards. E. Branch takeoffs rigidly connected to terminal unit without flex duct. 3.03 MEDIUM PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCT INSTALLATION A. Install duct, fittings, supports, and hangers in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”. B. Seal traverse and longitudinal joints with high pressure duct sealer and wrap with duct sealer tape or hard cast with minimum 2-inch overlap. C. Provide supplementary steel for support of ductwork in shafts and between building structural members. D. Change in duct size or shape necessitated by interference shall be made using rectangular equivalents of equal velocity. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: Perform leakage tests in accord with Section 23 05 90, Pressure Testing for HVAC Systems. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 31 02 - 3 HVAC Ducts and Casing-Medium OSP Tenant Improvement Pressure 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Medium and low pressure duct accessories, sealants and tapes, flexible connectors, fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination smoke and fire dampers, access doors, spin-in, extractors, automatic dampers, drain pans, eliminators, back draft dampers. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 31 01, HVAC Ducts and Casing-Low Pressure 2. Section 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work performed by qualified, experienced mechanics in accordance with the manual of Duct and Sheet Metal Construction of the National Association of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors and these Specifications. B. Install entire ductwork system, including materials and installation, in accordance with NFPA 90A. C. Flexible connectors, flexible equipment connections, tapes and sealants listed as UL 181, Class I air duct. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and smoke developed rating not to exceed 50. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: Product data for Duct Accessories: 1. Medium Pressure Duct Accessories: a. Acoustical Turning Vanes. b. Access Doors. c. Bell Mouth Fittings. d. Duct Sealer. 2. Low Pressure Duct Accessories: a. Access Doors. b. Duct Sealer. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Automatic dampers, fire dampers, smoke dampers. Combination smoke and fire dampers, air flow station. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. As indicated. 2. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Duct Sealer: 1. Based On: McGill Airseal Zero. 2. Description: Suitable for indoor/outdoor use, rated to 10-inch WG, Maximum Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating of 25/50, maximum VOC of 420 g/L less water. SCAQMD Rule 1168 compliant.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 33 00 - 1 Air Duct Accessories OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Flexible Connector: 1. Peabody Noise Control/Kinetics Model KNM-100B, Polymer Adhesive. 2. Description: One pound per square foot density, barium sulphate load vinyl material with fiberglass reinforcing. D. Turning Vane Assemblies: 1. Sheet Metal Vanes: Multiple radius hollow vane air foil type with 4-1/2 inch inside radius, galvanized steel construction. 2. Runners: Embossed type. E. Acoustical Turning Vanes: Multiple radius air foil type, perforated steel construction with fiberglass fill. AirSan Acoustiturn or as approved. F. Access Doors: 1. Manufacturers: United Sheetmetal APR or ASR, Metco, Semco, Cesco, Ruskin, Nailor- Hart or approved equal. 2. Round, oval or rectangular to match duct, single wall to open against positive duct pressure, fastened with spring clips, pressure seal gasket, fastened with chain. Double wall access doors similar except provide insulated frame and insulated door. G. Bell Mouth Fittings: Round or flat oval, radius of 0.20 D minimum. 2.02 LOW PRESSURE DUCT ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. As indicated. 2. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Volume Damper Fabrication: 1. Single blade dampers reinforced or crimped for rigidity, with pivot rod extending through duct. Dampers over 12 inches high use multiple opposed blade damper. Single blade damper no larger than 12 inches by 48 inches. Multiple blade damper factory fabricated, Ruskin MD-35 or equal. 2. Minimum gauge and duct construction in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”, latest edition. 3. Splitter and butterfly dampers fabricated of 18-gauge galvanized steel. 4. Dampers of length suitable to close branch ducts without damper flutter. 5. Damper blade must be aligned with handle and index pointer. C. Flexible Equipment Connections: 30 ounce Ventfabrics Ventglas or Duro Dyne neoprene coated fire retardant glass fabric or approved equal. D. Extractors (EX): Gang operated blades, steel construction, blades at 1-inch centers, slide operator set 15 degrees into main trunk duct, Titus AG-45 with No. 1 operator, similar Carnes, Anemostat, Barber-Coleman, Nailor-Hart or approved equal. E. Spin-in Fittings: 1. Sheet Metal Duct: Straight pattern sheet metal spin-in fitting with scoops designed for connection to sheet metal ductwork, volume damper, and locking quadrant. Construction with spot welds or rivets. “Button-punch” fabrication prohibited. 2. Fiberglass Duct: Straight pattern sheet metal spin-in fitting with scoops designed for connection to fiberglass ductwork volume damper, and locking quadrant. Construction shall be with spot welds or rivets. “Button-punch” fabrication prohibited. F. Duct Sealer: 1. Based On: McGill Airseal Zero. 2. Description: Suitable for indoor/outdoor use, rated to 10-inch WG, Maximum Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating of 25/50, maximum VOC of 420 g/L less water. SCAQMD Rule 1168 compliant. G. Duct Tape for Sheet Metal: ARNO C520 duct tape similar United, Duro Dyne, Nashua, Polymer Adhesive. H. Tape and Adhesive/Activator System for Sheet Metal: Hardcast, Polymer Adhesive.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 33 00 - 2 Air Duct Accessories OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

I. Turning Vane Assemblies: 1. Sheet Metal Vanes: Multiple radius hollow vane air foil type 2-inch (small vane) or 4-1/2- inch (large vane) inside radius, galvanized steel construction. 2. Runners: Push-on type. 3. Acoustical Vanes: Multiple radius air foil type, perforated steel construction with fiberglass fill. AirSan Acoustiturn or as approved. J. Access Doors: 1. Manufacturer: a. Air Balance b. Ruskin c. Metco d. Durodyne e. Cesco f. Nailor-Hart g. Or approved equal. 2. Doors complete with steel frame, steel door with backing plate, cam latches (two on units 14-inch by 14-inch and larger), hinge and gasketing. Doors on insulated or lined ducts shall be insulated. 3. Grease Duct Access Door: Construct of metal thickness equal to metal duct, doors air and grease tight with hinge and hand operable latches. Ductmate. 4. Size: Duct Width or Duct Diameter Net Access Door Opening Up to 8" 6" x 6" 9" to 12" 8" x 8" 13" to 20" 12" x 12" 21" to 30" 16" x 14" 31" to 42" 18" x 14" Over 42" Two 16" x 14" K. Drip Pans: Provide Type 304 stainless steel drip pans for cooling coils and exhaust heat recovery coils on built-up units as indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all devices as shown on the Contract Drawings and per manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Medium Pressure Duct Accessory installation specified under Section 23 31 02, HVAC Ducts and Casings-Medium Pressure. C. Low Pressure Duct Accessory installation specified under Section 23 31 01, HVAC Ducts and Casings-Low Pressure. D. Access Doors: Install where indicated and at all duct mounted coils, humidifiers, automatic control dampers, smoke dampers, fire dampers, air flow stations, to provide access for cleaning and maintenance. E. Drip Pans: Install under each cooling coil and exhaust heat recovery coil as indicated. Provide drain connection from each drip pan and pipe to nearest floor drain through trap. Drip pans over 6 feet in length require drain connections from both ends. Pitch drip pans in direction of air flow and to drain. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 33 00 - 3 Air Duct Accessories OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Terminal Units. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Select units for sound levels, maximum pressure drops, and maximum inlet velocity as specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Catalog data, construction details, and performance characteristics for each type and size of terminal unit. 2. Data showing compliance with discharge and radiated sound power level specified. 3. Provide computer calculations for heating coils supplied with unit. 4. Operating and maintenance data. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SINGLE DUCT CONSTANT OR VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carnes 2. Titus 3. Environmental Technologies 4. Trane 5. Price 6. Tuttle and Bailey 7. Nailor Hart 8. Anemostat 9. Krueger 10. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Description: Single duct, medium velocity, pressure independent, variable volume. C. Constructed of minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel. Construction to be leakproof with all joints sealed and all access doors gasketed. Leakage rate to be 15 cfm at 3.0-inch differential S.P. Provide access door for cleaning of coil as an integral part of the unit. Interior lined with coated dual density or matt faced insulation meeting NFPA 90A requirements with lining in accordance with U.L. l8l. D. Volume Regulator Assembly (DDC Controls): 1. Controller and actuator provided by 23 09 00, Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC, factory mounted in NEMA 1 enclosure. 2. Provide averaging type velocity sensor utilizing multiple sensing points. 3. Air valves all metal construction, non-corrosive, with bearings self-lubricating and moving parts replaceable in the field. 4. Assembled unit tested, factory preset, and guaranteed to provide ±5% total maximum air flow rate through an inlet pressure range to 3.0 inches water.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 36 00 - 1 Air Terminal Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

E. Air static pressure drop across terminal unit not to exceed 0.35-inch WG without coil and 0.6-inch WG with water coil. Maximum inlet duct velocities shall not exceed 2200 fpm. F. Sound ratings shall be tested as power level l0-l2 watts in accordance with ARI/ADC 880 standard and ASHRAE Standard 36B-72 at 1.5-inch WG inlet static pressure. Unit discharge airborne and casing radiated sound not to exceed following rated sound power levels: MAXIMUM AIRBORNE SOUND POWER (db) OCTAVE BAND & CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) CFM 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 0 - 300 -- 63 64 60 60 60 52 301 – 400 68 65 65 63 60 60 52 401 – 800 71 68 67 67 60 60 52 801 – 1200 73 72 68 67 60 60 52 1201 – 2000 73 75 69 67 60 60 54 2001 and -- 80 78 76 67 67 60 above * Units must have 5-feet of 2-inch thick lined duct or 3-feet-0-inch IAC MS sound trap provided with unit at units discharge to meet acoustic design goals

MAXIMUM RADIATED SOUND POWER (db) OCTAVE BAND & CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CFM 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 0-2000 71 68 61 61 55 55 50 2001 and

above* * Units must have loaded vinyl wrap over 2-inch thick insulation PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, TERMINAL UNITS A. Support terminal units from structure using thread rod and brackets provided. Provide vibration isolation as indicated on plans, and as specified. Make a rigid duct connection to the inlet with minimum length of straight duct upstream of unit as recommended by the manufacturer or as noted whichever is greater. B. Refer to Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC for duct lining requirements at outlet of terminal units. Maintain 3 feet clear in front of control enclosure. C. Arrange units for operation with control system. D. Provide a minimum of 5 feet of ductwork prior to first spin-in fitting or outlet branch duct takeoff. E. Install terminal unit to allow for complete access to controls, and all items requiring maintenance or adjustment. When electrical disconnect is used, coordinate required clearance with NEC requirements, 36 inches minimum. In all other cases, maintain a minimum of 30-inches clearance directly in front of the controls. F. Mount terminal unit controller, actuator to primary air valve, and control valve on the same side of the terminal unit. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 36 00 - 2 Air Terminal Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Ceiling diffusers, sidewall grilles. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 23 33 00, Duct Accessories 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Showing dimensions and details of construction. 2. Product Data PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Where only Titus figure numbers are listed, equivalent products by the following are acceptable: 1. Carnes 2. Price 3. Krueger 4. Tuttle & Bailey 5. Anemostat 6. Nailor B. All such products shall be of one manufacturer. C. Other Manufacturers: Submit substitution Request. 2.02 PERFORMANCE A. Unit sizing is based on air being introduced at 20 degrees F temperature differential and being diffused at the 5-foot level to a velocity not greater than 50 FPM and a temperature differential not greater than 1.5 degrees F. Units are also selected so as not to exceed the NC-30 curve. 2.03 DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES A. Ceiling Supply Diffuser (C-1): Perforated face modular diffuser with adjustable modular core, steel panel, square or rectangular neck size as indicated, discharge pattern as indicated, lay-in tee bar ceiling, or surface mounted as required (coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plan), white baked enamel finish, Titus PMC. B. Ceiling Return/Exhaust Grille (C-2): Perforated face modular ceiling grille, steel panel, with duct adapters for round or rectangular as indicated, lay-in tee bar ceiling, or surface mounted as required (coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plan), white baked enamel finish, Titus PAR. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all diffusers tight to their respective mounting surfaces. B. Installed plumb and true with room dimensions and accurately centered on projections as shown on the architectural reflected ceiling plans.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 37 00 - 1 Air Outlets and Inlets OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Install extractors behind all duct mounted sidewall supply grilles, and where shown. Turning vanes allowable if condition is the last outlet on a branch. D. Set pattern control for directions of throw as shown on Drawings prior to air balancer arriving on Project. E. Paint ductwork behind all outlets flat black. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 37 00 - 2 Air Outlets and Inlets OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 23 82 00 CONVECTION HEATING AND COOLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Section 23 05 00, Common Work Results for HVAC, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Active Chilled Beams 2. Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) System 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Catalog data showing dimensions and performance. 2. Computer calculations for coil performance. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Fan coil units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN COIL UNITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Trane 2. Carrier 3. Daikin 4. International 5. Air Therm 6. York 7. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Description: Furnish complete unit including cabinet, fan and motor assembly, heating coil, cooling coil and filter. Unit U.L. approved for application and wired per NEC. C. Cabinet: 1. Factory Standard Enclosures: 18-gauge steel, welded and bolted construction, flat top, removable panels for access to components. Interior portions of cabinet insulated to prevent condensation. Factory applied baked enamel finish with custom color matching to match adjacent wall paint. 2. Cabinet Dimensions: Cabinet to be custom fabricated to extend to full width of wall recess. D. Fans and Motor: Steel construction designed for minimum noise levels, direct drive type, multispeed permanent split capacitor motor or belt drive unit, fan controls. E. Filters: Throwaway type, 1-inch thick fiberglass. F. Water Coils: 3/4-inch OD seamless copper tubes, aluminum fins and end supports. Provide shutoff valves on water lines, and unions for a complete system. Coil and heater construction shall be for 250 psi working pressure. G. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel drain pan with copper drain connection. Pan to extend under coil and coil connection for proper drainage of condensate. H. Configuration: As scheduled. I. Controls: Complete, factory-installed control system with all operating and safety controls. Include all remote sensors and devices for field installation.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 82 00 - 1 Convection Heating and Cooling Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

J. Speed Controller: Provide three-speed switch mounted internally to unit. Electrical: Furnish magnetic contactors. Arrange for single point electrical connection. Provide all field wiring. K. Provide with Optional Disconnect Switch. 2.02 ACTIVE CHILLED BEAMS (CEILING) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Price 2. Dadanco 3. TWA 4. Trox 5. Other Manufacturers: Submit Substitution Request. B. Active chilled beam shall utilize induction of room air across a water coil mounted within the unit to provide sensible cooling or heating when required. The induced air shall mix with primary air and discharge evenly into the room via discharge outlet. C. Components: 1. Primary Air Inlet 2. Pressurization Cavity 3. Induction Nozzles 4. 4-Pipe Water Coil 5. Induction Grille 6. Coanda Plates/Wings D. Construction: 1. Casing: 24-gauge steel, powder coated. 2. Nozzles: Formed metal. 3. Frame: Aluminum Extrusion, powder coated. 4. Adjustable Mounting Brackets: Factory installed. 5. Water Coil: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into aluminum plate fins, constructed to 250 psi working pressure, AHRI 410 certified, fin spacing no greater than 10 fins per inch. 6. Installation: Lay-in tee bar ceiling, or surface mounted as required (coordinate with architectural reflected ceiling plan). 7. Drain Pan (Displacement Floor Mounted Active Chilled Beams): 1-1/2-inch deep galvanized steel drain pan with copper drain connection. Pan to extend under coil and coil connection for proper drainage of condensate. 2.03 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Mitsubishi (City Multi) 2. Daikin (VRV) 3. LG (Multi-V) 4. The basis of design is Mitsubishi (City Multi). The contractor shall be responsible for any changes required from basis of design, such as pipe quantity and routing, control coordination, and power requirements if a different manufacturer is selected. B. Indoor Unit – Wall Mounted: 1. Description: The unit shall be a wall-mounted ductless fan-coil unit. Furnish complete unit including cabinet, wall mounting kit and accessories, refrigerant line set, electronic expansion valve, fan and motor assembly, cooling coil, condensate drain pan and filter. Unit as scheduled on drawing, factory-tested and assembled, factory wired, refrigerant-to- air heat exchanger, fan/motor assembly, compressor, controls and safety devices, control circuit transformer, shipped in one piece with ARI certification and UL listing. 2. Cabinet: 18 gauge steel, removable panels for access to components. Provide drain connection.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 82 00 - 2 Convection Heating and Cooling Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3. Fan and Motor: The evaporator fan shall be an assembly with one or two line-flow fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The fan shall consist of 2 speeds, High and Low. 4. Coil/Piping: The indoor coil shall be direct expansion type for nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. A condensate pan shall be located under the coil. Both refrigerant lines shall be insulated. 5. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by a removable, washable filter. 6. Electrical: Furnish starters, contactors and disconnects. Arrange for single point electrical connection. 7. Condensate Pump: Where condensate pump is indicated, provide condensate pump with hard-wired electrical connection. Pipe drain to floor drain. C. Indoor Unit – Ceiling Cassette: 1. Description: a. Ceiling-recessed cassette fan-coil unit. b. Furnish complete unit including cabinet, ceiling mounting kit and accessories, refrigerant line set, electronic expansion valve, fan and motor assembly, cooling coil, condensate drain pan and filter. c. Unit as scheduled on drawing, factory-tested and assembly, compressor, controls and safety devices, control circuit transformer, shipped in one piece with ARI certification and UL listing. 2. Cabinet: a. Ceiling-recessed cassette constructed of 18 gauge steel, removable panels for access to components. b. Provide drain connection. c. Painted finish. d. Cabinet Panel: Provisions for a field installed filtered outside air intake. e. Branch ducting allowed from cabinet. A grille shall be fixed to bottom of cabinet allowing four-way blow. 3. Fan and Motor: a. Evaporator fan to have an assembly with one or two line-flow fan(s) direct driven by a single motor. b. Statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. c. Consist of two speeds, High and Low. 4. Coil/Piping: a. Indoor Coil: Direct expansion type of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. b. Condensate Pan: Locate under coil. c. Insulate both refrigerant lines. 5. Filter: Return air filtered by means of an easily removable, washable filter. 6. Electrical: a. Furnish starters, contactors and disconnects. b. Arrange for single point electrical connection. 7. Condensate Pump: a. Provide internal factory-mounted condensate pump with hard-wired electrical connection. b. Pipe drain to floor drain. D. Outdoor Unit: 1. Description: a. Provide air cooled heat pump (with heat recovery system for simultaneous heating and cooling) designed for outdoor installation with factory supplied supports, properly assembled and tested at the factory.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 82 00 - 3 Convection Heating and Cooling Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

b. Completely weatherproof and include compressor, condenser coils, condensing fans, motor, refrigerant reservoir, charging valve, controls and a holding charge of refrigerant. c. Provide guards on condenser fans and coil guard. Unit shall have a power coated finish. d. Completely factory assembled, piped, wired and tested. e. Both refrigerant lines insulated between the outside and inside units. f. Sound rating no higher than 63 dB(A). g. Modular in design and allow for side-by-side installation with minimum spacing. h. Provide accessories and kits required for a complete installation including field connection of heat pump units. 2. Cabinet: The casing(s) fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. 3. Condenser Fans and Motors: a. Direct driven variable speed propeller type fans with permanently lubricated motors. b. Provide fans with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. c. Outdoor Unit: Vertical discharge airflow. 4. Refrigerant Circuits: a. Units hold a charge of R410A refrigerant. b. Include back seating service valve and gauge ports in liquid and suction lines. c. Provided refrigerant filter-dryer. d. Refrigeration circuit of the condensing unit consists of the following: 1) Scroll Compressor 2) Motors 3) Fans 4) Condenser Coil 5) Electric Expansion Valve 6) Solenoid Valves 7) 4-Way Valve 8) Distribution Headers 9) Capillaries 10) Filters 11) Shut-Off Valves 12) Oil Separators 13) Service Ports 14) Liquid Receivers 15) Accumulators 5. Coil: The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plat fins on copper tubing. 6. Compressors: a. Furnish inverter driven scroll hermetic sealed compressor isolation and sound muffling. b. Overload and inherent winding thermostat protection to prevent burn out. c. Provide crankcase heater. d. Multiple compressors manifolded for single joint connection on liquid and suction lines. e. Capacity completely variable down to 16 percent of rated capacity. 7. Controls: a. Provide high and low pressure cutouts, contractors and internal overload protection on motors. b. Provide low ambient operation to 0 degrees F outside to maintain condensing temperature on part load operation. c. Provide short cycle timer. 8. Warranty: Provide five year warranty on compressors.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 82 00 - 4 Convection Heating and Cooling Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

E. Branch Circuit Controller: 1. General: a. Galvanized steel finish. b. Completely factory assembled, piped and wired. c. Each unit run tested at the factory. d. Mount indoors and operate so that different zones served by each controller can be in heating and cooling mode simultaneously. 2. Cabinet: a. House a liquid-gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves. b. Contain tube-in-tube heat exchangers. c. Casing: Fabricated of galvanized steel. 3. Refrigerant Valves: a. The unit shall be furnished with multiple two position refrigerant valves. b. Each circuit shall have a two-position liquid line valve and a two-position suction line valve. c. When connecting a 54,000 BTU-h or larger indoor unit section, two branch circuits shall be joined together at the branch controller to deliver an appropriate amount of refrigerant he two refrigerant valves shall operate simultaneously. d. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow. 4. Integral Drain Pan: An integral condensate pan and drain shall be provided. 5. Condensate pump: a. Provide internal factory-mounted condensate pump with hard-wired electrical connection. b. Provide external condensate pump with hard-wired electrical connection when required. c. Pipe drain to floor drain. 6. Electrical: Furnish starters and contactors. Arrange for single point electrical connection. F. VRF Controls: 1. Provide a complete, control system with operating and safety controls, consisting of remote controllers and centralized controllers. Network together using a high-speed communication bus and wiring as recommended by manufacturer. Provide control wiring and control power wiring for a complete and operational system. Provide required controllers for stand-alone temperature sensors. The controls network to support operation monitoring, scheduling, error email distribution, personal browsers, and online maintenance support. 2. Operator Workstation: a. Provide personal computer that performs data access, operator’s commands, alarm management, requests for reports, file generation, diagnostics, and modifications. b. Control system not dependent on Operator Workstation for operation. c. Computer to be used for operator interface. 3. Room Thermostat: a. Provide locally programmable 7-day thermostats with automatic change over, fan on- auto switch, system off-auto switch, and individual set point for heating and cooling with backlit LCD display. b. Provide minimum of four independent programmable temperature periods per day. c. Provide error codes in the event of system abnormality/error. d. Provide one thermostat per unit unless otherwise indicated. e. Provide 10 percent spare stock to owner. f. Based on: Mitsubishi Deluxe MA Controller. 4. Centralized Controller: a. Capable of controlling a maximum of 50 indoor units with multiple outdoor units. b. Override remote controllers every 2 hours, system configuration, daily/weekly/annual scheduling, monitoring of operation status, error email notification, online maintenance tool and malfunction monitoring.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 82 00 - 5 Convection Heating and Cooling Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

c. Provide basic operation controls which can be applied to an individual indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to 50 indoor units), or indoor units (collective batch operation) including on/off, operation mode selection (cool, heat, auto, dry, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, airflow direction setting, error email notification, and online maintenance. 5. Power Supply: Provide power supply for controls from spare electrical circuits, including breakers, disconnects, transformers, and wiring. G. Controls Interface: The control system shall be equipped with a network port and shall have a network type data transfer interface with the DDC controller. The following interface shall be required: 1. BACnet protocol compatible. 2. Alarms read to the DDC controller. 3. The following analog signals shall be read to the DDC controller as a minimum: Space temperature. 4. The following status signals be read to the DDC controller as a minimum: a. Occupied Cycle b. Unoccupied Cycle c. Warmup d. Override e. Supply Fan f. Compressors g. Heating/Cooling Operation H. Controls Interface: 1. The packaged equipment controls equipped with a network port and network type data transfer interface. 2. Input and output points, setpoints and functions identified in the Sequences of Operation accessible to the DDC control system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Active Chilled Beams. 1. The installation shall be coordinated with other trades working in the ceiling area to achieve a neat and well-coordinated installation. Refer to architectural drawings for installation details. 2. All supports shall be the responsibility of Division 9 unless specialized application is required. All radiant and non-radiant panels shall be made available to Division 9 for installation of panels by Division 9. Ensure ceiling openings and wall moldings are installed as per radiant panel shop drawings. 3. Tubing passing closest to exterior wall shall be connected to the supply mains. 4. Factory supplied inter-connectors must be used to connect panels for standard installation of panels in series. Soft copper or pigtail type connections are not acceptable. 5. All system piping shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed before connecting to radiant panels, sails, or chilled beams. 6. Purge air from hydronic piping loops. 7. All radiant panels shall and chilled beams be installed by personnel wearing clean white gloves. 8. Install insulation blanket over radiant panels in enclosed spaces as indicated. 9. Provide mock up. B. Damaged Coils: Make every effort to prevent damage to both built-up coils and coils of packaged equipment. Comb damaged coil fins to be straight.

214002.4 / CAMS 23 82 00 - 6 Convection Heating and Cooling Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.02 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM A. Installation: 1. Install in location shown on the Drawings. Level unit and secure to structure. Provide secondary structural base where required to attached to structure. Provide vibration isolators where indicated. 2. Make piping connections and unit installation per manufacturer's recommendations and installation guides. 3. Size and run refrigerant piping between fan coil unit(s), branch circuit controller(s) and condensing unit(s) per manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Insulate refrigerant piping as specified in Section 23 07 00, Insulation for HVAC. 5. Pipe coil drain pan to floor drain per manufacturers installation guide. 6. Provide secondary drain protection via a sensor in the drain pain overflow. Field wire interlock to shut down the unit upon sensing of moisture. 7. Make refrigerant piping connections, install refrigeration accessories and charge system. Provide additional refrigerant as required for proper operation at design capacities. 8. Provide interconnecting power and control wiring. B. Start-up: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide startup checklist by the manufacturer and completed by the contractor prior to startup. 2. Startup to be witnessed and signed off on by the manufacturer’s representative. 3. Install filters before operating unit. 4. Ensure proper refrigerant and airflow before operating unit compressor. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 23 82 00 - 7 Convection Heating and Cooling Units OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. C. Sections of Division 26, Electrical are interrelated. When interpreting any direction, material, and method specified in any section of Division 26, Electrical, consider it within the entirety of Work in Division 26, Electrical. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Design-Build work. 1. The intent of Division 26 Specifications and Drawings is to provide a complete and workable facility, with complete systems as required by applicable codes, as indicated, and as specified. 2. Include all work specified in Division 26 and indicated on Drawings, including appurtenances, connections, fasteners, and accessories required to make a complete working system, whether indicated or not indicated. 3. Refer to Division 01, General Requirements. B. Division 26 Specifications and accompanying Drawings are complementary, and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 1. Items shown on the Drawings are not necessarily included in the Specifications and vice versa. 2. In case of conflict, Specifications supersede Drawings. C. Imperative language used in Division 26, Electrical Sections addresses the Contractor, as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, “Summary of Work”. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The latest adopted revisions of the publications listed below apply to these Specifications as referenced: 1. International Building Code (IBC) 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 5. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 9. Oregon Administrative Rules (OAR) 10. The publications are referred to in the text by acronym or initials in parentheses above. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Ground Systems: 1. Provide complete ground systems indicated. 2. Include conduit system, transformer housings, switchboard frame, and neutral bus, motors, and miscellaneous grounds required by Contract Documents and by applicable codes. B. System Identification: 1. Clearly identify all elements of the Project electrical system to indicate the loads served, or the function of each item of equipment, connected under this work.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 1 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Comply with requirements of Division 26 Section, “Identification,” and with applicable codes. C. Drawings: 1. Drawings are diagrammatic: they do not show every offset, bend, tee, or elbow which may be required to install work in the space provided and avoid conflicts with other construction. a. Prior to installing work, take field dimensions, and note conditions available for, installation. b. Follow Drawings as closely as practical to do so, and install additional bends, offsets, and elbows where required by installation conditions. 1) Additional offsets, bends, and other connectors are subject to approval by Project Engineer. 2) Install additional offsets, bends, and other connectors without additional cost to Owner. c. The right to make any reasonable changes in outlet location prior to roughing in is reserved to the Owner’s Representative. 2. Luminaire Designations: a. Lower case letters adjacent to devices or luminaires indicate switching arrangement or circuit grouping. b. Numbers adjacent to devices indicate circuit connection. 3. Circuits and Switching: a. Do not change branch circuiting and switching indicated; nor combine homeruns, without Engineer’s prior approval. b. Do not combine or change feeder runs. 4. Circuit Conductors: a. Cross or hash marks on conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 copper branch circuit conductors, unless otherwise noted. b. Where such marks do not appear, provide quantity of circuit conductors to the outlets shown to perform the control or circuiting indicated. c. Include ground, travelers, and switchlegs required by the circuiting arrangement indicated. d. Provide a dedicated neutral conductor with each circuit, do not use a shared neutral conductor between phases unless specifically requested or directed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Division 01, General Requirements. B. Shop Drawings and Equipment Data: 1. Combine electrical shop drawings and equipment data in Submittal binders. 2. Include in Submittal binders: a. A complete index of materials and equipment required by Specifications to be documented by submittals. b. Manufacturer’s detailed specifications and data sheets to fully describe equipment furnished. c. All deviations from the Drawings and Specifications, noted on the submittals. Failure to comply will automatically void any implied approval for use of the equipment on this project. C. Installation Drawings: 1. Submit prior to starting installation. 2. Documentation of existing circuits and loads as described on construction documents. 3. Proposed circuiting adjustments, if applicable, as described on construction documents. 4. Show all outlets, devices, terminal cabinets, conduits, wiring, and connections required for the complete system described. D. Record Drawings: 1. Keep record drawings up to date as the work progresses.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 2 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Show all changes, deviations, addendum items, change orders, corrections, and other variations from the Contract Drawings. 3. Keep record drawings at the jobsite and available for the Architect’s review. 4. At the completion of the work, incorporate all deviations from the installation drawings to indicate “as-built” conditions. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. As specified in Division 01, General Requirements. 2. Provide a separate manual or chapter for each system as follows: a. Low Voltage Distribution System b. Emergency Power System c. Standby Power System d. Fire Alarm System e. Lighting System f. Lighting Control System 3. Description of system. 4. Operating Sequence and Procedures: a. Step-by-step procedure for system start-up, including a pre-start checklist. 1) Refer to controls and indicators by nomenclature consistent with that used on panels and in control diagrams. b. Detailed instruction in proper sequence, for each mode of operation (i.e., day-night, staging of equipment). c. Emergency Operation: 1) If some functions of the equipment can be operated while other functions are disabled, give instructions for operations under those conditions. 2) Include here only those alternate methods of operations (from normal) which the operator can follow when there is a partial failure or malfunctioning of components or other unusual condition. d. Shutdown Procedure: 1) Include instructions for stopping and securing the equipment after operation. 2) If a particular sequence is required, give step-by-step instructions in that order. 5. Preventive Maintenance: a. Schedule for preventive maintenance. 1) State the recommended frequency of performance of each preventive maintenance task such as cleaning, inspection, and scheduled overhauls. b. Cleaning: Provide instructions and schedules for all routine cleaning and inspection with recommended lubricants. c. Inspection: If periodic inspection of equipment is required for operation, cleaning, or other reasons, indicate the items to be inspected and give the inspection criteria. d. Provide instructions for lubrication and adjustments required for preventive maintenance routines. Identify test points and given values for each. 6. Manufacturer’s Brochures: a. Include manufacturer’s descriptive literature covering devices and equipment used in the system, together with illustrations, exploded views, and renewal parts lists. b. Edit manufacturer’s standard brochures so that the information applying to the actual installed equipment is clearly defined. 7. Results of performance testing, as specified in Part 3 of This Section. F. Submittals Procedures: 1. Review and recommendations by the Architect or Engineer are not to be construed as change authorizations. 2. If discrepancies are discovered between the materials or equipment submitted, and the Contract Documents, either prior to or after the data is processed, the Contract Documents govern.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 3 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

1.06 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Provide 2D model in the following format: 1. AutoCAD 2. PDF B. Provide record drawings in hard copy and PDF format. 1. Drawings include the following: a. Project specific titleblock. b. Notations reflecting the as built conditions of any additions to or variations from the construction documents provided as part of the BIM coordination, RFIs, ASIs, Owner Changes, and Field Coordination. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. All products and equipment shall comply with Oregon Revised Statute (ORS) 453.005(7)(e) prohibiting pentabrominated, octabrominated and decabrominated diphenyl ethers. Where products or equipment within this specification contain these banned substances, provide complying products and equipment from approved manufacturers with equal performance characteristics. 2. Provide work and materials conforming to: a. Local and State Codes b. Federal and State Laws and Regulations c. Other Applicable Laws and Regulations 3. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspection certificates required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Pay any other fees required by governing authorities for work of this Division. B. Install only electrical products listed by a recognized testing laboratory, or approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by governing codes and ordinances. 1.08 SITE VISITATION A. The Contractor shall visit the site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions and all other factors which may affect the execution of the work. Coordination of installation of equipment with prior bid packages previously issued shall be completed. Include all related costs in the initial bid proposal. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work of This Division with all other trades to ensure proper installation of electrical equipment. 1. Review Drawings of other trades or crafts to avoid conflicts with cabinets, counters, equipment, structural members, and other possible impediments to electrical work. 2. Report potential conflicts to Architect prior to rough-in. 3. Proceed with rough-in following Architect’s directives to resolve conflicts. 4. In general, the Architectural Drawings govern. B. Verify the physical dimension of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space. Contractor’s responsibility includes: 1. Coordination of the equipment to fit into the available space. 2. Access routes through the construction. C. Layout Drawings: 1. Equipment arrangement shown on Drawings is diagrammatic to indicate general equipment sizing and spatial relationship. Contractor shall include, as part of distribution equipment submittal, a scaled floor plan which includes all equipment shown with their submitted sizes. Include all feeder conduit routing, both above-ground and underground, including termination points at equipment. Submit for Engineer’s review prior to commencing work. 2. Provide additional wiring details at switchboards, motor control centers, and other areas where work is of sufficient complexity to warrant additional detailing for coordination.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 4 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3. Submit layout drawings for approval prior to commencing field installation. D. Where electrical connections are required for equipment provided as Work of other Divisions, coordinate rough-in and wiring requirements for that equipment with its supplier and installer prior to commencing work. Notify Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between the actual rough-in and wiring requirements, and those identified on Drawings for resolution prior to installation. E. Arrange raceways, wiring, and equipment to permit ready access to switches, motors, and control components. 1. Doors and access panels shall be kept clear. F. Coordinate electrical, telephone, and other utility services with the appropriate serving utility. 1. No additional compensation will be allowed the Contractor for connection fees or additional work or equipment required by the serving utility, but not covered in the Drawings or Specifications. G. Coordinate underground work with other contractors working on the site. 1. Coordinate particularly with contractors installing storm sewer, sanitary sewer, water, and irrigation lines to avoid conflicts. 2. Common trenches may be used with other trades, providing clearances required by codes and ordinances are maintained. H. Coordinated Shop Drawings: 1. Prepare in three-dimensional format. 2. Include but are not limited to: a. Superplot plans of above ground work with a colored overlay of all trades including, but not limited to, HVAC piping, HVAC equipment, plumbing piping and equipment, sprinklers, lighting, lighting controls, cable tray, fire alarm devices, electrical power conduit, and ceiling system to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-inch scale. b. Superplot plans of below ground work with a colored overlay of all trades including, but not limited to, structural footings and foundation, HVAC piping, civil piping, plumbing piping, and power conduit to a minimum of 1/2-inch equals 1-inch scale. c. Beam penetration drawings indicating beam penetrations meeting the requirements indicated on the floor plans and on the structural drawings to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-inch scale. d. Slab penetration drawings of HVAC, plumbing, sprinklers, lighting and electrical to a minimum of 1/4-inch equals 1-inch scale. e. Fabrication drawings of radiant ceiling panels, architectural metal ceiling, including panel penetrations for lighting, sprinkler heads, fire alarm devices, and any other penetrations. 1.10 CHANGE ORDERS A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied with a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials. At the Architect’s request, Contractor’s estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. Labor shall be separated and allocated for each item of work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty covering the work of this Division as required by the General Conditions. 1. Incandescent lamps are excluded from this warranty. B. Apparatus: 1. Free of defects of material and workmanship and in accord with the Contract Documents. 2. Built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. 3. Operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. C. Include in Contractor’s warranty for Work of Division 26 system damage caused by failures of any system component.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 5 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

1.12 ALTERNATES A. Comply with Division 01, General Requirements. B. Refer to Electrical Drawings for detailed information relating to the appropriate alternates. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Where specified materials or methods conflict with applicable codes, the more stringent requirement applies. B. Provide apparatus built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. C. Ensure that entire electrical system operates at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. D. Materials and Equipment: 1. Use materials and equipment that are: a. New b. Quality meeting or exceeding specified standards. c. Free of faults and defects. d. Conforming to Contract Documents. e. Of size, make, type, and quality specified. f. Suitable for the installation indicated. g. Manufactured in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, UL, or other applicable standards. h. Otherwise as specified in Division 01, General Requirements Section, “Product Requirements”. 2. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. 3. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use products of the same manufacturer. a. Component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. 4. Basis of Design: a. Equipment scheduled or specified by performance or model number shall be considered the Basis of Design. b. If other equipment is provided in lieu of the Basis of Design equipment, assume responsibility for all changes and costs which may be necessary to accommodate this equipment, including, but not limited to: 1) Different sizes and locations for connections. 2) Different dimensions. 3) Different access requirements. 4) Any other differences. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide a complete properly operating system for each item of equipment specified. 2. Install materials in a neat and professional manner. 3. Comply with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions, the best industry practices, and the Contract Documents. 4. Comply with latest published NECA Standard of Installation, and provide competent supervision. B. Clarification: 1. Where there is a conflict among manufacturer’s instruction, best practice, and the Documents, request clarification from the Architect prior to rough-in. 2. Architect’s decision will be final.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 6 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3. Work installed without clarification shall be removed and corrected by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. C. Existing concrete, block or brick walls are considered not accessible and may require use of Surface Mounted Raceway (SMR) if existing concealed raceway and device boxes are not available for reuse or do not meet the intent of the design (i.e. proximity to egress path, point of use, etc.). Coordinate route and installation where SMR is required with the Architect/Engineer prior to rough-in. The contractor will be responsible for reinstalling SMR routed without such prior approval to the Architects satisfaction. D. Existing stud walls (wood or metal) with or without blocking with plaster, plasterboard or paneling finish are considered accessible with accessible ceiling, attic, tunnel, or crawl space above, below, or adjacent. Remove, patch, and repair finished surface as required to conceal rough-in for new device locations. If it is determined that a specific instance will not permit concealment of rough-in due to obstructions such as beams, headers, and other structural elements prior approval before rough-in from the Architect is required. 3.02 INSTALLATION IN RATED CONSTRUCTION A. Firestopping is required at ducts, conduits, and other electrical elements penetrating fire-rated construction assemblies. B. Comply with firestop materials manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent spread of smoke or fire through sleeves or block-outs penetrating rated fire barriers. C. Provide firestop materials specified in Division 07, and as follows: 1. Capable of passing a 3-hour test per ASTM E-814 (UL 1479). 2. Consisting of material capable of expanding nominally eight times when exposed to temperatures of 250 degrees F-350 degrees FF. 3. An alternate method utilizing intumescent materials in caulk or putty complying with Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection Section, “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems” may be used. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Perform all necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of electrical work in compliance with Division 31, Earthwork. B. For direct burial cable or non-metallic conduit, a minimum 3-inch cover of sand or clean earth fill shall be placed all around the cable or conduit on a leveled trench bottom. Lay all steel conduit on a smooth level trench bottom, so that contact is made for its entire length. Water shall be removed from trench while electrical conduit is being laid. C. Place backfill in layers not exceeding 8 inches deep and compact to 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture to preclude settlement. 1. Interior: Bank sand or pea gravel. 2. Exterior: Excavated material with final 8 inches clean soil. D. Following backfilling, grade all trenches to the level of surrounding soil. All excess soil shall be disposed of at the site as directed. E. Provide 6 inches wide vinyl tape marked "ELECTRICAL" in backfill, 12 inches below finished grade, above all high voltage cable or conduit runs. F. Coordinate patching of all asphalt or concrete surfaces disturbed by this work with General Contractor. 3.04 NOISE CONTROL A. Minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces. B. Outlet Boxes: 1. Do not install outlet boxes on opposite sides of partitions back to back. 2. Do not use straight through outlet boxes, except where indicated.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 7 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Conduit: 1. Route conduit along corridors or other “noncritical” space to minimize penetrations through sound rated walls, or through non-sound-rated partitions between occupied spaces. 2. Grout solid and airtight all penetrations through sound rated partitions. 3. Use flexible connections or attachments between independent wall structures. a. Do not rigidly connect (i.e., bridge) independent wall structures. D. Do not install contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise-producing devices on walls that are common to occupied spaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where such devices are indicated to be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, use shock mounts, or otherwise isolate them to prevent the transmission of noise to the occupied spaces. E. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced. 3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. General: 1. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental wiring, materials, devices, and labor necessary for a finished working installation. 2. Verify the location and method for connecting to each item of equipment prior to roughing- in. 3. Check the amperage, maximum overcurrent protection, voltage, phase and similar attributes of each item of equipment before rough-in and connection. B. Motor Connections: 1. Make motor connections for the proper direction of rotation. 2. Minimum Size Flex for Mechanical Equipment: 1/2-inch; except at small control devices where 3/8-inch flex may be used. 3. Exposed Motor Wiring: Jacketed metallic flex with minimum 6 inches slack loop. 4. Do not test run pump motors until liquid is in the system. C. Control devices and wiring relating to the HVAC systems are furnished and installed under Division 23; except for provisions or items indicated in Division 26 Drawings and Specifications. 3.06 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. Minimum Support Capacity: 1. Provide fastening devices and supports for electrical equipment, luminaires, panels, outlets, and cabinets capable of supporting not less than four times the ultimate weight of the object or objects fastened to or suspended from the building structure. B. Luminaire Supports: 1. Support luminaires from the building structure. 2. Use supports that provide proper alignment and leveling of luminaires. 3. Where permitted at exposed luminaires, install flexible connections neat and straight, without excess slack, and attached to the support device. C. Support all junction boxes, pull boxes, or other conduit terminating housings located above the suspended ceiling from the floor above, roof, or penthouse floor structure to prevent sagging or swaying. D. Conduits: 1. Support suspended conduits 1-inch and larger from the overhead structural system with metal ring or trapeze hangers and threaded steel rod having a safety factor of four. 2. Conduits smaller than one 1-inch installed in ceiling cavities, may be supported on the mechanical system supports when available space and support capacity has been coordinated with the subcontractor installing the supports. 3. Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing with No. 14 black iron wire.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 8 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

E. Powder actuated or similar shot-in fastening devices will not be permitted for any electrical work except by special permission from the Architect. 3.07 ACCESS DOORS A. Location and size of access doors is Work of Division 26, Electrical. B. Furnishing and installation of access doors is work of Division 08 Section, Access Doors and Frames. 3.08 ALIGNMENT A. Install panels, cabinets, and equipment level and plumb, parallel with structural building lines. B. Install distribution equipment and all electrical enclosures fitted neatly, without gaps, openings, or distortion. C. Properly and neatly close all unused openings with approved devices. D. Fit surface panels, devices, and outlets with neat, appropriate, trims, plates, or covers without overhanging edges, protruding corners, or raw edges. 3.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: 1. Comply with Division 01, General Requirements. 2. Restore to original condition new or existing work cut or damaged by installation, testing, and removal of electrical Work. 3. Patch and finish spaces around conduits passing through floors and walls to match the adjacent construction, including painting or other finishes. 4. Clean up and remove all dirt and debris. B. Make additional required openings by drilling or cutting. Use of jackhammer is prohibited. C. Fill holes that are cut oversize so that a tight fit is obtained around the objects passing through. 1. In rated construction, comply with Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. D. Obtain Architect’s permission and direction prior to piercing beams or columns. E. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, walks, and other permanent site improvements, repair and refinish surfaces to condition existing prior to commencement of work. 3.10 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect all electrical work and equipment installed under this Division against damage by other trades, weather conditions, or any other causes. 1. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective. B. Keep switchgear, transformers, panels, luminaires, and all electrical equipment covered or closed to exclude dust, dirt, and splashes of plaster, cement, paint, or other construction material spray. 1. Equipment not free of all such contamination is not acceptable. C. Provide enclosures and trims in new condition, free of rust, scratches, and other finish defects. 1. If damaged, properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.11 UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE A. Maintain electrical service to all functioning portions of the building throughout construction. B. Pre-arrange with Owner outages necessary for new construction. 1. Comply with Division 01, General Requirements. 2. Apply for scheduled shut-downs minimum 4 weeks prior to time needed and reconfirm a minimum of 72 hours prior to time needed. 3. Contractor is liable for any damages resulting from unscheduled outages or for those not confined to the pre-arranged times. Damages include costs incurred by the Owner and by the Owner’s tenants. C. Maintain signal and communication systems and equipment in operation at all times. 1. Outages of these systems shall be treated the same as electrical power outages.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 9 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

D. Maintain telephone services in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements. 3.12 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE A. General: 1. Remove or relocate all electrical wiring, equipment, luminaires, etc., as may be encountered in removed or remodeled areas in the existing construction affected by this work. 2. Disconnect electrical service to hard wired equipment scheduled for removal under other Divisions of Work. 3. Wiring which serves usable existing outlets shall be restored and routed clear of the construction or demolition. 4. Safely cut off and terminate all wiring to be abandoned and remove to leave site clean. B. Reuse of existing: 1. Existing concealed conduits in good condition may be reused for installation of new wiring where available. 2. Existing undamaged, properly supported surface conduits may be reused where surface conduits are called for, if the installation meets all workmanship requirements of the Specifications. 3. Where new wiring is added or existing wiring disturbed in existing branch circuit raceways, all existing wires shall be replaced with new. C. Salvage and Disposal: 1. Removed materials, not containing hazardous waste, not scheduled for reuse shall become the property of the Contractor for removal from the site, except for those items specifically indicated on the Demolition Drawings for salvage or reuse. 2. Materials containing, or possibly containing, hazardous waste shall be identified for removal and disposal by the Owner’s Hazardous Waste Contractor. 3. Neatly store salvaged items at one location at the site where directed by the Owner’s Representative. 4. Salvage properly operating circuit breakers from panels scheduled for removal and use to replace faulty or inadequate breakers in existing panels scheduled to remain. 3.13 WIRING IN PRECAST CONSTRUCTION A. Coordinate installation of electrical conduit, boxes, fittings, anchors, and miscellaneous items to be concealed in precast concrete assemblies with the General Contractor. B. Where electrical items are required to be installed in concrete assemblies precast off-site, it will be the Electrical Contractor’s responsibility to place the electrical items necessary in the concrete at the off-site locations or pay for the General Contractor to make arrangements for the installation of these items in the precast assemblies. The Electrical Contractor will be held responsible for the proper placement and locations of electrical items at the off-site location. 3.14 COMPLETION AND TESTING A. General: 1. Comply with Division 01, General Requirements. B. Upon completion, test systems to show that installed equipment operates as designed and specified, free of faults and unintentional grounds. 1. Schedule system tests so that several occur on the same day. 2. Coordinate testing schedule with construction phasing. 3. Conduct tests in the presence of the Architect or its representative. 4. Notify Architect of tests 48 hours in advance. C. Engage a journeyman electrician with required tools to conduct equipment tests. Arrange to have the equipment factory representative present for those test where the manufacturer’s warranty could be impacted by the absence of a factory representative. D. Perform tests per the requirements of each of the following systems: 1. Low voltage distribution system.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 10 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Emergency power system. 3. Standby power system. 4. Fire alarm system. 5. Lighting system. 6. Lighting control system. E. Provide a written record of performance tests and submit with operation and maintenance data. 3.15 COMMISSIONING A. Complete all phases of work so the system, equipment, and components can be checked out, started, calibrated, operationally tested, adjusted, balanced, functionally tested, and otherwise commissioned. Complete systems, including all subsystems, so they are fully functional. B. Perform commissioning as specified in Section 01 91 00, General Commissioning Requirements, the technical sections, and Section 26 08 00, Commissioning of Electrical Systems. 1. Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections, provide factory startup services for the following items of equipment: a. Transformers b. Primary Switchgear c. Secondary Switchgear d. Emergency Power Systems e. Electrical Distribution Systems f. Lighting Control Systems C. Participation in Commissioning: 1. Provide skilled technicians to checkout, startup, calibrate, and test systems, equipment, and components. 2. The Engineer reserves the right to judge the appropriateness and qualifications of the technicians relative to each item of equipment or system. D. Resolution of Deficiencies: 1. Corrective work shall be completed in a timely fashion to permit timely completion of the commissioning process. Experimentation to render system performance will be permitted. E. Verification and Documentation: 1. As each test is performed, the Contractor shall have the commissioning manager observe the physical responses of the system and compare them to the specified requirements to verify the test results. 2. Submit site observation reports for deficiencies in the system. 3. Record the result of individual checks or tests on the pre-approved checklist, test, and report form from the commissioning plan and submit results for review. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 00 - 11 Common Work Results for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Copper conductors. Indicated sizes shall be considered minimum for ampacities and voltage drop requirements. 2. Conductors for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer except as noted. 3. Deliver conductors to the job site in cartons, protective covers, or on reels. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 2. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 80, Electrical Testing 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. ASTM: American Society For Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM B 3 – Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. ASTM B 8 – Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. 3. ASTM B 33 – Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association: 1. S-95-658 – Non-shielded 0-2 kV Cables C. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers: 1. IEEE 383 – Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections. D. UL: Underwriters Laboratories: 1. UL 44 – Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL 83 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. 3. UL 1277 – Type TC Power and Control Tray Cable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for the following materials: 1. Single conductor 600-volt power and control conductors. 2. MC cable. B. Submittals of the following materials shall consist only of a listing of the manufacturer’s name and the applicable catalog numbers of the items to be utilized. 1. Connectors. 2. Branch circuit conductor splices. 3. Splices with compression fitting and heat-shrinkable insulator. C. Submit cable test data per testing requirements of Part 3.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 19 - 1 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors OSP Tenant Improvement and Cables 03 24 2017

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS – 600V A. Type: 1. Copper: No. 12 AWG minimum size unless noted otherwise. No. 12 and No. 10, solid or stranded, No. 8 or larger, Class B concentric or compressed stranded. 2. Aluminum shall be permitted for feeder sizes as indicated on the drawings. Compact stranded conductors, AA-8000 series electrical grade aluminum alloy. B. Insulation: 1. THHN/THWN-2 for conductors 6 AWG and smaller. 2. XHHW-2 for conductors 4 AWG and larger. C. Thru wiring in fluorescent luminaires shall be rated for 90 degree C minimum. D. Manufacturers: 1. General 2. Essex 3. Southwire 4. Or equivalent. 2.02 POWER LIMITED WIRING A. Copper, stranded or solid as recommended by the system manufacturer. B. Insulation shall be appropriate for the system and location used. 2.03 MC CABLE A. Sheath: Steel or Aluminum, of the interlocking metal type, continuous and close fitting. The sheath shall not be considered a current carrying or grounding conductor. B. Conductors: Solid copper, of the same ampacity as the conduit/wire system indicated for the specific location. Provide separate green insulated grounding conductors in circuits where an isolated ground is called for. 2.04 CONNECTORS – 600V AND BELOW A. Branch Circuit Conductor Splices: 1. Live spring type, Scotchlok, Ideal Wire Nut, Buchanan B-Cap, or 3M Series 560 self- stripping type. B. Cable Splices: Compression tool applied sleeves, Kearney, Burndy, or equivalent with 600V heat shrink insulation. Except where specifically indicated on the plans, all proposed splice locations shall be submitted for review by the Engineer. C. Terminator Lugs for Stranded Wire: 1. 10 AWG Wire and Smaller: Spade flared, tool applied. 2. 8 AWG Wire and Larger: Compression tool applied, Burndy, Anderson, or equivalent. 3. Setscrew type terminator lugs furnished as an integral part of switches and circuit breakers will be acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTORS A. Pulling compounds may be used for pulling all conductors. Clean residue from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made. B. Pulleys or Blocks: 1. Use for alignment of the conductors when pulling. 2. Pulling in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications regarding pulling tensions, bending radii of the cable, and compounds.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 19 - 2 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors OSP Tenant Improvement and Cables 03 24 2017

C. Make up and insulate wiring promptly after installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled in until all bushings are installed and raceways terminations are completed. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit embedded in concrete until after the concrete is poured and forms are stripped. D. Provide a dedicated neutral conductor with each branch circuit, do not use a shared neutral conductor between phases unless specifically requested or directed. 3.02 MC CABLE A. MC cable is allowed only where concealed within wall or ceiling cavities. B. MC cable shall not be used for branch circuit homeruns to branch panelboards. C. EMT or RMC conduit shall be utilized for all branch circuit homeruns to branch panelboards. 3.03 CONNECTORS A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool applied spade flared lug when terminating at a screw connection. B. All screw and bolt type connectors shall be made up tight and retightened after an eight hour period. C. All tool applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer’s recommendations and physically checked for tightness. 3.04 COLOR CODING A. Secondary service, feeders, and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A-B-C left-to-right, A-B-C top-to-bottom, or A-B- C front-to-back. Color code shall be as follows: 120/240 volt 480 volt 208Y/120 volt Phase 480Y/277 volt Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray* Green Ground** Green * or white with colored (other than green) tracer **Ground for isolated ground receptacles shall be green with yellow tracer. B. Use solid color compound or solid color coating for No. 12 and No. 10 branch circuit conductors and neutral sizes. C. Phase conductors No. 8 and larger color code using one of the following: 1. Solid color compound or solid color coating. 2. Stripes, bands, or hash marks of color specified above. 3. Colored as specified using 3/4-inch wide tape. Apply tape in half overlapping turns for a minimum of three inches for terminal points and in junction boxes, pull boxes, troughs, manholes, and handholes. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Where cable markings are covered by tape, apply tags to cable stating size and insulation type. D. Switchlegs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the phases to which connected or a color distinctive from that listed. E. Color-coding of the flexible wiring system conductors and connectors shall be the manufacturer’s standard. F. For modifications and additions to existing wiring systems, color-coding shall conform to the existing wiring system.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 19 - 3 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors OSP Tenant Improvement and Cables 03 24 2017

3.05 FIELD TESTING A. All 600-volt rated conductors shall be tested by the Contractor for continuity. Conductors 100A and over in size shall be meggered after installation and prior to termination. Provide the megger, rated 1,000 volts DC, and record and maintain the results, in tabular form, clearly identifying each conductor being tested. 1. Replace cables when test value is less than 15 megohms. 2. Cable test submittal shall include results, equipment used, and date. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 19 - 4 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors OSP Tenant Improvement and Cables 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Provide complete ground systems as indicated. Include conduit system and miscellaneous grounds required. 2. Provide an insulated ground conductor in every conduit or raceway containing power conductors. 3. Continue existing system as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 80, Electrical Testing 4. Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices 5. Section 26 29 00, Motor Controllers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Green insulated copper for use in conduits, raceways, and enclosures. B. Bare copper for ground grids and grounding electrode systems. 2.02 CONNECTORS A. Cast, set screw or bolted type. B. Form poured, exothermic welds. C. Grounding lugs where provided as standard manufacturer’s items on equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Sized in accordance with Article 250, Tables 250.66 and 250.122 of the National Electrical Code. B. Grounding Conductor Connectors: Made up tight and located for future servicing and to insure low impedance. C. Ground the electrical system, the cold-water service, structural steel, and transformers to the building ground grid. D. Plug-in Receptacles: Bonded to the boxes, raceways, and grounding conductor. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. Provide separate green insulated equipment ground conductor in all non-metallic and flexible electrical raceways. Effectively ground all luminaires, panels, controls, motors, disconnect switches, exterior lighting standards, and noncurrent carrying metallic enclosures. Use bonding jumpers, grounding bushings, lugs, buses, etc., for this purpose.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 26 - 1 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement Systems 03 24 2017

B. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances to panels and equipment enclosures and bond bushings to enclosures with minimum 10 AWG conductor. Connect the equipment ground to the building system ground. Use the same size equipment ground conductors as phase conductors, up through 10 AWG. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 26 - 2 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement Systems 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section describes supporting devices for electrical equipment, associated conduit, and cable. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 2. Section 26 05 36, Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 50 00, Lighting 1.03 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. International Building Code (IBC) B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Hangers: Kindorf B-905-2A Channel, H-119-D washer, C105 strap, minimum 1/2-inch rod with ceiling flange, or equal. B. Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron. C. Support of Open Cabling: Label NRTL for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 3. Straps and other devices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide electrical equipment supports. B. Install vertical support members for equipment, straight and parallel to building walls. C. Provide independent supports to structural member for electrical fixtures, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls, or in void spaces and/or over furred or suspended ceilings. D. Do not use other trades’ fastening devices to support electrical equipment materials or fixtures. E. Do not use supports and/or fastening devices to support other than one particular item. F. Support conduits within 18-inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets, and deflections. G. Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the vertical and lateral restraint of conduit, cable trays, bus ducts, and electrical equipment as required by IBC Chapter 6 16 and the most recent version of the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual for Seismic Hazard Level (SHL) A. Submit shop drawings of bracing systems to the Architect for review and bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State of Oregon.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 29 - 1 Hangers and Supports for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement Systems 03 24 2017

3.02 LUMINAIRES A. Light-Duty Ceiling Systems: 1. Attach 12 gauge hanger wire from each corner of the luminaire to the structure above. 2. Positively and securely, attach luminaire within 6-inches of each corner to the suspended ceiling-framing member by mechanical means. B. Intermediate-Duty Ceiling Systems: 1. Positively and securely, attach luminaire within 6-inches of each corner to the suspended ceiling-framing member by mechanical means. 2. Attach 12 gauge hanger wire within 3-inches of each corner of each luminaire. 3. Connect two 12 gauge slack wires from the luminaire housing to the structure above for luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds. 4. Support luminaries weighing 56 pounds or more directly from the structure above with approved hangers attached to each corner of the luminaire. C. Heavy-Duty Ceiling Systems: 1. Positively and securely, attach luminaire within 6 inches of each corner to the suspended ceiling-framing member by mechanical means. 2. Connect two 12-gauge slack wires from the luminaire housing to the structure above for luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds. 3. Support luminaries weighing 56 pounds or more directly from the structure above with approved hangers attached to each corner of the luminaire. 3.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Pull and junction boxes installed within the cavity of a suspended ceiling that is not a fire rated assembly may be attached to the suspended ceiling framing members, provided the following criteria are met: 1. Installation complies with the ceiling system manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Pull or junction box is not larger than 100 cubic inches. 3. Support to the main runner with two fastening devices designed for framing member application and positively attach or lock to the member. 4. Serves branch circuits and associated equipment in the area. 5. Pull or junction box is within 6-feet of the luminaires supplied. 6. Framing members are not rotated more than 2 degrees after installation. 7. Install within the cavity of a suspended ceiling may be attached to independent support wires, provided the following criteria are met: a. Independent support wires are taut and connected at both ends, one end to the ceiling framing member and the other to the structure above. b. No larger than 100 cubic inches. c. Secure to the independent support wires by two fastening devices designed for the application. d. Independent support wires in a fire-rated ceiling are distinguishable by color, tagging, or other effective means. 3.04 CABLES AND RACEWAY A. Cables and raceway installed within the cavity of a suspended ceiling may be attached to independent support wires provided the following criteria are met: 1. Independent support wires are taut and connected at both ends, one end to the ceiling framing member and the other to the structure above. 2. Raceways no larger than 1-inch trade size and cables and bundled cables are not larger than 1-inch diameter including insulation. 3. Not more than three raceways or cables supported by any independent support wire and supported within the top or bottom 12-inches. 4. Cables for telecommunications, data processing, Class 2 power-limited signaling systems, fiber optics, and other power limited systems are securely fastened within 2 feet of each termination and at intervals not to exceed 5-feet or per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 29 - 2 Hangers and Supports for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement Systems 03 24 2017

5. Secure raceways at intervals required for the type of raceway installed. 6. Secure cables and raceway to independent support wires by fastening devices and clips designed for the purpose. 7. Independent support wires are distinguishable by color, tagging, or other effective means. B. Cables and raceway installed within the cavity of a suspended ceiling may be supported with trapezes constructed of steel rods and channels provided the following criteria are met: 1. The size of the rods, channel, and fastening devices are suitable for the anticipated weight. 2. The spacing of the trapezes meets that required for the type of raceway installed. 3. Secure to a trapeze by straps designed for the purpose. 4. Cables and raceway do not support other raceway or cables. 5. An appropriately sized seismic bracing system is installed. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 29 - 3 Hangers and Supports for Electrical OSP Tenant Improvement Systems 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Raceways and conduits of specified types for all electrical system wiring, except where clearly indicated otherwise. 2. All fittings, boxes, hangers, and appurtenances required for the conduits and raceways. 3. Size raceways and conduits as indicated. Where no size is indicated, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of conductors installed, based upon NEC tables for conductors with type THW insulation. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METALLIC CONDUITS A. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): 1. Smooth surfaced heavy wall mild steel tube of uniform thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each end and protected inside and out with galvanizing, sherardizing, or equivalent process. 2. Comply with NEC Article 344. B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC): 1. Smooth surface, intermediate wall mild steel tube of uniform thickness and temper, reamed and threaded at each end, and protected inside and out with galvanizing, sherardizing, or equivalent process. 2. Comply with NEC Article 342. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Smooth surface, thin wall mild steel tube of uniform thickness and temper, galvanized or sherardized on the outside, and enameled on the interior. 2. Comply with NEC Article 358. D. Flexible Conduits (Flex): 1. Flexible Metallic Conduit: a. Interlocking single strip steel construction, galvanized inside and out after fabrication. b. Comply with NEC Article 348. 2. Liquid Tight: a. Similar to flexible metallic conduit, except encased in a liquid tight polyvinylchloride or equivalent outer jacket over the flexible steel core. b. Comply with NEC Article 350.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 33 - 1 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.02 NON-METALLIC CONDUITS A. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: 1. Type II PVC Schedule 40 or 80, suitable for use with 90 degree C rated wire. Conduit shall conform to UL Standard 65l and carry appropriate UL listing for above and below ground use. 2.03 WIREWAYS A. Troughs: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knock-outs on standard spacing, screw cover. B. Fittings: Tees, elbows, couplings as required for configuration shown on the Drawings. 2.04 FITTINGS A. RMC and IMC: 1. Threaded Locknuts: Sealing type where used with NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4, and 12 enclosures. 2. Threaded Bushings: 1-1/4-inch and larger, insulated, grounding type as required under Section 26 05 26. 3. Threaded Couplings: Standard threaded of the same material and as furnished with conduit supplied. Erickson type couplings may be used where required to complete conduit runs larger than 1 inch. B. EMT: 1. Connectors: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type for conduit termination, with insulated throat, suitable for conditions used. Use lay-in grounding type bushings where terminating grounding conductors. 2. Couplings: Steel compression ring or steel set screw type, concrete tight. C. Threadless: RMC and IMC couplings and box connectors may be steel threadless, compression ring or set screw type for use with conduits one (1) inch and smaller where installed in poured concrete locations or where limited working space makes threaded fittings impractical. D. Weatherproof Connectors: Threaded. E. Expansion Couplings: Equivalent to O.Z. type EX with jumper. F. Seal-Offs: With filler fiber, compound, and removable cover. 2.05 METALLIC BOXES A. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears for device ring mounting, knock-out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required, RACO or equivalent. B. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings; cast steel or aluminum with threaded hubs or bosses for use on walls. C. Large Boxes: 1. Boxes exceeding 4-11/16-inches square when required shall be welded steel construction with screw cover and painted, steel gauge as required by physical size. 2. Manufacturers: a. Hoffman b. Circle AW c. Or equivalent. D. Systems: Boxes for systems devices shall be as recommended by the systems manufacturer, suitable for the equipment installed. Equip with grounding lugs, brackets, device rings, etc., as required.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 33 - 2 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.06 FLOOR BOXES, TABLE BOXES, POKE-THROUGHS, AND FURNITURE FEEDS. A. PK-1 Poke-Through: 1. Flush fire-rated poke-through power, data and communications floor device. Nominal 9.25- inch diameter trim flange, 8-inch diameter core, 3/4-inch service conduits and power junction box. 2-hour UL listed assembly suitable for use with concrete, tile or carpet floor finishes, 2. Hinged aluminum cover. 3. All brass cover. 4. One or two pre-wired 20A duplex receptacles as indicated on plans. 5. Legrand 8AT series or equal. B. PK-2 Poke-Through: Flush fire-rated poke-through power, data and communications floor device. Nominal 7.5-inch diameter trim flange, 6-inch diameter core, 3/4-inch service conduits and power junction box. 2- hour UL listed assembly suitable for use with concrete, tile, stone or carpet floor finishes. 1. Hinged brass cover. 2. All brass cover. 3. One pre-wired 20A duplex receptacle. 4. Hubbell SystemOne series or equal. C. PK-3 Poke-Through: Flush fire-rated poke-through power floor device. Nominal 7-inch diameter trim flange, 3-inch diameter core, 3/4-inch service conduit and power junction box. 2-hour UL listed assembly suitable for use with concrete, tile, or carpet floor finishes, 1. Hinged, flush all-brass cover with individual receptacle covers. 2. One pre-wired 20A duplex receptacle. 3. Hubbell FRPT or equal. 2.07 NON-METALLIC BOXES A. PVC, molded enclosures, threaded hubs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conceal all conduits in finished spaces. Concealed conduits shall run in a direct line with long sweep bends and offsets. RMC and IMC embedded in concrete below grade or in damp locations shall be made watertight by painting the entire male thread with Rustoleum metal primer or equivalent before assembly. B. Route exposed conduit parallel or at right angles to structural building lines and neatly offset into boxes. Conduits attached directly to building surfaces shall closely follow the surfaces. Conduit fittings shall be used to “saddle” under beams. Drilling or notching of existing beams, trusses on structural members shall be coordinated with Architect prior to commencing. C. RMC and IMC terminations at boxes, cabinets, and general wiring enclosures shall be rigidly secured with double locknuts and bushings or approved fittings. Conduit shall be screwed in and shall engage at least five threads in hub where conduit boxes with threaded hubs or bosses are used. Insulating bushings shall be used for conduits 1-1/4 inches or larger. D. Keep conduit and raceways closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete, or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance. E. Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with polyurethane caulking to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are installed in sleeves or block-outs penetrating moisture barriers. F. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 33 - 3 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.02 CONDUIT A. RMC: 1. RMC may be used in all areas for all wiring systems. 2. RMC shall be installed for all exposed runs of medium voltage circuits outside of the electrical rooms. 3. RMC shall be installed where subject to mechanical injury. 4. RMC shall be installed with threaded fittings made up tight. B. IMC: 1. IMC may be used for all medium voltage circuits where concealed or where exposed in the electrical rooms. 2. IMC may also be used for all circuits rated 600V and less where not in contact with earth or fill. 3. IMC shall be installed with threaded fittings made up tight. C. EMT: 1. EMT may be used in all other dry protected locations for circuits rated 600V and less. 2. EMT, whether exposed or concealed, shall be securely supported and fastened at intervals of nominally every 8 feet and within 24 inches of each outlet, ell, fitting, panel, etc. D. Flex: 1. Flex shall be used for connections to vibration producing equipment and where installation flexibility is required with a minimum 12 inches slack connection. 2. Limit flex length to 36 inches for exposed equipment connections and 72 inches in concealed ceiling and wall cavities. 3. PVC jacketed flex shall be used in wet locations, areas subject to washdown, and exterior locations. E. PVC: 1. Type II Schedule 40 and 80 PVC may be used underground and in and under interior slabs, poured concrete walls, and where scheduled or noted on the Drawings. 2. Make connections with waterproof solvent cement. 3. Provide RMC at 60 degree and larger bends and where penetrating slabs. 3.03 RACEWAYS A. Surface metal wireways may be installed at locations to serve motor starters or other control devices where required by a multitude of wiring interconnections or physical layout. 3.04 FITTINGS A. Metallic raceways and conduits shall be assembled continuous and secured to boxes, panels, etc., with appropriate fittings to maintain electrical continuity. All conduit joints shall be cut square and reamed smooth with all fittings drawn up tight. B. Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type, malleable iron or cast set screw fittings shall not be used. 3.05 BOXES A. General: 1. Outlet boxes shall be of code required size to accommodate all wires, fittings, and devices. 2. Provide multi-gang boxes as required to accept devices installed with no more than one device per gang. 3. Equip all metallic boxes with grounding provisions. B. Size and Type: 1. Flush wall switch and receptacle outlets used with conduit systems shall be 4 inches square, 1-1/2 inches or more deep, with one or two-gang plaster ring, mounted vertically. Where three or more devices are at one location, use one piece multiple gang tile box or gang box with suitable device ring.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 33 - 4 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Wall bracket and ceiling surface mounted luminaire outlets shall be 4-inch octagon 1-1/2 inches deep with 3/8-inch fixture stud where required. Wall bracket outlets shall have single gang opening where required to accommodate luminaire canopy. Provide larger boxes or extension rings where quantity of wires installed requires more cubic capacity. 3. Junction boxes installed in accessible ceiling or wall cavities or exposed in utility areas shall be a minimum of 4 inches square, 1-1/2 inches deep with appropriately marked blank cover. 4. Boxes for the special systems shall be suitable for the equipment installed. Coordinate size and type with the system supplier. C. Pull Boxes: 1. Provide pull boxes where shown for installation of cable supports or where required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90-degree bends. 2. Use galvanized boxes of code-required size with removable covers installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed. D. Installation: 1. Boxes and outlets shall be mounted at nominal centerline heights shown on the drawings. 2. Adjust heights in concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls to prevent devices or finish plates from spanning masonry joints. 3. Recessed boxes shall be flush with finished surfaces or not more than 1/8-inch back and be level and plumb. Long screws with spacers or shims for mounting devices will not be acceptable. No combustible material shall be exposed to wiring at outlets. 4. Covers for flush mounted boxes in finished spaces shall extend a minimum of 1/4-inch beyond the box edge to provide a finished appearance. Finish edge of cover to match cover face. 5. Boxes installed attached to a stud in sheet rock walls shall be equipped with opposite side box supports equivalent to Caddy #760. Install drywall screw prior to finish taping. Methods used to attach boxes to studs shall not cause projections on the face of the stud to prevent full-length contact of sheet rock to the stud face. 3.06 PULL WIRES A. Install nylon pull lines in all empty conduits larger than 1-inch where routing includes 25 feet or more in length or includes 180 degrees or more in bends. B. Where conduits requiring pull lines are stubbed out and capped, coil a minimum of 36 inches of pull line and tape at termination of conduit for easy future access. Label pull lines as to conduit starting or terminations point and intended future use. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 33 - 5 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Clearly and properly identify the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this scope of work. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices 4. Section 26 29 00, Motor Controllers 5. Section 26 50 00, Lighting 6. Section 28 30 01, Fire Detection and Communications PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LABELS A. Pre-printed: 1. Permanent material pre-printed with black on white, with adhesive backing. 2. Manufacturers: a. Brady b. 3M c. Or equivalent. B. Engraved Laminated Plastic: 1. 3-ply laminated plastic, colors indicated herein, with beveled edges, engraved letters and stainless steel screw attachment. 2. Nameplate length to suit engraving. 3. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable. C. Clear Plastic Tape: 1. Black (normal) or red (emergency or standby) 12-point Helvetica medium text, clear adhesive backing, field printed with proper equipment for device labeling. 2. Manufacturers: a. Brother P-Touch b. Dyno-tape c. Kroy d. Or equal. D. Wire Markers: White with black numbers, adhesive backed tape on dispenser roll, Brady, 3M or equivalent. E. Feeder Conduit Marking: 1. Provide one-piece snap-around vinyl feeder conduit markers for feeder conduits. 2. Provide custom label, black letters on orange background indicating destination equipment, 1.25-inch high letters (min) – Seton Setmark Pipe Marker Series. 3. Provide additional one-piece snap-around vinyl label, black letters on orange background for voltage designation (i.e., 277/480V, 120/208V). 4. Secure labels to conduits using plastic tie wrap, 2 per label. F. Marker Pen: Black permanent marker suitable for writing on metallic surfaces.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 53 - 1 Identification For Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Nameplate and text coloring: 1. Normal Black nameplate with white lettering. 2. Emergency Orange nameplate with black lettering. 3. Standby Yellow nameplate with black lettering. 4. UPS Blue nameplate with white lettering. 3.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Provide typewritten panel directories, with protective, clear transparent covers, accurately accounting for every breaker installed including spares. 1. Schedules shall use the actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work and not the space designation on the Drawings. Confirm final room designations with Architect and Owner prior to completion of work. 2. Each load description shall include a room or area designation whether indicated on the Drawings or not. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A. Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplate on the face of all disconnect switches, motor starters, relays, contactors, etc. indicating equipment served (e.g., AHU-1) and equipment load (e.g., 20HP). Provide additional engraved laminated plastic nameplate indicating serving panel designation and circuit number. B. Provide clear plastic tape label for all relays, contactors, time switches and miscellaneous equipment provided under this Division of work indicating equipment served. 3.04 FEEDER CONDUIT A. Provide feeder conduit marker for all electrical feeders. B. Markers shall be provided when exiting source equipment and located along the entire conduit length 20 feet on centers in exposed areas, above ceilings and upon entering or leaving an area or room. 3.05 DEVICES A. Label each receptacle plate with preprinted clear plastic tape indicating serving panel and circuit number (e.g., PANEL 2PA-5). Clean all oils, dirt and any foreign materials from plate prior to label application. Receptacles connected to a GFCI protected circuit downstream from the protecting device shall be so labeled. 3.06 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A. Label all pull boxes and junction boxes for systems with paint or marker pen on box cover identifying system. Where box covers are exposed in finished areas, label inside of cover. Covers shall be color labeled as follows: 480Y/277V wiring - orange; 208Y/120V wiring - black; fire alarm - red; communications - green; security - blue. B. Label each end of pull wires left in empty conduits with tags or tape indicating location of other end of wire. 3.07 SYSTEMS A. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors with each conductor identified throughout, using wraparound numbers or letters. Use the number or letters shown where the Drawings or operation and maintenance data indicate wiring identification. B. Label the fire alarm and communication equipment zones, controls, indicators, etc., with machine printed labels or indicators appropriate for the equipment installed as supplied or recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 53 - 2 Identification For Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.08 EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. Provide new nameplates and labels for existing distribution equipment in accordance with panel descriptions shown on the Drawings. Provide new labels for feeder devices where labels are non-existent, incorrect or confusing on existing distribution panels affected by this work. B. Equip existing branch circuit panelboards scheduled to remain with new, accurate, typed, circuit directories where circuiting changes are made. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 53 - 3 Identification For Electrical Systems OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Overcurrent protective device coordination study. 2. Arc flash hazard analysis, arc flash boundary calculations and equipment labeling. 3. Recommend device settings and equipment labeling. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 29 00, Motor Controllers 1.03 REFERENCES A. IEEE 141 Recommended practice for electrical power distribution and coordination of industrial and commercial power systems. B. IEEE 242 Recommended practice for protection and coordination of industrial and commercial power systems. C. IEEE 399 Recommended practice for industrial and commercial power system analysis. D. IEEE 1584 Guide for performing arc-flash hazard calculations. E. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, latest addition. F. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace, latest addition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Study B. Device Setting Recommendations PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ETI B. Electrical Systems Analysis C. Emerson D. Qualified engineers of the switchgear manufacturer. 2.02 STUDIES AND ANALYSIS A. Coordination Study: 1. When required: a. Coordination study shall be provided for any new overcurrent protection devices that do not match existing devices within the same equipment. b. Re-use of existing devices or new devices on the normal power distribution that match existing do not require coordination study. c. New overcurrent protection devices installed as part of the life safety (NEC 700) branch require coordination study regardless of existing conditions. 2. Provide a coordination study for the electrical overcurrent devices to assure proper equipment and personnel protection.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 73 - 1 Overcurrent Protective Device OSP Tenant Improvement Coordination Study 03 24 2017

3. Demonstrate selective coordination of the emergency system in conformance with National Electrical Code Section 700. Standby and optional standby systems on the load side of automatic transfer switches are required to coordinate with overcurrent protection devices on the line side of automatic transfer switches. 4. Bring to the attention of the Engineer devices that fail to selectively coordinate as required to meet code. 5. Provide alternative options and/or scenarios for devices that fail to coordinate and demonstrate methods/devices needed to selectively coordinate for the engineers review and acceptance. 6. The study shall present an organized time-current analysis of each protective device in series from the individual device back to the source. The study shall reflect the operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions. 7. The Contractor shall provide all pertinent information required by the preparers to complete the study. 8. The complete study shall include a system one-line diagram and protective coordination curves. a. The coordination curves shall determine the required settings of protective devices to assure selective coordination. The curves shall graphically illustrate on log paper that adequate time separation exists between series devices. Plot the specific time-current characteristics of each protective device so that all upstream devices are clearly depicted on one sheet. b. Time-current curves shall be developed for both phase and ground protective devices. c. The following specific information shall also be shown on the coordination curves: 1) Device identification. 2) Voltage and current ratio for curves. 3) 3-phase and 1-phase ANSI damage points for each transformer. 4) No-damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. 5) Cable damage curve. 6) Transformer inrush points. 7) Maximum short circuit cut-off point. 8) Motor starting locked rotor curves. 9) Clearly marked short circuit current levels through each protective device and branch. d. Develop a table that summarizes the settings selected for the protective devices. Included in the table shall be the following: 1) Device identification. 2) Circuit breaker sensor rating, long-time, short-time, instantaneous settings, and time bands. 3) Fuse rating and type. 4) Ground fault pickup and time delay. 5) Provide characteristic time-current curves for each adjustable overcurrent protective device showing pickup settings, time delay bands and device operating times. Include trip adjustment time dials and available settings corresponding to each characteristic time-current curve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SETTINGS AND ADJUSTMENT A. Set and adjust all breakers in the distribution system per the recommendations of the coordination study and settings table. B. Provide protective covers and locking devices on breakers to secure settings from accidental changes. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 73 - 2 Overcurrent Protective Device OSP Tenant Improvement Coordination Study 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 05 80 ELECTRICAL TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Perform field tests and operational checks to assure that all electrical equipment, both Contractor and Owner supplied, is operational within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications. 2. The tests and operational check shall determine the suitability for energization. 3. Schedule tests and give a minimum of one week’s advance notice of time and date to the Architect and Owner for any major systems tests specified in this Section. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 29 00, Motor Controllers 4. Section 28 30 01, Fire Detection and Communications 1.03 TESTING CRITERIA A. General: 1. The testing company shall provide the equipment and technical personnel to perform all tests and inspections. The contractor shall, at his expense, furnish any personnel necessary to assist in the testing and inspection. 2. When the tests and inspections have been completed, a label shall be attached to all devices tested. The label shall provide the name of the testing company, the date of the tests, and the initials of the Engineer who performed the tests. B. Responsibilities: 1. The Contractor shall clean the equipment, torque down all accessible bolts according to the equipment manufacturer’s instructions, perform routine insulation resistance tests on all branch and feeder circuits, continuity checks on all branch and control wiring, and rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment. The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of current plans and specifications to the testing company prior to commencement of any testing. At each test site, the Contractor shall provide any test control power necessary to perform the tests specified. The test organization shall be consulted as to the specific power requirements. The Contractor shall notify the testing organization when the equipment and systems are ready for their inspections and testing. After review by the testing engineer, the Contractor shall correct any deficiencies noted by the testing company. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for having the manufacturer of each equipment and/or system provide factory trained representatives(s) that will perform all required functional testing, checkout, and repairs in order to pronounce the equipment and/or systems meet the requirements of these specifications and Drawings and it is ready for startup testing and commissioning by the testing organization as specified hereafter. 3. The Engineer, in conjunction with the Utility, shall furnish settings of protective devices.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 80 - 1 Electrical Testing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

4. The testing organization shall notify the Engineer prior to the commencement of any testing. The testing organization shall set and adjust the protective devices and associated auxiliary timing devices in accordance with the values furnished by the Engineer. The testing organization shall maintain a written record of all tests and, upon completion of the test, include them in a final report. The report shall detail any deficiencies in the system material, workmanship, or design. C. Implementation: 1. Safety practices shall comply with applicable state and local safety orders, as well as with the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). Compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standard NFPA 70E, and the Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations of the National Safety Council shall be observed. 2. Tests, other than phase rotation and operational tests, shall only be performed on apparatus that is deenergized. The testing company’s lead test engineer for the project shall be a designated safety representative and shall supervise testing observations and safety requirements. Work shall not proceed until he had determined that it is safe to do so. 3. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hotline grounding device approved for the purpose. Warning signs and protective barriers shall be provided as necessary to conduct the tests safely. D. Reports: 1. General: Provide full documentation of all tests in the form of a report. 2. The test report shall include the following sections: a. Scope of testing. b. Equipment tested. c. Description of test. d. Test results. e. Conclusions and recommendations. f. Appendix, including test forms. 3. Each piece of equipment shall be recorded on a data sheet listing the condition of the equipment as found and as left. Included shall be recommendations for any necessary repair and/or replacement parts. The data sheets shall indicate the name of the engineer who tested the equipment and the date of the test completion. 4. Record copies of the completed test report shall be submitted no more than 30 days after completion of the testing and inspection. 1.04 REFERENCES A. The testing and inspection shall comply with all applicable sections of the applicable codes and standards listed in Section 26 05 00 of the project specifications. B. The inspection and testing shall comply with the project plans and specifications, as well as with the manufacturer’s drawings, instruction manuals, and other applicable data that may be provided by the Engineer, for the apparatus tested. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. The testing organization may be an independent division of the manufacturer of the assembled products being tested. If an outside testing organization is utilized, a representative of the manufacturer shall be under Contract by the testing company. He shall be present during all testing to ensure the testing is performed properly and that nay deficiencies discovered are promptly corrected. B. The testing organization shall be a full service company that employs factory trained test engineers capable of troubleshooting, as well as identifying power equipment problems. All work outlined shall be performed under the full time, on-site supervision of a graduate engineer with a minimum of 5 years of field testing experience. Upon request, the testing company shall submit proof of its qualifications.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 80 - 2 Electrical Testing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING EQUIPMENT A. The testing agency shall have a calibration program which maintains all applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. The accuracy shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards in an unbroken chain. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: 1. Field Instruments: 6 months maximum. 2. Laboratory Instruments: 12 months. 3. Leased Specialty Equipment: 12 months (where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor). Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT TO BE TESTED A. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: 1. For all circuits rated 400 Amperes or higher perform tests listed in the NETA 2007 Acceptance Testing Specifications for Low-Voltage Cables, section 7.3.2. B. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: 1. Perform tests listed in the NETA 2007 Acceptance Testing Specifications for Grounding Systems, section 7.13. C. Section 26 29 00, Motor Controllers D. Section 28 30 01, Fire Alarm and Communications: 1. Fire Alarm System: Perform tests listed in Section 28 30 01. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 05 80 - 3 Electrical Testing OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Section includes responsibilities and participation under Division 26 in the automatic dimming system installation and commissioning process. 2. Installation, connection, adjustment, and testing of the equipment. 3. Provide qualified personnel for participation in commissioning tests, including seasonal testing required after the initial commissioning. 4. Providing equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during the commission process which fulfill contract and warranty requirements. 5. Providing Operating and Maintenance Data and Record Drawings to the Test Engineer for verification, organization, and distribution. 6. Providing assistance to the Test Engineer to develop and edit descriptions of system operation. 7. Providing training for the systems specified in this Division with coordination by the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices 2. Section 26 50 00, Lighting 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System is provided to reduce electric energy consumption during daylight hours by reducing the light output of the electric lighting system in response to measured lighting levels provided by daylight within the building interior. B. Areas within daylit areas shall have full daylight integration with photocells and automatic dimming and/or switching ballasts. Dimming zones will correlate with the distribution of daylight within the space. C. Areas near exterior glazing shall use dimming ballasts and photocells for daylight harvesting and resultant energy conservation. 1. Daylight sensing equipment will be analog, full range type. 2. Photocells will measure lighting levels on an affected interior surface. Illumination contribution to this measured surface will include both daylighting and electric lighting (closed-loop system) to ensure proper lighting levels with maximum energy savings. 3. Logical zones of luminaires will be controlled independently for maximum energy savings while maintaining even task illumination across the entire area between zones. Refer to drawings for control groupings. 4. Time delay logic will be incorporated to prevent cycling due to clouds and other short-term influences to lighting levels. D. The control system shall accept indoor, skylight, and outdoor photo sensing heads. Photo sensing control shall permit the user to specify the actual footcandle level where desired switching shall occur.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 09 23 - 1 Lighting Control Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOCELLS A. The photoelectric device for the fluorescent dimming ballasts shall be a Class 2, low voltage ambient light sensor designed to connect via 18 gauge shielded cable with the electronic dimming ballast. The sensor shall have the following modes of operation: 1. Automatic dimming of indoor fluorescent lighting in response to the availability of natural daylight. The response range shall be between 0-500 footcandles with a fixed delay of at least 30 seconds. B. The sensor shall have a flat Fresnel lens with a cone of response to be determined by mock- up. Quantity and location of sensors shall be determined by mock-up. The wire aperture for both the interface circuit and the sensor shall be no greater than 3/8-inch outside diameter. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. The photoelectric sensor used to control the Dimming Electronic Ballast shall be a Wattstopper LS-301, or equivalent. 2. Other “or equivalent” Manufacturers and Products: Submit Substitution Request, complying with requirements of Section 00 16 30, Product Requirements. 2.02 BALLASTS A. All dimming ballasts to be of same manufacturer. B. All dimming ballast shall be compatible with specified photocells. C. See Section 26 50 00 for ballast product specification. 2.03 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING A. 18 gauge shielded cable or as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.04 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Provide multi-function digital Illuminance meter with detachable receptor head with the following characteristics: 1. Receptor: Silicon photocell type. 2. Illuminance Units: Lux or footcandles (switchable). 3. Measuring range: 0.1 to 19,990 lux, 0.01 to 1,999 footcandles. 4. Accuracy: ±4% ±1 digit of displayed value. 5. Cosine Correction Characteristics: Within ±1% at 10°; within ±5% at 60°. 6. Measuring functions: Illuminance, integrated illuminance, average illuminance. 7. Temperature/humidity drift: Within ±3% ±1 digit (of value displayed at 20°C/ 68°F) within operating temperature/humidity range. 8. Operating conditions: 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F) at less than 85% humidity. B. Provide proof of calibration within 12 months of use. Calibration shall be performed by an independent calibration lab approved by the manufacturer of the meter. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Photocell: 1. Install surface mounted on recessed junction box in location best suited for accurate measurement. Avoid placement in high traffic or confined spaces. 2. Provide to Architect prior to installation layout drawings indicating proposed location of all photocells and control groups. Proceed with installation after review and acceptance by Architect. B. Wiring: 1. Install in conduit where running through inaccessible areas. Allow plenum rated wiring in accessible ceiling spaces. 2. Coordinate low voltage wiring connection and location with luminaires to be controlled.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 09 23 - 2 Lighting Control Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.02 WORK PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING A. Complete all phases of work so the system can be powered, tested, adjusted, and otherwise commissioned. Under Division 26, complete systems, including all subsystems, so they are fully functional. This includes the complete installation of all equipment, materials, wire, controls, etc., in accordance with the contract documents and related directives, clarifications, change orders, etc. B. A commissioning plan will be developed by the Test Engineer and approved by the Commissioning Agent. Under Division 26, assist the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent in preparing the commissioning plan by providing all necessary information pertaining to the actual equipment and installation. If system modifications and clarifications are in the contractual requirements of this and related sections of work, they will be made at no additional cost to the Owner. If Contractor initiated system changes have been made that alter the commissioning process, the Commissioning Agent will notify the Owner. C. Specific pre-commissioning responsibilities under Division 26 are as follows: 1. Factory startup services for the following items of equipment: a. Lighting Control System. 2. Normal startup services required to bring each system into a fully operational state. This includes complete installation and cleaning. The Test Engineer will not begin the commissioning process until each system is documented as being installed complete. D. Commissioning shall begin after installation of all interior and exterior finishes including but not limited to adjacent roofing, finished floor, wall, and ceiling systems including final painting, all furniture and book stacks in place, and all other building systems which have direct or indirect influence on the performance and distribution of the daylight and electric lighting systems. Start of commissioning before such items are complete will not relieve Contractor from completing those systems in accordance with the Construction Schedule. 3.03 SEQUENCE OF COMMISSIONING A. Provide to Architect prior to start of commissioning layout drawings indicating proposed location of all measurement points. Proceed with commissioning after review and acceptance by Architect. B. All illuminance measurements shall be oriented horizontal, facing up, at 30 inches above finished floor. All measurements for a control group shall occur at the same location. Ensure constancy of local surface reflectance conditions throughout commissioning of each control group. C. Ensure no personnel or outside influence affects the amount of flux striking the receptor head during the recording session. D. Document measurements in clearly understandable format for review by the Architect. Include time of measurement, temperature, and relative humidity. E. Measure illuminance at least two hours after local sunset with full output of all electric lighting. Record integrated illuminance and average illuminance for a two hour period. F. During daylight hours, measure illuminance with all electric lighting off, including emergency and "nightlight" circuits. Record integrated illuminance and average illuminance for a two hour period. Document in clearly understandable format for review by the Architect. G. Set each photocell to 150 percent of electric-only lighting contribution. H. After initial setpoint has been set, measure illuminance in 10 minute increments from 1 hour before to 1 hour after local sunset. I. Submit all recorded data to Architect for review.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 09 23 - 3 Lighting Control Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.04 TESTING FOR SEASONAL VARIATIONS A. Timing of Commissioning: 1. Initial commissioning shall be performed to best suit the current time-of-year and cloud cover conditions. 2. Seasonal commissioning pertains to testing under full sunlight and full overcast conditions during summer and winter solstice, as well as similar conditions at the spring or fall equinox. 3. Initial commissioning shall be done as soon as contract work is completed regardless of season. 4. Subsequent commissioning shall be undertaken thereafter to ascertain adequate performance during the four seasons. 3.05 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Provide skilled technicians to start up all systems within Division 26. These same technicians shall be made available to assist the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent in completing the commissioning program as it relates to each system and their technical specialty. Work schedules, time required for testing, etc., will be requested and coordinated by the Test Engineer. Under Division 26, ensure that the qualified technician(s) are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments, and problem resolutions at no additional cost to the Owner. B. System problems and discrepancies may require additional technician time, Test Engineer time, Commissioning Agent time, redesign, and reconstruction of systems and system components. The additional technician time shall be made available for the subsequent commissioning periods until the required system performance is obtained at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Commissioning Agent reserves the right to judge the appropriateness and qualifications of the technicians relative to each item of equipment or system. Qualifications of technicians include expert knowledge relative to the specific equipment involved, adequate documentation and tools to service the commission the equipment, and a willingness to work with the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent to get the job done. Technicians shall be removed from the project at the request of either the Test Engineer or Commissioning Agent. 3.06 RESOLUTION OF DEFICIENCIES A. In some systems, misadjustments, misapplied equipment, and deficient performance will result in additional work required to commission the systems. This work will be completed under the direction of the Architect, with input from the Contractor, equipment supplier, Test Engineer, and Commissioning Agent. Whereas all members will have input and the opportunity to discuss the work and resolve problems, the Architect will have final jurisdiction on the necessary work to be done to achieve performance. B. Corrective work shall be completed in a timely fashion to permit timely completion of the commissioning process. Experimentation to render system performance will be permitted. If the Commissioning Agent deems the experimentation work to be ineffective or untimely as it relates to the commissioning process, the Commissioning Agent will notify the Owner, indicating the nature of the problem, expected steps to be taken, and the deadline for completion of activities. C. If deadlines pass without resolution of the problem, the Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services, equipment, or both, to resolve the problem. Costs incurred to solve the problems in an expeditious manner will be the Contractor’s responsibility.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 09 23 - 4 Lighting Control Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.07 TRAINING A. Participate in the training of Owner’s engineering and maintenance staff, as required in Divisions 1 through 28, on each system and related components. Training, in part, will be conducted in a classroom setting, with system and component documentation, and suitable classroom training aids. All training classroom sessions and file demonstrations will be videotaped and copies of this material will be provided as part of closeout requirements. B. Training will be conducted jointly by the Test Engineer, Commissioning Agent, the Contractor, and the equipment suppliers. The Test Engineer will be responsible for highlighting system peculiarities specific to this project. 3.08 SYSTEMS DOCUMENTATION A. In addition to the requirements of Division 01, General Requirements, update contract documents to incorporate field changes and revisions to system designs to account for actual constructed configurations. Division 26, Electrical Record Drawings shall include architectural floor plans and the individual daylight control systems in relation to actual building layout. These Record Drawings shall also be provided in AutoCad .Dwg format for transmittal to the Test Engineer. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 09 23 - 5 Lighting Control Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Provide dry type transformers to provide 208Y/120V power from the 480Y/277V system. 2. Provide dry type transformers to provide 480Y/277V power from the 3-wire 480V system. 3. Size transformers as indicated. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. 2. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 4. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. 5. Section 26 05 80, Electrical Testing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings with Nameplate Data B. Product Data PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Transformers shall be of the same manufacturer as the distribution equipment specified in Section 26 24 16, Panelboards; or approved equivalent. 2.02 INDOOR LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS A. Enclosed and ventilated, air cooled type, Class H insulation, NEMA type TP-1 with copper or aluminum windings. Equip with two 2-1/2 percent FCAN taps and four 2-1/2 percent FCBN taps. Maximum sound level shall be N.E.M.A. standard with vibration isolators between the core and coil assembly and case. B. Maximum sound level shall be NEMA standard with vibration isolators between the core and coil assembly and case. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between core and coil and the enclosure. Sound levels shall be warranted by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: 10 to 50 KVA 45 DB 51 to 150 KVA 50 DB 151 to 300 KVA 55 DB 301 to 500 KVA 60 DB 501 to 700 KVA 62 DB C. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable UL and NEC Standards. D. The case shall be totally enclosed with louvers to prevent entry of foreign objects into the interior, manufactured in accordance with all NEMA & UL approval standards. E. Provide grounded isolation shields between the primary and secondary windings where noted or shown on the Drawings to attenuate source of line interference. Insulate shield from the transformer windings and core and ground to transformer enclosure.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 22 00 - 1 Low Voltage Transformers OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install transformers with flexible conduit connections to housing. Make all cable and ground wire connections. B. In general, transformers will be floor mounted. When necessary to wall or trapeze mount, securely anchor to structure as required for seismic zone 3. C. Install with sound isolating vibration dampers between the transformer enclosure and the hanger or building structure. D. Provide nominally 3-inch deep concrete pads under all floor-mounted transformers. E. Provide seismic restraint for all transformers as recommended by SMACNA. Provide shop drawings sealed by a registered Structural Engineer indicating this seismic restraint. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 22 00 - 2 Low Voltage Transformers OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: Provide panelboards for branch circuit distribution as indicated. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 6. Section 26 05 80, Electrical Testing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings B. Product Data: 1. Detailed component material list. 2. Voltage rating, amperage rating, bussing material, fault rating, wiring lugs capacity, mounting method, physical size, exterior finish and options. 3. Individual circuit breaker product data sheets. 4. Panel schedules; the panel schedules shall indicate circuit breakers in the same orientation as the construction documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton B. Square D C. GE D. Siemens 2.02 BRANCH PANELBOARDS A. Branch Circuit Panels: Bolt-on circuit breaker type fitted with metallic flush lift latches and locks keyed alike. Deliver all panel keys to the Owner at completion of the project. B. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Fully rated at a value greater than the maximum available short circuit current that can be expected at the panelboard location in the electrical system. Series rating is not permitted. C. Cabinets: 1. Cabinet rough-in boxes shall be code gauge steel, with dead front covers. 2. Flush panels shall have flush doors with concealed hinges and mounting clamps. Surface panels shall have metal face trims with no sharp edges or corners. Surface panel cabinets shall be fabricated without knockouts and finished to match face trim. 3. All panels shall be door-in-door type with hinged trim fronts and locking latches that provide full access to wiring compartment.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 24 16 - 1 Panelboards OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

D. Wiring Gutters: A minimum of 4 inches wide except where feeder conductors enter where a minimum of 6 inches clear shall be provided. Feeder conductors to enter directly in line with lug terminals wherever practicable. Provide separate feeder studs for each feeder conductor compression lug. E. Bussing: Provide one continuous bus bar per phase. Provide copper sized as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C maximum. Full size insulated neutral bars shall be included for panels indicated to have a neutral. Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. F. Ground Bus: Provide in each panelboard. Ground bus shall: 1. Have the same rating as the neutral bus. 2. Contain a ground conductor terminal for each available circuit in the panelboard. 3. Have terminals sized for the branch circuit equipment grounding conductors. G. Isolated Ground Bus: Provide in each panelboard as indicated. Ground bus shall: 1. Be insulated from the panelboard enclosure. 2. Have the same rating as the neutral bus. 3. Contain a ground conductor terminal for each available circuit in the panelboard. 4. Have terminals sized for the branch circuit equipment grounding conductors. H. Interiors: Main lug only unless otherwise indicated, with dead front shield covering the bus, and bus connectors, with all mounting hardware and bussing for all spaces indicated for future installation of devices. Interior trim shall be of dead front construction. All unused mounting spaces shall be covered with preformed knockouts. I. Main Circuit Breaker: Where indicated, equip panels indicated with main circuit breakers sized as scheduled and mounted behind door at top of panel for top entrance feeders, and bottom of panel for bottom entrance feeders. Where main circuit breaker size is not indicated, ampere rating shall match feeder ampacity or panelboard rating, whichever is less. 1. Molded case, thermal magnetic bolt-on type and sized as indicated on the Drawings. Circuit breaker shall have an overcenter, trip-free, toggle mechanism that shall provide quick-make, quick-break contact action. Indicate open, closed, or tripped by handle position, with common internal trip crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping for all poles. 2. Circuit breakers shall have a permanent trip action with thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Each thermal element shall be factory calibrated to operate in a 40 degrees C ambient environment. Thermal elements shall be ambient compensating above 40 degrees C. 3. Provide with circuit breaker lock-off device to provide capability to be locked in the open position. J. Branch Circuit Breakers. 1. Breakers shall be provided with amperage rating, and number of poles as indicated in the Panelboard Schedules. 2. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type. 3. Circuit breakers shall have an overcenter toggle mechanism that shall provide quick- make, quick-break contact action. Circuit breakers shall have thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. Two and three pole circuit breakers shall have an internal common trip crossbar to provide simultaneous tripping. 4. The exposed faceplates of all circuit breakers shall be flush with one another. 5. Breakers shall have short circuit capacity rating to withstand the maximum short circuit duty that can be expected at the breaker location in the electrical system. Minimum short circuit rating for any circuit breaker: 10,000 A.I.C. for 120V and 208V breakers, 14,000 A.I.C. for 277V and 480V breakers. 6. Circuit breakers used for switching duty shall be UL listed for that purpose and marked "SWD". 7. Circuit breakers serving heat trace circuits shall be ground fault interrupter (GFI) type with 30 ma ground fault trip rating.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 24 16 - 2 Panelboards OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

8. Provide circuit breaker lock-off device for each branch circuit breaker. K. Provide shunt trips, alarms and auxiliary switches as shown on the Drawings. L. Proved Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) breakers as shown on the Drawings or as required by Code. 2.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify branch circuit breakers with individual circuit numbers adjacent to each breaker with a typewritten card to identify the load controlled by that breaker. B. Contractor will be provided with complete schedules of all panelboards as designed prior to start of construction. Schedules will include circuit breaker arrangement, load schedules, and ratings for use in identification of circuits and coordination. C. Refer to Section 26 05 53, Identification of Electrical Systems, for additional requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Install panelboards plumb and level, located as shown on the Drawings up 6 feet-6 inches to top unless noted otherwise. C. Area above panelboard shall be kept clear of all equipment foreign to the electrical installation including piping, ductwork, supports, etc. Coordinate installation with all other trades. D. Provide identification as specified in Section 26 05 53, Identification of Electrical Systems. 3.02 SPARE CONDUITS A. Install a spare two 3/4-inch conduit from flush panels for each three single pole breakers or spaces provided. Terminate conduits above accessible ceiling or as directed. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 24 16 - 3 Panelboards OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Wiring Devices 2. Plates for all outlet boxes shown. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems 5. Section 26 05 80, Electrical Testing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data B. Shop drawings of the occupancy sensor locations shall be prepared by the manufacturer in AutoCAD and submitted for review. The shop drawings shall be coordinated with all other trades and identify actual device locations and quantities within each space required to provide adequate sensing coverage in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Identify mounting configuration (i.e., ceiling or wall) and sensor technology proposed at each location. C. Completed Receptacle Testing and Acceptance Report Form. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wiring devices shall be extra heavy duty grade, with special devices as noted on the Drawings. Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein, such device shall be of same grade and manufacture as specified below. Furnish a matching plug connector for all special purpose devices that do not have the common 120 volt NEMA 5-20R configuration. B. All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall have similar appearance characteristics unless noted otherwise. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Arrow-Hart 4. Pass & Seymour B. Line Voltage Switches: 1. 20 amp rated, 277 volt, quiet type, extra heavy duty, heavy duty nylon toggle handle, back and side wired with screw terminal connections. a. As noted on the drawings provide: 1) Pilot light switch: lighted clear toggle. 2) Momentary Contact Switches: 15A, SPDT, center off. 3) Key Switches: 20 ampere, 277V, back and side wired with screw terminal connections.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 27 26 - 1 Wiring Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. EPO pushbutton switch: 1. Red mushroom head push-off, pull-on with concentric guard, 2-1/4 inch diameter, non- illuminated, heavy duty operator. 2. Provide clear hinged louver to prevent accidental operation. 3. Provide laminated engraved nameplate attached with stainless steel screws indicating “Emergency Power Off” and load served. D. Dimming Switches: 1. Architectural grad, line voltage, 20 amp rated, single pole, slide-to-off type, slide up to brighten and down to dim, decora style, wattage rating and lamp/ballast compatibility as required. 2. Provide 3-way type where shown on plan. 3. Manufacturers: a. Lutron Nova T b. Leviton SureSlide c. Hubbell E. Except as noted herein, device exposed finish color shall be as follows: 1. Normal power shall be of finish per space type. During the submittal process the architect shall provide a detailed list of spaces and required device finishes. In general, the requirements for faceplates are as follows: a. Restrooms, kitchens, breakrooms, utility spaces: black. b. Devices located in wood paneling: black. c. All other areas: white. 2. Emergency power: Red. 3. Standby power: Red. 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Arrow-Hart 4. Pass & Seymour B. Standard straight blade duplex receptacle: 3-wire, 2-pole with grounding, extra heavy duty, 20 amp rated, NEMA 5-20R configuration, back and side wired with screw terminal connections. 1. Provide tamper-resistant as noted on the drawings or NEC required. 2. Provide isolated ground as noted on the drawings or NEC required. 3. Provide surge suppression receptacles as noted on the drawings. 4. Provide (2) USB charging ports at locations as noted on drawings. USB ports shall be integral to duplex receptacle, each capable of minimum 3000mA charging. 5. Where half of receptacle is noted as automatically controlled on drawings, provide permanent symbol on controlled half. Leviton 5262CH series or approved equal. C. Ground Fault Interrupting straight blade duplex receptacle: heavy duty, 3-wire, 2-pole with grounding, self-testing, green “ON” LED to indicate power, red “ON” LED to indicate ground fault condition, 20 amp rated, NEMA 5-20R configuration, back and side wired with screw terminal connections. 1. Provide tamper-resistant as noted on the drawings or where NEC required. 2. Provide weather-resistant rating at exterior locations as required by NEC. D. Clock Outlets: As noted on the drawings and compatible with the specified clock system. E. Special Purpose Receptacles: As noted on Drawings with NEMA configurations. F. Except as noted herein, device exposed finish color shall be as follows: 1. Normal power shall be of finish per space type. During the submittal process the architect shall provide a detailed list of spaces and required device finishes. In general, the requirements for faceplates are as follows: a. Restrooms, kitchens, breakrooms, utility spaces: black.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 27 26 - 2 Wiring Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

b. Devices located in wood paneling: black. c. All other areas: white. 2. Emergency power: Red. 3. Standby power: Red. 4. UPS: Blue. 5. Isolated Ground: Orange. 6. Surge Suppression: Blue. 2.04 PLATES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Arrow-Hart 4. Pass & Seymour B. Flush Finish Plates: 1. Finish per space type. During the submittal process the architect shall provide a detailed list of spaces and required faceplate finishes. In general, the requirements for faceplates are as follows: a. Restrooms, kitchens, breakrooms, utility spaces: stainless steel. b. Devices located in wood paneling: brushed brass. c. All other areas: white metal. C. Surface Covers: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel, 1/2-inch raised industrial type with openings appropriate for device installed. D. Weatherproof: Extra-Duty while in use covers, UL 514D listed, commercial quality diecast aluminum construction, NEMA 3R rated, gasketed, built-in padlock provisions, built-in cord strain relief provisions, gray powder-coated finish, vertical mounting as required for application or other covers of similar construction for other receptacle configurations. E. Identification: Identify receptacle plates with a pre-printed label indicating serving panel and branch circuit number. Refer to Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 2.05 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Watt Stopper 2. Leviton 3. SensorSwitch 4. Hubbell 5. Lutron 6. Watt Stopper series numbers are identified herein to establish the minimum level of quality for each product. Comparable products that meet the requirements of the specification by other acceptable manufacturers identified herein are acceptable. B. Wall-box Mounted: 1. Passive infrared type, 180 degree coverage, automatic-on operation, 3-wire type, daylight override, adjustable time-out, selectable walk-through mode and override off switch. 2. Single or dual relay type as required or as shown on Drawings. 3. Watt Stopper #PW series. C. Ceiling Mounted: 360 degree coverage, automatic-on operation, light-level sensing, adjustable time-out, automatic sensing/adjustment for optimal time-out delay setting, selectable walk- through mode, low- or line-voltage as shown on Drawings or described herein, surface mounted, with power pack as required, provide auxiliary contacts. 1. Combination passive infrared and ultrasonic/microphonic type: Watt Stopper #DT-300 series. 2. Passive infrared type: Watt Stopper #CI-300 series. 3. Ultrasonic type: Watt Stopper #UT-300 series.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 27 26 - 3 Wiring Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

D. Ceiling/Wall Mounted: 180 degree coverage, automatic-on operation, light-level sensing, adjustable time-out, automatic sensing/adjustment for optimal time-out delay setting, selectable walk-through mode, low-voltage with power pack, surface mounted, provide auxiliary contacts. 1. Combination passive infrared and ultrasonic/microphonic type: Watt stopper #DT-200 series. 2. Passive infrared type: Watt stopper #CX-100 series. E. Provide all ceiling mounted occupancy sensors with isolated normally open and normally closed output contacts rated at 1A at 30VDC/VAC. Coordinate interface requirements with HVAC contractor. F. Provide multiple contacts and/or power packs for occupancy sensors that: 1. Control both normal and emergency lighting and require separation of branch circuit wiring systems. In case of occupancy sensor failure, emergency lighting shall fail to the “ON” state. 2. Control separate lighting control zones. Unless otherwise noted, occupancy sensors are intended to control all light in a designated zone or room. Contractor is responsible for providing the required power packs to insure functionality of the system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the Drawings. B. Finish plates and devices are not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted. C. Switches, receptacles and/or other devices ganged into a common enclosure shall be provided with a separation barrier between devices where the combined circuit voltages within the enclosure exceeds 300 volts. D. Provide GFCI receptacles as shown on the drawings or as NEC required. Provide a GFCI type duplex receptacle in each required location, do not sub-feed normal receptacles downstream of the GFCI receptacle to obtain the GFCI rating. E. Provide receptacles with GFCI, tamperproof, weather-resistant or hospital grade ratings as shown on the drawings, appropriate for the installation or required by NEC. 3.02 CORD CAPS A. All special plugs provided with the receptacles shall be given to the Owner in their cartons with a letter stating the date and the Owner’s representative that received the materials. 3.03 COORDINATION A. The Electrical Drawings indicate the approximate location of all devices. Refer to Architectural elevations, sections, and details for exact locations. B. Coordinate with equipment installer the locations and methods of connection to devices mounted in cabinets, counters, work benches, service pedestals and similar equipment. 3.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Line voltage occupancy sensors shall be provided when installed in inaccessible ceiling system, except when auxiliary contacts are required, in which case a low voltage occupancy sensor shall be provided. For installation of low voltage occupancy sensors in inaccessible ceiling systems, coordinate power pack locations with Architect prior to installation and provide access panels as required. B. Low voltage occupancy sensors shall be provided when installed in accessible ceiling systems. C. Sensor locations identified on Drawings are diagrammatic and are meant to indicate only that occupancy sensing within a given space is required. Locate sensors to provide maximum coverage of the room, to operate as someone enters the room, and to avoid false operation due to persons outside the room passing an open door.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 27 26 - 4 Wiring Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

D. Provide additional sensing heads as necessary or per manufacturer’s recommendation to achieve complete coverage of each room. E. Set sensitivity as required to provide small movement coverage throughout the room without extending coverage beyond the room. F. System performance testing shall be done with the sensor timing set to the minimum time delay available. Once complete coverage of a given room has been demonstrated, set the delay to 15 minutes. G. Upon Completion of installation and prior to turning space over to Owner, Contractor shall reset occupancy sensor automatic self-adjustment settings to insure proper time delay self- adjustment for Owner occupant schedule and room use. H. Allow for up to 24 hours of call-back sensor adjustments to be made by the contractor or occupancy sensor manufacturer qualified installer for up to six months after the Owner has taken occupancy of the space. 3.05 TESTING A. Receptacles shall be tested for line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground faults. Correct any defective wiring. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 27 26 - 5 Wiring Devices OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 29 00 MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Provisions of Division 26, Electrical Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Provide manual or magnetic motor starters of the proper characteristics for equipment as indicated. 2. Provide motor control centers as indicated. 3. Provide switches of proper characteristics as disconnecting means. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cable 2. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems 4. Section 26 05 73, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 5. Section 26 05 80, Electrical Testing 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings, including the following information. 1. Field Dimensions 2. Description of Materials and Finishes 3. Component Connections 4. Anchorage Methods. 5. Installation Procedures B. Product Data C. Operating and Maintenance Data D. Overload (heater) Sizing: A final listing of all motors and the heater size installed for that motor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Motor Control Centers, Motor Starters and Visible Blade Disconnects: 1. Same manufacture as the distribution equipment specified in Section 26 24 16, Panelboards, Allen Bradley or approved equivalent. B. Horsepower Rated Toggle Switches: 1. Arrow Hart 2. General Electric 3. Hubbell 4. Pass & Seymour 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS A. Manual starters: 1. NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose Class A manually operated toggle type full voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, quick-make, quick-break, with thermal overload protection and suitable enclosures.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 29 00 - 1 Motor Controllers OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Magnetic starters, Non-reversing: 1. NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose, full voltage across the line non-reversing type, 120V coils, overload relays in each leg, running pilot lights, one normally closed and one normally open auxiliary contacts, 120V control transformers and suitable enclosures. 2. Overload relays shall be an ambient compensated bimetallic type with interchangeable heater pacts. 3. Overload adjustable, have single-phase sensitivity, and manual or automatic reset. 4. Suitable for the addition of at least four auxiliary contacts of any arrangement normally open or normally closed. 5. Provide with a NO and a NC auxiliary contacts. 6. Minimum fault interrupting rating of 10,000A. C. Magnetic Starters, Reversing: 1. NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose. 2. Reversing starters shall consist of two contactors and a single overload relays assembly. 3. Include electrical interlock and integral adjustable time delay transition between FORWARD and REVERSE rotation. 4. Starters shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prohibit line shorts and both starters being energized simultaneously. D. Magnetic Starters, Two Speed: 1. NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose. 2. Include electrical interlock and integral adjustable time delay transition between SLOW and FAST speeds. 3. Electrically and mechanically interlocked to prohibit both starters being energized simultaneously. E. Combination Starter/Disconnect, (Circuit Breaker): 1. Combine magnetic motor starter as described above and motor circuit protector disconnect in a common enclosure. a. Motor Circuit Protector: 1) NEMA AB 1, circuit breaker with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 2) Circuit protector shall have an externally operated handle, giving positive visual indication of its ON-OFF position. b. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breaker: 1) NEMA AB 1, with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 2) Circuit protector shall have an externally operated handle, giving positive visual indication of its ON-OFF position. F. Combination Starter/Disconnect, Disconnect Switch Type: 1. Combine magnetic motor starter as described above and non-fused or fused disconnect switch in a common enclosure. Switch type shall be as indicated on the drawings. Switch shall have an externally operated handle that shall give positive visual indication of its ON- OFF position. a. Non-fused Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with enclosed, but visible blades. Switch shall be rated as indicated on the drawings. b. Fused Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch. Fuse clips shall accept Class R fuses. Switch and fuse sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings. G. Starter Contacts: 1. Totally enclosed, double break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts. 2. Contact inspection or replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. H. Overload Relay: 1. NEMA ICS with one-piece thermal unit construction. 2. Thermal units shall be interchangeable. 3. Overload relay control circuit contact shall be replaceable. 4. Thermal units shall be required for starter to operate.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 29 00 - 2 Motor Controllers OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

I. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 as indicated, or as required to meet the conditions of installation. J. Equip starters with H-O-A selector switches, start-stop stations, or other auxiliary control device listed. Where no auxiliary devices are listed, equip each starter with an H-O-A switch. K. Control circuit transformer shall be provided in each starter. Transformer shall be sized to accommodate the contactor(s) and all control circuit loads. The transformer shall include primary and secondary fuses in all ungrounded conductors. L. Provide one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contacts in each starter, unless additional auxiliary contacts are required. Contacts shall be NEMA ICS 2. M. All starter units shall be provided with control terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be rated at 20-Amperes and shall be accessible from inside the unit with the unit door is opened. N. Push Buttons: Unguarded, recessed type. O. Indicating Lights: 1. LED type 2. Green for run 3. Red for stopped unless otherwise indicated. 2.03 DISCONNECTS A. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick-make, quick-break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served. Switches shall be equipped with a defeatable cover interlock. B. Enclosures shall be NEMA l for indoor use, unless specifically noted otherwise and NEMA 3R where installed exposed to the weather or designated by the subscript “WP”. C. Disconnects shall be fusible or non-fusible as designated on Drawings. 2.04 FUSES A. Fuses shall be UL Class RK-5 dual element, time delay, current limiting type. The overload thermal time delay element shall be a spring actuated soldered copper assembly in a separate sand free compartment. The short circuit current limiting section shall be copper alloy links encased in quartz sand. B. Fuses shall be capable of holding 500 percent of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds, and carry a UL listed minimum interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes rms symmetrical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide the motor starting equipment as shown on the Drawings and coordinate all motor “overload” starter relays. B. Install the starters at the respective equipment unless shown otherwise. C. Freestanding starters shall be installed on metal channel support structure. D. Starters that are installed on exterior walls shall be installed with minimum 1/2-inch channel on wall to allow air space between starter and wall. E. Where fusible units are provided, install fuses as indicated on the drawings. F. Thermal overloads (heaters) shall be installed in each starter in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations for that motor and the type of associated load. Coordinate proper size when individual power factor capacitors are utilized at the motor. 3.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide all code required disconnect switches under this work, whether specifically shown or not.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 29 00 - 3 Motor Controllers OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Non-fusible disconnect switches required when equipment is not in sight of the branch circuit panel or starter may be horsepower rated, toggle type in suitable enclosure, mounted at or on the equipment. 3.03 FUSES A. Install fuses for motor protection to best protect the motor without nuisance tripping. Should fuse sizes require changing from what is shown due to variance between the original design information and actual equipment installed, fuses shall be sized in accordance with NEC. In no case shall fuses be sized smaller than the starter heaters on motor circuits. B. Provide one complete set of spare fuses of each amperage used on this project. Store spare fuses in the spare fuse cabinet. 3.04 COORDINATION A. Verify the characteristics and the motor full load current for each motor installed, using the actual motor nameplate data. Select and install the proper running overload devices in the starter as per the manufacturer's instructions. Provide the proper overload protection is a part of this Division of the work. B. Prepare table of all motor full load currents and installed overload devices and submit to the Architect. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 29 00 - 4 Motor Controllers OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a luminaire of the type designated and appropriate for the location. 2. Luminaires shall be procured through a lighting distributor with a current and valid Oregon business license, operating in a location within 250 miles from the project site. 3. At the time of bid, all light fixtures and lighting controls shall have individual unit prices associated with each piece of lighting equipment. The Contractor shall provide back-up distributor net and Contractor net pricing to the Owner upon request. All change order pricing will be provided with distributor net and Contractor net back-up for review to the Owner. All lighting representative initiated lot price deducts and all-or-none deducts shall be made public to the Owner at the time of bid if specifically requested by the Architect, Owner, or Engineer. 4. Where a luminaire type designation has been omitted and cannot be determined by the Contractor, request a clarification from the Architect and Engineer in writing and provide a suitable luminaire type as directed. 5. Coordinate installation of luminaires with the ceiling installation and all other trades to provide a total system that is neat and orderly in appearance. 6. Luminaires located in fire rated assemblies rated for use in such assemblies or have assembly maintained by the installer through the use of appropriate construction techniques to maintain the assembly rating. It is the responsibility of the contractor to maintain the assembly rating and provide required components during construction. Coordinate luminaires impacted with Division 01, General Requirements and life safety documents. 7. Install all remote ballasts/drivers/transformers in enclosures as required by luminaire specified or code requirements. Locate remote ballasts/drivers/transformers as shown on drawings; where no location is shown, provide recommendation for approval prior to commencing field installation. Remote mounted ballasts/drivers/transformers shall be located within the distance limitations specified by the ballast manufacturer. 8. Coordinate voltage requirements to each luminaire as indicated on drawings prior to ordering. 9. Coordinate luminaire control requirements with specified lighting control system prior to ordering luminaires. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all control requirements and compatibility between the luminaires and control equipment prior to ordering luminaires. Uncoordinated equipment that does not meet the functional requirements of the specification or the design intent shall be replaced by the Contractor with equipment that meets the design specifications and design intent at no additional cost to the Owner or Design Team. 10. Coordinate luminaire installation requirements with all impacted trades prior to ordering. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all installation requirements and compatibility between the luminaires and building finish materials prior to ordering luminaires. Uncoordinated equipment that does not meet the specification or the design intent shall be replaced by the Contractor with equipment that meets the design specifications and design intent at no additional cost to the Owner or Design Team. 11. Verify luminaires carry a valid UL or ELT listing.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 1 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 26, Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 09 23, Lighting Control Devices 4. Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The lighting design for this project was based on luminaire types and manufacturers as specified. B. Specified manufacturers are pre-qualified to bid on products where specified. Inclusion of manufacturer and product series does not relieve specified manufacturer from providing product as described in luminaire schedule; modifications to standard product, if required, shall be included with initial bid. C. Items noted “or equivalent” do not require prior approval but shall be included with the shop drawing submittal. D. Other “Or Approved” Manufacturers and Products: 1. Submit substitution request prior to bid, complying with requirements of Division 01, General Requirements. 2. Determine approval by review of the following luminaire characteristics where applicable. E. Performance: 1. Distribution 2. Utilization 3. Average brightness/maximum brightness. 4. Spacing to mounting height ratio. 5. Visual comfort probability. F. Construction: 1. Engineering 2. Workmanship 3. Rigidity 4. Permanence of materials and finishes. G. Installation Ease: 1. Captive parts and captive hardware. 2. Provision for leveling. 3. Through-wiring ease. H. Maintenance: 1. Relamping ease. 2. Ease of replacement of ballast and lamp sockets. I. Appearance: 1. Architectural integration. 2. Light tightness. 3. Neat, trim styling. 4. Conformance with design intent. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical: B. Shop Drawings, to include: a. Product Data. Provide manufacturer’s published product data information. b. Luminaire dimensions on a fully dimensioned line drawing. c. Lamp information. d. Lamp socket information.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 2 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

e. Ballast information using ballast manufacturer’s published product data information. Multiple ballasts may be submitted for single luminaire if compatible with ballast specification included in contract documents. Include certification of lamp and ballast compatibility for all submitted ballasts. f. Mounting details including clips, canopies, supports, and methods for attachment to structure. g. U.L. Labeling information. h. Lm-79 and lm-80 testing reports for LED fixtures. i. Photometric Reports consisting of: 1) Candlepower distribution curves: Provide five plane candlepower distribution data at no more than 5 degree vertical angle increments. 2) Coefficient of utilization table. 3) Zonal lumen summary including overall luminaire efficiency. 4) Luminaire luminance: Provide measured maximum brightness data for luminaires with reflectors and average brightness data for luminaires with refractors. 5) Spacing to mounting height ratio. If parallel and perpendicular ratios differ, provide data on each plane. 6) VCP calculations (where applicable): For general office lighting luminaires, provide typical VCP calculations for ceiling heights between 9 feet and 12 feet at one 1-foot increments, for room sizes 20'x20' and 30'x30'. j. Provide working fixture samples upon request of the architect, Owner, Lighting Designer, or Engineer. 2. Operation and maintenance data. Prepare two copies of a Lighting Systems Maintenance Manual consisting of the following in a hard-cover binder for review. After review, Architect will deliver one copy to Owner. a. One complete set of final submittals of actual product installed, including product data and shop drawings. Include product data for actual ballast installed where applicable. b. List of lamps used in Project, cross-referenced to fixture types, with specific manufacturer’s names and ordering codes. c. Relamping instructions for lamps that require special precautions (tungsten halogen, metal halide, etc.). d. Lighting fixture cleaning instruction, including chemicals to be used or avoided. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Luminaires new and complete with mounting accessories, junction boxes, trims, and lamps. B. Luminaire assemblies UL listed. C. Luminaires UL listed appropriate to mounting conditions and application. D. Each luminaire family type (downlights, parabolics, etc.) supplied by only one manufacturer. E. Recessed luminaires installed in fire rated ceilings and using a fire rated protective cover shall be thermally protected for this application and shall carry a fire rated listing. F. Luminaires installed under canopies, roofs or open areas and similar damp or wet locations shall be UL listed and labeled as suitable for damp or wet locations. 2.02 LENSES A. Prismatic Acrylic: 1. 12-inch by 24-inch and Larger: Extruded of clear virgin acrylic plastic, 0.125-inch minimum overall thickness, 0.100-inch nominal unpenetrated thickness, Pattern 12 with flat sided female prisms running at 45 degrees off panel axis unless otherwise specified in the luminaire schedule. Concave prisms are not acceptable. B. Opal acrylic: 1. Extruded or injection molded of virgin acrylic plastic, 0.080-inch minimum overall thickness.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 3 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. As specified in the Luminaire Schedule. C. Opal acrylic overlay: High transmittance type, extruded of virgin acrylic plastic, 0.040-inch overall thickness, with minimum 80 percent light transmittance. 2.03 REFLECTOR CONES A. Spun of uniform gauge aluminum, free of spinning marks or other defects. B. Shall have an integral trim flange. C. Color and finish as specified in Luminaire Schedule. D. All reflectors shall be of the Alzak® process, and shall be of the low iridescent type. E. All luminaires using Alzak® reflector cones shall be supplied by the same manufacturer unless directed otherwise in Luminaire Schedule. 2.04 LAMPS A. Lamp each luminaire with the suitable lamp cataloged for the specific luminaire type and as indicated as manufactured by General Electric, Philips, OSRAM/Sylvania, Venture, Ushio (MR only), EYE (MR only), or approved, or as specifically indicated in the Luminaire Schedule, or as specified herein. B. Incandescent: Inside frosted, 130 volt rated except where otherwise specified. Reflector (R) flood lamps are not acceptable. C. Fluorescent: 1. Linear Fluorescent: a. T-8 Super System: lamps shall be bi-pin type, Tri-Phosphor with Color Rendering Index (CRI) exceeding 85, Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of 3000k with a minimum initial lumen output of not less than 3100 lumens when operated on a reference ballast with a ballast factor of 1.0. Rated lamp life of not less than 36,000 hours when operated at 3 hours per start. Osram Sylvania XPS, Philips Advantage or General Electric. A ballast compatible with the lamp as a system is required as specified in ballast section. b. T-5 lamps shall be bi-pin type, Tri-Phosphor with Color Rendering Index (CRI) exceeding 82, Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of 4100k or as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. c. T-12 lamps shall not be used. d. Provide low mercury (maximum 6 milligrams for standard 48 inch lamp) TCLP- compliant (Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure) lamps for all luminaires. 2. Compact Fluorescent: a. Of wattage and configuration indicated in Luminaire Schedule, Tri-Phosphor with Color Rendering Index (CRI) exceeding 81, Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of 3000k or as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. b. Amalgam technology to be used wherever at least one manufacturer supplies the specified lamp with that technology. c. Lamps shall be single ended four-pin plug-in base where available. d. Self-ballasted lamps shall not be provided unless specifically indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 3. All fluorescent lamps shall be of the same manufacturer and phosphor coating unless specifically identified in the Luminaire Schedule. D. Metal Halide: 1. Ceramic arc tube type: a. Of wattage, configuration, and base style indicated in Luminaire Schedule, ceramic arc tube type with Color Rendering Index (CRI) exceeding 80, Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) of 3000k or as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. b. Maximum rated +/- 200 Kelvin color shift over rated lamp life. c. Universal burn rated. d. Lamps used in open luminaires shall be rated for such use.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 4 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Lamps used in open luminaires shall be rated for such use. E. High Pressure Sodium: Of wattage, base style, color and type indicated in Luminaire Schedule. F. Light Emitting Diode (LED): 1. Of type and description listed in the luminaire schedule. 2. Must meet IES LM 79 and IES LM 80 protocols and requirements. 3. Must carry a minimum full 5-year, non-pro-rated warranty on the LED array and power supply. G. Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule. 2.05 LAMP SOCKETS A. Of configuration and design to accept standard lamp bases. B. Linear Fluorescent: 1. T-8: Polycarbonate medium bi-pin rotary lock type, with T12 inhibitor, copper or brass contacts. Straight-in type lamp holders are not acceptable. 2. T-5: Polycarbonate medium bi-pin rotary lock type, copper or brass contacts. C. Compact Fluorescent: 1. Long twin-tube lamps: Polycarbonate plug-in type with metallic lamp retention spring. Listed for both vertical and horizontal mounting orientation. Provide auxiliary lamp support clip. 2. Compact lamps: Polycarbonate plug-in type with metallic lamp retention spring, 4-pin type, starter-free. Twist-lock lamp holders are not acceptable unless specified in the Luminaire Schedule. D. High Intensity Discharge: 1. Screw base: Unglazed porcelain body with silver, nickel, or copper alloy screw shell. Pulse start rated where used with pulse start lamp/ballast system. 2. Double-Ended Linear (RSC): Ceramic body with copper-alloy contact pins. Pulse start rated where used with pulse start lamp/ballast system. Contact distance designed for lamp provided. 2.06 BALLASTS A. Linear Fluorescent: 1. Non-Dimming Electronic T-8 Super System: Ballasts shall meet the requirements of UL 935 and shall bear the appropriate UL label. Tandem wiring between luminaires may be used to minimize the number of ballasts while accomplishing the switching requirements shown on the drawings. Advance, OSRAM/Sylvania, General Electric, or approved. Ballasts shall have the following electrical characteristics: a. Series wired, Programmed Rapid Start circuitry. b. High frequency operation, >40kHz. c. Withstand input power line transients as defined in ANSI C62.41. The ballasts shall tolerate a line voltage variation of ±10%. d. The power factor shall be 98 percent or higher. e. The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.7 or less for program rapid start ballasts and 1.85 or less for instant start ballasts. f. The average Ballast Factor shall not exceed .75 under ANSI C82.2 conditions or as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. g. A two lamp ballast, when operating two Super System lamps as specified in the lamp section, shall consume 51 watts maximum with a total system efficacy of not less than 95 lumens per watt. h. Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic ballast shall not exceed 10 percent of the input current and comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18 concerning the generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency interference).

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 5 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

i. Class “A” sound rated and UL Class “P” thermally protected. The ballast shall be provided with an internal fuse to protect the electrical power supply from internal component failure. The ballast shall also be short-circuit protected in the event of miswiring. 2. 10 percent Dimming Electronic: Ballasts shall meet all the specifications for non-dimming electronic ballasts. Tandem wiring between luminaires shall not be used. Must be compatible with dimmers specified under Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset light output setting. Dimming control shall be by Osram Sylvania powersense or approved to provide continuous, flicker free square law dimming from 100 percent output to 10 percent output. 3. 1 percent Dimming Electronic: Dimming electronic ballasts shall meet all the specifications for non-dimming electronic ballasts. Tandem wiring between luminaires shall not be used. Must be compatible with dimmers specified under Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices. Ballast shall start lamp at any preset light output setting. Dimming control shall be by Osram Sylvania powersense or approved to provide continuous, flicker free square law dimming from 100 percent output to 1 percent output. 4. Magnetic Ballasts: Provide magnetic ballasts only where specifically indicated in Luminaire Schedule. High power factor, rapid start, energy efficient, full light output premium type or special types as required by the luminaires and lamps specified, C.B.M. and UL labeled class “P”, Advance Kool Koil Mark III, or equal. All ballasts shall be fused with in line fuse located behind ballast compartment cover. 5. Ballasts shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for three years. The warranty shall include either a $10 replacement labor allowance or complete replacement including labor by an agent of the manufacturer. 6. Ballasts shall operate a maximum of two lamps. B. Compact Fluorescent: 1. Non-Dimming Electronic: Ballasts shall meet the requirements of UL 935, ANSI C82.11 and shall bear the appropriate UL label. Ballast shall be suitable for lamp type(s) specified. Tandem wiring between luminaires shall not be used. Ballast shall employ integral end-of- life shutdown circuit with auto-reset to remove power from the lamp when the ballast senses lamp failure. Advance, OSRAM/Sylvania, Universal Lighting Technologies, or approved. Ballasts shall have the following electrical characteristics: a. Series wired, Program Rapid Start circuitry. b. High frequency operation, >50kHz. c. The power factor shall be 98 percent or higher. d. The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.5 or less. e. The average Ballast Factor (BF) shall be a minimum of 98 percent. f. Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic ballast shall not exceed 10 percent of the input current and comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18 concerning the generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency interference). g. Minimum starting temperature of 0 degrees F ambient. Maximum operating temperature of 120 degrees F ambient. h. Class “A” sound rated and UL Class “P” thermally protected. 2. 5 percent Dimming Electronic: Ballasts shall meet all the specifications for non-dimming electronic ballasts. Tandem wiring between luminaires shall not be used. Must be compatible with dimmers specified under Section 26 27 26, Wiring Devices. Dimming control shall be by line voltage control circuit with a positive line voltage On/Off. Lutron Hi- Lume, Lutron Tu-Wire, Advance MarkX, or approved to provide continuous, flicker free dimming from 100 percent output to 5 percent output. 3. Non-Dimming Electronic: Ballasts shall meet the requirements of UL 935, ANSI C82.11. C. LED Dimming Drivers: Eldoled or approved LED 0-10v dimming drives shall dim to 0% without flicker and shall have the following attributes: a. Power factor: > 0.90 at full load. b. 0-10V compatible.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 6 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

c. Driver, compatible with both sink and current source controllers. d. Efficient, smooth and flicker-free dimming. e. Full dimming control: 100%-0%, choice of linear or logarithmic dimming curve. f. High efficiency over a wide power and voltage range: 86% at full load, ≥ 85% above 20W output. g. Maximum (rated) power available over wide LED voltage (30-55V) and LED current range (200-1,050mA). h. NTC interface for robust thermal management. i. LED code: programming interface (LED output current, NTC temperature, dimming curve, minimum dimming level) and sensor/extended feature set interface. j. Independent housing can be modified into shorter, dependent housing. D. Metal Halide: 1. Ballasts shall bear the appropriate UL label. 2. Ballast shall be designed for proper lamp/ballast ANSI M-series designation suitable for lamp type specified. 3. Tandem wiring between luminaires shall not be used. 4. Non Dimming Electronic: Ballast shall employ integral end-of-life shutdown circuit with auto-reset to remove power from the lamp when the ballast senses lamp failure. NAiS Aromat or approved. Ballasts shall have the following electrical characteristics: a. High frequency operation. b. The ballasts shall tolerate an input voltage variation of ±10% with less than ±0.5% variation in output (lamp) voltage. c. The power factor shall be 95% or higher. d. The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.3 or less. e. The average Ballast Factor shall be 100% under ANSI C82.2 conditions. f. Total harmonic distortion of the input current to the electronic ballast shall not exceed 10% of the input current and comply with FCC rules and regulations Part 18C concerning the generation of both EMF (electromagnetic interference) and RFI (radio frequency interference). g. Class “A” sound rated and thermally protected. The ballast shall be provided with an internal fuse to protect the electrical power supply from internal component failure. The ballast shall also be short-circuit protected in the event of miswiring. h. Minimum rated distance between lamp and ballast shall exceed 8 feet. 5. Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule. E. High Pressure Sodium: 1. Ballasts shall bear the appropriate UL label. 2. Ballast shall be designed for proper lamp/ballast ANSI S-series designation suitable for lamp type specified. 3. Tandem wiring between luminaires shall not be used. 4. Constant Wattage Autotransformer (CWA): Ballast shall be provided with fully wired, integral dry-film type capacitor and potted igniter. Advance, Holophane, Universal Lighting Technologies, or approved. Ballasts shall have the following electrical characteristics: a. The ballasts shall tolerate an input voltage variation of ±10% with output (lamp) voltage within trapezoidal limits of lamp operating voltage over lamp life. b. The power factor shall be 90% or higher. c. The lamp crest factor shall measure 1.6 or less. d. The average Ballast Factor shall be 100% under ANSI C82.2 conditions. e. Minimum starting temperature of -40°F ambient. 5. Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule. F. All dimming ballasts controlled by a common controller shall be provided by the same manufacturer. G. Ballasts used in enclosed and gasketed luminaires listed for use in wet locations shall be of Type 1 construction.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 7 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

H. Ballasts shall be rated for the expected ambient temperature in which they are installed. All exterior installed ballasts shall be rated to start the lamps at 0 degrees F. I. Systems using tandem wired luminaires shall be labeled accordingly. Label shall be in the lamp compartment of each luminaire and identify the function of that luminaire. Label shall not be visible from room. J. Ballast housing shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections applied thereto. K. Remote mounted ballasts shall be not be located beyond the distance limitations specified by the ballast manufacturer. 2.07 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Sheet metal housings: Minimum 22 gauge cold-rolled steel, with welded joints. Exposed weld marks and seams filled and ground smooth. B. Door Frames for lensed luminaires: White-painted, flat aluminum with mitered corners, rotary cam latches to hinge from either side. C. Finish: Baked white dry polyester powder, unless otherwise specified, with a minimum average reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall be prepared for finishing with a 5-step zinc phosphating process prior to painting. D. Luminaires used as air-handling registers for HVAC systems shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A. 2.08 LINEAR FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Extruded Aluminum Housing: One piece housing of AA 6063 T5 extruded aluminum with 0.14 minimum thickness smooth and free of tooling lines in one uninterrupted section of one (1) foot to 24 feet with the cross sectional dimensions as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. Section lengths shall be as shown on the drawings and shall be such that the luminaire shall be able to be transported into and out of the installation location after final construction without any building demolition being required. B. Steel Housing: 20 gauge (0.7mm or 0.027”) minimum, free of dents, scratches, or other defects. Exposed weld marks, joints and seams shall be filled and sanded smooth before finishing. All edges shall be cleaned and dressed to remove sharp edges or burrs. Section lengths shall be as shown on the drawings comprised of one (1) foot to 12-foot lengths. C. End Plates: Die cast end plates shall be mechanically attached without exposed fasteners. End caps shall be minimum 0.125-inch thick. D. Where housing sections are joined together to form a continuous row, an internal alignment spline shall be provided. E. Finish: 1. All exposed aluminum surfaces shall be treated with an acid wash and clear water rinse prior to painting. The luminaire shall then be electrostatically painted or powder coated and oven baked in the color indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 2. All exposed steel surfaces shall be treated with an acid wash and clear water rinse, then prime coated. The luminaire shall then be electrostatically painted or powder coated and oven baked in the color indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. F. Lens: Mechanically secured from within the housing. Lens shall have interior linear prisms with smooth exterior. G. Louvers and Reflectors: 1. White Reflectors shall be steel or aluminum, minimum 22 gauge, with hard baked white enamel finish with minimum 85% reflectance. 2. Alzak reflectors shall be low iridescent semi-specular or as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule, Alzak® or Coilzak® with minimum reflectance of 90%.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 8 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

H. Suspension: 1. Suspension Devices, type as specified in the Luminaire Schedule: a. Aircraft Cable: Stainless steel type, 3/32-inich nominal diameter, stranded, with positive pressure, field adjustable clamp at fixture connection. b. Rigid Pendant: 1/2-inch nominal diameter or as specifically shown on drawings. Supplied by fixture manufacturer when available as standard product. At fixture end of stems, provide earthquake type swivel fitting to permit 45-degree swing in any direction away from vertical. Flat canopy to permit splice inspection after installation. c. Chain hangers: Length to suit fixture mounting height if shown or as field conditions dictate. Use two heavy duty chains with “S” hooks at each suspension point. Length to suit mounting height as shown on Drawings. d. Suspension system must permit ±13mm (1/2-inch) minimum vertical adjustment after installation. 2. Supports: a. Provide internal safety cable from fixture body to stud in outlet box. b. Carry fixture weight to structure and provide horizontal bracing from suspension points to ceiling framing to prevent sideways shifting. Provide diagonal seismic restraint wires per code. 3. Feed Point: a. Flat-plate canopy to cover outlet box, with holes for support cable and power cord, concealed fasteners to permit splice inspection after installation. b. At the electrified connection provide straight cord feed. Where emergency feed is required, a separate feed point shall be provided. c. Power cord: white multi-conductor cord, parallel to support cable (aircraft cable); within pendant (rigid pendant); or flexible conduit (chain hanger). d. Where emergency feed is required, a separate feed point shall be provided. 4. Non-feed Points: a. 13mm (1/2 inch) o.d. polished chrome end sleeve, inside threaded 1/4”-20, with 50mm (2-inch) diameter. Flat white plate to cover hole in ceiling. Top of cable with ball swaged on end, to fit inside sleeve. b. Contractor to provide support above ceiling as required. 5. Suspension method shall allow adjustment to be made in hanging length to allow for variance in ceiling height. 6. All exposed paintable suspension components shall have the same finish and color as the luminaire housing. 2.09 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES A. Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified. B. Luminaire shall be designed and manufactured specifically for lamp type and configuration provided. C. Recessed: Equip with through wire junction box. Box, ballast and replaceable components shall be accessible from the ceiling opening of the luminaire. D. Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have aiming stops which can be permanently set to position lamp vertically and rotationally. E. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte black. 2.10 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LUMINAIRES A. Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified. B. Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have aiming stops which can be permanently set to position lamp vertically and rotationally.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 9 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

C. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte black. D. Suspension means shall be as indicated in Luminaire Schedule. 2.11 LOW VOLTAGE LUMINAIRES A. Dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified. B. Recessed luminaires: Equip with protective thermal cutout and a through-wiring junction box accessible from the ceiling opening of the luminaire. C. Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have aiming stops which can be permanently set to position lamp vertically and rotationally. D. Transformers: To provide proper lamp voltage to low voltage lamps. 1. Integral: a. Magnetic: Encapsulated for silent operation, securely mounted to the luminaire and removable through the aperture for hard ceiling installations or remote where shown on drawings. b. Electronic: Electronic transformers shall not be provided unless directed in the Luminaire Schedule. 2. Remote: a. Magnetic: Toroidal for silent operation, securely mounted accessible in location shown on drawings. Provide code-sized primary and secondary circuit protection via fuse quantity of secondary circuits as required to serve specified load. Q-Tran or approved. b. Electronic: Electronic transformers shall not be provided unless directed in the Luminaire Schedule. E. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte black. 2.12 TRACK LIGHTING SYSTEMS A. Lighting Track: Extruded aluminum track with extruded poly-vinyl insulator. Twenty amp, copper conductor strips with separate ground to provide electrical and mechanical connection for the specified track mounted luminaires. Number of circuits as indicated in luminaire schedule, with separate neutrals per circuit. Provide connectors, elbows, stems, feed ends, end caps and fittings to make a complete system. B. Track Fittings: To provide positive mechanical and electrical connection for track heads to track. Removable fitting either twists into or snaps into specified lighting track. C. Luminaire dimensions: Proper for the various wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified. D. Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have adjustable aiming which can be set to position lamp vertically and rotationally. E. Transformers: To provide proper lamp voltage to low voltage lamps. All magnetic transformers to be encapsulated for silent operation. Magnetic and electronic transformers to be integrally mounted to the luminaire. F. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. G. Labels: Track and track fittings shall be compatible and be U.L. labeled and listed as a system. 2.13 CUSTOM LUMINAIRES A. The custom luminaire manufacturer shall not have less than five years of continuous experience in the design and manufacture of custom lighting elements of the type and quality shown.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 10 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. The specifications and drawings are intended to convey the features, function and character of the custom luminaire only and do not necessarily illustrate every component or detail required in the finished piece of equipment. C. Details and components that are necessary for the proper appearance and functioning of the custom luminaire shall be included. D. An operational sample prototype luminaire shall be provided for review and revision, if specified, of each custom luminaire type. The sample prototype luminaire shall be installed and connected by the Contractor in a mutually acceptable location for demonstration and evaluation by the design team. The Architect and Lighting Consultant shall be the final judges in determining whether the prototype sample complies with the specifications. 2.14 LED (LIGHT EMITTING DIODE) LUMINAIRES A. General: UL listed and labeled as a system. LEDs, LED Drivers, Power supplies, and all associated components are compatible and operate as a complete system. B. Dimensions: Proper for the wattage noted on the plans and as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer or as specified. C. Power Supply. 1. Integral: a. Rated for use with the LED array specified. Warranty array and driver as an assembly. 5 year full replacement, non-prorated warranty is required on all electronic components. 2. Remote: a. Rated for use with the LED array specified. Warranty array and driver as an assembly. 5 year full replacement, non-prorated warranty is required on all electronic components. D. Controls: Color changing control through 0-10 volt or DMX control as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule and shown on the drawings. Control to be compatible with LED luminaire and associated equipment. E. Finish: All visible surfaces to be of color and texture as directed in Luminaire Schedule. All concealed interior and exterior luminaire surfaces to be matte black or as recommended by the luminaire manufacturer. F. Recessed luminaires: Must be rated for use in recessed applications. If required by the Owner or Design Team, the manufacturer must produce test data proving the product is rated for use in recessed applications. G. CRI: luminaires shall have a minimum Color Rendering Index (CRI) of 80 or higher. H. Color temperature shall be per the luminaire schedule. The color temperature shall not exceed a +/- tolerance of greater than 2 McAdam Elipses. Over the life of the luminaire. I. Adjustable Lamp Mechanisms: To have aiming stops which can be permanently set to position lamp vertically and rotationally. J. Manufacturer shall have at least five years continuous experience in producing LED based lighting systems. K. Testing: LED luminaires must meet the IES LM-79-08 and LM 80-08 testing requirements. The manufacturer shall provide verification of testing compliance upon request of the Design Team, Contractor or Owner. L. Disposal and replacement: The LED manufacturer is responsible for the disposal of expired LED arrays and heat sinks. The fixture must be clearly labeled with return information, disposal procedures and manufacturer disposal contact information. All shipping will be paid for by the Owner. 1. The manufacturer is required to inform the Owner of new power requirements and /or lumen output values if new replacement components prior to shipping replacement parts.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 11 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. Disposal and replacement information will be labeled inside the luminaire and in the project operation and maintenance manuals along with all O&M requirements listed in Division 1 of the specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall meet the general requirements of NFPA 70, National Electric Code. B. Mounting heights specified on drawings: 1. Wall mounted luminaires: Shall be to centerline of luminaire. 2. Pendant mounted luminaires: Shall be to bottom of luminaire unless specifically identified in the Luminaire Schedule or on drawings. C. Support. 1. The luminaires shall be supported by separate means from the building structure and not from the ceiling system, ductwork, piping or other systems. 2. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment will be given by the Architect. D. Level luminaires, align in straight lines, and locate as shown on the architectural elevations and reflected ceiling plan. E. Manufacturer's labels or monograms shall not be visible after luminaire is installed, but must be included for future reference. F. When lamping tungsten halogen luminaires, use silk gloves to insert lamps. G. Tungsten halogen luminaires shall not be energized during construction to prevent dust build up on lamp, socket, and lamp chamber. Lamping shall occur as last stage of construction. H. Recessed luminaires shall have trims which fit neatly and tightly to the surfaces in which they are installed without light leaks or gaps. Where necessary, install heat resistant non-rubber gaskets to prevent light leaks or moisture from entering between luminaires trim and the surface to which they are mounted. 3.02 COORDINATION OF WORK A. The Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plans shall take preference as to the exact placement of the luminaires in the ceiling. B. Determine ceiling types in each area and provide suitable accessories and mounting frames where required for recessed luminaires. Luminaire catalog numbers do not necessarily denote specific mounting accessories for type of ceiling in which a luminaire may be installed. 3.03 AIMING A. Aim luminaires with proper lamps installed. B. Aim all directional luminaires, including but not limited to luminaires described in the Contract Documents or by the luminaire manufacturer as "aimable," "adjustable," or "asymmetric" as follows: 1. To provide the lighting pattern for which the luminaire is designed. 2. Where aiming cannot be determined, request, in writing, clarification from the Architect, indicating luminaires needing clarification. C. Re-aim luminaires as determined by Architect during final project walkthrough. D. Adjustable luminaires shall be installed with “dead” zone of rotation away from intended aiming point. 3.04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Leave luminaires clean at the time of acceptance of the work. If luminaires are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean them at no additional cost. Protective plastic wrap is to be removed from parabolic luminaires just prior to Owner acceptance.

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 12 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Provide fixtures with new lamps all operating at time of final acceptance. Exception: For fluorescent dimming fixtures, provide minimum 100 hour/maximum 200 hour, continuously lit lamps or per ballast manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Provide minimum 10 percent spare stock of all lamps, lenses, power supplies, transformers and ballasts. Label all spares with the luminaire type(s), voltage, and care instructions required. D. Where incandescent lamps are used for construction lighting, the lamps shall be replaced with new lamps just prior to occupancy by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 26 50 00 - 13 Lighting OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems C. Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems D. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems E. Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays For Communications Systems F. Section 27 05 44 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications, Pathways and Cabling G. Section 27 11 00 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings H. Section 27 13 00 - Communications Backbone Cabling I. Section 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling J. Other References SUMMARY A. This section includes general requirements for all Division 27 work and is supplemental and in addition to the requirements of Division 1. B. It is the intent of this Division of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings to describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete communication system. Provide all materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings, but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all communications systems shown on the contract drawings or described herein. Connect equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this specification (or the Owner) under this Division. C. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and competent and experienced technicians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced foreman. D. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. Where conflicting information occurs within the drawings and specifications or between the drawings and specifications, the more expensive alternative shall be used as a basis for bidding and construction. E. See Division 01 for sequence of work. WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. See all other specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to: Cutting and Patching Door Hardware Electronic Safety and Security Equipment Wiring Fire Stopping Mechanical Control Wiring Mechanical Equipment Painting, Refinishing and Finishes Temporary Power SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION A. Comply with Division 01 Sustainable Construction requirements.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

B. Manufacturers must be members pricing of the "Green Supplier Network". CODES, STANDARDS, ACTS, AGENCIES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. The following codes, associations, acts, agencies and standards bodies are referenced in the Division 27 specifications. Perform all work and provide materials and equipment in accordance with the contract documents, and with the latest referenced codes, associations, acts, agencies and standards bodies listed below. B. The following codes, acts and agencies shall be complied with as required by law: Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70 2014) International Building Code (IBC) (replaced Uniform Building Code in 2000) Federal Communications Commission Rules and Regulations (FCC) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), current edition National Electrical Code (NFPA Article 70) (NEC), current edition Lightning Protection Code (NFPA 78), current edition National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), current edition Oregon Electrical Specialty Code. Oregon Administrative Rules (OAR), Chapter 918, Division 305: Electrical Codes and Standards. The NEC and OAR ammendments form the “Oregon Electrical Specialty Code”, current edition Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Oregon Occupational Safety and Health Division (Oregon OSHA) Local AHJ (includes city/county/state inspectors and State/municipal fire marshals): State of Oregon City of Salem, Oregon Marion County, Oregon C. Install the communications systems based on the following codes: NFPA 70 (2014) National Electrical Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. NFPA 99 Healthcare Facilities Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. IBC International Building Code as adopted and amended by the Local Jurisdiction. D. The following organizations, associations and standards bodies and their standards shall be adhered to: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) BICSI (A Telecommunications Association) Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Healthcare Facilities Code (NFPA 99) Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) E. Install the communications systems based on the following communications specific standards: ANSI/BICSI 002-2011: Data Center Design and Implementation Best Practices. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2006: Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling. BICSI: Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual, current edition. BICSI: LAN and Internetworking Design Manual, current edition. BICSI: Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, current edition. BICSI: Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual, current edition. BICSI: Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, current edition. BICSI: Electronic Safety & Security Design Reference Manual, current edition. FCC Part 68: Connection of Terminal Equipment to Telephone Network. FCC Part 76.611: CFR Title 47 Radiation Leakage Standards

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 2 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

IEEE 802.11 Wireless Local Area Network Standard, including the IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac standards. NEC: NFPA 70, current edition. NEMA: VE1 & VE2 TIA-222 Series: Structural Standard for Antenna Supporting Structures and Antennas. TIA-455 Series: Standard Test Procedures For Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting And Terminating Devices, current edition. TIA-526 Series: Standard Test Procedures For Fiber Optic Systems, current edition. TIA-568-C Series: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current edition. TIA-569 Series: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces TIA-598 Series: Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding, current edition. TIA-606-B: Administration Standard for CommercialTelecommunications Infrastructure, current edition. TIA-607-B: Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, current edition. TIA-758 Series: Customer-owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, current edition. TIA-942: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers, current edition. TIA-1019 Series: Installation, Alteration, and Maintenance of Antenna Supporting Structures and Antennas. TIA-1096 Series: Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Connector Requirements for Connections of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network. TIA-1179: Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, current edition. TIA: Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) (related to the above TIA standards). UL 2043 and UL 2239 F. The referenced codes establish a minimum level of requirements. Where provision of the various codes conflict with each other, the more stringent provision shall govern. If any conflict occurs between referenced codes and this specification, the codes are to govern. Compliance with code requirements shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications which may be in excess of requirements of the governing codes and rules and not contrary to same. G. Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work by the inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection. ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS A. When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation to the work for Division 27 they shall have the following meanings:

Item Meaning

Accepted/Acceptable Work or materials conforming with the intent of the project, and in general, conforming to the pertinent information in the Construction Documents. Accessible Ceiling Acoustical tile hanging ceilings (“Hard-lid” ceilings, even when provided with access panels, are not considered an Accessible Ceiling.) Approved/Approval The written approval of the Engineer. Accessible/Easy access Access attained without requiring extensive removal of other materials to gain access. Agreement The contractual agreement between the Owner and the Contractor. AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 3 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

ARMM Armored Riser Cables BCT Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications BET Building Entrance Terminal Boxes Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes. CCR Campus Communications Room Code All applicable codes currently enforced at project location. Communications Infrastructure System: A communications Cabling System combined with a Communications Raceway System. Compression Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic or equivalent) crimping tool. Concealed Hidden from sight in interstitial building spaces, chases, furred spaces, shafts, crawl spaces, etc. Connection All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully operational. Construction Documents Collective term for the entire set of bound or unbound material describing the construction and services required, including all Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the contract, and modifications issued after Execution of the Contract (such as change orders, construction change directives, supplemental instructions, etc.). The Contractor The party responsible for providing the system(s) as indicated herein. Drawings The graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including (but not limited to) plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and/or diagrams. EF Entrance Facilities Engineer/Consultant The party responsible for producing the communications system(s) Construction Documents. Exposed Not concealed (see above) and not installed underground. Exterior Location Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building weather protective membrane. Final Completion The date when the Engineer confirms in writing that the Contractor has completed the work in accordance with the Construction Documents, including completion of all punch list items, cleanup work and delivery of all required guarantees, warranties, licenses, releases and other required deliverables. Fully Operational Tested, approved, and operating to the satisfaction of the AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents. Furnish To purchase, supply, and deliver to the project materials in new and operable condition, ready for installation. GE Ground Equalizer GEC Grounding Electrode Conductor Governing Requirements Collective term for regulations, laws, ordinances, codes, rules, standards, requirements, and guidelines that govern the installation and inspection of the work defined in the Contract Documents. See “Part 1 – General, 1.05 Codes, Standards, Acts, Agencies, Permits, Inspections Fees” herein. Governing Authorities Entities or their representatives charged with formation and/or enforcement of Governing Requirements, such as the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). HH Handhole Install To place in final position in fully operable, tested condition.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 4 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

Inside Plant (ISP) Infrastructure within a building; includes raceways, cabling, termination components and racks/cabinets. Mfr. Manufacturer. MH Man hole NEC National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association, Publication #70. OSP Outside Plant Noted Shown or specified in the contract documents. NRTL Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Or Equivalent Materials approved for use by the Engineer and which are dimensionally suitable and operationally identical to the specified item. Outside Plant (OSP) Infrastructure exterior to a building. Owner The Owner and the Owner's designated representative(s). Provide Furnish and install. The Project The total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part, and which may include construction by the Owner and/or separate contractors. Required As required by code, AHJ, contract documents, or manufacturer for the particular installation to be fully operational. Substantial Completion The date when all work required by the Construction Documents shall be complete (subject to the final punch list to be prepared by the Engineer) and on which the applicable jurisdictional authorities have issued a temporary certification of occupancy. Section An individual section of the Specifications. Shown on Drawings Noted, indicated, scheduled, detailed, or any other written reference made on the Drawings. Specifications The portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work and performance of related services. Specification Section(s) One or more sections of the Specifications. Structured Cabling System (SCS) Alternative term for Communications Cabling System Wiring Raceway, conductors and connections. The Work The construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall meet jointly with the Architectural and Engineering firms to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation, low voltage rough-in and infrastructure details, communications room size and locations, as well as layout and installation for all Low Voltage Communications Systems as directed by the Architectural and Engineering firms. B. Coordinate work with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work on the project. Examine all drawings and specifications of other trades for construction details and coordination. Make every reasonable effort to provide timely notice of work affecting other trades to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements, dimensions, openings, block-outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or necessitate work-around methods. C. Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections furnished under other divisions of the specification and by the Owner. Provide all wiring in accordance

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 5 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

with specific equipment requirements. Immediately advise the Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price. D. Special attention is called to the following items. Coordinate all conflicts prior to installation: Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all communications outlets and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that communications outlets, and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items. Recessing and concealing communications materials in CMU walls, concrete construction and precast construction. In every telecommunication room with either active or passive equipment the Contractor shall monitor the work of all trades to assure that the space and clearance requirements of code are met. Review specifications for other Divisions of the work to determine where other Divisions are requiring communication connections. Verify provisions shown on contract drawings by examining shop drawing submittals of other Divisions prior to submission to the Owner. Do not proceed with ordering of supporting equipment, until characteristics are verified. Proceed with rough only after verification of shop drawings. E. Digital format copies of bid drawings will be furnished to the successful bidder. Augment bid documents with additional information to ensure coordination between trades. Provide digital format communications systems drawings showing all ceiling devices, fixtures, raceways and cable tray locations and routing to mechanical contractor to be used for coordination drawings provided by mechanical contractor. Include dimensions and elevations of devices, fixtures, raceway and cable tray. F. Furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and connections and all other materials required for the communication systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon completion of the project. Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location. Where routings of major raceways and telecommunication pathways are indicated on plan sheets, the routing information supplements the information on diagrams. If no routing information is shown, route the systems in a manner that will coordinate with new and existing infrastructure and the work of other trades. G. Consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all communication and electrical equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. Make any minor changes (less than 6'-6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices, wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough-in. H. Provide inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and/or raceways as required. Coordinate the installation thereof with other trades. I. The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation. WARRANTY A. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract. CORRECTION OF WORK A. Within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of The Work, the Contractor shall correct any work found to be not in conformance with the Contract Documents promptly after written notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive acceptance of the work under this Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 6 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submittals and Shop Drawings: Schedule so as not to delay construction schedule and no later than 60 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts. Allow two weeks for review for each submittal and resubmittal. Incomplete submittals and shop drawings which do not comply with these requirements will be returned for correction, revision and resubmittal. See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc. B. Submit in a three ring binder with hardboard covers. Product Submittals shall show: Indicate listing by UL or other approved testing agency. Highlight with yellow or blue marker adequate information to demonstrate materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents. Review and check all material prior to submittal and stamp "Reviewed and Approved". Provide Manufacturer and/or lab certification that all product materials are PCB-free. C. Shop drawings shall show: Ratings of items and systems. How the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project. System layout floor plans with complete device layout, point-to-point wiring connection between all components of the system, wire sizes and color coding. Coordinate with other division shop drawings and submittals. Identify interface points and indicate method of connection. Communications Rooms: Submit 1/2" = 1'0" detail plans and wall elevations of each room showing actual size of equipment in place. Identify coordinating elements such as structural beams or mechanical systems. Submittals shall show coordination among all suppliers of equipment, including power components, fire alarm, racks, nurse call, public address, security, etc. Submit room layouts at same time as material submittals, and prior to installation of any equipment. D. The Contractor agrees: Submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders. The purpose of submittals and shop drawings by the Contractor is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept. Submittals demonstrate equipment and material Contractor intends to furnish and install and indicate detailing fabrication and installation methods Contractor intends to use. To accept all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this Division of the specifications meet, in full, all requirements of the contract documents. To pay for Engineers review cost of submittal review beyond one resubmittal. E. The Engineer's review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Corrections or comments made during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: Dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of this work with that of all other trades; performing this work in a safe and satisfactory manner. F. Submittals and shop drawings are required per the submittals schedule at the end of this Section. PROJECT CLOSE-OUT A. Coordinate with close-out provisions in Division 01 - General Requirements. B. Request For Final Punchlist To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to Sparling/Stantec/Stantec, Inc. stating; "The communications work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are complete, items a. - i. in the Project Punchlist Procedure paragraph in Section 27 05

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 7 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

00 Common Work Results For Communications, Part 1 - General, 1.11.B.2 are complete and the project is ready for final punch list observation." Project Punchlist Procedure: Perform the following procedures for project closeout of communications portions of work. Perform testing, tests and documentation per Section 26 01 26 - Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems. Color code junction boxes per Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes For Electrical Systems. Obtain final electrical permit inspection. Include copies in O & M manual. Provide written warranty in O & M per the General Conditions of the Contract. Furnish Record Drawings per this section. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. Furnish O & M Manuals per this section. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. Give instruction periods to Owner's personnel per this section. Obtain signature on Job Completion Form. To request final acceptance of project, fill out Job Completion Form in this section and forward to Sparling/Stantec/Stantec. Note: If inspectors have not signed form, a copy of signed-off permits will suffice. Include with Job Completion Form, a copy of the final punch list with the word "DONE", and the date and Contractor's initials after each item on the list. COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS A. Provide O&M manuals required in Division 01 - General Requirements plus one manual for Sparling/Stantec for all equipment furnished under Division 27 - Electrical of the specifications. Submit a preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Deliver final bound corrected copies as noted in Division 01 - General Requirements plus a copy to Sparling/Stantec 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer with the Job Completion Form. B. The information included must be the exact equipment installed. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. C. These O&M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project. Present and arrange information in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information provided shall include but not be limited to the following: Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc. Description of system configuration and operation including component identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawings(s) may be required for this purpose. Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate. Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions. Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and anticipated useful life (if appropriate). Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not acceptable. Shop drawings. Wiring diagrams. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation. A complete list of local (nearest) manufacturer representative and distributor contacts for each type of equipment and manufacturer. Include name, company, address, phone, fax, e-mail address, and web site.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 8 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

D. Furnish complete wiring diagrams for each system for the specific system installed under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable unless revised to indicate the exact field installation. E. Group the information contained in the manuals in an orderly arrangement by specification index. Provide a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. Bind the completed manuals with hard board covers not exceeding 5" thick. (Provide two or more volumes if required.) Signal and communication systems shall be in separate volumes. Imprint the covers with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of completion. Imprint the back edge with the name of the job, Owner and year of completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with screw post binding. RECORD DRAWINGS A. Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this purpose alone. Mark record prints with red erasable pencil. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the work as originally shown. Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab raceways and stub-outs. Note changes of directions and locations, by dimensions and elevations, as utilities are actually installed. Include addenda items and revisions made during construction. Erase conditions not constructed or "X-out" and annotate "not constructed" to clearly convey the actual "as constructed" condition. Organize record drawings sheets in manageable sets, bind and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. B. Transmit the record drawing set to the Architect at the completion of the work. Final payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these prints have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect. C. Transfer the changes marked up on the record prints into AutoCAD 2010 (or higher) at the completion of the work. Provide two (2) sets of prints, one set of fixed line reproducible drawings and one set of AutoCAD drawing files on CD Rom. Transmit drawings, CAD files and the record drawing mark-ups to the Architect. Final payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these documents have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect. FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST A. Submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Sparling/Stantec Engineer, a Sparling/Stantec Job Completion Form (form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final acceptance of the electrical work is requested. PRODUCTS GENERAL A. All materials and equipment installed shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless otherwise permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Inspector). B. All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified. Materials shall be designated to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed. C. Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the manufacturer's latest standard design. D. All materials, equipment and systems furnished that include provisions for storing, displaying, reporting, interfacing, inputting, or functioning using date specific information shall perform properly in all respects regardless of the century. Any interface to other new or existing

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 9 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

materials, equipment or systems shall function properly and shall be century compliant, both in regards to information sent and received. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. No Substitute: Where a specified product is indicated "no substitute", it is the intent of this specification to require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation or as specifically requested by the owner. To this end, for certain materials and systems no substitution will be allowed. B. Prior to Bid Opening: Acceptance of products other than those specified will be issued by addendum to the bid documents only after the following requirements are met and the proposed listed material is determined to meet or exceed the requirements: Requests for listing to be original material, clearly indicating the product fully complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt tip marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested. Samples shall be submitted if requested. Requests shall be received 10 days prior to bid opening. Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract documents will not be considered. C. After Award of Contract: Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following conditions: The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after contract is awarded and the specified products can not be delivered to the project to meet the Owner's construction schedule. The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i.e., due to strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacturer, acts of God. The specified product is no longer manufactured. There is compelling economic advantage to the Owner. There is compelling sustainable or environmental advantage. D. In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical or communication systems or building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign, and updating of record drawings required to accommodate the required modifications. EXECUTION PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Handle all equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged equipment. B. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, undercover in a weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instruction. CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION A. Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools. B. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 10 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to communications penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to maintain fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 section "Firestopping". PAINTING A. Items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or installation shall be refinished with touchup paint selected to match installed equipment finish. EQUIPMENT CONNECTION A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by owner, provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully operational upon completion of the project. Provide disconnect switch as required by code whenever an equipment connection is shown on the drawings. B. Investigate existing equipment to be relocated and provide new connections as required. C. Obtain rough-in requirements for equipment furnished under other divisions of this specification prior to roughing-in. Review shop drawings and submittals of other Divisions to determine requirements. CLEAN UP A. Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by this work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, other workers, the building or the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish equal to the original applied. Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Equipment installed prior to final clean-up shall be cleaned by the contractor. Jacks and patch panels that have construction dirt and dust shall be cleaned to like new condition. B. Materials recycling and salvage: Recycle all scrap metal. Salvage operable equipment removed from site and deliver to local resale organization. TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate that all electrical equipment operates as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Perform tests in the presence of the Architect, Owner or Engineer. Provide all instruments, manufacturer's operating instructions and personnel required to conduct the tests. Repair or replace any electrical equipment that fails to operate as specified and or in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 00 - 11 COMMON WORK RESULTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications C. Division 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes bonding and grounding requirements for all Division 27 work and is supplemental and in addition to the requirements of Division 1 and Division 26. B. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and competent and experienced technicians shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced foreman. C. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. Where conflicting information occurs within the drawings and specifications or between the drawings and specifications, the more expensive alternative shall be used as a basis for bidding and construction. D. See Division 01 for sequence of work. 1.03 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.04 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.05 CODES, STANDARDS, ACTS, AGENCIES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. Comply with Codes, Standards, Acts, Agencies, Permits and Inspection Fees as detailed in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.06 DEFINITIONS & ABBREVIATIONS A. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer B. AHJ: Authorities Having Jurisdiction C. ARMM Cables: Armored Riser Cable D. BC: Bonding Conductor E. BCT: Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications F. BET: Building Entrance Terminal G. CCR: Campus Communication Room H. EF: Entrance Facilities I. GE: Grounding Equalizer J. GEC: Grounding Electrode Conductor K. HH: Handholes L. NRTL: Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory M. OSP: Outside Plant N. MH: Maintenance holes / Man holes

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

O. SCS: Structured Cable System is the complete collective configuration of a voice and data structured cabling system, copper and fiber cabling and associated hardware at a given location P. TBB: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone Q. TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Busbar R. TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar S. TO: Telecommunications Outlet T. TR: Telecommunication Room U. VAR: Vendor Authorized Reseller V. WAO: Work Area Outlet W. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for additional Definitions and Abbreviations. 1.07 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for procurement, installation and commissioning of the telecommunications structured grounding system including, but not limited to equipment racks, busbars and pathways, and shall install all necessary grounding hardware to properly ground the equipment in the telecommunications rooms, equipment rooms, data rooms, EF, BET, as well as all cable trays in halls and corridors per current codes, standards and manufacturer installation requirements, and these specifications, and as directed by the Architectural and Electrical Engineering firms. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install a bonded grounding system. 1. Contractor shall not attach grounding conductors from the TMGB, TGB or telecommunications protectors to the main electrical building grounding busbar, grounding electrode conductor, or any element of the main electrical service distribution panel. 2. Contractor shall provide the conductor in a position to allow the Electrical Contractor to make the final connection of an information network grounding system to the electrical grounding system. 3. This specification does not address overall lightning protection of a structure, with respect to air terminals, surge arrestors on power lines, etc. C. The Contractor shall not make modifications to the existing telecommunications grounding system without notifying the Architectural and Engineering firms in advance and obtaining prior, formal written approval before execution of a modification. D. The overall purpose for the telecommunications bonding infrastructure is to equalize potentials between metallic surfaces predominantly in the event of lighting, ac electrical system faults, electromagnetic induction, or electrostatic discharge. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry. Installation must be per manufacturer environmental warranty requirements. B. All gas pipe lines shall be identified and tagged "Gas Line: Do NOT bond ground conductors to this pipe". 1.09 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall meet jointly with the Architectural and Engineering firms to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation, low voltage rough-in and infrastructure details, communications room size and locations, as well as layout and installation for all Low Voltage Communications Systems as directed by the Architectural and Engineering firms.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

B. Coordinate work with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work on the project. Examine all drawings and specifications of other trades for construction details and coordination. Make every reasonable effort to provide timely notice of work affecting other trades to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements, dimensions, openings, block-outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or necessitate work-around methods. C. Adjust arrangements and locations of required devices as needed. D. The Contractor shall coordinate installation time frames and final location(s) of all devices with the Architectural and Engineering firms and all other trades prior to starting installation work. E. Refer to Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications for additional coordination requirements. 1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The grounding and bonding infrastructure of a telecommunication installation is an essential part of the overall telecommunication system. B. The information is this specification does not replace any federal, state, local or applicable codes, laws, and regulations. Specific applications may contain variables that are beyond the control of this specification. C. The primary responsibility of the telecommunication grounding and bonding system is to safeguard personnel, property, and equipment from foreign electrical voltages and currents. ("Foreign", refers to voltage or currents that normally are not carried by, or expected in, the telecommunications distribution systems). D. The Contractor shall consider the following in their low voltage design: 1. Lightning 2. Ground potential rise 3. Contact with electrical power circuits 4. Electromagnetic interference (EMI) 5. Radio frequency interference (RFI) 6. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) E. The Contractor shall become familiar with the specified equipment manufacturer's requirements for grounding. A faulty grounding design may result in injury to personnel and or damage to equipment. If the Contractor finds a conflict between a local safety code and the manufacture's requirements, the conflict shall be resolved with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and the Architectural and Engineering firms before proceeding with installation. F. Grounding is the establishment of a reference for electrical power source (alternating current (AC) or direct current (DC)), the electrical equipment, or both. G. Bonding is the connection intended to equalize safely and effectively the potential difference between two metallic items (e.g. a telecommunication ground Busbar and a communication cable tray). H. The primary purpose of the equipment grounding system is to enhance personnel safety and reduce the likelihood of a fire hazard by facilitating the operation of overcurrent devices such as circuit breakers. This is achieved by reducing the amount of impedance across the equipment grounding conductor pathway. The equipment grounding system provides a reference for the logic (chassis) ground within the equipment, which benefits the steady-state operations electronic devices. I. The reliable operation of the information transport systems is dependent on the integrity of the equipment grounding system. J. Bonding: The main telecommunications busbar, referred to as the TMGB, shall be bonded to the building ground and structural steel within the network room or entrance facility. All telecommunications room busbar(s), referred to as the TGB, shall be bonded to the TMGB via

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

a TBB when a TBB is provided. Where bonding of the TGB to the TMGB via a TBB is not possible, the Contractor shall bond the TGB in each telecommunications space to the ac electrical panel board supplying AC power for that room, and shall provide a supplemental bonding connection to the Grounding Electrode System (e.g., structural steel). 1.11 SYSTEMS COMPONENTS A. The main component of the equipment grounding system is the equipment grounding conductor, available in many forms including: 1. Bare copper conductors 2. Insulated conductors 3. TMGB (Telecommunication Main Grounding Busbar) 4. TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Busbar) 5. Metallic conduits and the nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) listed fittings. 6. AC electrical panel boards and the NRTL-listed fittings 7. Junction boxes 8. Outlets boxes 9. Metallic raceway 1.12 REQUIREMENTS A. Any design may need to be enhanced for additional capacity beyond the scope of a current project to address the overall building needs. B. Establishing a suitable network ground is critical in grounding network equipment. A network ground is always required. Refer to TIA-607-B Series standard. The telecommunications grounding system shall have a single point of attachment at the main electrical grounding electrode conductor. Other attachments to the system are made to the structural building steel The grounding system for the building shall be set as detailed by TIA-607-B Series, without deviation. All questions about grounding shall be directed to the Electrical Engineering Firm during the design and installation phases. C. Design for adequate slack in a coil at the electrical service, at the grounding electrode or the Grounding Electrode System for the Electrical Contractor to make the connection. D. Bonding: 1. Specify all necessary grounding hardware to properly ground the equipment in the telecom/network spaces per codes, standards, methodologies, and specifications. 2. Self-tapping screws, or any other type of screw, shall not be used to form bonds or attach grounding hardware. All bonds shall be irreversible compression connectors (H-tap), irreversible compression connectors with bolts or exothermic welds. 3. Bond the TGB to the TBB with an appropriately sized grounding conductor, using irreversible compression connectors (H-tap) or exothermic weld on the TBB side, and irreversible two-hole compression lug or exothermic weld on the TGB side. Where a TBB is not installed, a. bond the TGB to the AC electrical branch panel board serving the space the TGB is located in (this connection to be made by the Electrical Contractor), and b. Provide a supplemental bond to the Grounding Electrode System (e.g., structural steel). 1.13 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. All grounding conductors shall be sized such that if the maximum current possible for the grounding electrode conductor passes through the telecommunications grounding system, the voltage drop over the grounding conductors shall not exceed 40 volts. B. Contractor shall not make modifications to the existing telecommunications grounding system without written approval from Electrical Engineering Firm in advance. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grounding and bonding hardware shall be of manufacturers specified by this document. 214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

1.15 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittal information in accordance with Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications and supplementary requirements described in this specification. B. Product Data: Provide the following: 1. Product data on all bonding and grounding material and components. Indicate listings, approvals and attachment methods. 2. Test Equipment Product Data: Provide a list of testing devices and indicate what equipment will be tested with each device. C. Closeout Submittals - In accordance with Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials shall be stored according to manufacturer's recommendations. In addition, any materials and miscellaneous devices must be stored in a location protected from vandalism and weather. If any materials and miscellaneous attachment devices are to be stored outside, it must be covered with provision for ventilation to prevent condensation and for protection from weather and vandalism. 1.17 DRAWINGS A. It shall be understood that the included details and drawings provided with the specification packages are diagrammatic. Locations are approximate unless specifically dimensioned. They are included to show the intent of the specifications and to aid the telecommunications Contractor in bidding the job. The Contractor shall be responsible for field coordinating the final location(s) with the Architectural and Engineering firms and all other trades prior to starting installation work. B. The telecommunications Contractor shall make allowance in the bid proposal to cover whatever work is required to comply with the intent of the plans and specifications. C. The telecommunications Contractor shall verify all dimensions at the site. D. Prior to submitting the bid, the telecommunications Contractor shall call to the attention of the Architectural and Engineering firms any materials or apparatus the telecommunications Contractor believes to be inadequate and to any necessary items of work omitted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: 1. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI). a. TGB 2 inches x 12 inches, P/N: 13622-012 b. TGB 4 inches x 12 inches, P/N: 40153-012 c. TMGB 4 inches x 20 inches, P/N: 40153-020 d. Cable Runway Ground Strap, P/N: 40164-001 or field manufactured equivalent e. Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal, P/N: 40167-001 2. Panduit: a. #12-24x1/2” green bonding screw, P/N: RGTBSG-C B. Busbar(s): Provide one (1) TMGB 20 inches at the main telecommunications entrance facility room. The designer shall specify a TGB 12 inches for all other network rooms. The TMGB shall be bonded to an appropriately sized Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT) and TBB with an irreversible compression connector (H-tap) or exothermic welds. Exothermic welds are preferred for these bonds. 1. TGB with insulated mounting brackets. a. CPI P/N: 13622-012. BICSI & ANSI/TIA/EIA Grounding Busbars, 12 inches x 2 inches

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 5 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

1) Note: this bar is only 2 inches wide and may not provide enough connection points for larger telecommunications rooms. Where quantities of connection points are not adequate, provide (CPI) P/N: 40153-012, 12 inches x 4 inches. 2) Contractor shall be responsible for properly sizing the TGB. b. Conductor terminations to TGB shall be made with minimum #6AWG green sheath insulated copper ground wire. Terminations shall be with 2-hole, long-barrel lug with viewing window. Double-crimp lugs on conductor using mechanical crimper. Lug shall be fastened with two bolts and double or self-locking nuts. All metals shall be ground to bare metal. Anti-corrosion compound shall be applied between dissimilar metals. 2. Conductors a. Provide and install a grounding conductor from the AC electrical branch circuit panel board serving the room, and a supplemental grounding conductor from the electrode grounding system (building steel). Size the grounding conductor per NEC Table 250.122. Connection of the grounding conductor to the TGB shall be with two-hole compression lugs with bolts, nuts and cut washers, or by exothermic weld. b. Provide and install an individual #6AWG green sheath insulated copper ground wire from the TMGB or TGB to each data rack, and to the cable ladder tray within each telecommunications room or BET. 1) Bonding conductors between TMGB or TGB and data racks and cable tray shall be connected with 2-hole, long-barrel lug with viewing window. Double- crimp lugs on conductor using mechanical crimper. Lug shall be fastened with two bolts and double or self-locking nuts. All metals shall be ground to bare metal. Anti-corrosion compound shall be applied between dissimilar metals. c. Bonding connections shall be made directly to the points being bonded. d. Unnecessary connections or splices in bonding conductors shall be avoided, but when necessary, use an approved connection and position it in an accessible location. 3. Grounding Screws, Panduit P/N: RGTBSG-C. a. In each Telecommunications Space, provide (100) #12-24x1/2" green bonding screw, Panduit p/n: RGTBSG-C to replace stock screw for all hardware, material and equipment to be located in telecommunications racks. Install screw in upper right position for each item installed in the telecommunications rack, including but not limited to fiber distribution units, copper patch panels, horizontal wire managers, equipment shelves, UPS units, automatic transfer switches, power distribution units and network switches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF THE WORK A. Coordinate as required in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications B. Meet with the Architectural and Engineering firms and all other trades prior to starting installation work to exchange information and agree on schedules, location of all devices, details of equipment arrangements, and installation interfaces. C. Record the agreements reached in these meetings and distribute the records to all participants. D. Adjust the arrangements and locations of equipment and cabling supports in affected rooms and space to accommodate and optimize the room or space arrangements. 3.02 INTERFACES WITH OTHER WORK A. As required in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 6 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

1. Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be installed complying with EMI clearance requirements. 2. Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations through rated fire walls are made using products approved for type of wall penetrated. 3. Prepare all wall penetrations in regards to radiation standards if required. 4. Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures is adequate for each pathway. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Contractor shall field coordinate all work with the Architectural and Engineering firms. 3.04 TMGB/TGB A. Position the TMGB/TGB 6” above cable runway to protect from physical damage from moving equipment, foot traffic, floor cleaning, etc. Position the TMGB/TGB close to the entrance of the AC electrical branch circuit panel board and Grounding Electrode System bonding conductors, or to the entrance of the TBB bonding conductor. 3.05 CABLE TRAYS IN EQUIPMENT ROOMS A. Bond and ground cable tray and/or ladder rack to TMGB/TGB with a minimum #6 AWG green sheath insulated copper ground wire with two-hole compression lugs, as described in 2.01(B)(2) above. B. Sections shall be bolted together with manufacturer specified, UL Listed hardware. Sections shall be bonded together with CPI Cable Runway Ground Strap Kit, P/N: 40164-001 or field manufactured equivalent. 1. Conductor shall be minimum #6AWG stranded copper ground wire with green insulator jacket. Connector shall be sized appropriately for conductor and shall have two-hole compression lugs, as described in 2.01(B)(2) above. 2. Lugs shall be double-crimped on conductor using mechanical crimper. Lugs shall be fastened to cable tray sections with two bolts and double or self-locking nuts. 3. All metals shall be ground to bare metal. 4. Conductive, anti-corrosion compound shall be applied between dissimilar metals. 3.06 RACKS/ENCLOSURES A. Ground each rack/enclosure to TMGB/TGB with a dedicated minimum #6awg green insulated copper ground wire. B. Ground two-post racks using provided double-post grounding terminals within rack channel. 1. Rack channel with grounding posts shall be located on the right side of the rack, when facing the rack front. 2. Connector to grounding posts shall be two-hole compression lugs, as described in 2.01(B)(2) above. 3. Lugs shall be fastened to rack channel with double or self-locking nuts. 4. All metals shall be ground to bare metal. Conductive, anti-corrosion compound shall be applied between dissimilar metals. C. Where rack does not have integrated double-post grounding terminals: 1. Provide CPI Two Mounting Hole Ground Terminal Block, P/N: 40167-001 to top of the back-side of the right rack channel, when facing the rack front. 2. Use Panduit #12-24x1/2" green bonding screw, P/N: RGTBSG-C to mount grounding terminal block to rack channel. 3. Channel shall be ground to bare metal. 4. Strip ground conductor to permit ¼” bare copper at both ends of ground terminal block. 5. Apply conductive, anti-corrosion compound between ground block terminal and rack channel, and to conductor and inside of ground block terminal. 214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

3.07 BONDING A. The Contractor shall not bond to gas piping, sprinkler system pipes, cold water pipes, or electrical panels. B. Specify all necessary grounding hardware to properly ground the equipment in the network room per codes, standards, methodologies, and specifications. C. Self-tapping screws, or any other type of screw, shall not be used to form bonds or attach grounding hardware. All bonds shall be irreversible two-hole compression connectors, exothermic welds, or bolts. D. Within telecom and server rooms, Contractor shall install a grounding busbar (TGB) as per the drawings and connect a minimum #6 AWG green sheath insulated copper ground wire from the TGB to the TBB, or to the AC electrical branch circuit panel board and electrode grounding system. Refer to 2.01(B)(2) above, and comply with NEC Table 250.122 and TIA-607 Series for proper sizing of conductors. E. Bond equipment to TGB as required with a minimum #6 AWG green sheath insulated copper ground wire. F. All grounding connectors shall be sanded to bare metal. G. Provide and install cutting or star washers on all metal equipment connected to the TGB or TMGB. H. Copper and Alloy connectors and other dissimilar metals shall be ground to bare metal, cleaned and coated with antioxidant prior to connection. I. Provide and install irreversible two-hole compression lug connectors as described in 2.01(B)(2) above. J. In each Telecommunications Space, replace (1) stock screw with a #12-24x1/2" green bonding screw for all hardware, material and equipment to be located in telecommunications racks. Install screw in upper right position for each item installed in the telecommunications rack, including but not limited to fiber distribution unites, copper patch panels, horizontal wire managers, equipment shelves, UPS units, automatic transfer switches and network switches. Refer to 2.01(B)(3) above. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Contractor shall test all bonds for a maximum impedance of 0.1ohm using a two-point impedance test. B. Contractor shall remediate any bond above 0.1ohm impedance. C. All bonds installed by the Contractor shall be tested for impedance with an earth ground resistance test in its two point setup, such as a LEM Handy GEO tester. Place a QA label (with date and inspector) in proximity to each bond tested. D. Test all grounding conductors, once installed, for current. Measure AC and bi-directional DC current. Report any AC current over 1 Amp. Report any DC current, in either direction, over 500 milliamps. E. The Contractor shall test the impedance of all bonds of the grounding system, including cable armor bonding to ground. The impedance of a two-point bonding test across any bond shall not exceed 0.1 ohm. The Contractor shall remediate any bond(s) over this limit or which contribute to a total impedance exceeding 0.1 ohm from any point in the network room to the busbar in that room. F. The Contractor shall not bend the grounding conductor wires into tight angles. Changes in direction shall be of the highest radius possible. The Contractor shall not create 180° bends in any grounding conductor END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 26- 8 GROUNDING AND BONDING OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. As noted in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes discrete J-hooks, slings and related accessories for supporting communications and other low voltage cables above accessible ceilings and below accessible raised floor systems. 1.03 REFERENCES A. As noted in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittal information in accordance with Section 27 0500 - Common Work Results For Communications and supplementary requirements described in this specification. B. Product Data: Provide the following: 1. Product data on all cable support devices and accessories. Indicate materials, finishes, load ratings, dimensions, listings, approvals and attachment methods. C. Shop Drawings: For projects where the low voltage systems cable pathways are not shown on the drawings, they are to be contractor designed per Part 3. The contractor shall prepare and submit proposed main pathway (20 cables or more), layout drawings for review and approval by the Owner's representative prior to installing supports. Shop drawings shall: 1. Indicate pathways on plan view showing pathway coordination with mechanical components, lighting components, sprinkler head components, plumbing components and electrical components. 2. Include elevations and sections to indicate space allocations and coordination with work of other trades. 3. Include details to describe the different support configurations, accessories, attaching means and cable groupings. D. Closeout Submittals – In accordance with Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hangars, supports and accessories shall be listed to Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc Standard 2239. B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Contractor shall set up a pre-installation meeting to discuss communication and other low voltage cable support layout work and installation guidelines. Contractor shall organize meeting a minimum of 30 days prior to initiating hangars and support installation work. Attendees shall include general contractor, cable tray contractor, cable contractor(s), mechanical contractor, sprinkler contractor low voltage system vendors, Architect and Engineer. Purpose of meeting shall be to coordinate work between the parties to have a consistent layout for all communications and low voltage system cables, minimize interferences and to make cable system accessibility for future Owner modifications and maintenance high priority issue for all installers. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 29 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

B. Examine drawings and existing conditions above ceilings and include additional supports in bid price to avoid ducts, pipes, conduits, etc. Installation in existing ceilings if very difficult. Include extra labor time involved in bid price. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIDE BASE CABLE SUPPORTS A. J hooks - Galvanized loop with integrated cable retainers, complies with TIA structured cabling system requirements, as indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. B. Accessories: Provide applicable accessories to independently support "J" hooks from structure. This includes extender bracket for mounting multiple J hooks on a single support, fasteners and clamps for connecting to wall, beams, rods, dedicated support wires and C and Z Purlins as required for specific construction. C. Manufacturer. 1. ERICO Caddy CableCatTM series 2. Chatsworth RapidTrakTM series 3. Or approved equivalent. 2.02 SOFT CABLE SLING SUPPORTS A. Adjustable sling cable supports suitable for plenums. 4 inch diameter loop for (220) 4-pair UTP or 2-strand fiber optic cables or inner duct. 6 inch diameter loop for (425) 4-pair UTP or 2- strand fiber optic cables or inner duct. B. Accessories: Provide applicable accessories to independently support slings from structure. This includes fasteners and clamps for connecting to walls, beams, rods, ceiling tee bars, dedicated support wires and C and Z Purlins as required for specific construction C. Material 1. Construction: Polyethylene strands woven and laminated, reinforced seams, connected steel mounting and fastening hardware. 2. Suitable for plenum location installation. D. Manufacturer 1. ERICO Caddy CableCatTM 425 series 2. Or approved equivalent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Support all cables not supported in conduits and cable tray with J-Hooks or slings. Space J- Hooks or slings at a maximum of 36 inches apart and at each change of direction of the cables. Maintain maximum sag of 12-inches between supports. B. Install supports to route cables parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Hang cable supports from 3/8" all thread rods, dedicated #8 galvanized ceiling drop wire or wall brackets connected directly to structure. Do not support from the ceiling grid or ceiling wire system. C. Provide the appropriate sized J- hooks as required. Minimum 1" width and flared edges where cables enter and leave support. 2-inch diameter loop for (25) 4-pair UTP cables and 4-inch diameter loop for (50) 4-pair UTP cables. D. Provide multiple hooks at each hanger location as required by cable count and cable segregation requirements. E. Install cable bundles no closer than 5-inches in all directions from ballasted light fixtures. F. Contractor shall not mix fire alarm, security, access control, paging or other energized media with UTP Category-rated media in pathways, wide-base cable supports or soft cable sling

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 29 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

supports. Separate pathways and cable supports shall be provided for fire alarm, security, access control, paging and other energized media. G. Where main pathways are indicated on the drawings, contractor shall follow indicated pathway as closely as possible according to field conditions. Pathway for smaller cable counts shall be laid out and documented on the as-built drawings by the contractor. H. Where specific main pathways are not indicated, the cable pathways for all communication systems shall be laid out by the contractor and coordinated with other disciplines and the systems designer. I. Do not tie wrap cables to the J-hooks. Provide cable retainers at each J-hook. J. Provide applicable accessories to independently support J-hooks from structure, including extender bracket for mounting multiple J hooks on a single support, fasteners and clamps for connecting to wall, beams, rods, dedicated support wires and C and Z Purlins as required for specific construction. K. At a minimum, brace multiple J-hook assemblies from structure with diagonal braces at each change of direction. L. Coordinate the allocation of ceiling space and the mounting elevations of various systems to allow maintenance and accessibility for future modifications. Cable supports shall be as close to the ceiling as possible while allowing ceiling tiles to be removed. Supports shall be located to avoid interference with maintenance access to other equipment. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 29 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 05 33 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems C. Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications D. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems E. Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems F. Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays For Communications Systems G. Section 27 05 44 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications, Pathways and Cabling H. Section 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling I. Other References, Codes and Standards 1. As noted in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.02 CODES, STANDARDS, ACTS, AGENCIES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. Comply with Codes, Standards, Acts, Agencies, Permits and Inspection Fees as detailed in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Provide raceway systems for the installation of the telephone cables and computer wiring. Installation shall include raceways, outlet boxes, plaster rings, outlet box cover plates and terminal back boards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittal information in accordance with Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results For Communications. B. Closeout Submittals – In accordance with section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL OUTLETS A. Shall consist of a 4-11/16" square, 2-1/8" deep (minimum) box, with knockouts for 3/4", 1", and 1-1/4" conduits, as manufactured by Steel City, OZ/Gedney, Raco or equal. 2.02 FLOOR OUTLETS A. See Section 26 05 33.10 - Flush Floor Outlets for flush floor outlets. 2.03 OUTLET DEVICE RING A. Coordinate device ring requirements with cable/outlet installer. 2.04 DEVICE PLATES A. Provide device cover plates for all unwired or "future" outlets. Plates shall match device plates specified in Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices except with no device openings. 2.05 PULL WIRE A. Shall be plastic having not less than 200-pound tensile strength.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 33 - 1 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WALL OUTLETS IN UNINSULATED INTERIOR WALLS WITH ACCESSABLE CEILINGS A. Provide an individual conduit from each communications outlet location to cable tray or accessible ceiling space. 3.02 WALLS WITH NON-ACCESIBLE CEILINGS, EXTERIOR WALLS OR INSULATED INTERIOR WALLS A. Provide an individual conduit from each communications outlet location to cable tray or accessible ceiling space. 3.03 FLOOR MOUNTED OUTLETS A. All conduits from floor outlets shall terminate in an accessible ceiling space or at cable tray on the same floor as the outlet. B. Provide an individual conduit from each communications outlet location to cable tray or accessible ceiling space. 3.04 SYSTEM FURNITURE CONNECTIONS A. Provide an individual conduit from each furniture wall connection location to cable tray or accessible ceiling space. 3.05 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY CONNECTIONS A. Provide an individual conduit from each surface raceway to cable tray or accessible ceiling space. 3.06 CONDUIT SIZING TABLE A. Provide conduits for communications outlets sized as follows:

Wall Phones 3/4" Wall Outlets (except wall phones) 1" Single Gang Floor Mounted Outlets/Boxes 1" Multiple Gang Recessed Floor Outlets/Boxes 1-1/4" System Furniture - per every (2) workstations 1" System Furniture - per every (3) workstations 1-1/4" Surface Metal Raceway - per 12 ft of SMR 1-1/4" Surface Metal Raceway - per 20 ft of SMR 1-1/2" 3.07 RACEWAYS A. Shall conform to specification Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems with the additional requirement that no length of run shall exceed 100 feet and shall not contain more than two 90-degree bends or the equivalent without a code size pull box. Provide pull boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Locate pull boxes in straight runs only, not as a replacement for an elbow. B. Conduits with an internal diameter of two inches or less shall have a bend radius at least 6 times the internal conduit diameter. Conduits greater than two inches shall have a bend radius at least 10 times the internal conduit diameter. C. Provide an insulated bushing on all conduits terminated in a cabinet and/ or pullboxes. D. Terminate conduits stubbed out above accessible ceiling space so that the conduit is parallel with the ceiling and provide an insulating bushing. E. Terminate conduit at cable trays at an accessible location within 6" of tray with an insulated bushing and provide bonding jumper.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 33 - 2 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

3.08 PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes shall be sized per the following table:

PULL BOX SIZING (inches)

Conduit Width Length Depth Width increase for Trade Size additional conduit 1 4 16 3 2 1-1/4 6 20 3 3 1-1/2 8 27 4 4 2 8 36 4 5 2-1/2 10 42 5 6 3 12 48 5 6 3-1/2 12 54 6 6 4 15 60 8 8 3.09 PULL CORDS A. Nylon type shall be included in all raceways over 10 feet long. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. 3.10 RACEWAY RISER SLEEVES A. Riser raceways to be installed through floors with tops 6 inches above each floor to give continuous cable riser capability. Sleeves shall be firestopped with an approved firestop system. Refer to Divison 07 80 00 – Fire and Smoke Protection. 3.11 REMODEL SPACES A. Coordinate with Owner removal of inactive and abandoned communications cables that serve remodeled spaces. B. Notify Owner in writing when active telephone and computer conductors are serving occupied spaces and must be relocated due to the remodel. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 33 - 3 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 05 36 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Retain or delete this article in all Sections of Project Manual. B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. C. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems D. Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications E. Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems F. Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems G. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems H. Section 27 05 44 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications, Pathways and Cabling I. Section 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling J. Section 27 11 00 - Communications Equipment Rooms K. Other References, Codes and Standards 1. As noted in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Wire-basket cable trays. B. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for (or shown) in either is required to be provided as if called for in both. Where conflicting information occurs within the drawings and specifications or between the drawings and specifications, the more expensive alternative shall be used as a basis for bidding and construction. 1.03 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.04 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.05 CODES, STANDARDS, ACTS, AGENCIES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. Comply with Codes, Standards, Acts, Agencies, Permits and Inspection Fees as detailed in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray. 1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray. 1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate con- nectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints. 1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, li- censed in the state of Oregon, who is responsible for their preparation. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 36 - 1 CABLE TRAYS FOR OSP Tenant Improvement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported cable trays. 1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. 2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure. B. Field quality-control reports. C. Closeout Submittals – In accordance with section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cable tray and accessories shall comply with NEMA VE1. B. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and compentent and experienced technicians shall be employed and shall be under the direct supervision of a compentent and experienced foreman. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required in section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications B. Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. 2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing. 1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, li- censed in the state of Oregon, who is responsible for their preparation. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. 3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported cable trays. B. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions. 1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 (2014) and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. 1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer. B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Drawings for specific requirements C. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters:

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 36 - 2 CABLE TRAYS FOR OSP Tenant Improvement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indi- cated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1. 2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities. 2.03 FLAT LADDER TYPE CABLE TRAY WITHOUT SIDE RAILS A. Flat Ladder Type Cable Tray shall not be installed outside of Telecom Rooms or Spaces. B. Ladder type cable tray with 9-inch rung spacing, black powder coat finish, with widths as noted on the drawings, complete with heavy duty splice kits, junction splice kits, equipment rack-to- runway mounting kits, ceiling support hardware and wall support hardware. C. Material 1. Construction: Side stringers and cross members constructed of .375" x 1.5" x .065" thick rectangular steel tubing for a uniform look and support. D. Cable Trays, Fittings, and Accessories: Steel, mill galvanized before fabrication, complying with ASTM A 653, G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275) coating. E. Manufacturer. 1. Chatsworth 2. Approved equivalent F. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. G. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 1. Comply with section 27 05 26 –Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. H. Contractor to provide 6” side posts on the cable tray, in the telecom room above the equipment racks. Posts are to be on both front and rear of each equipment rack. Posts are to be 12” apart and centered on each equipment rack. I. Cable management waterfalls are to be used above the vertical wire managers in the equipment rack row. Two above each vertical manager, supporting cables routed in either direction into the vertical wire managers. J. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1. 2.04 WIRE-BASKET CABLE TRAYS A. Wire-Basket Cable Trays shall not be installed in Telecom Rooms or Spaces. B. Manufacturers: 1. Cablofil/Legrande. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 3. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 4. Appoved equivalent C. Description: 1. Configuration: Wires are formed into a standard 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. Mesh sections must have at least one bottom longitudinal wire along entire length of section. 2. Materials: High-strength-steel longitudinal wires with no bends. 3. Safety Provisions: T-weld is used to assemble the top longitudinal wires of the basket flanges and the U-shaped cross wires to maintain integrity of cables and installer safety. 4. Sizes: a. Straight sections shall be furnished in standard lengths. b. Retain one or more of four "Wire-Basket Depth" subparagraphs below. If retaining more than one, show tray depth on Drawings. c. Wire-Basket Depth: 1-inch (25-mm) usable loading depth by 4 inches (100 mm) wide.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 36 - 3 CABLE TRAYS FOR OSP Tenant Improvement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

d. Wire-Basket Depth: 1-inch (25-mm) usable loading depth by 6 inches (100 mm) wide. e. Wire-Basket Depth: 2-inch (50-mm) usable loading depth by 8 inches (200 mm) wide. f. Wire-Basket Depth: 2-inch (50-mm) usable loading depth by 12 inches (200 mm) wide. g. Wire-Basket Depth: 4-inch (100-mm) usable loading depth by 12 inches (300 mm) wide. h. Wire-Basket Depth: 4-inch (100-mm) usable loading depth by 18 inches (300 mm) wide. i. Wire-Basket Depth: 6-inch (150-mm) usable loading depth by 24 inches (600 mm) wide. 5. Connector Assemblies: Bolt welded to plate shaped to fit around adjoining tray wires and mating plate. Mechanically joins adjacent tray wires to splice sections together or to cre- ate horizontal fittings. 6. Connector Assembly Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray. 7. Hardware and Fasteners: Shall be of the same manufacture as cable tray. 2.05 MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Steel: 1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum me- chanical properties of ASTM A510. 2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. 3. Finish: Electrogalvanized before fabrication. a. Standard: Comply with ASTM B 633. b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633. c. Powder coated black 2.06 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray. B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray. C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 1. Comply with section 27 05 26 –Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. 2.07 WARNING SIGNS A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel." 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2. B. Flat Ladder Type Cable Tray shall not be installed outside of Telecom Rooms and Spaces. C. Wire Basket Type Cable Trays shall not be installed within Telecom Rooms and Spaces. D. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding. E. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 36 - 4 CABLE TRAYS FOR OSP Tenant Improvement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

F. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays. G. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts. H. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints. I. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). J. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules or manufacturer specifications, and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs. K. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application. L. Support tray assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading. M. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3. N. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports. O. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions. 1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5 P. Support wire-basket cable trays with center support hangers, trapeze hangers and wall brackets as determined by field requirements and manufacturer specifications. Q. Support center support hangers and trapeze hangers for wire-basket trays with 3/8-inch- (10- mm-) diameter threaded rods, or as required by manufacturer specifications. R. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure. S. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard. T. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings. U. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings. V. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 07 8000 "Penetration Firestopping." W. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers. X. Install cable trays with minimum 1’-0” workspace above cable trays to permit access for installing cables. Y. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation. 3.02 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING A. Cable tray shall be grounded/bonded per manufacturer specifications for selected cable tray, and in accordance with NFPA 70 (2014) NEC. Comply with requirements of Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems and Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 36 - 5 CABLE TRAYS FOR OSP Tenant Improvement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers. D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer. E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors." 3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected. B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Secure cables with plenum-rated hook-loop cable ties or Velcro tape. C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches (450 mm). D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches (1800 mm). E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches (900 mm) where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72 inches (1800 mm) elsewhere. Plastic Ty-wrap/Zip-ties are not permitted. F. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed. B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections 1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in ca- ble trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage. 3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that per- mitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separat- ed from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays. 4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation. 6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continu- ity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. 7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continui- ty. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed cable trays and cables. 214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 36 - 6 CABLE TRAYS FOR OSP Tenant Improvement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over. 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating manufactured by or rec- ommended by cable tray manufacturer. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 36 - 7 CABLE TRAYS FOR OSP Tenant Improvement COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 05 44 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.04 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.05 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.06 CODES, STANDARDS, ACTS, AGENCIES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. Comply with Codes, Standards, Acts, Agencies, Permits and Inspection Fees as detailed in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Technicians: 30% of installers shall have a current installation certification from the manufacturer. 3. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a compentent and experience foreman with current installation certifications from the manufacturer. B. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and compentent and experienced technicians shall be employed and shall be under the direct supervision of a compentent and experienced foreman. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 44 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 03 24 2017

2. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES A. Wall Sleeves: 1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized- steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board. C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: 1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm). 2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM, Nitrile or Buna N rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, Plastic or Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. 2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable product by one of the following:

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 44 - 2 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 03 24 2017

a. Presealed Systems b. Approved equivalent 2.04 GROUT A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire- rated walls or floors. B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.05 SILICONE SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below. 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based, liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations. C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls: 1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing. 2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed unless seismic criteria require different clearance. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 4 inches (100 mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors. D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: 1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 44 - 3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 03 24 2017

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system. 3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building. B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed. B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall. C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms. D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 05 44 - 4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS OSP Tenant Improvement FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 2. Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for data cabling associated with system panels and devices 3. Section 27 13 00 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Telecommunications cable raceway. 5. Grounding and Bonding. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. C. BDF: Building Distribution Frame D. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection. E. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. F. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. G. IDF: Intermediate Distribution Frame H. LAN: Local area network. I. MDF: Main Distribution Frame J. NECA: National Electrical Contractors Association 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. B. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 11 00 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 03 24 2017

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For equipment frames from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components on which certification is based. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Equipment frames shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event. 2.02 BACKBOARDS A. Back boards are to be installed on (4) walls in the telecom rooms. B. Fire-retardant treated plywood, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1. Backboards are to start 6" AFF and extend to a height of 8'6”. 2. Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. 3. Painted with two (2) coat of paint. Painted finish in the room will be light colored to enhance room lighting. 4. One (1) fire-retardant stamp is to be left unpainted on the bottom of each individual piece of fire-retardant plywood. 2.03 LADDER CABLE RUNWAY A. Manufacturers: 1. Chatsworth (CPI) B. Cable Runway and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 (2014) and marked for intended location, application, and grounding. C. General Requirements: 1. Modular-steel or aluminum units designed for telecommunications cabling support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Module Dimension: Width standard, 12-inch (304-mm) or as indicated on plans.. 3. Level 1 Mounting Height 7' or as indicated on plans. 4. Level 2 Mounting Height 8' or as indicated on plans 5. Finish: Black baked-polyester powder coat. 6. Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 11 00 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 03 24 2017

2.04 EQUIPMENT FRAMES A. Manufacturers: 1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. American Power Conversion (APC) B. General Frame Requirements: 1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding modular-steel or aluminum units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310-D standard, 19-inch (480-mm) panel mounting. Height 84" or as indicated on plans. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, Black baked-polyester powder coat. C. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type, aluminum construction. 1. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug. 2. Black baked-polyester powder coat finish. D. Computer Room Cabinets: 1. Removable and lockable side panels. 2. Hinged and lockable front and rear doors. 3. Adjustable feet for leveling. 4. Screened ventilation openings in the front and rear doors. 5. Cable access provisions in the roof and base. 6. Front and rear mounting rails tapped 12-24, square holes for caged nuts. 7. Grounding bus bar. 8. Rack or Roof-mounted, 550-cfm (260-L/s) fan with filter. 9. Power strip. 10. Black baked-polyester powder coat finish. 11. All cabinets keyed alike. 12. Server cabinets E. Cable Management for Equipment Frames: 1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Black baked-polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers and shall be no less than 6 inches in any dimension unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 4. Vertical cable management shall have cable management fingers spaced at every RU and provide cable bend radius control at each finger. Covers for the vertical cable managers shall be provided on the front of the managers and shall be operable either left or right handed. 2.05 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH / PDU A. Manufacturers: 1. APC a. AP7752 B. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363. 1. Provide (2) for each rack or cabinet unless noted otherwise on drawings. 2. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Rack mounting. 4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 5. One rack space (1U) in standard 19 inch rack. 6. (10) Output receptacles outlets rated at 20 amps. 2.06 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 11 00 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 03 24 2017

B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus Bar (TMGB): 1. Connectors: Mechanical type, solderless aluminum compression, or cast silicon bronze exothermic type wire terminals and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to main ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide by 12 inches long (6 mm thick by 100 mm wide by 304 mm long) with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. 3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. C. Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar (TGB): 1. Connectors: Mechanical type, solderless, aluminum compression, or cast silicon bronze exothermic type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 2 inches wide by 12 inches long (6 mm thick by 50 mm wide by 304 mm long) with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. 3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. D. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-B-2013. E. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. F. Bond metallic racks, cabinets and cable raceway to the grounding bus bar, using no smaller than No. 6 AWG with green plastic jacket grounding conductor. 2.07 LABELING A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606 and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with NECA 1. 2. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms. 3. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. B. Black Velcro type tie wraps are to be used for all cable bundling and support. Plastic or Nylon tie wraps are not approved. C. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. D. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 11 00 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 03 24 2017

3.02 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.03 INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 3 inches (75 mm) above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. I. Contractor shall use EZ-Path series 44+ for all rated wall cabling pathway penetrations. J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pathway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal pathway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe, sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.04 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with TIA-569-B Annex A, "Fire Stopping." B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 11 00 - 5 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 03 24 2017

3.05 BACKBOARDS A. Equipment backboards shall be mounted on (4) walls from 6" AFF to 8'6”AFF. Backboards shall be mated to each other so no gap between boards is more than 1/4". B. Backboards shall be securely mounted to the existing walls. If attached to masonry walls, expandable anchors shall be used to secure the plywood to the walls. Backboards attached to studded walls shall have screws that penetrate the studs to provide secure attachment. If there is plywood backing in the wall, screws that penetrate the backing material can be used in lieu of penetrating the studs. 3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Install equipment racks with manufacturer approved installation hardware. All equipment racks shall be securely bolted to the floor with four bolts. B. Equipment racks shall be supported at the top of the rack using cable tray, cable runway or supports attached to the wall. These supporting devices shall add rigidity to the rack for ease in working on equipment mounted in the rack. C. Equipment cabinets shall be assembled and secured as recommended by the manufacturer. All doors, panels and equipment shall be securely mounted to the equipment cabinet by means of fasteners designed to fasten these devices. D. All equipment cabinets and racks shall be bonded to the grounding bus bar with individual #6 AWG grounding conductors. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors. E. Label all equipment racks and cabinets to meet the requirements of TIA/EIA-606. 3.07 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-B-2013. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum 3/0 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. E. Fasteners for grounding lugs shall be machine screws with either nuts or tapped holes for securing the grounding lug to the equipment to be grounded. Self-tapping screws are not acceptable for grounding connections. 1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and spaces. 3.08 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-B. B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-B for Class 2, Class 3, or Class 4 level of administration. E. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 11 00 - 6 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pathways. 2. Backboards 3. Multimode 50/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling. 4. Singlemode optical fiber cabling. 5. Cable connecting hardware. 6. Backbone cable labeling. 1.02 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross- connection. B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-C, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension. B. Shop Drawings: 1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following: a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords. 5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. 6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B. F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-B-2013. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical loss test set. 2. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. 3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. 1.09 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for one year. B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B. B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of CAT-6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, wide base J-hooks, and D-rings. 3. Straps and other devices. C. Ladder Rack Cable Runway 1. Manufacturers: a. Chatsworth (CPI) D. Wire Basket Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturers: a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc. b. Cablofil Inc. c. Cooper B-Line, Inc. d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit. e. GS Metals Corp. E. Conduit and Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 4 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/8 inches (54 mm) deep. F. Rated Wall Cabling Penetrations - Approved Manufacturers 1. EZ-Path Series 44+ 2.02 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19mm by 1220mm by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." B. Back boards are to be installed on (4) walls in the telecom rooms. See Drawings for locations C. Backboards are to start 6" AFF and extend to a height of 8'6”. D. Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. E. Painted with two (2) coat of paint. Painted finish in the room will be light colored to enhance room lighting. F. One (1) fire-retardant stamp is to be left unpainted on the bottom of each individual piece of fire- retardant plywood. 2.03 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE A. Multimode Manufacturers: 1. Leviton B. Description: Armored, Multimode, Laser Optimized 50/125-micrometer, strand count per drawings, fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Non-Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR complying with UL 1666. 5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm. C. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm). D. Singlemode Manufacturers: 1. Leviton E. Description: Armored, Singlemode, OM2 strand count per drawings, fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Non-Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR complying with UL 1666. 5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm. F. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Yellow 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B. 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches (1000 mm). 2.04 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, SC cable connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. C. Singlemode fiber termination SC connectors with Angel Polished Heads D. Cable Connecting Hardware: 1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C. 2. Insertion loss not more than 0.3db. 2.05 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-B-2013. 2.06 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-C. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-C.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-C. E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Black Velcro tie wraps are to be used for all cable bundling and support. Plastic or Nylon Tie wraps not approved. 3.02 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A. B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. D. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches (76 mm)] above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch (2440-mm) dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. F. Contractor shall use EZ-Path series 44+ for all rated wall cabling pathway penetrations. G. All EZ-Paths installed for Telecommunications cabling shall be labeled with "Telecom Pathway" 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 5 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot (3m) long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C. 2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. D. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. F. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm). 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). 4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 6 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

3.05 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Firestopping. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, Firestopping. B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. C. Contractor shall use EZ-Path series 44+ for all rated wall cabling pathway penetrations. 3.06 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-B-2013. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 Green outside jacket AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems. 1. Administration Class: 4. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Interior Painting for painting backboards. For fire- resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. See Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling for additional identification requirements. See Evaluations for discussion about TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-B for Class 4 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard. D. Comply with requirements in Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling for cable and asset management software. E. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. G. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m). 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 7 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building- mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. 5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-B, for the following: 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent. I. Comply with requirements in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. J. All EZ-Paths installed for Telecommunications cabling shall be labeled with "Telecom Pathway" 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Visually inspect optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color- coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA- 568-C. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 3. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. 2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-C. D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 13 00 - 8 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE OSP Tenant Improvement CABLING 03 24 2017

SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Communications C. Section 27 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems D. Section 27 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Communications Systems E. Section 27 05 33 – Conduits and Backboxes for Communications Systems F. Section 27 05 34 – Conduits and Backboxes for Nurse Call Systems G. Section 27 05 36 – Cable Trays For Communications Systems H. Section 27 05 44 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications, Pathways and Cabling I. Section 27 11 00 – Communications Equipment Room Fittings J. Section 27 13 00 – Communications Backbone Cabling 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Coaxial cable. 3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 4. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 5. Cabling system identification products. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.04 WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.05 SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION A. As indicated in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications 1.06 CODES, STANDARDS, ACTS, AGENCIES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES A. Comply with Codes, Standards, Acts, Agencies, Permits and Inspection Fees as detailed in Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.07 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 27 05 00 - Common Work Results for Communications. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Technicians: 30% of installers shall have a current installation certification from the manufacturer.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 15 00 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement HORIZONTAL CABLING 03 24 2017

3. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a compentent and experience foreman with current installation certifications from the manufacturer. B. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and compentent and experienced technicians shall be employed and shall be under the direct supervision of a compentent and experienced foreman. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. 2. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. 1.11 CERTIFICATION AND WARRANTY A. Refer to Division 01 "Supplementary Warranty Conditions" for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide warranty for a minimum period of one year, from the date of acceptance of the work for all installation labor and materials included under this Work. After notifying the Owner/Engineer of a defective item, repair or replace such items within 24 hours without cost to the Owner, all to the satisfaction of the Owner/Engineer.. C. Provide CommScope Enterprise 20-year Extended Product Warranty from the date of acceptance of the work. 1. The Extended Product Warranty shall be issued and signed by the manufacturer and shall list the owner as the holder of the warranty. 2. The Extended Product Warranty shall cover the testing and replacement of the labor and material for all “Permanent Link” components. 3. The structured cable system Extended Product Warranty shall be a complete certified system as offered by CommScope for the Systimax product. 4. Provide as part of the bid response, a letter from the manufacturer, stating that the product set offered will meet their requirements to ensure that a Performance Warranty shall be offered to the owner at the completion of the project. 5. Transferable to Department of Administrative Services (DAS) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by one of the specified manufacturers. Provide telecommunications cable and termination equipment with performance levels and capacities as noted herein. B. Part numbers provided in this Specification have been coordinated with the manufacturers latest available product literature. Part numbers are subject to change without notice by the manufacturers. Where a specific part number is invalid, provide product meeting component description. C. Where specific items are called out in the specification or indicated on the drawings for a specific application, use those products or materials, or approved substitutes. Where no specific call outs are made use premium products and materials. D. Both plenum and non-plenum cable may be required to be installed for this project. Coordinate with mechanical contractor to determine extent of plenum ceiling cavities. E. Black Velcro type tie wraps are to be used for all cable bundling and support. Plastic or Nylon tie wraps are not approved. Cable ties or Velcro type tie wraps are not permitted in the overhead. 2.02 CABLE A. 4-Pair Cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (Permanent Link Component) 1. Cable Jacket Color: Blue

214002.4 / CAMS 27 15 00 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement HORIZONTAL CABLING 03 24 2017

2. Manufacturer: Leviton B. Coaxial RG-6 cable, connectors and splitters – suitable for use to horizontally extend a CATV signal. 1. Cable Manufacturers: a. Leviton b. Belden c. CommScope d. Approved Equivalent 2.03 PATCH CORDS 1. CAT6 patch cables vary in color, according to cable length, for easy identification: a. White – 3’ b. Blue – 5’ c. Red – 7’ d. Yellow – 10’ e. Gray – 14’ f. Black – 25’ and 50’ g. Green Telephone – various length (used for Telephone) 2.04 TERMINATION HARDWARE A. Copper Patch Panels 1. CAT-6 rated, 8-position/8-conductor RJ45 with 110 IDC termination, 19”x2RU, angled 48- port. B. Wireless Copper Patch Panels 1. CAT-6A rated, 8-position/8-conductor RJ45 with 110 IDC termination, 19”x2RU, angled 48-port. C. Outlet Connectors 1. Color: Ivory (unless faceplate is differernt color, then match faceplate color). D. Faceplate: High-impact plastic or stainless steel. Single gang with 2 or 4 ports. 1. Color: coordinate color with Architect. E. Wireless Outlet/CCTV IP Outlet Box 1. Single surface-mount data outlet box with Outlet Connector as described in 2.03(B) above. 2. Color: Ivory F. Wall Mounted Telephone Face-Plate: Stainless steel face-plate, single gang with two mounting studs to support wall mounted telephone with one port. G. Rack Mounted Wire Management 1. 19-inch rack mount, 3 ½-inch high, horizontal cable management 2. Manufacturer: CPI (Chatsworth Producst Inc.) 3. Model: Large Horizontal Ring Panel 4. P/N: 11564-719 2.05 IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Comply with TIA-606-B Series and applicable requirements in this section. B. Cable Labels- Machine printed self-adhesive, smudge resistant labels for cables and face- plates. Labels shall be appropriately sized for cable diameter. Labels shall be appropriately colored for face-plate color contrast. Submit sample labels for approval. C. Outlet Labels- Machine generated, self-adhesive, smudge resistant labels for faceplates. Lables shall be appropriately sized for viewing from 48”. Label information will be provided by Asante IT. Submit sample labels for approval.

214002.4 / CAMS 27 15 00 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement HORIZONTAL CABLING 03 24 2017

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Follow manufacturers' instructions for installing components and adjusting all equipment and telecommunications cables. Where no instructions are included with the equipment, follow accepted industry practices and workmanlike installation standards. B. Keep all items protected before and after installation, with dust and water proof barrier materials as necessary. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure the integrity of the protective measures throughout the life of the project. C. The Contractor shall protect all telecommunications equipment from damage, at all times during the construction. Do not install equipment in the telecommunications areas until the other trades have completed their work in the areas so that the equipment will not be moved or damaged. D. Ensure that safe ingress and egress, from all work areas, are maintained during movement and installation of materials. E. Clean up and remove all debris generated by installation activities. Keep the telecommunications areas free of debris at all times. F. Deliver to Owner two sets of all special tools specifically needed for proper operation, adjustment and maintenance of cable and cable termination hardware installed under this Contract. 3.02 INSTALLATION STANDARDS A. Comply with BICSI TDMM best practices and TIA -568, 569, 606 and 607 Standards. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the work and the conditions under which the Work would be performed. Contractor shall remedy conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. 1. Verify proposed routes of pathways. Check J-Hooks, conduits, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, clearances, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Verify that cabling can be installed complying with EMI clearance requirements. 2. Prepare wall penetrations and verify that penetrations of rated fire walls are made using products labeled for type of wall penetrated. 3. Identify plan to support cables and raceways in suspended ceilings. Verify weight of individual types and sizes of cables. Verify that load capacity of cable support structures is adequate for each pathway. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.04 METHODS AND PROCEDURES A. General 1. Install all components in accordance with this Specification, the approved Cable Termination Schedule, the manufacturer’s recommendations, and the Telecommunications Distribution Drawings. B. Cable Installation - General 1. Ensure that all telecommunications cable supports (J-hooks, cable tray, conduits, etc.) are fully installed before proceeding with cable installation. At no times shall cables be installed and left unsupported. At no times shall cables be tie-wrapped to any other supporting structure in lieu of specified cable supports. Do not bundle or tie-wrap the cables in the overhead, even within the approved cable supports. Do not allow the cable to sag more than 12-inches. 2. Protect all cables at all times during installation, especially on floor(s), including dedicated telecommunication spaces. Provide rigid protection for cables left on floor at any time 214002.4 / CAMS 27 15 00 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement HORIZONTAL CABLING 03 24 2017

during construction. Design protection to prevent pressure on cables from walking, equipment placement, or rolled/dragged construction equipment and materials. 3. Maintain manufacturer's recommended minimum bend radius of the cables. Do not stretch, stress, tightly coil, bend or crimp the workstation cables during the installation or when leaving them out of the way of other trades during the staging of the work. The Contractor, at the Contractors expense shall replace all abused or stressed cables. 4. After dressing the cable to its final location, remove only enough jacketing to allow the conductors to be splayed and terminated in a neat and uniform fashion. Every effort will be made to maintain jacketing integrity by removing only as much jacketing as is practical, to accomplish termination. For twisted pair cables, maintain the manufacturers twisting of the wire pairs through to the point of termination. 5. Install cable in continuous runs without splices or mechanical couplers between the cable points of origin and termination for the inter-building and intra-building cable. 6. Terminate all cables neatly, with enough slack to pull off, test and re-terminate each cable as needed. 7. When pulling cables through conduits, leave in-place all drag-lines for future use. 8. Do not allow UTP cables to run parallel with electrical cables/conduits, unless they are separated by a minimum of 12 inches. Any telecommunications cables that must cross over electrical cables/conduits shall do so only at 90-degree angles. 9. Use the conduit installed in the building for the routing of cables. Aggregate all cables and use conduits sleeves installed in the walls of all rooms with full height gyp board construction, to route cables from the room to the cable trays in the corridors. 10. Mill Work Furniture and Modular Furniture Connections: Route cables down the conduit stub-up or up from a conduit sleeve to a mill work furniture or modular system in-feed. Route the cables into and within the raceway of the mill work or modular furniture to the outlet location and terminate the cables. 11. Install plenum rated cables in the return air ceilings to support the telecommunication outlets in admitting and lobby areas. 12. Black Velcro type tie wraps are to be used for all cable bundling and support. Plastic or Nylon tie wraps are not approved. 3.05 WORKSTATION CABLES A. Provide 4-pair UTP cables from the telecommunication room to the communication outlets as shown on the drawings. Terminate the cables onto termination blocks in the telecommunication rooms and onto 8-pin modular connectors at the outlet location. Provide 15-feet of service loop in the telecom room. Route the cable in the cable tray to support the service loop. Route the cable in cable tray in the accessible ceiling areas to the workstations. Support the cables with J-hooks installed at a maximum separation of 36-inches in route from the cable tray to the workstation outlet. B. Provide 4-pair UTP cables from the telecommunication room to the communication outlets for Video Surveillance cameras as shown on the drawings. Terminate the cables onto termination blocks in the telecommunication room and onto 8-pin modular connectors with a surface mount box at the outlet location. Route the cable in the cable tray to support the service loop. Route the cable in cable tray in the accessible ceiling areas to the workstations. Support the cables with J-hooks installed at a maximum separation of 36-inches in route from the cable tray to the workstation outlet. C. Provide a coaxial cable from the telecommunication room to the TV outlet. Terminate the cables with F connectors at each end. Support the cables with J-hooks installed at a maximum separation of 36-inches in route. 3.06 WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CABLES A. Provide 4-pair UTP CAT-6A cables from the telecommunication room to the communication outlets as shown on the drawings. Terminate the cables onto termination blocks in the telecommunication rooms and onto 8-pin modular connectors at the outlet location. Provide 25-feet of service loop at AP location. Support the cables with J-hooks installed at a maximum separation of 36-inches in route from the cable tray to the workstation outlet. 214002.4 / CAMS 27 15 00 - 5 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement HORIZONTAL CABLING 03 24 2017

3.07 TERMINATION DEVICES A. Provide termination blocks for the termination of all twisted pair cables installed under this Work. Mount the termination blocks onto the plywood backboards in the rooms. Provide blocks complete with 4-pair connectors, designation strips and wall brackets. B. Provide CAT-6, 8-pin modular connectors for the termination of all 4-pair cables. C. Provide an accompanying faceplate and/or mounting plate at the appropriate outlet location. Install faceplates level and align to adjacent outlet faceplates 3.08 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide labels in accordance with the information identified in the approved cable termination schedule. B. Provide on all outlet faceplates installed under this Work, machine-generated labels with the outlet ID, in uppercase lettering. Label shall be of a contrasting color to the faceplate color. C. Provide a machine-generated label on all telecommunications cables installed under this Work with the cable ID, in black uppercase lettering on a permanent adhesive, white label stock, covered with a permanent water resistant sealer. Place the labels on both ends of the cable and no more than 6" from the point at which the cable is broken out into individual copper pairs or strands from the connector or termination block. Place the label parallel with the cable. All labels shall be readily visible. D. Hand lettered label stock will not be accepted for final installation. Hand lettered stock is only acceptable for use with temporary labeling required during construction phases. E. If at any time during the project, the label becomes illegible or removed, the Contractor shall immediately replace it with a duplicate preprinted label. F. All cable IDs shall be both physically and visually accessible upon completion of the project. G. Room numbers as shown on Construction Documents are not final room numbers. Final room numbers will be provided during construction. All final labeling and programming that references room numbers shall use final room numbering. All final record documents and O & M documents shall include both Construction Document room numbers and final room numbers. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing CAT-6, 4-Pair Cables- Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Ensure that all test instruments meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in Annex I, complying with measurement accuracy specified in Annex H. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. a. Test System shall be Fluke DTX-1800 CableAnalyzer or approved equivalent. 2. Test all cables and conductors from 1 to 300 MHz for CAT-6 cables and 500MHz for CAT-6A cables with a tester that complies with performance requirements in TIA-568-C, Level III. Include tests for longitudinal or transverse conversion loss. 3. Provide evidence of testing apparatus calibration at beginning of testing, and for every 1000 channels or links tested. 4. Provide evidence of replacement of consumable testing apparatus, including modular jacks, per the tester manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Provide evidence that the testing apparatus software or firmware has been updated to current revision/version. 6. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 7. Perform the following permanent link tests on each CAT-6 and CAT-6A UTP cable: a. Wiremap b. Cable Length

214002.4 / CAMS 27 15 00 - 6 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement HORIZONTAL CABLING 03 24 2017

c. Propagation Delay d. Delay Skew e. Insertion loss f. Return Loss g. Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio (ACR) h. Power Sum Attenuation-to-Crosstalk Ratio (PSACR) i. Near-end Crosstalk (NEXT) j. Power Sum (PSNEXT) k. Equal-level Far-end Crosstalk (ELFEXT) loss l. Power Sum Equal-level Far-end Crosstalk(PSELFEXT) m. DC Loop Resistance n. Performance shall comply with minimum criteria in TIA-568 Series. B. Test Reports: 1. Document data for each measurement. 2. Provide an individual cable report for each UTP cable that tests within the instrument tolerance band for any parameter, i.e., for any parameter that would not pass if the instrument tolerance were taken as worst case. 3. Provide a CD containing all individual cable reports in the native file structure of the test instrument(s). 4. Provide software to display and print individual and summary cable test reports from the native test files. C. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. After review of the completed test results, the Owner/Engineer reserves the right to retest up to 100 of the installed cables, utilizing the Contractor’s tester and the Contractor’s labor. E. After the installation is complete, in addition to any other required testing as described herein, and at such times as the Owner/Engineer directs, the Contractor shall be present while the Owner conducts an operating test for approval. The installation shall be demonstrated to be in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Any defects revealed shall be corrected promptly at the Contractor's expense and the tests performed again. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 27 15 00 - 7 COMMUNICATIONS OSP Tenant Improvement HORIZONTAL CABLING 03 24 2017

SECTION 28 30 01 FIRE DETECTION AND COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01, General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. The provisions of Division 26 Section, Common Work Results for Electrical, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Replacing select devices within the existing facility fire alarm system. 2. Design, install, and provide all labor, materials, and equipment required to maintain a complete and operating system of manual and automatic initiating devices, audio/visual annunciation, voice communication with control panels, amplifier(s), speakers, auxiliary relays, power supplies, batteries and all accessories necessary to accomplish the desired sequence of events. 3. Devices installed shall be addressable as described below with monitoring and annunciation of all system alarms and troubles. B. Related Sections include: 1. Section 26 05 19, Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 2. Section 26 05 33, Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 3. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment shall be approved and installed in accordance with NFPA, ADA and IBC requirements and shall be UL listed both in individual components and as a system. All equipment shall be ISO-9000 certified; UL & FM listed and meet NFPA 72. B. The system supplier shall furnish evidence that there is an experienced and efficient service organization which carries a stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished and that the organization is capable of providing repair service within 24 hours of a trouble call. C. The system shall be installed by an Electrical Contractor experienced in the installation of addressable fire alarm systems and certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) for fire alarm systems. The services of the control equipment factory representative shall be obtained to provide engineered system floor plans and point-to-point drawings on AutoCAD. The representative shall supervise the installation, system start-up, programming, make final adjustments and provide testing of the completed system. The factory representative shall provide a letter of system certification to the Architect. 1.04 CONTRACTOR DESIGN A. The equipment shown on the contract drawings indicate the general nature of the fire alarm system, but does not show all components required. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a complete fire alarm and communications system as needed to meet all applicable codes and requirements under this section. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review various sets of drawings for initiating and notification devices, and provide devices as required to comply with the requirements of the specifications and NFPA 72. C. Raceway, routing, and wiring for field devices are not shown on the drawings except for a few specific design requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. AutoCAD shop drawings with Fire Marshal's stamp of approval.

214002.4 / CAMS 28 30 01 - 1 Fire Detection and Communications OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

B. Product data with wiring schematics. C. AutoCAD wiring diagrams of each type of device. D. AutoCAD riser diagram of the complete system(s). E. Battery and voltage drop calculations based on intended routing and wiring. F. Amplifier Sizing Calculations G. Shop drawings of the system shall be prepared by the manufacturer in AutoCAD and submitted to the Fire Marshal for approval. The approved shop drawings will be utilized as the installation drawings. The shop drawings shall show actual conduit routing and conductors as to be installed. These drawings shall be updated by the Contractor to include any revisions and changes to the system during construction and installation. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The automatic fire detection systems shall operate in a local, supervised non-coded fashion. The system shall be low voltage operating at 24 volts DC. The system shall be fully addressable with analog technology for all sensors. Signal circuits shall be either class "A" or "B" without changing modules. System shall be designed class "B". All circuits shall be loaded to 75 percent capacity maximum. B. All signal, visual and audible alarms, communication circuits, and flow and tamper circuits shall be supervised for all opens, shorts, and grounds. Any open, short or ground shall cause a trouble on the system, sound the audible trouble sounder and annunciate at the control panel and remote annunciator: the device, location and nature of the trouble condition. C. The Emergency Command Center Panel (ECC) shall monitor all alarms and provide control for the following systems and as indicated in the building code: 1. Standby Power 2. Fireman’s Communication 3. Voice Evacuation 1.07 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Operation of any manual or automatic initiating device shall cause an audible and visual alarm to sound, activate the control-by-event program and perform all auxiliary functions. B. Any fault in the circuits shall be annunciated at the control panel and the remote annunciators. C. System shall utilize a single pair of wires to power, transmit and receive data from the addressable analog initiating devices and to transmit commands to the remote control points. The wire shall be sized for the length of communications loop but in no event shall it be less than number 18-2 wire size. 1.08 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, automatic initiating device, or sprinkler flow/pressure switch is to be as follows: 1. Audible alarm indicating appliances shall sound a digitized tone in the elevators, stairwells and the floor initiating the alarm until silenced by the alarm silence switch at the control panel. 2. All visual alarm indicating appliances (xenon strobes) shall display a continuous pattern until extinguished by the alarm silence switch. 3. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release. Door lock systems shall be signaled to unlock. 4. A supervised signal to notify an approved central station shall be activated. 5. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall de-energize to normally closed position. B. The alarm activation of any elevator lobby, hoistway, or machine room smoke or heat detector shall in addition to the operations listed above, cause the elevator cab to be recalled according to the following sequence: 1. If the alarmed detector is on any floor other than the preferred level of egress, the elevator cab shall be recalled to the preferred level of egress.

214002.4 / CAMS 28 30 01 - 2 Fire Detection and Communications OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2. If the alarmed detector is on the main egress level, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. 3. The activation of any heat detector in an elevator hoistway or machine room shall automatically disconnect power to the elevator motor via base-mounted contacts activating the elevator feeder shunt-trip circuit breaker. Refer to drawings. C. The control panel shall have a dedicated supervisory service indicator and a dedicated supervisory service acknowledge switch. D. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve tamper switch shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the indicator at the control panel. 1. Activating the supervisory service acknowledge switch will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the supervisory serviced LED on indicating the tamper contact is still in the off-normal state. 2. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the supervisory service indicator to extinguish thus indicating restoration to normal position. E. The activation of any sprinkler pre-action system pressure or low air switch shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the indicator at the control panel. 1. Activating the supervisory service acknowledge switch will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the supervisory service indicator on indicating the pressure/air contact is still in the off-normal state. 2. Restoring the air pressure to the normal shall cause the supervisory service indicator to extinguish thus indicating restoration to normal position. F. Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control panel front alphanumeric display and of remote annunciators. If more alarms or troubles are in the system the operator may scroll to display new alarms. G. The system shall have an alarm list key that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service conditions with the time of occurrence. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Siemens to match existing. 2.02 STROBE SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE A. Synchronize all strobes to 1Hz flash to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 2.03 REMOTE EQUIPMENT A. Remote Annunciator Control Panels: 1. Alphanumeric display module, 80 character LCD display, back lighted. 2. System acknowledge, signal silence, and system reset touchpad control switches. 3. Time/date display. 4. Integral sounder with subsequent alarm/trouble resound. 5. Flush mounting. 6. Microphone, hand held press-to-talk for transmission of messages. Module shall provide facilities to manually control the audio alarm system and transmit verbal instructions to all areas, zones, or floors, or any combination desired by the Fire Marshal. B. Transponders: Up to 26 field configurable circuits of any mix. Full LED/LCD display of alarm and trouble per point. Status displays and controls including power, on-line, local alarm and local trouble LED/LCDs plus reset and lamp test switches. Power supply, charger and battery as required for control panel. C. Lamp Driver Modules: Field selectable alarm and trouble or alarm only. Integral system trouble lamp on-line/power LED/LCD, alarm and trouble resound with flash function of new events, serial RS-485 interface to control panel, capable of being powered remotely or locally with supervision. Integral lamp test function.

214002.4 / CAMS 28 30 01 - 3 Fire Detection and Communications OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

D. Power supplies, with integral chargers and batteries current limited low energy as recommended by the manufacturer but sized for 25% spare capacity. 2.04 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. Equipment shall consist of an armature contact plate with adjustable pivot mount, to be installed on door. A heavy-duty electromagnet, in a durable enclosure to be mounted behind the door on the wall or floor. B. Fail-Safe operation, loss of power shall release the door holder for the door to close. C. Unit shall accept 12VDC, 24VAC/VDC or 120VAC. Voltage shall be coordinated by the fire alarm system installer/supplier. Any circuitry required for the systems operation shall be provided by the system installer. D. All door holder equipment shall be of the same manufacturer as the fire alarm system to ensure system compatibility and proper UL compatibility listings. 2.05 DETECTION DEVICES A. Analog photoelectric smoke detectors shall provide for individual addressing of each detector. The sensor is constantly monitored to measure any change in its sensitivity due to the environment caused by dirt, aging, temperature, humidity, etc. It shall give an advanced indication to the control panel of the need for maintenance and can be specific as to where the maintenance is needed. It is to be mounted on a two wire standard device base. Photo electric detectors located within the elevator shaft shall be rated for installation within a pressurized shaft. B. Analog thermal detectors consist of a dual thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. The sensor is continually monitored to measure any changes in their sensitivity due to temperature. It shall give an advanced indication to the control panel of the need for maintenance and can be specific as to where the maintenance is needed. It is to be mounted on a two wire standard device base. Thermal detectors in elevator shafts and machine rooms shall be equipped with a set of auxiliary contacts for elevator equipment use. Thermal detectors located within elevator shaft shall be rated for installation within a pressurized shaft. C. Projected beam type smoke detectors shall be four-wire 24 VDC and powered from the control panel four-wire smoke power source. This unit shall consist of a separate transmitter and receiver capable of being powered separately or together. This unit shall operate in either a short range of 30 to 100 feet or a long range of 100 to 300 feet. The detector shall feature a bank of four alignment LEDs on both the receiver and transmitter that are used to ensure proper alignment without the use of special tools. 1. The beam detector shall feature automatic gain control that shall compensate for gradual signal deterioration from dirt accumulation on lenses. Ceiling or wall mount as shown on the drawings. Testing shall be carried out using calibrated test filters. Provide a key activated remote test station. 2. Provide monitor modules for alarm and trouble and control relay module for reset. D. Addressable monitor modules shall provide an address for a single, normally open initiating device such as a waterflow switch, manual station, etc. The monitor module shall be UL approved to extend the sensor loop to lengths up to 2,500 feet. E. Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies to mount an analog/addressable detector along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. The housing shall also protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be provided. 2.06 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Single action, addressable, constructed of all metal construction with a key reset switch for positive authorized resetting action. The unit to be keyed the same as the control unit.

214002.4 / CAMS 28 30 01 - 4 Fire Detection and Communications OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

2.07 ANNUNCIATION DEVICES A. Speaker and combination speaker/strobe mounted to a recessed box with an extension ring. Front of the unit shall allow for candela light levels as required by ADA for the spacing as installed. Speaker shall provide a 100 dba peak sound output with field adjustable output level. Finish to be white or red as selected by the Architect. B. Strobe lights shall be triangular with "FIRE" on white plastic lens, polarized 24 VDC, mounting single gang on four square box. Front of the unit shall allow for candela light levels as required by ADA for the spacing as installed. Strobe candela level shall be field adjustable from 15-110 CD. Mount at 80" or as shown on drawings. Finish to be white or red as selected by the Architect. C. The candela rating of each strobe installed shall be apparent to the Fire Marshal and to qualified service personnel either as installed or with the removal of the faceplate. If faceplates are interchangeable between strobes of different ratings the indication of candela rating shall not be on the faceplate. D. Speakers shall be mylar cone-type supplied by the panel manufacturer to ensure system compatibility and proper UL compatibility listings. Screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speaker housings shall be white. Speakers shall have power taps at 1/4w, 1/2w, 1w, and 2w. Speakers shall provide 90 dBA peak sound output at 2w. Speakers shall mount in 4-inch electrical boxes with extension rings using the two screws provided with each ring. 2.08 ADDRESSABLE ACCESSORIES A. Control Modules: Connects to the same loop as the initiating devices and provides a form “C” relay contact. The module may be programmed to transfer from either a trouble or alarm input from any or combination of any addressable device. 2.09 CONTROLLED DEVICES A. Mechanical control system for control of air handlers and smoke/fire rated dampers. B. Fire protection tamper, flow, dry system and pre-action system. 2.10 CABLE A. Plenum rated as recommended by System Manufacturer and the building construction methods. B. Circuit Integrity (CI) rated as and where required by NFPA 72 Ch. 6. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with code, IFC, IBC, NFPA 72, 101 and the manufacturer’s instructions. Review proper installation of each type of device with manufacturer’s agent. Install all wiring, raceway and outlet boxes required for a complete system as indicated in the Contract Documents. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 260533 for boxes and surface mounted raceways. B. Typical Wiring: Install manufacturer’s recommended listed cable to connect all devices as recommended by the manufacturer. The cable shall be run in conduit where exposed to physical damage. C. Detectors: Locate 48” clear of supply air vents and 12” clear of lights and sprinkler heads. Install detector heads not more than two weeks prior to substantial completion. Verify the design locations shown conform to the actual construction. Do not locate detectors in close proximity to air supply vents. Bring cases of uncertain applicability to the attention of the Architect for resolution prior to roughing in. D. Install remote annunciator as indicated on plans and where required by Fire Marshall. Coordinate prior to rough-in. E. Provide auxiliary power supplies as required and extend the 120V power to the power supply as required and per NEC.

214002.4 / CAMS 28 30 01 - 5 Fire Detection and Communications OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

F. Provide visual devices and alarm devices as required. Device locations are diagrammatic showing intent of area coverage. The exact quantity placement, sound or light level is to be per the requirements and the listing of the manufacturer’s equipment and NFPA 72 installation requirements for the device(s) installed and the building conditions at and adjacent to the device(s). 3.02 LABELING A. Label all alarm initiating devices with 1/2-inch by 1-inch lamicoid nameplates, indicating control panel point designation. Locate nameplates in the vicinity of the device as approved by the Owner. B. Provide Brady type wire markers to identify all conductors at each junction or terminal. Use numbers indicated on the wiring diagrams. 3.03 TESTS A. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during the programming, final connections, adjustments and tests for the system. B. When the system is complete and prior to the substantial completion, furnish testing equipment and perform the following tests: C. Before energizing system, check for correct wiring connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. D. Test the insulation on all installed wiring by standard methods as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. E. Open all supervised circuits to see if the trouble signal activates. F. Ground all supervised circuits and verify response of trouble signals. G. Check installation, supervision, operation and sensitivity of smoke detectors as recommended by the manufacturer to ascertain that they will avoid false alarm signals yet provide the required automatic detection. H. Test each device for proper operation and auxiliary function. I. Submit a print out of the entire test procedure to the engineer with the letter of certification for the completed fire alarm system. J. When any defects in the work are detected, make repairs and repeat the tests as required. K. Test system for NFPA standby and alarm runtime for the actual load on the system batteries and recharge time of system batteries. L. Perform all required and necessary verification of the system operating functions with the Architect and Owner’s facility staff prior to turnover of the complete system for final test observed by the Fire Department. These tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or the Owner’s Representative. A System Certification verifying the proper system operation is required prior to acceptance. Instruct Owner’s personnel in system operation, maintenance and programming for a minimum of 20 hours. The cost of any retesting as a result of the failure of the system to operate in accordance with these specifications, drawings, or applicable codes shall be paid for by the Contractor to the Owner. 3.04 WARRANTY SERVICE AND INSTRUCTION A. The fire alarm system will be checked on a monthly basis by the fire alarm system service organization for a period of one year after beneficial occupancy. The monthly checks will consist of reviewing the operation of the system with the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel, providing additional hands on instruction, and assisting in execution of programming revisions. Each monthly visit will consist of not less than two hours of on-site time and no more than four hours. The monthly visits will be scheduled with the Owner not less than one week in advance.

214002.4 / CAMS 28 30 01 - 6 Fire Detection and Communications OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017

3.05 TRAINING A. Provide operation and maintenance training for Owner’s personnel. B. Conduct a minimum of two maintenance training sessions upon completion of the work. Maintenance training sessions shall include a walk-thru of the completed facilities identifying the location, address, and means of access to every device monitored by the fire alarm system. C. Conduct training sessions for two operator levels. D. Operator training. Provide a minimum of three refresher and system update training sessions of on-the-job training. E. Supervisor training. Provide a system update training session for supervisory functions. F. Training sessions with fully qualified, trained representative, of the equipment manufacturer who is thoroughly knowledgeable of the specific installation. END OF SECTION

214002.4 / CAMS 28 30 01 - 7 Fire Detection and Communications OSP Tenant Improvement 03 24 2017